HomeMy WebLinkAbout7050 GALL BLVD (37)� � :
� �d
� ��� ��`�� ;
� - . �
� ' �
, \ P - Y . _ l .
�
�.i
'.��� ♦ .0 �}(f��
� f�l� ` _G/L'��h!� •
� ' TION RENOVATIONS � '
; ADIV.ITNISTRA ; ,'�(�'-.r�p
. - -f�_-
� � ( EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER l����--.` � J
�
i � ZEPHYRHTI.,LS,FLORIDA
� �
� JOB NO.99Q48.00
,,
i _ -
� � MARCH 3,2000
I � � �
� �- `
� �
l �
� =
� 'f- �' �
��`�' �, - f '
� ''�`� , ,_
� �flf�1 f'1^ '���
� � fr r �..� �
I `
� ,� '
� � i
; �
� (
i
I
�
� EARL SWENSSON A5SOCIATES
�, 2100 WEST END AVE.
� � SITITE 1200
� NAS�IVILLE,TENNESSEE 37203
�
i � �
� ; �
�
� _ '
�
' i IVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REOUIItEMENTS
Section 00000 Cover Sheet
�, Sectio�00050 Table of Contents
Section 00070 State of Florida Codes &Standards
(Local Codes are Referenced on Drawing Title Sheet)
- 5ection 00700 General Conditions of the Contract
� Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
� Section 01010 Summary of Work
Sectiori 01031 Alteration Project Procedures
� $ection 01040 Contract Coordination �
Section 01045 Cutting and Patching
Sectiori 01200 Project Meetings
� Section 01300 Submittals
Section 01310 Construction Schedules
Sectiori 01400 Tests and Inspections
Section 01410 Structural Testing/Inspection Agency Services
� Section 01500 Temporary Facilities
Secrion 01630 Product Options and Substitutions
Section 01700 Contract Closeout '
� Section 01710 General Cleaning and Final Finish Cleaning
Section 01720 Project Record Documents
Section 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data
� �IVISION 2 SITEWORK
� Not Used ,
DIVIS ON 3 CONCRETE
� Not Used
� DIVIS�ION 4 MASONRY
�� �
Not Used �
i �
� DIVISION 5 METALS
I �
Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metal
� !
DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY
I
� Section 06102 Fire Retardant Wood Blocking
Section 06200 Finish Carpentry
�
' I�
,
� i i
I
I
I
� March 3,2000 00050-1 99048.00
I
�
;
� �
�
� DIVISION 7 THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07193 Plastic Vapor Retarder
Secrion 07213 Fibrous Insulation
� Section 072�0 Exterior Insulation and Finish System
Section 07253 Sprayed Fireproofing
Section 07270 Firestopping
� Section 07900 Sealants
�
DIVISION 8 DOORS &WINDOWS
� Section 08100 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
— Section 08215 Wood Doors
� Section 08300 Access Doors
Section 08400 Entrances &Storefronts
Section 08424 Electro-Mechanical Sliding Doors '�,
Section 08700 Finish Hardware
� Section 08800 Glass and Glazing
Section 08900 Glazed Curtain Walls
� DIVISION 9 FINISHES �
I �
Section 09100 Metal Stud Framing System
�,� Section 09121 Gypsum Board Ceiling Suspension
Section 09206 Metal Furring and Lathing
Section 09220 Portland Cement Plaster(Stucco)
�� Section 09260 Gypsum Wallboard Systems
Section 09262 Fiberglass Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing
Section 09300 Tile
� Section 09500 Acoustical Ceilings
Section 09650 Resilient Flooring
Section 09680 Carpet Glue-Down Installation
� Section 09900 Painting
Section 09952 Vinyl Wallcovering
� IDIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
� �
Section 10161 Laminated Plastic Toilet Partitions
Section 10400 Interior Signage/Exterior poor Signage
� Section 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories
Section 10850 Corian Counter Tops and Bowls
�
� DIVISION 11 EOUIPMENT
i �
i �
i ection 11131 Projection Screens
�
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS '�
�i
� Sectio�n 12300 Hospital Casework
Section 12510 Blinds&Shades
I �
I �
� I
� March 3,2000 00050-2 99048.00
i
�
�
� iIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used
�
,� I9IVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
�
' Not Used
� DIVISION 15 MECHA1vICAL
Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions
� '
Section 15020 Identi�cation and Painting
� Section 15025 Equipment Identification
� Section 15030 Cleaning Mechanical Systems
Section 15035 Testing Mechanical Systems
Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods
� Section 15060 Piping and Fittings
Section 15061 Pipe Hangers
Section 15062 Valves
i Section 15250 Insulation
� Section 15300 Fire Protection
Section 15400 Plumbing
Section 15410 Plumbing Piping
� Section 15450 Plumbing Fixtures
Section 15515 Hydronic Specialties
Section 15790 Coils-Heating
� Section 15890 Sheet Metal-Low Pressure
Section 15910 Sheet Metal Accessories
Section 15985 DDC Control System I
� Section 15990 Test and Balance I
Section 15999 Critical Systems Checklist �
� DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL '
Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions
� Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods
�Section 16111 Conduit
�Section 16120 Wire and Cable
�Section 16130 Outlet and Junction Boxes
� ISection 16140 Wiring Devices and Plates
Section 16190 Supporting Devices and Hangers
Section 16400 Service and Distribution System and Grounding
� Section 16500 Lighting Fixtures
Section 16721 Existing Fire Alarm and Detection System Modifications
Section 16740 Telephone Raceway System
Section 16750 Music/Paging Raceway System �
Section 16775 Connection to Owner-Furnished Equipment
Section 16779 Cable TV System
� Section 16781 Data Processing Raceway Systems
Section 16999 Critical Systems Checklist
i
END'OF SECTION 00050 �
� � I
� March 3, 2000 00050-3 99048.00
,
i
� �
!
I
�
SECTIOO N 00070 -STATE OF FLORIDA CODES & STANDARDS
�� � (LOCAL CODES ARE REFERENCED ON DRAWING TITLE SHEET)
i
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
i
li.l THE FOLLOWING CODES & STANDARDS WERE UTILIZED IN THE DESIGN OF THIS
� � PROJECT.
�
�. 1.2 CODES & STANDARDS
� NFPA-10 (1990) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
I NFPA-11 (1994) Standard for Low Expansion Foam and Combined Agent Systems
� � NFPA-11A (1994) Standard for Medium and High Expansion Foam Systems
� I NFPA-12 (1993) Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
� , NFPA-12A (1992) Standard on Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems
NFPA-12B (1990) Standard on Halon 1211 Fire Extinguishing Systems
NFPA-13 (1994) Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
� ' NFPA-13D (1994) Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in One and Two
Family Dwellings and Mobile Homes
i I NFPA-13R (1994) Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to
Four Stories in Height
'i NFPA-14 (1993) Standard for Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, except 4-
� 4.3 shall be omitted
� NFPA-15 (1990) Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
� NFPA-16 (1991) Standard for Installation of Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and
�I Foam-Water Spray Systems
j NFPA-16A (1994) Standard for Installation of Closed-Head Foam-Water Sprinklers
� and Foam-Water Spray Systems
� NFPA-17 (1990) Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
'I NFPA-17A (1990) Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA-20 (1993) Standard for Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps
�; � NFPA-22 (1993) Standards for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
NFPA-24 (1992) Standards for Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
� NFPA 25 (1992) Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Bases
' Fire Protection Systems
� NFPA-26 (1988) Supervision of Valves Controlling Water Supplies for Fire
� � Protection
I NFPA-30 (1993) Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
; NFPA-30A (1993) Automotive Service Station Code
� � NFPA-30B (1990) Aerosol Products,Manufacture and Storage
i NFPA-31 (1992) Standard for the Installation of Oil Burnmg Equipment
NFPA-32 (1990) Standards for Dry Cleaning Plants
'� NFPA-33 (1989) Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable and Combustible
Materials
NFPA-34 (1989) Standards for Dipping and Coating Processes Using Flammable or
� Combustible Liquids
� March 3,2000 00070-1 99048.00
, �
NFPA-35 (1987) Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings '�
NFPA-37 (1994) Standard for Installation and Use of Stationary Combustible
Engines and Gas Turbines
� NFPA-40 (1988) Standard for the Storage and Handling of Cellulose Nitrate Mohon
Picture Film
NFPA-40E (1993) Standards for the Storage of Pyrexin Plastics �
NFPA-43A (1990) Standards for the Storage of Liquid and Solid Oxidizers
NFPA-43B (1993) Standards for Storage of Organic Peroxide Formulation
NFPA-43D (1986) Standards for Storage of Pesticides in Portable Containers
NFPA-45 (1991) Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals �
NFPA-49 (1991) Hazardous Chemicals Data
I NFPA-51 (1992) Standard for the Design and Installation of Oxygen-Fuel Gas
Systems for Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes �
NFPA-S1B (1994) Standard for Fire Prevention and Use of Cutting and Welding
Processes
NFPA-53M (1990) Standard for Fire Hazards in Oxygen Enriched Atmospheres �
NFPA-54 (1992) National Fuel Gas Code
NFPA-58 (1992) Standard for Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases
NFPA-61A (1989) Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in �
Facilities Manufacturing and Handling Starch
NFPA-61B (1989) Standard for the Prevention of Fires and Explosions in Grain
Elevators and Facilities Handling Bulk Raw Agricultural �
Commodrties '
NFPA-61C (1989) Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in Feed
Mills
NFPA-61D (1989) Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in the �,
Milling of Agriculture Commodities for Human Consumphon
NFPA-65 (1993) Standard for the Processing and Finishing of Aluminum
NFPA-69 (1992) Standard for Explosion Prevention Systems �
NFPA-70 (1993) National Electrical Code
NFPA-72 (1993) Standard for the Installation, Mamtenance and Use of Local
Protective Signaling Systems
� �'
NFPA-75 (1992) Standard for the Protection of Electromc Computer/Data Processing
Equipment
NFPA-80 (1992) Standard for Fire Doors and Windows �
NFPA-82 (1994) Standard on Incinerators, Waste and Linen Handlmg Systems and
Equipment
NFPA-85C (1991) Standard for Furnace Explosions/Implosions in Multiple Burner �
Boiler Furnaces
NFPA-86 (1990) Standard for Ovens and Furnaces,Design, Location and Equipment
NFPA-88A (1991) Standard for Parking Structures
NFPA-88B (1991) Standard for Repair Garages ,�
NFPA-90A (1993) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems
NFPA-90B (1993) Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air ���
Conditioning Systems
NFPA-91 (1992) Standard for the Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveymg
of Materials ��
NFPA-92A (1993) Standard for Smoke Control Systems
NFPA-92B (1991) Standard for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, I,arge
Areas �
March 3, 2000 00070-2 99048.00 �
i �
� �
�
� �� ,
�; NFPA-96 (1994) Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of
fSmoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking
� f Equipment
,; NFPA-99 (1993) Standard for Health Care Facilities
� NFPA-101 (1994) Life Safety Code
' NFPA-lO1M (1992) Manual on Alternative Approaches to Life Safety
i NFPA-102 (1992) Standard for Assembly Setting,Tents and Air Supported Structures
� I
� NFPA-105 (1993) Standard for Smoke Control Door Assemblies
NFPA-110 (1993) Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
� NFPA-120 (1994) Standard for Coal Preparation Plants
, NFPA-150 (1991) Fire Safety in Racetrack Stables
; NFPA-211 (1992) Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents and Solid Fuel Burning
� Appliances
NFPA-214 (1992) Water-Cooling Towers
' NFPA-220 (1992) Standard on Types of Building Construction
� NFPA-231 (1990) Standard for Indoor General Storage
NFPA-231C (1991) Standard for Rack Storage of Materials
NFPA-231D (1989) Standard for Storage of Rubber Tires
� NFPA-231F (1987) Standard for Storage of Roll Paper
NFPA-232 (1991) Standard for the Protection of Records
NFPA-232AM(1991) Standard for Archives and Record Centers
� NFPA-241 (1993) Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition
Operations
NFPA-251 (1990) Standard Methods of Fire Testing of Building Construction and
� � Materials
� NFPA-252 (1990) Standard Methods of Fire Test of Door Assemblies
, NFPA-253 (1990) Standard Methods of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor
� Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
1 I NFPA-255 (1990) Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
� �iBuilding Materials
, NFPA-256 (1993) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
� ;� NFPA-257 (1990) Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies
i NFPA-303 (1990) Fire Protection Standards for Marinas and Boat Yards
, NFPA-307 (1990) Standard for the Construction and Fire Protection of Marine
� Terminals,Piers and Wharfs
NFPA-321 (1991) Standard for Basic Classification of Flammable and Combustible
i Liquids
� NFPA-327 (1993) Standard Procedures for Cleaning or Safeguarding Small Tanks and
� Containers
NFPA-385 (1990) Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids
,�� NFPA-386 (1990) Standard for Portable Shipping Tanks for Flammable and
Combustible Liquids
' NFPA-395 (1993) Standard for Storage of Flammable and Combustible Liquids on
� Farms and Isolated Construction Projects
NFPA-409 (1990) Standard on Aircraft Hangars
NFPA-416 (1993) Standard on Construction and Protection of Airport Terminal
� Buildings
NFPA-418 (1990) Standard for Roof-top Heliport Construction and Protection
' NFPA-480 (1993) Standard for the Storage,Handling and Processing of Magnesium
� � NFPA-490 (1993) Code for Storage of Ammonium Nitrate
� March 3,2000 00070-3 99048.00
, �
NFPA-SOlA (1992) Standard for Fire Safety Criteria for Mobile Home Installations, '�
- Sites and Communities
NFPA-SO1C (1993) Standard for Fire Safety Criteria for Recreational Vehicles
NFPA-SO1D (1993) Standard for Fire Safety Criteria for Recreational Vehicle Parks and �
Campgrounds
NFPA-651 (1993) Standard for the Manufacture of Aluminum and Magnesium �
Powder
, NFPA-654 (1968) Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions m the
Chemical,Dye,Pharmaceutical and Plastics Industry �
NFPA-655 (1993) Standard for the Prevention of Sulfur Fire and Explosives
NFPA-664 (1993) Standard for the Prevention of Fires and Explosives in Wood
Processing and Woodworking Facilities
NFPA-701 (1989) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Resistant Textiles and �
Film
NFPA-703 (1992) Standard for Fire Retardant Impregnated Wood and Fire Retardant
Coatings for Building Materials � I
NFPA-704 (1990) Standard System for the Identification of the Fire Hazards of
Material
NFPA-1221 (1991) Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Public Fire �,
Service Communications
NFPA-1962 (1993) Standard for the Care,Use and Maintenance of Fire Hose(Includmg
Connections and Nozzles) �
NFPA-1963 (1993) Standards for Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose
Connections
ASTM E136 (1987) Standard Test Method for Behavior of Matenals in a Vertical Tube �
Furnace at 750 Degrees Fahrenheit
The following is a listing of all codes adopted by F.A.C. 59A-3.079. These codes are for Hospitals only
and are in addition to the State Fire Marshal's Rule, 4A-3.014 F.A.C. �
Chapter 50(1990),Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites
Chapter 70B (1990), Electrical Equipment Maintenance �
Chapter 70E(1988),Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces
Chapter 77 (1988), Static Electricity
Chapter 780 (1992), Lightning Protection Code �
Chapter 99B (1990),Hypobaric Facilities
Chapter 170 (1991),Fire Safety Symbols
Chapter 262 (1990),Method of Test for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Electrical Wires �
Chapter 497M (1991), Classification of Gases, Vapors and Ducts for Electrical Equipment in
Hazardous(Classified) Locations
Chapter 600 (1986), Private Fire Brigades �
Chapter 801 (1991),Facilities Handling Radioactive Materials
Chapter 850 (1990),Fossil Fueled Steam and Combustion Turbine Electric Generating Plants
The Following rules and standards shall also be utilized by projects as required. �
Chapter 4A-3,F.A.C. The State Fire Prevention Code (1990 edition)
Chapter 4A-47,F.A.C. The Uniform Fire Safety Standards for Elevators (1990 edition) �
Chapter 59A-3,F.A.C. Hospital Licensure(Revised 7/97)
Chapter 59A-4,F.A.C. Nursing Homes and Related Facilities (Revised 9/97) ,
Chapter 59A-5,F.A.C. Ambulatory Surgical Centers (Revised 6/97) �
March 3, 2000 00070-4 99048.00
�
i
� '
I
� Florida Americans with Disabilities Accessibility Implementation Act (October 1, 1993) as described in
Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction, Deparhnent of Community Affairs (October,
� 1997).
i
Effective August 8, 1997 the following codes and editions have been adopted by the State of Florida
throug �Rule 9B-3.047.
� �
� � Standard Building Code (1997)
I South Florida Building Code—Dade (1994)
� South Florida Building Code—Broward(1996)
Standard Gas Code(1997)
� Standard Mechanical Code (1997) �
� Standard Plumbing Code (1994)
` I
� END OF SECTION 00070
� �
� I
� �
I
' i
I
� ,�
�
�� I
i
� '
i
� �
� �
� ' �
�
� ,
�
� r �
� March 3,2000 00070-5 99048.00
i
, ��
��
�
�,
SECTION 00700 -GENERAI,CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT ,
� 'i
PART � -GENERAL
i
� I �'�
1'i 1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
�
� � A. Supplementary Conditions: SECTION 00800.
,
� 1r.2 STANDARD FORMS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Standard Form A201, 1987 edition, of the American
� Institute of Architects, are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents to the same extent as
�, if bound herein.
END OF SECTION 00700 I
� ,
� '�
�
� �
,�
i i
�
;� �
�
! !
�
� �
� � �
� ��
�
� '
,
�
)
� March 3,2000 00700-1 99048.00
� i
� i
f
1 �!
SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
� 1I I .
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Contract
' for Coristruction, AIA Document A201, Fourteenth Edition, 1987. Where any article of the General '
Conditions is modified or any paragraph, or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements,
, the unaltered provisions of that article,paragraph, subparagraph, or clause shall remain in effect.
�
� PART 1 -GENERAL
i
� I
1.1 MODIFICATIONS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
' � A. Article 1: General Provisions
� Add the following subparagraphs 1.1.8 through 1.1.11:
� � 1.1.8 The term "product" as used in the Drawings and Specifications mcludes
materials, systems and equipment.
� � 1.1.9 The term "or equal" as used in the Drawings and Specifications means "an equal
i approved by the Architect."
i
� � 1.1.10 The term "provide" as used in the Drawings and Specifications means "furnish
I and install."
� � 1.1.11 Wherever technical standards, such as (but not limited to) ASTM, are referenced
I
I in the Proj ect Manual,it shall mean the standards current on the date the Contract
iAgreement is finalized,unless otherwise noted.
� B. Article 3: Contractor
� i Add the following to subparagraph 3.2.1:
� '
� 3.2.1.1 Revise as follows: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, prior to
submittmg bids, to notify the Architect in writing of conflicting information in
� � the drawings and specifications so an Addendum may be issued to all bidders. In
! the event of failure to submit such notice, the more expensive material or process
I shall be included by the Contractor for a complete project. The Architect will
� rule as to the material or process to be furnished.
Add the following subparagraphs 3.4.3, 3.43.1, 3.4.4 and 3.4.4.1.
1 I
3.4.3 The Contractor shall be responsible to provide a list to the Owner showing the
� name of the manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the products identified
� I in the Drawings and Specifications and, where applicable, the name of the I
' installing Subcontractor.
i
� '
� March 3,2000 00800-1 99048.00
�
3.4.3.1 The Owner will reply in writing to the Contractor stating whether the O�mer or ��
the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such
proposal. If adequate data on any proposed manufacturer or installer is not
available, the Owner may state that action will be deferred until the Contractor I�
provides further data. Failure of the Owner to reply will constitute notice of no
reasonable objection. Failure to object to a manufacturer will not constitute a
waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and all products �
furnished by the listed manufacturer must comply with such requirements'.
3.4.4 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner will consider a formal request �
for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the
conditions set forth in the General Requirements of the specifications (Division
', 1) �
3.4.4.1 B makin re uests for substitutions based on subparagraph 3.4.4.1, the
Y g q --
I Contractor: �
a. Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product
and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;
b. Represents that he will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the
Contractor would for that specified;
c. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs �
under this Contract but excludes the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all
claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become -
apparent; and ;�
d. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes
as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects.
C. Article 4: Administration of the Contract �
Add the following subparagraph:
4.5.8 Any arbitration hearings necessary hereunder shall be conducted and held in the �
place where the project is located.
D. Article 5: Subcontractors �
' Delete the last sentence from subparagraph 5.2.1. Add the following subparagraph: �
5.2.1.1 No work shall be commenced until approval of such subcontractors has been
given in writing by the Owner. If required,the Contractor shall furnish evidence �
satisfactory to the Owner, showing that any or all proposed subcontractors are
competent to execute the various parts of the work covered by their subcontracts.
E. Article 7: Changes in the Work �
�
Make the following changes to subparagraph 7.3.6:
In the first sentence, delete the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" and �
substitute "an allowance for overhead and profit m accordance with the schedule set forth in
subparagraph 73.6.6 below." �
' March 3, 2000 00800-2 99048.00 �
�
� �
� �
I
� Add new subparagraph 7.3.6.6:
I
' ' The allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner, shall 'I
� be based on the following schedule:
i 1. For General Contractor, 15%of the cost of the work performed by own forces. II
, i 2. For each Subcontractor, 10%of cost of the work performed by own forces.
; 3. Markup for General Contractor, for work performed by his subcontractors, 5 percent of
;� the amount due the Sub-subcontractor.
' � 4. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals shall be
� accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials, and
' , subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above.
� , Where major cost items are subcontracts,they shall be itemized also.
F. Article 9: Payments and Completion
� Add new subparagraph 9.3.1.3:
� 9.3.1.3 The Owner will retain 10%of the amount due the Contractor on the project. (See
', contract for changes if any.)
Add the following to subparagraph 9.10.2:
� ,
� 9.10.2.1 Releases of liens shall be furnished by the Contractor on AIA Document G706A
� or a form approved by the Architect. Subcontractors and materials suppliers lien
I releases may be provided by the Contractor and submitted with each pay request.
�
'i G. Article 11: Insurance and Bonds
� I
'� 11.1.1 Modify the first sentence of subparagraph 11.1.1 to read as follows:
�
' The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies
licensed to do business in the state in which the project is located such insurance
as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of
� � or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the
Contractor may be legally liable,whether such operations be by the Contractor or
i by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,
� or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
� Add new subparagraph:
i
� ' 11.1.1.8 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a
� comprehensive basis including:
i ,
, ' Premises-Operations (including X-C-U)
'I
,i Independent Contractor's Protective
1 , Products and Completed Operations
� i Personal Injury Liability.
� March,3, 2000 00800-3 99048.00
�
Contractual - including specified provision for the Contractor's obligations under �
Paragraph 3.18
Owned,non-owned, and hired motor vehicles ��
Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations '
Umbrella Excess Liability
Add to subparagraph 11.1.2 the following clause: , �
11.1.2.1 The insurance required by subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than
the following, or greater if required by law. �
1. Worker's Compensation:
a. State: Statutory Limit �
b. Applicable Federal: Statutory Limit
c. Employer's Liability: $100,000, without restriction as to whether covered by �
workmen's compensation law.
2. Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises-Operations; Independent �
Contractor's Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property
Damage):
a. Bodily Injury: �
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence ,
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
b. Property Damage:
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence �
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
c. Maintain Products and Completed Operations Insurance for period of two years �
after final payment.
d. Property Damage Liability Insurance will include X, C and U(Explosion, Collapse �
and Underground) coverage.
3. Contractual Liability(Hold Harmless Coverage):
a. Bodil In'u : �
Y J rY
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence �
b. Property Damage:
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence '
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
� �
March 3,2000 00800-4 99048.00 �
I
i
� �I
�
� I
� 4. PersonalIn'u
! J i7'�
' �I $1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
� 5. Comprehensive Automobile Liability(owned,non-owned,hired):
i
' � a. Bodil In'u
Y J rY�
� $1,000,000 Each Person
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence
� b. Property Damage:
� $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
� i 6. Excess Limits Liability Policy(Umbrella):
a. $5,000,000
, , 11.1.2.2 Each policy shall provide either in the body of the policy or by appropriate
� endorsement (rider) to the policy, that such policy cannot be altered or canceled
� in less than ten days after the mailing of written registered notice to the Owner of
i such alteration or cancellation, or not less than five days after actual receipt by
the Owner of such written notice.
I
� , Add the following to subparagraph 11.1.3:
� 11.1.3.1 Furnish one copy of each Certificate of Insurance herein required for each copy
� i of the Agreement, which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage
I required by 11.1.1, 11.1.2, and 11.1.3. The form of the certificate shall be AIA
'I Document G705 or a form approved by the Owner/Owner's Representative.
, �� Furnish to the Owner copies of endorsements that are subsequently issued
� amending coverage or limits.
I
, ' Add the following subparagraph to 11.3.1.1: ,
'� The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value.
i
' � Add the following subparagraph to 11.3.1.2:
� If by the terms of this insurance any mandatory deductibles are required, or if the Owner should
elect to increase the mandatory deductible amounts or purchase this insurance with voluntary
, deductible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the amount of the
� deductible in the event of a paid claim. �
, I Add the following subparagraph:
I 11.4.3 The bonding company shall furnish a letter to the Owner from the home office
� ' aclrnowledging the bond(s). Separate bonds are preferred; however, a single
� bond providing the stated coverage will be acceptable.
� �
� March 3,2000 00800-5 99048.00
,
'
PART 2 -PRODUCTS �.
Not Used. ' �
PART 3 -EXECUTION '
Not Used. 1
END OF SECTION 00800
'� �
, �
�
; �
1
�
; �
; �
. �
�
� �
�
t
1
March 3,2000 00800-6 99048.00 �
� �i
,�
i
� �
SECTION 01010 -SUMMARY OF WORK
� !
PART 1 -GENERAL
' '
1�.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
�
' ,!
j A. Renovation of approximately 6936 square feet of the existing facility for a new administration
� area. This will consist of the administration offices, boardroom, and kitchen with new
� receptions area and waiting area. Also a new corridor will be added along with the relocation of
� ; the telephone equipment. The project will also consist of an addition of a new vestibule of
approximately 420 square feet to the existing main entry.
' 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
i ' A. AIA A201 1987 Edition.
, B. Supplementary Conditions to AIA A201, Section 00800.
� I
_ 1.3 OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
i
' E A. Equipment fumished by Owner to be installed by Contractor is listed in Owner
, Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment Brochure.
� B. Owner's Responsibilities:
� I
� 1. Arrange for delivery of shop drawings, product data, samples, manufacturer's
' � instructions, and certificates to the Contractor.
` 2. Submit claims for transportation damage.
3. Inspect deliveries jointly with the Contractor.
, 4. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing rtems.
5. Arrange for manufacturer's field services.
6. Arrange for and deliver manufacturer's warranties and bonds to the Contractor.
� C. , Contractor's Responsibilities:
� 1. Review shop drawings, product data, samples and other submittals. The Contractor shall
� I notify the Architect and engineers of any conflicts in vendor drawings and that of the
IContract Documents before proceeding with installation.
2. Receive and unload products at the site.
, 3. Inspect deliveries and record shortages, and damaged or defective items.
I 4. Protect equipment from damage and from exposure to elements.
j 5. Handle products at site including uncrating, inventory and storage of equipment.
i6. Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products.
� 7. Provide installation inspections required by public authorities.
, 8. Repair or replace items damaged by the Contractor or his operations.
�
� March 3,2000 01010-1 99048.00
�
1.4 FIXED EQUIPMENT LIST �
A. FIXED EQUII'MENT LIST includes items to be: �
1. Owner specified, Owner furnished and Coniractor mstalled.
2. Owner specified, Owner furnished and Owner installed.
3. Architect specified,Contractor furnished,and Cantractar installed. �
4. Kitchen Equipment specified, furnished and installed.
1.5 WC?RK SEQUENCE �
A. A scheduling sequence meeting shauld be held with the 4wner's representative prior' ta any �
renovation work being done. Coordinate progress schedule with the Owner's representative.
B. Construet work in stages to provide continuous public usage. L7o not close off public usage of �
facilities until use of ane stage of work will provide alternate passage.
1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMI5ES �
A. Caardinate use af the premzses under drrection of Architect. Contractor will submit plan ar
discuss lacations on the site of storage areas, layout areas and offices wrth the Architect for �
appraval. .
B. Do nat unreasonably encumber site under this contract. �
C. Da not load structure with weight that will endanger stzucture.
D. Assume full responsibility far protection and safekeeping af products stored on premises. �
E. Obtam and pay for additional starage and work areas if required for operations under this �
contract.
F. Keep site clean and building braom clean at aIl times. Vacuum passages between existing and
new or renovated spaces on a daily basis and/or as the need occurs. �
1.7 OWNER OCCTJPANCY �
A. Owner will occupy premises during entire construction period to conduct his operations.
Cooperate with Owner in scheduling operations to rnmirnize canflict and to facilitate Qwner �
usage.
1.8 PARTIAL OWNER OCCUPANCY �
A. Schedule and substantially complete designated portians of work for C?wner's occupancy prior
to Substantial Completion af the entire work. �
B. Owner will occupy designated areas far the purpose of storage of furnishings and equipment
and/or installatian of equipment. �
March 3, 2000 01010-2 99048.00 �
I
i
� '
,i
� �
C. Execute Certificate of Substantial Completion for designated portion of work prior to Owner
� occupancy. Allow:
,p
� , 1. Access for Owner personnel.
i 2. Use of parking facilities.
' � 3. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems.
i D. On occupancy, Owner will provide for occupied areas:
I1. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems.
' I 2. Maintenance
I
� 3. Security
'
PART 2-PRODUCTS
� � �
Not used.
1 PART 8 -EXECUTION
Not used.
� �
END OF SECTION 01010
� �I
�
� I
' �
I
, I
� +
�
�
;I
' I
�
1 I
� March 3,2000 01010-3 99048.00
i ,
I
�
,;
� '�
SECTION 01031 -ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
�
� I
PART 1 -GENERAL
� �
1.�1 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES
�
� �i A. Schedule work in the sequences and within times specified in Section 01010.
I B. Submit separate detailed subschedule for alterations work, coordinated with the Construction
� � Schedules. Show:
� 1. Each stage of work and dates of occupancy areas.
' 2. Date of Substantial Completion for area of alterations work, as appropriate.
; 3. Trades and subcontractors employed in each stage.
� 1:2 I ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION
A. � Assign the work of moving, removal, cutting and patching to trades qualified to perform the
� work in a manner to cause the least damage to each type of work, and provide means of
� returning surfaces to appearance of new work.
' B. Perform cutting and removal work to minimum necessary, and in a manner to avoid damage to
� ; adjacent work.
i
' I 1. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster or metals by methods to terminate
isurfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division.
��
j C. Perform cutting and patching as specified in Section 01045.
� ,I
� D. Protect existing finishes, equipment and adjacent work which is scheduled to remain from
damage.
' I
1. Protect existing and new work from weather and extremes of temperature.
a. Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F.
t � b. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as needed to
prevent damage to remaining existing work and to new work.
jE. � Provide temporary enclosures as specified in Section 01500, to separate work areas from
existing building and from areas occupied by the Owner, and to provide weather protection.
; F. Discoveries of construction, furnishings and articles having a historical or private value remain
, the property of the Owner.
�
' 1. Promptly notify the Architect.
2. Protect discovery from damage from elements or work.
; 3. The Architect will promptly transmit the decision for disposition of discovery.
,
, March 3,2000 01031-1 99048.00
a
4. Store items to be retained by the Owner in a safe, dry place on the site. Dispose'of items �
the Owner releases.
�
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 SALVAGED MATERIALS �
A. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed material to replace damaged work of;existing �
construction,when material is not readily obtainable on the current market.
1. Use particular care in removal and salvage of the following items: �
a. Ceiling Tile
b. Doors ,
c. Light Fixtures
d. Door Hardware
e. Marble Floonng �
f. Marble Veneer
2. Store salvaged items in a dry, secure place on the site.
3. Items not required for use in repair of existing work remain the property of the Owner.
4. Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new construction except with permission �
of the Architect.
5. Dispose of serviceable material not wanted by the Owner in a proper manner and identify �
this credit to the project.
2.2 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING,EXTENDING AND MATCHING ,
� A. General requirements that work be complete: �
1. Provide same products or types of construction as that in existing structure, as needed to
patch, extend or match existing work. '
a. Generally, the Contract Documents will not define standards of workmanship
present in existing construction; the Contractor is expected to determine products
by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by experience.
�
2. Presence of a product, finish or type of construction requires that patching, extending or
matching be performed as necessary to make the work complete and consistent to �
identical standards of quality unless the existing standard of quality is less than desirable
as determined by the Architect.
3. Patch, replace and/or repair finishes disturbed in areas where work is done under the �
terms of the contract but where no other finish work is required.
�
'
March 3, 2000 01031-2 99048.00 ,
� I
i
I
' I
I
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
�I
I
' 3.�1 PROCEDURES
I
� , A. Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching existing
i quality of workmanship. Quality of patched or extended work is same as that for new work.
�I
' 3 2 ADJUSTMENTS
I
i A. Where partitions are removed, patch floors, walls and ceilings with finish materials to match
� ' existing and/or replace both areas with new materials and finishes approved by Architect.
�
1. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors and
� , ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps or bulkheads.
2. Where extreme change of plane (2" or more) occurs, request instructions from the
Architect as to the method of making transition.
, ; B. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new floors.
I
' 3�3 DAMAGED SURFACES
iA. Patch and replace any portion of an existing finished surface which is found to be damaged,
, lifted, discolored or shows other imperfections,with matching material.
, 1. Provide adequate support of substrate prior to patching the finish.
� ' � 2. Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce uniform
color and texture over the entire surface.
� 3. When existing surface finish cannot be matched, refinish the entire surface to the nearest
' , intersections.
�
3'.4 TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW
' ' A. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth and worlmianlike
� transition. Match existing adjacent work with patched work in texture and appearance so that
� patch or transition is invisible at five feet.
,I 1. When finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is
I � � not possible, terminate existing surface in a neat manner along a straight line at a natural
line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface.
, 3.5 CLEANING
i
; A. ! Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in Section 01700.
' I
1. Clean Owner-occupied areas daily and/or as the need occurs.
� 2. Clean spillage, overspray and heavy collection of dust in Owner-occupied areas
� ' immediately. I
� Marchi3,2000 01031-3 99048.00 i
'
B. At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive �
trades.
C. At completion of alterations work in each area, provide final cleaning and return to a condition �
suitable for use by the Owner.
END OF
SECTION 01031 � �
,
�
�
�
,
� I
'
�
,
�
� i�
1 �
i
i ��
March 3, 2000 01031-4 99048.00 �
�
I ,I
' I • I
I ,.
i � �
SECTION 01040 -CONTRACT COORDINATION II
' �
PART -GENERAL
i
� I
1�1 RELATED WORK
I A. Sequence of construction: Section 01010.
, �
I B. Owner occupancy: Section 01010.
', ' C. Cutting and patching: Section 01045. �
C
� D. Project meetings: Section 01200.
E. Substitutions and product options: Section 01630.
, � F. Closeout submittals: Section 01700.
1i.2 DESCRIPTION
�
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of specifications to assure
� � efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements with provisions for
accommodating items to be installed later.
! B. Coordinate sequence of the work to accommodate Owner occupancy as specified in Section
' 01010.
I
� 1.3 MEETINGS
��
� A. I In addition to progress meetings specified in Section 01200, hold coordination meetings and
' preinstallation conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of work.
�
1.4 i COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
'
A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section 01300.
, B. Coordinate work of various sections havmg interdependent responsibilities for installing,
connecting to, and placing in service such equipment.
�
' � C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements,
i and effect on work of other sections.
� �
� � I
1 �
March 3, 2000 01040-1 99048.00
' '
'
1.5 COORDINATION OF SPACE ,
A. Coordinate use of project space and sequence of installation of inechanical and electrical work ,
which is indicated diagrammatically on the drawmgs. Follow routings indicated for pipes, ducts
and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make
runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other
installations, for maintenance,and for repairs. '
B. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring� in the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. '
1.6 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT '
A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial
Completion of portions of the work designated for Owner occupancy designated in Section � I
01010.
B. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for Sub'stantial
Completion. ,
C. After Owner occupancy of the premises, coordinate access to site by various sections for �
correction of defective work and work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, to
' minimize disruption of the Owner's activities.
D. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified m Section 01700. �
PART 2 -PRODUCTS '
Not Used.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
'
Not Used. � ,
END OF SECTION 01040 ,
,
'
' I
,
, March 3, 2000 01040-2 99048.00 '
l I
i
i
, I 1
!
I
� I
SECTION 01045 -CUTTING AND PATCHING
� i
PART 1 -GENERAL
I
'
1!1 DESCRII'TION
' I A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching (including excavation and backfill) to complete the work '
and to:
I 1. Fit the arts to ether and ro erly integrate with other work. I
1 P g PP
2. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
3. Uncover work to provide for Owner's observation of covered work.
' , 4. Remove and replace noncomplying work performed under contract.
5. Remove samples of installed work for testing.
� 6. Provide openings in non-structure elements for penetrations of inechanical and electrical
iI work.
, B. In addition to requirements above,upon written instructions of Owner:
I
I
I' 1. Remove samples of installed materials for testing.
2. Remove items to provide for alteration of existing work.
�
� I
1�.2 PRECAUTIONS
I
� A. Do not endanger work when cutting or altering.
B. Do not cut or alter work of another trade without consulting the trade involved and the
, Superintendent of construction.
13 SUBMITTALS
' �
A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
B. I Prior to cutting any structural member, submit written notice to the Structural Engineer
' requesting consent to proceed with cutting including:
' 1. Identifications of project.
2. Description of affected work.
' 3. `�Necessity for cutting.
� 4. Effect on other work, and on structural integrity of project.
' ; 5. Description of proposed work. Designate scope of:
�
' a. Cutting and patching
' � I b. Trades required to perform work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
� d. Extent of refinishing.
, '
' March 3,2000 01045-1 99048.00
� '
6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. '
7. Designation of party responsible for cost of cutting and patching.
C. Submit cost estimate for cutting and patching requested by Owner prior to starting work: �
D. Should conditions of work or schedule require a change of materials or methods, submit written '
recommendations to Architect, including:
1. Conditions which cause requirement for change.
2. Recommendations for alternative materials or methods. �
3. Submittals as required for substitutions.
4. Cost estimate for changing materials and methods.
E. Submit written notice to Architect designating time work will be uncovered for his observation. '
1.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR COSTS ,
A. Costs caused by ill-timed or defective work, and work not complying with requirements of '
contracts, including costs of additional services of the Architect or other consultants, shall be
paid by the party responsible for ill-timed, defective, or noncomplying work as determined by
, the Architect. ', ;
B. Cost of work done on instructions of Owner, other than defect:ve or noncomplymg work, will
be paid by the Owner.
,
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
�
2.1 MATERIAI_S
A. Provide materials required for original construction. �
B. For any change in materials, submit request for substitution as specified above.
� '
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions includmg elements subject to movement or damage during: '
1. Cutting and patching.
2. Excavating and backfilling. ,
B. After uncovenng work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products.
'
, '
March 3, 2000 01045-2 99048.00 ,
, �I
I
■ I '�
3.i2 PREPARATION I
, A. Before cutting:
i1. Shore,brace, and support as necessary to maintain structural integrity.
, ' 2. Protect other parts of project from damage. ,
3. Provide protection from inclement weather and maintain excavations free of water.
i 33 PERFORMING WORK
1
i A. Fit and adjust materials to provide a finished and complete installation.
' �
; B. Cut and remove materials, to ensure other work will not be damaged, and new materials can be
properly installed. -
� C. Excavate and backfill so that other work will not be damaged.
' D. Restore work to ensure compliance with specifications.
�
E. Refinish surfaces to provide an even,uniform appearance.
I
' f 1. Continuous surfaces: Refinish to nearest intersections.
� 2. Assemblies: Refinish entire assemblies.
I
IEND OF SECTION 01045 ,-
,;
' �I
,�
�
t I
�I
, �
' �
� ,
' I
�
�
, ' �
,
March 3,2000 01045-3 99048.00
'
I �
I I
I , I I
�
' �
SECTION 01200 -PROJECT MEETINGS
1 � '�
PART 1 -GENERAL ,
a
' I
1:1 MEETINGS—GENERAL
' � A. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Schedule and administer meetings throughout duration of work.
' 2. Prepare agenda for meetings.
� 3. Distribute written notice of each meeting seven days in advance of ineeting date.
I 4. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
� 5. Preside at meetings.
6. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions.
7. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after each meeting.
� � , 8. Provide one copy to:
�
a. All participants in the meeting,including the Architect.
; b. All parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
' I B. Participants:
' � 1. Qualified representative of contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers authorized to act on
� behalf of the parties they represent.
; 2. Architect
' �j 3. Owner's Representative
' �.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
��
IA. Schedule meeting within the early stages of construction as determined by the General
' i Contractor.
I
B. Suggested Agenda-Prepare written material, distribute lists and discuss:
I
' 1. Identification of major subcontractors and suppliers
( 2. Projected construction schedules
' 3. Critical work sequencing
' 4. Major equipment deliveries and priorities
5. Project coordination,including designation of responsible personnel
6. Procedures for, and processmg of:
� ��
a. Field decisions
'� b. Proposal requests
, � c. Submittals
, � d. Change orders
e. Applications for payments
' 7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents
, March 3, 2000 01200-1 99048.00
'
8. Procedures for Maintaining Record Documents ,
9. Use of Premises:
a. Office, work and storage areas �
b. Owner's requirements �
10. Construction facilities, construction aids and controls ' ,
11. Temporary utilities �
12. Safety and first aid procedures �
13. Security procedures ' i
14. Housekeeping procedures
� 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ,
A. Schedule regular monthly meetings and as necessary, schedule additional meetings. ,
B. Suggested Agenda: ,
1. Review and approval of minutes of previous meeting. ,
2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. ,
3. Field observations,problems, and conflicts. ,
4. Problems which impede construction schedule. ,
5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules.
6. Corrective measures and procedures required to regain pro�ected schedule.
7. Revisions to construction schedule. '
8. Plan progress and schedule for succeeding work period.
9. Coordination of schedules.
10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. ,
11. Maintenance of quality standards.
12. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on construction schedule and on completion date. ,
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.
13. Other business. '
' END OF SECTION 01200 ,
'
. ,
'
'
March 3, 2000 01200-2 99048.00 ,
i
i , �
I
, .
�
I
' 'I
SECTION 01300 -SUBMITTALS
' I
PART1 -GENERAL
, �
1:1 SUBMITTALS
I
' i A. Submittals include shop drawings, design calculations, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,
- � performance charts, nomenclature charts, brochures and other data which are prepared by the
i Contractor or any Subcontractor, Manufacturer, Supplier, Fabricator, or Distributor and which
' illustrate some portion of the project.
B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to furnish equipment, materials, and labor for the project,
' f which meets the requirements of the codes and authorities quoted, as well as the Contract
I Documents. Proprietary items specified herein only establish a minimum functional and
aesthetic standard, and it is incumbent upon the Contractor to ascertain conformance of these
' ' proprietary items or any proposed substitution with the codes and authorities.
C. Contract Documents shall not include shop drawings, vendor drawings, or any material
' prepared and submitted by the Contractor or Subcontractor.
' I
1.2 � SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
' '� A. The individual Specification Sections identify when submittals are required.
IB. Submit all required items to the Architect for review.
'
C. All submittals and samples shall be accompanied by transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing
' ; project name, Contractor's name, number of drawings, titles, and other pertinent data. Idenri
on transmittal work and product by Specification Section. Transmittals which do not identify
� the Specification Section number will not be processed by the Architect.
� D.I Provide required blank space on each submittal for the Contractor's and the
� Architect/Engineer's stamps.
i
, E., Individual Specification Sections establish forms of submittals required.
' �1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
' A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Trtle each drawing with project name and number;
' i identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail of Contract
Documents.
IB. Reproduction of Contract Drawings for shop drawings is not acceptable.
' �
C. Identify field dimensions; show relationship to adjacent or critical features of work or products.
'
' March 3,2000 01300-1 99048.00
�-
' I
D. Submit three blueline prints and one transparency (reproducible sepia) of each shop drawings. ,
Upon completion of the review by the Archrtect/Engineer the transparency and one print will be
returned to the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for providmg additional prints for his '
needs.
E. A copy of the marked-up shop drawings with the Architect and/or Engineer's review stamp is to '
be maintained at the jobsite.
F. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2"x 11". I
� '
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit four(4) copies of product data. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy '
of standard printed data to identify pertinent products referenced to Specification Section and
Article number. Show reference standards, performance characteristics, and capacities; wiring �
and piping diagrams and controls, component parts; finishes; dimensions; and required
clearances.
B. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard '
information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete infor•nation
which is not applicable. '
C. Provide manufacturer's preparation, assembly, and installation instructions.
1.5 SAMPLES I
A. Submit full-page range of manufacturer's standard finishes except where more restrictive '
requirements are specified, indicatmg colors,textures, and patterns.
B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of products, including parts and '
attachments as required by Architect/Engineer.
C. Approved samples,which are of proper size,may be incorporated in the work. �
D. Label each sample with identification.
E. Field Finishes: Provide full samples at Project, at location acceptable to Architect as required ,
by individual Specification Section. Install each sample complete and finished. Acceptable
finishes m place may be retained in completed work.
,
1.7 CONTRACTOR REVIEW
A. Review submittals to determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, ,
manufacturer's catalog numbers, and compliance of submittal with requirements of Contract
Documents before transmittal to the Architect. � '
'
March 3, 2000 01300-2 99048.00 '
i
1 I
I
I
' , B. Stamp and sign each sheet of shop drawings and product data, and sign or initial each sample to
�I certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify designated recipient in
, ' writing at time of submittal of deviations from requirements of Contract Documents.
, Submittals not bearing the Contractor's stamp of compliance will not be processed by the
, Architect.
' i C. Work requiring submittals shall not be commenced until the submission has been reviewed by
� j the Architect and/or Engineer. Work shall be in accordance with and performed from the
, i reviewed drawings and the Contractor or his Subcontractor shall make certain that proper
submittals are at the site of the work.
� D. By reviewing, approvmg and submitting required submittals, the Contractor thereby represents
' ; that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction critena,materials,
i , member sizes catalog numbers, and similar data and that he has checked and coordinated shop
� drawings with the requirements of the project and of the Contract Documents.
'
1.8 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW
' � A. The ArchitectJEngineer will review submittals with reasonable promptness so as to cause no
! delay. The Architect/Engineer's review and/or corrections refer only to the general
' i arrangement and conformance of the subject of the submittals with the design concept of the
I project and with the information given in the Contract Documents. Under no conditions should
� the Contractor consider the review to mclude the dimensions, quantities, and details of the items
� nor the approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The ArchitectlEngineer's review
' � � of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has informed the
i Architect/Engineer in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the
' ' ArchitecdEngineer has given written approval to the specific deviation; nor shall the
Architect/Engineer's review relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions
i from the shop drawing.
' �
1.9 RESUBMITTALS
' A.� When shop drawings are returned to the Contractor with the Architect/Engineer's corrections,
, the Contractor shall make the required corrections. Upon request,resubmit one set of corrected
' drawings. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on the submitted drawings
' � to revisions other than requested by the Architect/Engineer on previous submission.
' 1.10 DISTRIBUTION
� A. Distribute reproductions of shop drawings, copies of product data, and samples which bear the
' j Architect/Engineer's stamp of approval, to job site file, Record Documents file, subcontractors,
suppliers, other affected contractors, and other entities requiring information.
' IPART 2 -PRODUCTS
Not used.
' �
' March 3,2000 01300-3 99048.00
1
PART 3 -EXECUTION I
Not used. '
END OF SECTION 01300 ,
1
, '
1 I
'
'
'
'
1
'
,
'
� i
1
1
March 3, 2000 01300-4 99048.00 '
i
, �
I
I
�
� I
APPENDIX I-SEISMIC INFORMATION
� 1.�1 PREFACE
; A. Items of equipment incorporated, installed in or on the building shall be fabricated and installed
' i to resist vertical loads and lateral forces stated in the Building Code,
Edition.
�
I [SPECIFIER: SELECT ONE OF THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPIiS. CHECK WITH
I � STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR APPROPRIATE PARAGRAPH.]
i B. Project is located in Seismic Zone . [THIS IS THE METHOD USED BY THE
t ; UBC.]
� ' OR
'� �
' B. Pro'ect is lcoated in a seismic hazard zone with site acceleration coefficients Av= and
J
' Aa= . [THIS IS THE METHOD USED BY THE SBC AND BOCA. CHECK
� WITH STANDARD ENGINEER FOR COEFFICIENTS.]
I
' 1 i 2 SUBMITTAL DATA REQUIRED
�
�� A. � Make submittals under procedures specified in Section 01300.
1 B. In order to provide adequate information to the Owner for proper review and evaluation of
adequacy of equipment and nonstructural items, submit the following information with shop
I drawings and product data:
' 1 e ific te from the manufacturers statin that the items furnished b them will maintain
. Crt a g y
� unit integrity by resisting lateral forces usmg the appropriate code required coefficients.
� ! 2. Dimensions and details of each piece of equipment, weight of each piece, and its
, approximate center of gravity.
, 3. Size and dimensions of supporting assembly structures and the identification of each of its
' I members including secondary elements used as stiffeners and connectors.
4. Include calculations prepared and signed by licensed Structural Engineer in project state
� to indicate the adequacy of the sh-uctures to resist the code mandated vertical loads and
' ' lateralforces.
' 1.3 POSSIBLE BACK CHARGES TO CONTRACTOR
� A. If the submittals for equipment and nonstructural elements do not contain the data required,they
' ; will be returned without action for resubmission with required data. If the submittals are
returned to Owner with incomplete or insufficient data which may cause extra work to the
; Owner or his consultants, the Owner will charge the Contractor for such extra work at the rate
i i of 2.5 times direct personnel expense plus the cost of direct expenses.
1
END OF APPENDIX 01300
' '
March 3,2000 01300-5 99048.00
'
i �
1 i
' �
�
SECTION 01310 -CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
� �
PART 1 -GENERAL
� I
1�.1 FORMAT
I
' I
� A. Prepare network analysis system using similarities to the critical path method, as outlined in
; The Associated General Contractors of America publication, "The Use of CPM in Construction
� -A Manual for General Contractors."
' `
� B. Sequence of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
�
� C. Scale and spacing: Prepare to allow space for updating.
1.2 CONTENT
' I
; A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for the beginning and
� completion of each element of construction.
� �
B. Identify each item by major Specifications Section number.
�
� i C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.
� D. Provide subschedules to define critical portions of the entire schedule.
' '�
E. Show accumulated percentage of completion for each item, and total percentage of work
,i completed,as of first day of each month.
' �� F. Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products and products specified under-allowances, if
� any.
� 1.3 I MONTHLY PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. : Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal and projected completion date of each
' activity.
' B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule for the following.
i l. Major changes in scope.
�� 2. Activities modified since previous submission.
� � 3. Revised projection of progress and completion.
i
' C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define.
1 � '
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
' 2. Corrective action taken or recommended, and its effect.
� , 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
�
' March 3,2000 01310-1 99048.00
�I
1
� 1.4 SUBMITTALS � ' '�
A. Distribute copies of revised schedules to Owner. After review, resubmit required revised data �
r uired
i as eq . �
B. Submit revised progress schedule with each monthly Application for Payment.
' ' ' �
1.5 INSTRUCTIONS ' �
A. Instruct subcontractors, Suppliers, and other parties whose actions affect scheduled work, to '
promptly report inabilrty to comply with schedules. Provide a detailed explanation and
suggested remedies. '
END OF SECTION 01310 '
1 �
�
' II�
; �
�
'
i
�
'
, '
� �
, ,
' �
March 3,2000 01310-2 99,048.00 ,
�
�
�
:
' 1
�
I
�
' I
�
SECTION 01400 -TESTS &INSPECTIONS
' !
PART 1 -GENERAL
� i
1!1 The Testing Agency will be selected by the Architect. The Owner will pay for tests and
I inspections unless otherwise specified.
� I
'I
1�2 The responsibility of the Testing Agency shall be to test, inspect and report. Work and
1 , materials not complying with these specifications and referenced codes, standards and
specifications shall be reported to the Contractor and Architect immediately. Field notes
� confirming such notification are to be submitted with test and inspection reports. Copies of
� field notes are to be left with the project supenntendent prior to leaving the construction site.
' Field notes shall include the message given to the Contractor, date and time of inessage, name
� of Contractor's Representative informed, nature of discrepancy, action taken by Contractor, and
1 name of Testing Agency Representative.
1�.3 Tests and inspections of materials and processes will be required as set forth in the appropriate
' ; sections of these specifications and as directed by the Architect. Laboratory and field personnel
are to be qualified with a minimum of two years experience.
i I
� 1.4 Dispose of or conect materials and work not complying with the specifications in an approved
� manner. Should the Contractor elect to accept material or work not complying to the
, ; specifications, he thereby assumes full responsibility for the material or work and design, test,
iinspection,and corrective action should the material not conform to appropriate codes.
i
' 'I
1.5 Whenever extra testing design and/or inspections are necessrtated by the fault or error of the
� Contractor, or by the noncompliance of the materials or worlananship with the requirements of
' these drawings and specifications, or for the convenience of the Contractor, the Owner will pay
ifor such extra tests and inspections but will deduct the amounts of such payments from
' payments due to the Contractor. Additional work for the Architect shall be at the rate of 2.5
I times direct personnel expense plus the cost of direct expense.
� �
1.6 The reports shall indicate that the materials were tested in accordance with the requirements of
� the specifications and referenced codes, and shall state whether the material or materials passed
or failed to pass those requirements. The Architect or his representative (Testing and Inspection
Agency) shall select the samples of materials for teshng. In no case shall the vendor be
� , considered a representative of the Architect for this purpose.
�1.7 � Copies of test or inspechon reports are to be issued within 48 hours of the test or inspection.
, � The following information is to be included:
� Name and Address of Test Agency
� Date
� March 3, 2000 01400-1 99048.00
'
Proj ect Name ,
Pro�ect Location
Proj ect Contractor '
Material Supplier
Specified Strength ',
Type of Material '
Time Sampled
Name of Person Performing Tests
Quantity Represented
Weather Conditions �
Results of Tests '
Date Tested
Location of Material Tested � 'I
Remarks �
Distribution of Reports I
' I�
1.8 Make the premises available to the Architect and to the Testing and Inspection Agency and i
cooperate with the Testing Agency. ' �I
1.9 Notify the Testing Agency 24 hours prior to the required testing and inspection. � I
1.10 The Architect will make decisions or set guidelines for acceptance or rejection of matenals
based on test results. '
1.11 Advise the Architect immediately of improper testing procedures, unqualified personnel '
performing test,unnecessary testing or incorrect test results.
he ntract nor ins ections
1.12 Neither the observations of the Architect in his administration of t co , p ,
,
tests or approvals by persons other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his
� obligations to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. �
END OF SECTION 01400
�
�
�
,
'
March 3, 2000 01400-2 99048.00 �
' I
1 I
I
SECTION 01410 -STRUCTURAL TESTING/II�SPECTION AGENCY SERVICES
� ' I ,
PART ll -GENERAL
, �
' I
1�1 ADMINISTRATION
�
� I
� A. Stanley D. Lindsey and Associates, Ltd., Consulting Engineers, 1801 West End Avenue, Suite
� 400, Nashville, Tennessee, 37203, will administer the work of structural teshng agencies. The
i Architect/Structural Engineer will determine acceptance or rejection of all work tested andlor
1 I I
inspected.
B. A pre-construction meeting shall be conducted at the construction site by the Structural �
' Engineer to discuss quality control. The parties involved may be the testing and inspection
agencies,Architect, Contractor, appropriate subcontractors, suppliers and detailers.
' C. Neither the observation of the Architect/Structural Engineer in the administration of the
Contract, nor tests and inspections by the testing agency, nor approvals by persons other than
the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the work in
� accordance with the Contract Documents.
' �
1�.2 ' PAYMENTS
' �
�� A. The Owner will pay for the testing that is required by the Contract Documents unless specified
' otherwise.
' i B. The Contractor shall pay for the additional testing required for work or materials not complymg
� with Contract Documents due to negligence andlor nonconformance.
�
� � C. The Contractor shall pay for the additional testing required for his convemence.
I
' 1.3 OPTIONS
A. � If the testing agency is located at such a distance from the project that paying travel expenses
� � will be a consideration in scheduling the testing agency to the job site, or if the amount of
sampling performed is minor, then, by mutual agreement of the ArchitectlStructural Engineer
and Contractor, the Contractor may be requested to take samples and forward them to the
' ' testing agency for testing.
�
� PART 2-MATERIALS (NOT APPLICABLE)
' I
'
� '
' March 3, 2000 01410-1 99048.00
'
PART 3 -EXECUTION I
3.1 TESTING AGENCY'S RESPONSIBILITIES '
A. Submit qualifications of techmcians, inspectors, engineers and the organization to perform '
services for this project. Include copies of certificates and license numbers to confirm
compliance.
B. Provide personnel with a minimum of two years' experience and qualified to meet requirements '
of appropriate sections of these specifications.
C. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications," published by '
American Council of Independent Laboratones.
D. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329-72 "Standards for Recommended Practice for '
Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in
Consiruction."
E. Have properly calibrated equipment, calibrated withm the past 12 months by devices of '
accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural pnysical
constants.
F. Obtain a copy of the project documents from the Contractor. '
, G. Cooperate with the Contractor and provide prompt service.
'
H. Upon arriving at the construction site, sign in and notify the Contractor.
I. Perform tests and/or inspections as outlined in appropriate sections of the project specifications, '
required by codes, and as directed by the Structural Engmeers.
J. Leave copies of field notes with the project superintendent prior to leaving the construction site. r
Field notes shall include the message given to the Contractor, date, time of inessage, name of
Contractor's Representative informed, type and location of work or materials tested and/or ,
inspected, whether the work or materials complies with Contract Documents and name of the
- testing agency representative.
K. Report work and materials not complying with Contract Documents immediately to the �
Contractor and Structural Engineer.
L. Report and distribute results of tests and/or inspections promptly in the form of written reports '
as directed by the Structural Engineer.
M. Keep time and cost separate for additional testing and inspechon as outlined herein. Notify the '
Structural Engineer of additional testing and inspection required.
N. Select the representative samples that are to be tested and/or inspected. ,
O. The testing agency shall not alter requirements of Contract Documents, approve or reject any
i portion of the work, or perform duties of the Contractor. '
'
March 3,2000 01410-2 99048.00
, '
� � i
�
�
� �
3 2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
I
'i A. Arrange the pre-construction meeting for quality control.
'
� B. Cooperate with testing agency personnel and provide access to work.
' � C. Provide a copy of project documents to the Testing Agency.
�� D. Provide samples of materials to be tested in required quantities.
� ;� E. Furnish copies of mill test reports when requested.
i
1 � F. Provide storage space for testing agency's exclusive use, such as for storing and curing testing
' samples.
I
' ; G. f Provide labor to assist the testing agency in performing test and/or inspections.
H. I Notify the testmg agency suffciently m advance of operations to allow assignment of personnel
t � and scheduling of tests.
�
i �
END OF SECTION 01410
1 i
� (
� '
' '
' i ,
� I
' ; �
'
I
� ,�
'
1 �
� I
'
' � �
' March'3,2000 01410-3 99048.00
I �
� � ,
!
� +
i
SECTION 41540 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES
� +
t
P�T 1 -GENERAL
� �
1�1 RELATED REQUIItEMENTS
� � A. Contractor's use of prernises: Section 01010.
!
B. Final cleaning: Section 01700.
, '
1.2 ; ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
, �
A. Provide service required for construction operations, with poles, branch wiring, distribution
boxes and ather appurtenances located ta allow service and lighting by means of canstruction
' ; type power cords. Pay for costs of energy used.
� B. Arrange with local electric power company and pay fees for tapping onto existing electric
� + power source and providing meter for temporary construction lights and pawer.
� C. ' Pravide lighting far construction operatians.
; D. � Existing and permanent lighting ma be used durin conshuction. Maintain li htin and make
� , Y g g g
j routrne repairs.
�
' E. " When teznporary items are no longer required,remove the system.
�
� 1�.3 HEAT AND VENTILATION
,,
; A. � Pravide as requixed to rnamtam specified condlnons for construction operations and to protect
' materials,finishes and equipment from damage due to temperature and humidity.
' B. Coordinate use of existing facilities with the 4wner. Extend and supplement with temporary
units as required to rnaintain specified conditions for construction operations and to protect
� i materials,finishes and equipment from damage due to temperature and humidity.
C. Obtain approval of Owner's Representative prior to operation of permanent facilities for
� temporary purposes, verify that installation is approved for aperatian, and that all filters are in
i � place. Provide and pay for aperatian and rnaintenance.
�
� D. I Provide stnoke free temporary heat required for performance of work. Open fires will not be
' � permitted.
,
! E. Pravide ventilation of enciosed areas to cure materials, to disperse humidity, and to prevent
' � accumulations of dust, fumes,vapors or gases.
� I
, Marcli 3, 2040 01500-1 99048.00
�
i
�
'
1.4 TELEPHONE SERVICE I
A. Provide telephone service to the field office. Toll calls by parties other than the Contractor will ,
be at their own expense.
1.5 WATER '
A. Provide service required for construction operations. Extend branch piping with outlets located
so that water is available by use of hoses. Pay meter charges. �
B. Arrange with the local water company and pay fees for tapping existing water mains and
providing meter for temporary consiruction water. '
C. When temporary piping is no longer required,remove it.
D. Provide drinking water m approved sanitary containers and disposable cups for worlanen. '
1.6 SANITARY FACII.ITIES '
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures for use by worlanen.
B. Construct facilities to be weathertight, and in compliance with applicable legal and health '
requirements.
i C. Keep facilities clean and sanitary and maintain facilities until construction is completed. �
D. If temporary facilities are placed over manholes,use flushing type fixtures.
'
E. Do not allow worlanen to use Owner's facilities.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
1
A. Provide and operate dramage and pumping equipment. Maintain excavations and site free of '
standing water.
B. Designated existing stairs may be used by construction personnel. Coordinate with the '
Architect.
C. Designated existing and permanent elevators may be used by construction personnel and for ' �
transporting lightweight materials. Do not exceed 80% of the elevator's rated load capacity. �
Provide protective coverings for finish surfaces of cars and entrances.
D. Do not use existing elevators for construction purposes unless the General Contractor grants '
permission.
'
1
March 3,2000 01500-2 99048.00 �
1 �
I I
' 1.8 ENCLOSURES I
I
, i A. Provide temporary insulated weathertight closures of openings in exterior surfaces to provide
�� acceptable working conditions and protection for materials, to allow for temporary heating, and
' to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide doors with self-locking hardware and locks.
�
' ; B. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner �
� ; occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to ,
; prevent damage to existing areas and equipment.
� ' '
'' 1. Construction: Frame and cover with sheet materials with closed jomts and sealed edges
Iat intersections with existing surfaces.
, 2. Sound rating: STC 35 in accordance with ASTM E90.
, 3. Fire rating: Flame Spread Rating of 25 in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Finish: Paint surfaces exposed to view in Owner occupied areas to match surrounding.
� ,
1.9 BARRIERS
I ' ,' A. Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities
i and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.
, B. Provide barricades and covered walkways as required by governing authorities for public rights-
, of-way and for public access to existing building.
I
C. I Provide barricades and temporary lighting at streets and open ditches where construction work
' , � may present hazards to vehicles and personnel. "
' 1i.10 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
' � A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish, and periodically dispose of off-site.
� B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work. Maintain areas free of dust and other
contaminants during finishing operations.
' C. I Also see Section 01710 for further cleaning instructions.
�
I1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
' A. Provide a weathertight building or an office trailer with:
I
� 1. Lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped
' with furniture.
2. Job telephone as specified above.
' 3. Space for Project Meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate a minimum of 12
' persons.
I4. Work table large enough to accommodate working drawings.
5. Files, drawings,racks, and shelves to maintain order and neatness.
' B. Provide janitor service for the office.
�
' March 3,2000 01500-3 99048.00
�
'
C. Provide lighted, weathertight storage sheds, for tools, materials and equipment with adequate ,
space for organized storage and access. Provide heat and ventilation for products requiring
controlled conditions. '
D. Locate these facilities to preclude interference with work and as directed.
1.12 PARKING FACILITIES '
A. Parking space at the site is limited. '
B. Make anangements with the Owner's Representative to secure parking spaces for workmen.
Do not park in spaces other than those designated. ,
C. If designated area is insufficient, contractors and workmen will be required to make their own
� arrangements for parking. '
1.13 REMOVAL
ra materials e ui ment services and construction rior to Substantial '
A. Remove tempo ry , q p , p
Completion.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove '
underground installations to a depth of two feet and grade as indicated or directed by the
Architect. '
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified, or to original condition. '
'
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
Not Used. '
PART 3 -EXECUTION '
Not Used.
'
END OF SECTION 01500
'
,
'
'
March 3, 2000 01500-4 99048.00 ,
� _. _ _ -. __ .__ _
� I
'
SECTION 01630 -PRODUCT C?PTIC7NS AND SUBSTITUTIQNS
, '�
PART 1 -GENERAL
� ��
1.,� REQUIIZEMENTS 1NCLUDED
' ' A. Contractor's option in selection of products.
B. Products list.
' ; C. Requests for substitution of products.
r1.2 ' OWNER&ARCHITECT'S RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT
, ' A. Under terms set forth below, reasonable requests for substitution will be considered. If, in the
i apinion of 4wner and Architect, substitute items are equal ta the products specified and are
,I sa'sfactory for incorparation m the work,then the substitute items will be approved.
, ;
' �i
1:3 CQNTR.ACTOR'S OPTIONS
�;
� ��) A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Select a product meeting
i those standards or descriptian.
� B. Products Specified by Naming One ar More Manufacturers with an "or equal" statement: submit
, �I a request for substitution for a manufacturer not specifically named.
I
� C. Praducts Specified by Naming Several Manufacturers: Select products of a named manufacturer
� � meetzng specifications.
� D. Praducts Specified by Manufacturer, Brand Name, Type ar Catalag Number: Specif cation is
� for purpose of establishing standards of quality, and style desired. Specification does indicate
Owner and Architect's preference,but reasonable requests for substitutian may be submitted.
� E. Product Speci�ed by Manufacturer, Brand Narne, Type or Catalog Number and Followed by
Words "No Substitutians: Provide Praducts Specified".
� 1:�4 LIMITATIONS OF SUBSTTTUTIONS
(
� A. Submit requests for substitutions prior to issuance of subcontracts or purchase arders.
Subsequent request will be cansidered only in case of product unavailability or ather cond'rtrons
i beyond control of Contractar.
,�
� � B. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data
� submittals withaut separate formal request, when requested directly by a subcontractor or
i supplier, ar when acceptance wiil require substanhal revision of Contract Documents.
' i
i
� 1t�larch 3,2000 01634-1 99Q48.00 ;
, '
C. Do not order or install substitute products without written acceptance. '
D. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution is not �
accepted,provide specified product.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION '
A. In making request for substitution, Contractor represents:
B. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and determined that it is ;equal or �
superior in all respects to that specified or the credit or addition offered represents a fair or
superior difference in value. '
C. He will provide the same warranty for substituted product as for product or method speci�ied.
D. He will coordmate mstallation of accepted substitution into work, making such changes as may �
be required for work to be complete in all respects.
E. He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which consequently,become ,
apparent.
F. Cost data is complete and includes all related cost under his Contract, but excludes the '
Architect's design.
1.6 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS �
A. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete data, with drawings and ,
samples as appropriate,including:
1. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified. �
2. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the substitution.
3. Effect on the construction schedule.
4. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified. �
5. Any required license fees or royalties.
6. Availability of maintenance service,and source of replacement materials.
B. Identify product by Specifications Section number. Provide the manufacturer's name and �
address, trade name of product, and model or catalog number. List fabncators and suppliers as
appropriate. �
C. Attach product data as specified in Section 01300. i
D. List similar projects using the proposed product, dates of installation, and names of Architect '
and the Owner.
E. The Owner and Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and �
notify Contractor, in writing, of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution. �
Failure to object to a listed item shall not constitute a waiver of requirements of Contract
Documents.
�
March 3, 2000 01630-2 99048.00 '
�
I � � '
� 1�7 PRODUCTS LIST
�
' ,i A. For products specified only by reference standards (ASTM, etc.), include with listing of each
iproduct:
�� 1. Name and address of manufacturer.
! ' 2. Trade name.
i
i 3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturer's data to include performance and test data and reference standards.
� B. For products which will affect structure or be affected by structural considerations, include
� drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures, test data, and
� 'i reference standards.
i
�
� PART2 -PRODUCTS
�
Not Used.
� !
PART 3 -EXECUTION
I
� Not Us i d.
' I
'i
' END OF SECTION 01630
�
' �
�
�
� I
�
� '
� i
� �
�
I
� �
�
i
� March�3, 2000 01630-3 99048.00
,� '
�
I
� �
SECTION 01700 -CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
� I
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
� 1.�1 DESCRIPTION -
,i
� j A. Definitions: Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near the end of
� Contract time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of
,� contract, occupancy by Owner and similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific
,� ; requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Divisions 2 through 16.
, Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion" and; therefore, may be either a
single time period for the entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the work
� which have been certified as substantially complete at different dates. That time variation (if
any) shall be applicable to other provisions of this section,regardless of whether resulting from
"phased completion" originally specified by the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed
� ; upon by Owner and Contxactor.
� i
i
1:2 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
� � ,
i A. � General: Prior to requesting Architect's inspection for certification of substantial completion, as
, ;
, required by General Conditions (for either the entire work or portions thereo fl, complete the
; ; following and list lrnown exceptions in request:
i �
1. In progress payment request comcident with or first following date claimed, show either
I � , ' portion of the work claimed as "substantially completed", or list incomplete items, value
; of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete. Include supporting documentation
' for completion as indicated elsewhere in these Contract Documents.
� j 2. Submit statement showing accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
� 4. Submit specific warranties, worlananship/inaintenance bonds, maintenance agreements,
final certifications and similar documents.
� I 5. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner's full and unrestricted use of the work and
access to services and utilities, including (where required) occupancy permrts, operating
� � certificates, and similar releases.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials,and similar physical items to Owner.
7. Make final changeover of locks and transmit keys to Owner, and advise Owner's
i personnel to changeover in security provisions.
� 8. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instructions of Owner's operating/maintenance
I personnel. Disconhnue (or change over) and remove from project site temporary
facilities and services, along with construction tools and facilities, mockups, and similar
� , elements.
I 9. The Contractor is responsible for making all punch lists and execution of same pnor to
his request for substantial completion.
� �
�
' March�3, 2000 01700-1 99048.00
�l
B. Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Architect will either proceed with �
inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection,
Architect will either prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion, or advise Contractor of work �
which must be performed prior to issuance of Certificate; and repeat inspection when requested
and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will
form initial "punchlist" for final acceptance. �
13 PREREQUISTTES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE �
A. General: Prior to requesting Architect's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and
final payment, as required by General Conditions, complete the following and list lrnown ,�
exceptions(if any) m request: �,
1. Submit final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and �
completed operations where required.
2. Submit updated final statement, accounting for additional (final) changes to the Contract
Sum.
3. Submit certified copy of Architect's final punchlist of itemized work to be completed or �
corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resol�•ed for
acceptance, endorsed and dated by Architect. �
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, measured record of stored fuel, and similar data
as of time of substantial completion or when Owner took possession of and responsibility
for conesponding elements of the work. '
5. Submit specific warranties, worlrnzanship/maintenance agreements, final certifications
and similar documents.
6. Complete final cleaning up requirements,including touch-up of marred surfaces.
7. Submit consent of surety. �
8. Submit final liquidated damages settlement statement, acceptable to Owner.
9. Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage complying wrth insurance
requirements until Owner takes final acceptance (i.e. final payment), or sooner by mutual
agreement.
B. Reinspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that work has been completed, �
including punchlist items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete item
delays because of acceptable circumstances, Architect will reinspect work. Upon completion of
reinspection, Architect will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of �
work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary,
procedure will be repeated.
1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS �
A. General: Specific requirements for record documents are indicated in individual sections of the
specifications. Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from
deteriorahon or loss in a secure, fire resistive location; provide access to record documents for
Architect's reference during normal working hours.
�
�
March 3, 2000 01700-2 99048.00 � 'I
;� �
�
►
� i B. Maintenance Manuals: Organize maintenance-and-operating manual information into suitable
� sets of manageable size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and indexed
� ; (thumbtabbed); examples: Elevators, Finish Floor, Maintenance, Lawn and Plant Maintenance,
Roof Maintenance. Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, warranties, wiring
� i diagrams, recommended "turnaround" cycles, inspection procedures, shop drawings, product
' data, and similar applicable information. Bind each manual of each set into a heavy duty 2",
� ; three ring vinyl covered binder, and include pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark
� ; identification on both front and spine of each binder.
� ; C. The Contractor and his mechanical and electrical subcontractors will each keep one set of
� drawings in the job office and make a daily record of all changes in location of equipment,
' partitions, materials, etc., as approved by Architect. At the conclusion of the job, the Owner
' will furnish sepias to the Contractor and the mechanical and electrical subcontractors who will I
incorporate all changes on the sepias. This includes all Change Order sketches issued by the
' Architect during the progress of the work. The revised sepias are to be turned over to the
� Owner at the conclusion of the project.
I
� PART 2- PRODUCTS
Not Used.
� �
� � �
PART 3 -EXECUTION
� � i
3.�1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
� �
� i A. General Operating/Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of work requiring
continuing maintenance (by Owner) or operation, to meet with Owner's personnel, at project
� site, to provide basic instruction needed for proper operation and maintenance of the entire
� work. Include instructions by manufacturer's representatives where installers are not expert in
� , the required procedures. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare
' parts and materials, lubricants, fuels, identification system, control sequences, hazards, cleaning
� , and similar procedures and facilities. For operational equipment, demonstrate start-up,
� shutdown, emergency operations, noise and vibration adjustments, safety, economy/efficiency
' adjustments, and similar operations. Review maintenance and operations in relation with
I applicable warranties, agreements to maintain bonds and similar continuing commitments.
�
3.2 I FINAL CLEANING
� A. General: Specific cleaning for specific units of work is specified in sections of Divisions 2
� through 16. General cleaning during progress of work is specified m General Conditions:
� '
� 1. Provide final cleaning of the work, at time indicated, consishng of cleaning each surface
' or unit of work to normal "clean" condition expected for a first class building cleamng
� , and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning
� operations. The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels
required:
� i
�
� March 3,2000 01700-3 99048.00
�'
��
a. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. ,�
b. Clean glazed materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished �
condition, removmg substances, which are noticeable as vision obscuring
materials. Replace broken glass. �
c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surface finishes, including metals,
masonry, stone, concrete, pamted surfaces, plastics, tile, wood, special coatings,
and similar surfaces, to a dirt free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar
noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance
� of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original `.
reflective condition.
d. Wipe surfaces of inechanical and electrical equipment clean, including elevator (�
equipment and similar equipment in addition to that specified in Divisions 15 and ��
16;remove excess lubrication and other substances.
e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces including roofs,
plenums, shafts,trenches,equipment vaults,manholes, attics and similar spaces. _
f. Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom clean.
g. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces.
h. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those �'
resulting from water exposure.
i. Clean food service equipment to a condition of sanitation ready and acceptable for �
intended food service use.
j. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency.
k. Clean project site (yard and grounds) includmg landscape, development areas, of
litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom clean condition; �
remove stains, petrochemical spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds _
which are neither planted nor paved,to a smooth, even textured surface. ,.
B. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Architect, remove ��
protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of work to protect
previously completed work during remamder of construction period. �
C. Compliances: Comply with governing regulations for cleaning operations. Do not burn waste
materials at site, or bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property, or discharge volatile or
other harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems; remove waste materials from site
and dispose of in a lawful manner.
1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have ��
I become Owner's property, dispose of these to Owner's best advantage as directed.
��
�
\ �
� '
March 3, 2000 01700-4 99048.00 �
i
.�� I
�
� 3.3 CONTINUING INSPECTIONS
!
� � A. General: Except as otherwise required by specific warranties, agreements to maintain,
� workmanship/ maintenance bonds, and similar continuing commitments, comply with Owner's
� I request to participate in inspections at end of each time period of such continuing commitments.
�� Participate in general inspection of the work approximately one year beyond date(s) of
�� � substantial completion.
�I
END OF SECTION 01700
� I �
� �
� ',
�� ,
� I
; '
� ; '
i
� ; '�
� '� �
�
:�
� �
,
;,
� �
� ;
;
.�,, �
� ;
�
� �
�� i .
,
� �
, �
�
March 3,2000 01700-5 99048.00
��
�
�� i
i
� ��
;�
SECTION 01710 -GENERAL CLEANING&FINAL FIlVISH CLEANING
� ;
PART1 -GENERAL
i
� �
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
� I ,
i
f� �A. Maintain premises free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by operations.
, i
�B. Keep streets clean from mud, dirt, debris, and other materials removed from the job site.
� , Promptly remove from the streets,mud and dirt tracked by vehicles.
'C. At completion of work remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery, and
� ; surplus materials. Clean all sight-exposed surfaces. Leave project clean and ready for
construction work to follow, and ready for occupancy, as applicable.
D. i Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution
�, ' laws.
i
1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site.
� j 2. Do not dispose of volatile waste such as mineral spirits, oil, and paint thinner in storm
drains or sanitary sewers.
i ;
�E. � Hazard Control:
� i ,
1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily.
j2. Prevent accumulation of waste,which might cause hazardous conditions.
��� ; 3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile and noxious substances.
I
� PART2 -PRODUCT
I
�� 2.1 MATERTAT"
'
�A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
� �B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
�,
PART 3 -EXECUTION
I
`� 3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION �
' A. Clean building and grounds and keep free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.
� � B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent dust.
,�,I
� March 3, 2000 01710-1 99048.00
,�
C. At reasonable intervals during progress of work, but in no case less than once a week, clean site �
and public properties and dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
D. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Type of �
container is at Contractor's option. Use containers with adequate capacity to accommodate
anticipated needs. If containers do not have adequate capacrty, increase intervals of waste �
removal until adequate capacity is provided.
E. Vacuum interior building areas where work is performed prior to painting and other finish
work. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until building is ready for occupancy. ��
F. Minimize handling of materials. Do not drop or throw materials from heights.
G. Schedule cleamn o erations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning ��'
g P
process will not fall on wet,new painted surfaces.
�.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING '
A. Employ experienced worlanen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. ,�
B. In preparation for substantial completion and occupancy, conduct inspection of sight-exposed
mterior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed open spaces. �
C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight-
exposed interior and extenor finished surfaces of this work. Polish designated surfaces. �
Remove debris,rubbish, dirt, etc., from open concealed spaces, chases and above ceilmgs.
D. Repair,patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish and to match adjacent surfaces. �
E. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean surfaces of grounds.
F. Remove ice and snow from access to building. �
G. Replace air-conditioning filters, when air-conditiomng and heating umts are operated during ��
construction. j�
END OF SECTION 01710 �
�
� I
i
, �
�,
March 3, 2000 01710-2 99048.00 �
�� �i
, �►
SECTIO 01720 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
� ��
PART 1 -GENERAL
,-a
� 1.�1 DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE
�I A. Maintain copies of the following documents for record purposes:
�
1. Contract drawings.
2. Specifications (Project Manual).
�' 3. Addenda.
� 4. Reviewed shop drawmgs.
� ; 5. Change orders.
6. Other documents which modify original contract.
� 7. Field test records.
� 8. Manufacturer's certificates.
�- 9. Fixed equipment manuals.
10. Revisions.
II B. Store record documents in a file in the field office, apart from the documents used for
�� d ecure stora e for Record Documents.
.I construction. Provide files,racks an s g
�� C. Label and file Record Documents in sequence with section number listings in Table o�Contents
� of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in the lower right hand
� corner in neat,large printed letters.
�� � D. Maintain Record Documents in clean d le ble condition.
� rY� �
� ' E. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes.
� F. Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection by the Owner's Representative.
� ING
1.2 RECORD
�� i A. General Contractor shall transfer all changes on sepia prints. All work shall be neat and legible.
� 1. Use separate colors for recording information about each major system.
� 2. Establish a code to denote the color for each trade and indicate by schedule placed on the
front sheet of the Record Drawings.
�, B. Marlang Drawmgs: �,
� I i
� 1. Keep markings current.
�� 2. Do not conceal work until required information has been recorded.
� � 3. Neatly and legibly mark Record Set to indicate actual construction,including:
a. Depth of footings in relation to first floor level.
�
=�' n�arch 3, 2000 01720-1 99048.00
�
b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities,valves, etc. referenced to '�
building exterior lmes. Show direction of flow of pipe and depth of piping
underground. �
c. Field changes of dimensions and details.
d. Changes made by Contract Modifications.
e. Details not on original Contract Drawings. ��`
,�
C. Marking Project Manual:
1. Neatly and legibly mark Project Manual with black, permanent ink:
a. On appropriate pages, record references to Addenda, Amendments, Modifications,
Change Orders, and Field Orders. �
b. On appropriate pages, enter trade name, manufacturer, catalog number, and name
of supplier of each product and item actually installed, if different from that
specified. �
c. Other items installed but not originally specified. �
� .
D. Maintain documents listed in Paragraph 1.OlA, above. ��
,
1.3 SUBMTTTAL �
�
A. At Contract Closeout, deliver Record Documents to Owner's Representative.
B. Submit Record Documents under cover of a transmittal letter containing:
1. Date. ,
2. Proj ect title and number. �
3. Contractor's and subcontractor's names and addresses. �
4. Title and number of each Record Document. �
5. Certification that each document submitted is complete and accurate. �
6. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.
PART2 -PRODUCT
�;
' Not Used.
, �
PART 3 -EXECUTION
Not Used. y�
END OF SECTION 01720 �
� �
� �
March 3, 2000 01720-2 99048.00 ��
\�, i I
I �
� 'I
SECTION 01730 -OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
� '�
PART 1 -GENERAL
�1 I� .
� '
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
� A. Submittals-Section 01300.
� �
�� B. Contract Closeout-Section 01700.
� �I
i C. i Project Record Documents -Section 01720.
� D. Warranties—Per the individual Specification Sections.
�
1.2 GENERAL
� I
, A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and
operation of products furnished under the Contract.
�� I B. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this SeGtion and as referenced in other
� ; pertinent sections of specifications.
� I
C. Insh-uct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment
i and systems.
�f I
l.i QUALITY ASSURANCE
� �I A. Have data prepared by personnel:
I
� 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products.
� ! 2. Completely familiar with requirements of this Section.
' � 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data.
i 4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.
� i
� 1.',4 FORM OF SUBMIT"TALS
� I
� A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. Submit three
i (3)copies of manual to Owner's Representative.
�' B. Format:
� 1. Size: 8-1/2" x 11".
� i 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum,white, for typed pages.
� 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
��
March 3, 2000 01730-1 99048.00
� '
`� �
C. Drawings ��
1. Provide reinforced punched binder tab;bind in with text. -�
2. Fold larger drawings to the size of the text pages.
D. Product Literature:
��
1. Provide flyleaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment.
2. Provide typed description of product, and maj or component parts of equipment.
3. Provide indexed tabs. �
E. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND �
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS."
' F. List: , �
' 1. Title of Project. '
2. Identi of se arate structure as a licable.
tY P PP �� ,
3. Identity of general subject matter covered in manual.
G. Binders:
1. Commercial quality three ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
�
2. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings.
, �
1.5 CONTENT OF MANUAL:
, �A. Prepare a neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, ananged in a systematic order,
to include: �
1. Contractor,name of responsible principal, address, and telephone number. �
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. ��
3. List,with each product,the name, address, and telephone number of
a. Subcontractor or installer.
��'
b. Maintenance Contractor, as appropnate.
c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. �
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. _,
4. Identify each product by product name and other idenhfying symbols as set forth m �
Contract Documents.
' B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
�
2. Annotate each sheet to:
1 rl identi the s ecific roduct or art installed. �
a. C ea y fy p p p
b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.
c. Delete references to inapplicable information. (�
��
March 3, 2000 01730-2 99048.00
i
I
�� C. Drawings:
� 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: "
i
� � a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
��
'i 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct
illustration of completed installation.
� � 3. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
_ ;�
;� D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
� I 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
� 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
�
� ' E. Copy of each warranty,bond, and service contract issued.
,i F. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel giving:
� ,
�, l. Proper procedures in the event of failure.
� 2. Instances which might affect the validrty of warranties or bonds.
�� ��
il a. If a system shall be placed in operation prior to substantial completion, the
� warranty shall begin at the time the system is placed in operation as directed by the
� �� Owner's Representative.
1�6 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES �
,�� I
� A. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form.
� '�
�I B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials, and finishes:
i
; 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
� ; a. Catalo number, size, com osition.
g P
� b. Color and texture designations.
�� ! c. Information required for reordering specially manufactured products.
� �
I
�' 2. Instructions for care and maintenance.
3. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
�� ;� 4. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product.
'i 5. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
`�f ; C. Content, for moisture protection and weather exposed products:
� l. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
' 2. Applicable standards.
3. Chemical composition.
4. Details of installation.
��
� n4arch 3,2000 01730-3 99048.00
,
\�
D. Instructions for inspection,maintenance and repair. �
E. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of specifications.
F. Provide complete information for products of applicable sections of the Project Manual �
including,but not limited to, the following types of materials: �
1. Metal fabrications.
2. Jointsealants.
3. Doors and frames. ��
4. Windows.
5. Hardware.
6. Glazing. �
7. All finish materials. -
8. Toilet partitions.
9. Toilet accessories.
�
1.7 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. "
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: �
J
1. Description of unit and component parts.
2. Function,normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. �
3. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.
C. Operating Procedures: �
1. Start-up,break-in,routine and normal operating instructions. '�►
2. Re ulation control sto m shutdown and emer enc instructions. '�
g � , PP� g, � g Y
3. Summer and winter o eratin instructions. �
P g
4. Special operating instructions.
�
D. Maintenance Procedures: �
1. Routine operations. �' I
2. Guide to "troubleshootmg." e ,
3. Disassembly,repair, and reassembly.
4. Alignment, adjusting, and checking. `r
�
E. Servicmg and lubrication schedule.
1. List of lubricants required. � I
F. Manufacturer's printed operatmg and maintenance instructions. i
�,
G. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. ,
�
March 3, 2000 01730-4 99048.00 '�� �
�' ,
� �H. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for
� maintenance.
� I
I 1. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
2. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
� ;I. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
�
J. Each Contractor's coordination drawings.
� I �
1. As-installed color-coded piping diagrams.
� '� K. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended
; quantities to be maintained in storage.
��� � L. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
�� ; M. Content, for each electrical and electronic system, as appropnate:
� 1. Description of system and component parts.
�i a. Function,normal operating characteristics and limitmg conditions.
�; 'i b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
i c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
� �
� � 2. Circuit directories of panelboards.
� 3. Electrical service.
�� 4. Controls.
� ! 5. Communications.
� 6. As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams.
7. Operating schedules:
� I a. Routine and normal operating instxuctions.
� ; b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
�
� 8. Maintenance procedures:
i
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "troubleshooting."
�` � c. Disassembly,repair, and reassembly.
� ; d. Adjustment and checking.
` I
9. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
� i 10. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
� recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
- � 11. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
�
, ', ; N. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during the
� instruction of Owner's personnel.
I
i
� March 3�, 2000 01730-5 99048.00
\�
O. Addihonal requirements for operating and maintenance data: The respective sections of `'
specifications.
P. Provide complete information for products of applicable sections of the Pro�ect Manual �
including,but not limited to, the following types of matenals:
1. Plumbing systems. �
2. Domestic water conditioners.
� 3. Fire protection.
4. Power or heat generation.
� 5. Air distribution. "
� 6. Controls and instrumentation.
7. Motors. �
8. Power generation and transmission. �
9. Service and distribution.
10. Lighting. ��
11. Special systems.
12. Commumcations.
I 1.8 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
�
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents prior to �
start of work.
B. Submit one copy of completed data in final form prior to final mspection or acceptance'. �-
C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form after final inspection or
acceptance. �
1.9 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL �
�'
A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operattng and '
, maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment,
and systems. ��,
B. For each item,record the following information:
1. Time and date of instruction. �
2. Name(s) of personnel providing instruction.
'.S
3. Name(s) of personnel receivmg mstruction.
� ,
� 4. Items covered during instructions. ,
� C. Use operating and maintenance manual to constitute the basis of instruction.
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of '
operations and maintenance. .�
�
, �
March 3,2000 01730-6 99048.00
� �� '
;
-_ i
, ,I
� f
� �
P�ART 2,-PRODUCTS
. �
I
� N,ot Used.
;
�
P'.ART 3 -EXECUTION
� �
�� Not Use,d.
, � I
� END C�F SECTION 0173Q
1
�, �
� ;
.��
�
, .,� �
~� , ;�
� � �
i
I
� '
�
'
� (
�' �
( �
1� �
I
� �
� I
�
�' II
f
�
�l
I
� I
�
�
E
� �
'�, � 01730-7 99Q48.40
11Jlarch 3,20Q0
\�� '
� i
�, �
SECTION 05500 -MISCELLANEOUS METAL
�I � �
' PART 11 -GENERAL
� �
1�1 WORK INCLUDED
�
� ! A. Work under this Section includes, but is not limited to and should include all metal required to
icomplete all openings and supports for the project:
�\ ,
1. Steel angle frames above ceilings to support projection screen.
�' ! 2. Steel framing for wall mounted television brackets.
, , 3. Steel pipe bumper posts (bollards).
�"� 4. Steel bracket and gussets for supporting counter tops.
5. Metalladders.
��; 1.2 SUBMITTALS
; A. Submit all items in accordance wrth Section 01300.
�� �
� B. Welding Submittals: See Section 05100 for requirements.
�I
� ' C. ' Mill Certification: Upon request, submit mill certification that steel supplied meets requirements
' I of these specifications and referenced specifications above.
��� , D. � Shop Drawings: Submit four copies of prints of each drawing.
� nnections and method of attachment.
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, locahons, co ,
� ' 2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols.
�
�
1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTING
� , A. i Owner will engage a Testing Laboratory to inspect and test miscellaneous steel work. In
; addrtion, Structural Engineer may inspect infrequently. Inspections will be made by AWS
� ; Qualified Inspectors.
�; B. Inspections and tests will mclude:
��� I
� �, 1. Visual inspections of: welded connections; fit-up welded �oints; welds, and bolted
� �i
�� connections.
� ; 2. Observation of welding procedures.
� , 3. Inspectors may inspect fabricator's shop to observe work in progress.
�
'�� 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
'A I
A. Qualifications of Fabncator: Approved by American Institute of Steel Construction Quality
�, Certification Program, Category II.
� March 3, 2000 05500-1 99048.00
�
B. A Fabricator not approved may be acceptable to Structural Engineer provided he has tests made ��
(and pays for such tests) as set forth in Section 01410 — Structural Testing/Inspectiori Agency
Services. Approval or rejection will be at Owner's discrehon and without recourse. �
�
1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING �
A. Deliver items installed by others in sufficient time not to delay that work. Provide drawzngs and
directions required for proper installation.
B. Handle and store materials to preclude damage. �
C. Store materials to permit easy access. Keep steel off of ground. �
PART 2 -PRODUCTS :�
2.1 MATERIALS � �
A. Steel Sections -ASTM A36. '^'I
B. Steel Pipe -ASTM A53,Type S or E, Grade B,black for interior; galvamzed for exterior. �
C. Sheet Steel -ASTM A611, Grade B.
D. Bolts,Nuts and Washers-ASTM A325. �
E. Welding Matenals: Comply with AWS Code. �
F. Primer: Fabricators standard rust resisting primer.
��2.2 FABRICATING
,-.
A. Verify dimensions on site pnor to shop fabrication. �
�
B. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
C. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent surfaces �nth each exposed edge to small, ��
uniform radius.
� D. Supply components required for anchoring metal fabrications. �
2.3 FINISH
�
A. Clean surfaces prior to fimshing.
��B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field weldmg is required.
C. Prime paint rtems scheduled with one smooth,uniform coat. �
March 3, 2000 05500-2 99048.00 '�
i
4�
p` �
PART 3 - EXECUTION
i
�� Iil
� 3�1 PREPARATION
� ' A. Obtain Structural Engineer's approval before site cutting, or making adjustments not scheduled:
; B. Supply items shall be embedded in mortar, and for reinforcing roof deck.
� 3�2 INSTALLING
� � A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, and free from distortion and defects.
B. Perform field welding m accordance with AWS D1.1 and Section 05100.
� C. Attach steel angle counter brackets through legs of steel studs and drywall with toggle bolts.
Coordinate with Section 06410 for proper mounting height.
'�, , D. Set steel pipe wheel guards in concrete and fill pipes with concrete. Dome top of concrete.
� 3:6 FABRICATIONS
A. Worlananship:
� 1. Clean all metal surfaces of mill scale, flake rust and rust pitting.
2. Surfaces shall be well formed and finished to shape and size with sharp lmes and angles
� , and smooth surfaces.
� 3. Weld or rivet all permanent connections.
4. Grind welds and flush rivets smooth on surfaces that will be exposed.
'� 5. Thiclrness of inetal and details of assembly and supports shall give ample strength and
stiffness.
6. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water.
� 7. Provide holes and connections for work of other trades.
8. Conceal fastenings where practical.
�
iB. Castings:
� � 1. Casting shall be umform quality, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage
� distortion or other defects.
r� � 2. Castings shall conform to the dimensions indicated with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8
� � inch.
I 3. Castings shall be smooth and well cleaned by shop blasting or other approved method.
`�. C. Shop Painting:
1. Properly clean all ferrous metals, except stainless steel and galvanized surfaces, and
�� apply one coat of paint.
2. Coat all anchors built into masonry with asphalt paint unless specified to be galvanized.
i
�' � �
, March 3, 2000 05500-3 99048.00
�
�
�
PART 2 - PRODUCTS �
2.1 MATERIALS
.�
A. Lumber: PS 20, graded in accordance with grading rules af one or more of the associations; �
maximum moisture content 19°l0, straight and free fram warp which cannat be carrected by
nailing.
B. Fasteners: Properly selected for the material to be fastened and the substrate to which the ��
material will be fixed, designed to develop proper and adequate strength camrnensurate iuith the �
use.
�
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Exarnine the areas and conditions under which work af this Section wi11 be perfarmed. Correct �
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Da not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been canected.
1
,,�-
3.2 INSTALLATION OF W04D DOORS
A. Prior to start of installation of each door, carefully inspect the door and verify that the door �,
furnished is the proper daor for the opening, as described an the door schedule in the drawings.
That the door is in sound condition, unblemished, without warp, twist, baw or other attributes
causing it to be rejected upon installation. }
�
B. Trim all wood doors as necessary to provide a uniform clearance of between 1/8" and 3/16" at
jambs and head, and a uniform clearance at the threshold or flaor to praperly clear the flaar
coverin s ecified. Door undercut must not exceed S/8" ta concrete finish slab floor. ��
g P
F
C. For each door,verify the hardware type on the Door Schedule and verify that hardware actually
supplied is the hardware specified. Using only the specified hinges or butts, and the praper ��
equipment for the purpose, install the door into the opening with the followmg hinge or butt
locatians; tap hinge or butt, the center of the butt not more than 11" below the top of the daor;
bottom hinge or butt, the center of the butt not more than 13" above the finish floor, ��
intermediate hinge or butt equidistant between the top and bottom butt.
D. Remove all rough edges resulting frozn door trirnrning with fine sandpaper and leave the �i
installed door in canditian to receive its final finish. Carefully touch-up alI trimmed surfaces,
applying a finish equal in al]respects ta the factory prefinish specified.
,�1
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HA.RDWARE
A. Carnbinatian PushfPull: Cen#ered 38" above finish floor. �'
�
�;
March 3, 2000 06200-2 99048.00 ,
�'
� �
i
� I
�I
� ,� B. Door closin devices; install and adjust in strict accordance with the templates and printed
,I g
instruchons supplied by the manufacturer. Insofar as practicable, doors opening to or from halls
� � or corridors shall have the closer mounted on the room side of the door. '
�� C. Kick plates on smgle-acting doors: Install kick plate on push side. On double-actmg doors: �
Install kick plate on both sides.
,1 ��
'� D. Panic bolt cross bars align in horizontal position with top and bottom bolts and rods aligned
j vertically. Install the centerline of strike 36" above fimsh floor.
� ' �
� E. Knob lock and knob latch strikes; center 38" above finish floor. �
! �i
� � F. Push bars centered 36" above finish floor. �
�
� G. Push plates centered 48" above finish floor.
� 1'H. Mortise deadlock strike centered 38" above finish floor.
. ,
� ;I. Extension level flush in the edge of door, center to bolt fronts 12" from bottom and 12" from the
I top edge of the door.
�J. Key cabinet shall be installed as directed by the Architect. '
� ,I K. ' Anchor all com onents firml into position for long life under hard use. Use only the anchoring I
P Y
- � devices furnished with the hardware item,unless otherwise specifically directed.
�I
�
3.4 I INSPECTION AND ADNSTMENT
.'� ,�A. Verify that each item has been installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
� recommendations and is in proper condition and functions in its intended manner.
� I .
'B. All installed finish hardware is in accordance with these specifications as to quality, type,
� appearance, operation, and all other specified ariributes.
� �
END OFI SECTION 06200
�
,� ,
.� 'i
. �
I
� 'I
� 'i
�
�
� March 3,'2000 06200-3 99048.00
_;!!�� t
�
� I
SECTION 07193 -PLASTIC VAPOR RETARDER
� I!
P 'ART 1 GENERAL
� � .
- 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
� II 1. Metal Studs-Section 09100.
� 2. Gypsum Wallboard-Secnon 09260.
,f ,
�� P I T 2-PRODUCTS
- I
� 2.11 MANUFACTURER:
�
� 'i 1. Visking Corp. "Visqueen."
_ ;I
2.2 MATERIALS:
,
� 1. Vapor Retarder: 6 mil polyethylene sheet(clear). -
2. Adhesive: 3M Co.No.4693 at studs.
i�.
� 3. Tape: 3M Co.No. 396(single faced) at joints.
P �I T 3 -EXECUTION
�
3.1 INSTALLATION:
� I -
1. Adhere over interior face of inetal studs before installation of wallboard.
�� 2. Extend from structural floor slab to bottom of structure above,using adhesive application
� � on metal studs and deck.
I3. Make vertical splices on metal stud,lapping vapor barrier 6 in.minimum.
� 4. Seal all laps and intersection with structural slabs continuously with adhesive or pressure
� sensitive tape.
`� � 5. Exterior wall to be vapor tight at completion of work.
�
,�. END OF SECTION 07193
��
I
�' ! - - -
__ �
� '
�'
� March 3,2000 07193-1 99048.00
�
�
�
i
� �I
'i _
i
� I I
_ il
SECTION 07213 -FIBROUS INSULATION
�� �;
PARTI -GENERAL
� �
1.1 DELNERY AND STORAGE
� - �
� ;A. Coordinate delivery with job progress and affected trades to minimize job storage time.
�
;B. Store materials in clean dry space and protect against moisture.
� ' _
1.2 . QUALITY ASSURANCE
� ;�A. Deliver materials in original unopened packages, containers, or bundles bearing manufacturer's
• labels. Labels shall indicate brand name,UL fire rating information, where applicable,R-value
� and other descriptive data confirming compliance with this specification.
� i
j B. Provide insulation having a.flame spread rating of 25 or less, in accordance with ASTM E84
- �� tests. •
,� I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
� �
!
2.1 MATERIALS
�� ; A. Thermal Insulation: Owens-Corning Fiberglass,unfaced,or approved equal,blanket type or batt
j type, in widths to fit stud spacing. Provide insulation having an "R" value of a minimum of R-
� 19 for walls and a minimum of R-30 for roof/ceiling. Flame spread rating shall be less than 25.
� �
; B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: U.S. Gypsum "Thermafiber", or approved equal paperless, semi-
; rigid, spun�mineral fibermat, of thickness indicated. -
� C. Safing Insulation: U.S. Gypsum "Thermafiber", Type I, Class "A", listed by Underwriter's
Laboratories,Inc., or approved equal.
� 1. Provide galvanized steel safing clips, "stik-clips" and/or galvanized wire to keep
insulation intact in walls.
� -
- PART 3 -EXECUTION
� 3.,1 PREPARATION
� , A. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.
! B. Verify mechanical and electnc services v�nthin spaces have been installed and tested.
� '
Nlarch 3,2000 07213-1 99048.00
� � �
i . �
- � � �
��
3.2 . INSTALLATION �` ,� I
� A. Install thermal insulation between metal studs on all exteriar walls. ' ---
l. Fit insulation snugly into framing with "stik-clips" or galv. wire threaded through �
i , �
� insulation to kee intact. Do not sta le insulation b forcin the insulation into reduced
, P P Y g
thickness,thereby losing the required R value. � I
2. Maintain integrity of insulation over entire area to be insulated. �
3. Insulate small spaces between closely spaced framing members. A finished insulated � �
wall shall be free of all voids. �
4. Carefully fit insulation around pipes, conduits, and other obstructions.
5. Where pipes and conduits are located in stud space, place insulation between'exterior
wall and pipes and conduits. ' �
6. _ Where building heat is in operation during the installation of exterior wall insulation,
install vapor retarder immediately to prevent condensation.
B. Insta.11 sound attenuation blankets where indicated. .`
1. Fit insulation into framing and maintain integrity of insulation over entire area.to be �
insulated. Use "stik- clips" or galv. wire threaded through insulation to keep intact in � I
walls. _
C. Install safing insulation, where indicated, strictly in accordance with manufacturers' ,� 'I
instructions. �
D. Install curtainwall insulation, where indicated, strictly in accordance with-manufacturers' ` �
instructions. _ � �
END OF SECTION 07213 -
- � �
�
.. - � I
_ �
� �
�
�
�
March 3,2000 07213-2 99048.00 -
i �
�i -
� ��
, .
� a
SECTION 07240 -EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYST`EM
� �I �
PART 1 GENERAL
jl
, �� 1.1 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE
� -
;�A. Provide certification that the applicator, and the insulation manufacturer are approved to supply
� i and install system components by the manufacturer.
I
'I B. The applicator shall have at least three installations of similar scope to this Project.
� � .
�i C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide Owner with a ten (10) year written labor and material
1 warranty for the system. Warranty to be from the manufacturer. If manufacturer requires pre-
� ; selected subcontractors to provide this warranty, then the manufacturer must negotiate or send
, this information to the General Contractor.
� _ .
� i -
1.2 SUBMTTTALS
- .
. A. Submit manufacturer's catalog data to the Architect for his approval. �
,�' ,
+ B. Submit six copies of shop drawings to the Architect and obtain his approval before ordering
� �' materials. -
�
iC. Submit color chart to the Architect for his approval prior to application.
� `
��
1.3 SAMPLES
,I
'� � A. Construct on 2'-0" x 4'-0" sample for each finish, color, and texture to serve as quality standard
� for the project�when approved by the Architect. Construct using same tools and techniques for
� the project work.
� - , �
1:4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
� �I A. Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's unopened packages with labels intact.
i
; B. Store materials inside, off floor or ground, in a weather tight area with temperatures maintained
� � above 40 degrees F.
��
I
� �I `
I
�
1
�
_ �
� I -
�
N[arch 3,2000 07240-1 � 99048.00
�� - f
�
�
I
�
PART 2-PRODUCTS ,�
2.1 INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM MATERIALS: �
A. Materials are insulation board, adhesives, mesh described here and on drawings, ax�d finish
coatings as manufactured and provided by the Dryvit System, Inc., STO Industries9 Inc., or �
equal as pre-approved by Architect prior to bid. �
B. Finish coat to be a"dirt pickup resistant"finish to inhibit mildew and inhibit dirt pickup.
� . �
C. Finish coat af following areas to be"Medallion Series"finish to match other finishes orn the job.
, Areas aie as listed here: The entire surface of vestibule addition and any patch and repair work
to the existing facility. � �.
2.2 INSULATION BOARD AND REIlVFORCING FABRIC �
A. Expanded polystyrene closed cell insulation boazd with a density of one pound per cubic foot
and open weave fiberglass fabric. �
B. Reinforcing Mesh. Provide the following glass fiber reinforcing at locations describecfl here or
�� on drawings: ' �
i
�i 1. Standard(4.3 oz/sq.yd.)on all azeas of the renovation and any patch and repair work.
2. Panzer 20 (20.0 oz/sq. yd.) & Standard (4.3 oz/sq. yd.): Refer to exterior elevations for �
locations.
C. Detail and Corner Mesh. Provide as required by manufacturer for specific applications. �,
2.3 PORTLAND CEMENT �
A. ASTM C-15U,Type 1.
�
2.4 WATER
� A. Clear and potable. ' � �
' PART 3-EXECUTION �
3.1 INSPECTION
�I
A. Inspect azeas to receive insulation and finish system for deficiencies which will adversely affect
installation. Do not begin work until deficiencies are conected.
�
; �
March 3,2000 07240-2 99048.00 �
�
i
i
, .
I � i
� 3,2 PRECAUTIONS
� ''�A. Do not apply materials when air temperature is below 40 degrees F., is forecast to go below 40
� degrees within 24 hours of application, or when it is raining.
,�
� 3.3 PROTECTION � '
�A. Protect adjacent materials from contamination and soiling during application of system. , �
� � I B. Protect s stem durin installation and curin from weather and other dama e. �
Y g g g
;� ' ��
� ' 3.'� APPLICATION � I�,
i �
� j A. Erect, mix, and apply materials per the manufacturer's printed instructions. If areas of applied
I
materials are defective or otherwise unsatisfactory,take steps to correct conditions.
,i B. Where materials stop above roof counterflashings, install reglet/screeds. Take care to see that
� reglets are absolutely true and horizontal and at proper height to receive flashing.
C. Form special shapes and aesthetic joints as indicated on the drawings. All aesthetic reveals,
� � � recesses,projections, etc., shall be straight and true.
I
� 3.5 Coordination with Sheathing Installer:
I
;'A. Coordinate with Sheathing Installer to insure that reveals cut into styrofoam do not occur over
�
� � joints in sheathing.
I
i
3.�6 Cleanup �
� ��A. Clean up debris resulting from this work and remove from the j ob site. `
I
� . END OF SECTION 07240
�� I
— i
a
.� �
i
i
��
� I
I '
�
March 3, 2000 07240-3 99048.00
� � �
I
�i
I
d
, i
i �
� I
I
�
� ,l
� i1
SECTIO'N 07253 -SPRAYED FIItEPROOFING
�
� i
PART 1 -GENERAL .
�- 1.1 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE
'I A. Sprayed-on fireproofing work shall be performed by a firm having experience in the installation
� � � of similar materials to those specified herein in projects comparable to this project. The firm
�! shall be licensed or otherwise approved to apply the specified materials by the manufacturer of
� ; said materials.
;B. Before proceeding with fireproofing work,. approvals of the proposed materials, densities and
thiclrness shall be obtained from the Architect and other necessary authorities.
�I � C. At the re
quest of the Archrtect, Apphcator may be asked to spray a single bay or select area as a
; Mockup for approval which will serve as a guide for remainder of project.
!� i � - .
1.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
' � �
I �A. Owner will engage a Testing Laboratory to inspect and test fireproofing to ensure that applied ��
; thickness and density meets U.L. fire rating requirements,ASTM E605 "Standard Test Methods '�
� �! for Thickness&Density of Sprayed Fire Resistive Materials." I
I I
�I B. Additional inspecting and testing because of noncompliance with Project Documents will be ,
i paid for by Owner and deducted from payments to Contractor. �
� � - _ �i
j C. Patch test areas as required to reestablish fireproofing integrity. �
� �
I D. Testing laboratory to cross reference tested density(ASTM E605)to manufacturer's air erosion I
� tables to establish air erosion(E859)of.000 gm/sq. ft. ' �,
i '
� �E. All fireproofing thiclrnesses to be figured on unrestrained beam thickness values. � �'I
! �
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
� �
A. U.L.Fire Hazard Classification �
� I -
B. ASTM E84-Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. ASTM E119, E605, E736, E759, E760, E761, E859 and E937 - Fire Tests `of Building
'� Construction and Materials.
� 1.4 SUBMITTALS
;A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
� � I
March 3,2000 07253-1 99048.00 . '
� II
I
�
B. Submit six copies of shop drawings of the following: �
1. Plan drawings showing systems and thiclmess designations for each column, be�m and
assembly, W/D ratios for all structural members and densities and air erosion � I
characteristics of the fireproofing material, required to provide a complete fireproofing
protection job.
2. Reports of reputable independent testing agency, of products proposed for use, which �
indicates compliance with ASTM E84 and E119, or equivalent tests, requirements.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIItE1VIENTS �
A. An air and substrate temperature of 40° F (4.4°C) must be maintained for 24 hours before, �
during and for 24 hours after application of the sprayed fireproofing. If necessary for job
progress,provide enclosures with heat to maintain temperatures.
B. Provide ventilation to allow for proper drying of the fireproofing during and subsequent to its �� �I
application. In poorly ventilated areas lacking natural ventilation, forced air circulation will be
required.
�
1.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide adequate ventilation in areas to receive fireproofing during and 24 hours after � �
application. I
B. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage. Mask adjacent work as required. � �I
C. Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air. �
D. Close off and seal ductwork in areas when fireproofing is being applied.
E. Protect applied sprayed fireproofing from damage. ��
1.7 DELNERY AND STORAGE _
�
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages bearing name of manufacturer and product
identification. �
B. Keep materials dry,under cover and away from damp surfaces.
�
�
�
. �
March 3,2000 07253-2 - 99048.00
. �
I
� I
� PART2-PRODUCTS
,�
� 2.1 MATERIALS
�
,�A. Asbestos-free Fireproofing: "Monokote" by W.R. Grace Co with Monokote Accelerator,
� ;i Aluminum Sulfate Hydrate (1VII�-6/CBF to match U.L. Design Assemblies indicated.)Alternate
; manufacturers are acceptable providing the U. L. Design Assemblies are the same as originally
� specified on the drawings, except for the fireproofing manufacturer and fireproofing type. See
� � Section 01630.
i
;B. Water: Clean and free from elements which might adversely affect quality of fireproofing.
�
i
_ ;i C. Density: Minimum density to be 15 lb/FT3 (ASTM E 605) or as required for .000 gm/FTZ air
� erosion,whichever is more stringent.
I •
� '
PART 3 -EXECUTION
,�
3.1 PREPARATION
� ��A. The Contractor shall cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this section to
avoid delays in job progress.
' �
; B.� Clean substrate of foreign materials which might interfere with proper bonding. Material must �
� � adhere to substrate properly.
�
� ; C. Sprayed fireproofmg shall not be applied to steel floor decks prior to the complerion of concrete
�i work on that deck.
� D. Application to the underside of roof deck assemblies shall be done only after roofing application
� ; is complete and roof traffic has ceased. ,
IE. Insure that erection fastenings (Clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, precast concrete panel
� connections and other attachments to the fireproofing bases, as covered under other Sections of
� the specifications)are placed by other trades before the application of fireproofmg material.
� ; F. Ducts, piping conduits or other suspended equipment that could interfere with the uniform
application of the sprayed fireproofmg are to be positioned after the application of the sprayed
jfireproofing.
�
i G. Fireproof thiclrnesses are to be calculated on unrestrained beam values.
� 3.2 APPLICATION
� A. Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of substrate material or surrounding air is
� I below 40°F.
�
; B. Mix in clean machine, and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply with
� � clean powered sprayers in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
March 3,2000 07253-3 99048.00
�� �
�
C. Apply proper thiclrness to comply with UL requirements for ratings indicated. tise UL �
formulas to determine correct thiclrness of application for sizes of steel members. The average
thiclrness shall be equal to or be greater than the approved thickness. �
D. Patching of fireproofing shall be the responsibility of this Contractor as defined in cooperation
with the General Contractor.
E. Equipment and application procedure shall conform to the materials application instructions. •�
3.3 CLEAN - , �.
A. Remove excess and overspray, droppings and debris. �
!
B. Remove spray fireproofing from materials and surfaces not specifically scheduled to be
fireproofed.
- �
� END OF SECTION 07253
�
� � �
_ �
, �
�
_ �
�
i
� , �
� � �
�
March 3,2000 07253-4 99048.00 �
,
I �
�
� I . ,
� ' -
SECTION 07270 -FIRESTOPPING �
� , �I _
PART 1 -GENERAL
� �
1.'!1 WORK INCLUDED
; .
� A. Provide firestopping in accordance with the details of the latest edition of U.L.Handbooks.
�
i 1. Empty hole penetrations through fire rated floor slabs.
; 2. Openings between curtainwalls and floor slabs. See Fibrous Insulation-Section 07213.
,� ;1 3. Openings between tops of fire rated walls and floor or roof slabs are to be fu�e caulked.
, ;I 4. Expansion joints in fire rated wa11s..See Expansion Control-Section 05800.
5. Through penetrations of fire rated walls.
�' � -
1.2 RELATED WORK
� . ,� A. Refer to Sections 07900/07213 for sealing of openings and penetrations in sound barrier
I applications,not work of this Section.
� '
�
1.3 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE: ,
i
� .� A. General: Provide firestopping materials that expand to fill cavities or provide adhesion to
i substrates, and that will maintain seal under normal expected movements of substrates. '
� I
i B. UL Classification: Provide firestopping materials that are currently classified with UL as "Fill,
'l Void, or Cavity Materials," and"Through Penetration Firestop Systems."
,;
� ; C. Fire Tests: Provide firestopping materials that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E
� 814 "Methods for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops" and UL 1479 "Fire Test of
� Through-Penetration Firestops."
� '
D. All through-penetration firestops are to be as per the U.L. fire resistance handbook, latest
edition,and are to carry U.L. system numbers and an appropriate F or T number.
� E. The same type/manufacture of firestopping should be agreed to and used by all subcontractors
on the project. -
� 1.4 SUBMITTALS: ,
, `
' A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including product description,
technical data, and installation instructions in accordance with Section 01300.
,I B. Identify the U.L. Design system numbers for each product or assembly. Provide shop drawings
�� , - � of exact dimensioning, anchorage, substrate, proprietary system, etc., and identify typical
' locations for each.
�
� March 3�,2000 07270-1 99048.00
� ,
` ' �
. �
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: ' � �
� A. Deliver firestopping materials to job site in original,new and unopened packages and cqntainers
bearing manufacturer's name and a label idenrifying contents. ; �
B. Store firestopping materials out of weather, at temperatures below 90 degrees F (32 degrees C),
and as recommended by manufacturer. Store as per manufacturers specified instructions. �
1.6 SAMPLE MOCKUP �
� I
A. See Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard Systems, for the construction wall mockup. �,Provide
fire rated systems as required for this mockup. � �
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
!■
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTLTRERS _ - I
A. Provide materials by one of the following manufacturers:- �
1. Dow Corning Corporation. �
2. � 1Vlinnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company(31V�.
3. Metalines,Inc.'
4. Tremco. �
5. Hevi-Duty Nelson. ,
6. USG Fire Stop Systems.
7. Hilti. '
8. General Electric. � �
9. Specified Technologies,Inc.
10. CAFCO T.P.S. -
11. USG - Acoustical caulk for non-rated sound wall terminations at floors and decks above �
as per drawings and specificatioris. `
2.2 MATERIALS �
A. Provide materials specifically tested for the location proposed. Provide primers, sealants, tapes,
foams, dams, etc., as required to provide a complete proprietary system. �,
PART 3 -EXECUTION � ��
3.1 EXAMIlVATION: �
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed, �
and identify conditions detrimental to proper andJor untimely completion. �
1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
�
- March 3, 2000 07270-2 99048.00
�
,
� �
I
� � 2. Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of
4 -
" ; firestopping. •
� 1 �
3:2 INSTALLATION:
� � i A. Perform work using methods and materials specified in firestopping systems indicated in
; referenced standards.
� 1. Consult with Architect to establish acceptable modified versions of referenced standards
� for conditions not specifically illustrated in referenced standards.
i
; B. Install firestopping, at least equal to barrier. fire-rating, in and around penetrations of floor
� structures, exterior walls and interior walls indicated as time-rated fire barriers or smoke
barriers. , _
�. � C. Install firestopping to close clearances around and within sleeves, and around cables, conduits,
-,� pipes, ducts, equipment enclosures, or other apparatus causing penetration of barrier.
�
� � D. Patch penetrations caused by cutting or presence of unused or abandoned openings or boxes,
' using materials compatible with barrier construction and with fire-rating equal to or greater
than barrier rating.
� ; E. In smoke barriers, firestopping shall resist the passage of smoke.
,�
� 3I3 TO EXTENT PRACTICABLE, CONSTRUCT FIRE-RATED WALLS AFTER
I PLACEMENT OF PENETRATING MATERIAI.S, FITTING RATED CONSTRUCTION .
I MATERIALS TIGHTLY TO OR DIRECTLY ON MATERIAL OF PENETRATION.
;�
! A. Where large openings are created in barriers, to permit later installation of pipes and ducts,
close unused portions of opening with solid fill equal to barrier rating and with applicable
� ,; firestopping sealant system around penetrating items.
;
� B. Firestop spaces in structural floor openings with rated firestop concrete, or other rated asserribly
� ; only where both horizontal dimensions exceed thiclrness of rated barrier. Provide dowels and
� reinforcement, within such fill, equal to reinforcing specified for slab. Install applicable
i firestopping system around all penetrating items. -
� I
; C. Firestop spaces in rated concrete or masonry wall openings with fire rated solid fill only where
� both height and width exceed thiclrness ofrated barrier. Install applicable Fire-stopping system�
; around all penetrating items. ,
�� i
�� D. Firestop penetrations through full thiclaiess of barriers. Where required thiclrness of
firestopping sealant system is less than thickness of barrier, use fiber fill, solid fill, or fiber �
� ` packirig to make up remainder of barrier thiclrness.
� E. Completely fill void spaces of each penetration with firestopping material.
i ' .
' F. Provide forms and dams to permanently secure firestopping materials.
,,
� ' 1. Install firestopping in floors to flush with top of slab, sleeve, or housekeeping pad.
March 3,2000 ' 07270-3 99048.00 �
�
i
�
',
G. Apply firestopping directly to penetrating item. Do not anchor or bond firestopping to �
combustible or non fire-rated materials such as plastic or fiber coverings.
H. Where sleeves have been installed surrounding pipes or other penetrations, firestop annular � ,
space between sleeve and its contained pipe, cable, or duct with resilient firestopping sealant
, system to permit movement of pipe or duct without damage to firestopping sealant.
'
END OF SECTION 07270
�
_ . , �
, "�
. �
�
�
�
�
.�
' � -
�
�
'�
�
March 3, 2000 07270-4 99048.00 �
�; .
� -
_ ;
� � .
SECTIO 07900 -SEALANTS
��
� ��
PART 1 -GENERAL
�i
�
� 1.�1 WORK INCLUDED
;I A. Exterior wall joints, except"seismic joints.
� � . �
; B. Joints between.aluminum frames and walls.
� C. Interior wall joints where two materials of different types meet.
,�D. Setting beds for thresholds.
� '
� E. Other caulking or sealing indicated. ,
� f .
1.2 SUBMTTTALS _
I
� �i A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
!
j B. Product Data: Submit four copies of manufactarer's product specifications,
'' handling/installation/curing instruction and performance data sheets for each sealant product
� specified. Include chemical characteristics,performance criteria and l.imitations. '
� 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
�
; A. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under unfavorable weather
' conditions. Install elastomeric sealants only when temperature is in the temperature range
recommended by manufacturer.
'� 1.4 INSTALLERS'QUALIFICATIONS
' A. Employ only worlanen skilled in application of sealant materials, and regularly engaged in.
� sealant work.
� 1.5 EXTERIOR SEALANT WARRANTY
�
�A. Provide a project specific warranty for a period of ten years. Warranty must include adhesive
� � ii and cohesive failure as well as durometer shift (flelcibility) of no more than 5 points increase
� over typical fully oured hardness.
jWarranty must be accompanied by substrate adhesion and compatibility test reports supplied by
� ;� the sealant supplier. On site adhesion/cohesion pull tests must be performed and results
� forwarded to Contractor for use in close-out manual.
�
, _ �
� March 3 2000 � 07,900-1 99048.00
, � �
B. Replace sealants which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of coliesion or �
.adhesion, or do not cure.
PART 2-PRODUCTS �
2.1 MATERIALS �
= A. General Requirements: As close as possible; match darkest adjacent finish or in brick/tile, �
match mortar joints with manufacturer's standard colors.
' B. Sealant for Thresholds: Single Component Polysulfide Sealant, by Pecora, W.R. Grace, Dap,
' Inc.,or approved equal. � �
C. Sealant for Interior at Painted Areas: Acrylic -latex caulk,permanent flexible,non-stainzng and
non-bleeding by Tremco or approved equal. �
D. Exterior Insulation Finish System Joints, Standard Colors.
1. Metal to EIPS -G.E. Sil ruf or pow Cornin .790 or Pecora 890 or a roved e ual. �
P g PP 4 ,
' 2. EIFS to EIFS -G.E. Silpruf.or pow Corning 790 or Pecora 890 or approved equal. -
3. EIFS to Masonry-G.E. Silpruf or pow Corning 790 or Pecora 890 or approved equal. - �
E. Exterior Construction Joints, Standard Colors. .
� 1. Concrete to Concrete - G.E. Silpruf or pow Corning 795 or Pecora 895 or approved �
equal.
2. Metal to Metal-G.E. Silpruf or pow Corning 795 or Pecora 895 or approved equa,l.
, 3. Structural Glazing-As recommended by glazing contractor. �
F. Sealant for Interior at Vinyl Wallcovering and Cabinetry: One part silicone, SILPRUF by
General Electric or pow Corning 795 or Pecora 895 or approved equal. Countertop sealant is �
by hospital casework installer, Section 12300.
G. Interior at Plumbing Fixtures and Tubs: One part silicone sanitary sealant by General Electric
Sanitary Silicone 1700 or pow Corning 786 Mildew Resistarit Sealant or Pecora 863/898 or �
equal. ,
H. Interior at Tile Wall: One part silicone sanitary sealant by Dow Corning 786 Mildew I�esistant �i ',
Sealant or General Electric Sanit Silicone 1700 or Pecora 863/898 or a roved e ual,. I
�Y PP q
' � 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � !,
, A. Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint surfaces to be �
primed and sealed. All exterior sealant to be primed unless specifically deleted by manufacturer
� through substrate testing by sealant supplier. ,
� B. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer, �
to be applied to sealant contact surfaces,where bond to substrate or joint filler is not desirable.
,. � � -
� �
March 3,2000 07900-2 99048.00
_ �
,
I
� '
i
,�
� �
i C. Sealant Backer Rod (for minor joints requiring backup): Compressible rod stock of flelcible,
permanent, durable non-absorptive�material recommended by sealant manufacturer.
� I
PART 3 -EXECUTION
� '�
3.�1 INSPECTION
� �'� A. Examine substrates (joint surfaces) and conditions under which work is to be performed. Do
� not proceed with joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
,i
� 3.2 JOINT PREPARATION
I
i A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of joint fillers, primer/sealer, sealants and
� ; caulking compound. Remove dirt, loose coatings, moisture and other items which could
interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. Clean concrete and masonry joint �
, surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
� � B. Prime surfaces unless on site substrate tests�indicate priming not required. Confine primer/sealer
� to areas of sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
� �
� 3.3 INSTALLATION �
�� '� A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions.
� B. Install backer rod at depth recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint width. Install using
� ; blunt instrument to avoid puncturing or twisting. Do not leave voids between rod ends. Size of
i rod should allow approximately 25%compression.
,�
� ; C. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in
uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" ofjoint bond
, surfaces.
� D. Fill sealant groove to a slightly concave surface. Tool sealant to form concave surface and to
set material against the backer rod and the joint surfaces. �
� ,
3.4 APPLICATION
� , A. Generally, depth of sealant in joints shall be at least 1/8" to 3/8". In larger joints the depth of
� the sealant shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Use silicone filler for backup in
� knee j oints..
B. Use masking tape ifnecessary to protect adjacent areas.
� �i C. Use gun nozzles sized to fit joints. Finish joints neatly. Remove any excess materials and
leave joints clean.
� D. Use silicone sealant in channel glazing and back-bedding of glass (unless factory glazed). _
� March 3,2000 07900-3 99048.00
; ��
E. Use acrylic latex sealant for interior work. Caulk where shown on drawings and at all masonry �
walls butting into other masonry walls.
_ �3.5 CURING AND PROTECTING
A. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect �
sealan'ts,particularly while there is surface tack to avoid"pickup" of dirt and dust.
END OF SECTION 07900 �
� �
. �
' �
�
�
. �
�
, �
" �
�
, �
�
�
March 3, 2000 07900-4 99048.00
I �
�
_ i �i
i -
�i I
i � i
i �
�
i
, � I
��
SECTION 08100 -HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
� � �
PART 1 -GENER AT•
,�
� 1.1 �, FIltE RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS
�
� � A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and Warnock-Hersey International, Inc. fire-rating tests and
�
labels are acceptable in usual Local and State requirements.
„ �
� �i B. Affix applicable meta.l labels to doors, frames, and view windows designated in door schedule
� or on drawings. Mylar or paper labels are not acceptable.
� ; C. Rated doors at stairs shall meet temperature rise criteria on unexposed side of door and shall not
exceed 450 degrees F. at end of 30 minutes when tested by standard fire test.
� D. � Doors designated a"20 minute" or greater rating require UL labeled frame.
; E. Hollow metal frame view windows'in one-hour rated walls to receive a "C" label, 45 minute
� rated frame.
�
' 1.2 , SUBMITTALS
� � A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
I �
� ,; B. Submit shop drawings indicating door and frame types, gauge of inetal, sizes, Architect's
; numbers,wall thickness where frames will be installed, fire resistance ratings where applicable,
,I and other pertinent data. _
I
� � 1. Indicate sizes of louver and glazing openings.
2. Indicate doors and frames which are to have thresholds, lead-lining and other special
� features. .
� � i
1.3 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
� �
A. , Doors and frames shall be shipped in accordance with manufacturer's standard practice. Each
� door and frame shall be identified by door number on the drawings.
� B. ' Deliver, store, and handle doors and frames in accordance with requirements of manufacturer,
and so as to preclude damage.
� C. �; Store off of floor, on dunnage,in a dry protected place, and with at least 1/4 inch space between
i � individual pieces.
� . '�
�
� March 3,2000 08100-1 99048.00
�
� i
PART 2-PRODUCTS II
�
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER � I
A. Manufacturer: Palmetto Metal Products, Columbia, South Carolina; Steelcraft, Cincinnati,
Ohio;�and CECO Door Products,Birmingham,Alabama. ��
2.2 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES I,
�
A. Provide metal frames with integral stops for doors and interior view windows and x-ray control
windows. Fabricate frames from 16 au e cold-rolled furniture steel late.
g b P
1. Line frames with lead where indicated. Use lead e ual in thiclrness to lead�used in �
q ,
adjacent walls. �
2. Form double return flanges on all frames, except for existing openings�as shown. Where
frames wrap around wall openings, form flanges to fit wall thiclmesses.
3. Miter corners of frames and continuously weld full depth and width of face and throats.
Tack welding at throat and stops is not acceptable. � �
4. Dress welded joints smooth on exposed surfaces so that joints are not visible when
frames are prime painted. Use of surface applied fillers to conceal manufacturing �
� defects is not acceptable. .
5. Provide trim angles to be installed at heads of exterior frames. �
6. Provide 16 gauge steel channel spreaders across bottoms of frames.
7. Frame Anchors: Provide floor anchors at each jamb and mullion. At jambs installed in �i
masonry walls, provide three masonry anchors at each jamb up to 7'-6" high, and one S
additional anchor for each 18 inches or fraction thereof over 7'-6" in height. At jambs
installed in metal stud partitions,provide four metal stud anchors at each jamb up to 7'-6" �
high and one additional anchor for each 18 inches or fraction thereof over 7'-6" in lieight.
8. Hollow Metal View Windows & Sidelite Frames: Provide a rated iJ.L. label fire�vindow i
frame, "C"45 minute rated,which is constructed and installed per U.L. label procedures. �
Glazing to be wire glass unless noted otherwise in the documents.
�
2.3 PREPARING FOR FINISH HARDWARE �
A. Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware.
1. Hardware supplier will furnish hollow metal manufacturer approved hardware schedule, �
and hardware templates for use in preparation.
2. Preparation includes sinkages and cut-outs for mortise and concealed hardware.
3. See Finish Carpentry, Section 06200 for mounting heights of strikes. ��
B. Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface mounted hardware. �
1. Drill and tap mortise reinforcement at factory. Reinforce only for surface applied
hardware. �
2. Provide 9 gauge steel reinforcement 1-1/2 inches wide x 10 inches long for hinges. �
Offset reinforcement so that hinges will finish flush with frame rabbet.
3. Provide 12 gauge steel reinforcement for strikes.
�
March 3, 2000 . 08100-2 99048.00 �
� i
� -
� ,� 4. Provide 12 gauge steel reinforcement for other hardware.
� 5. Install reinforcement with concealed connections to develop full strength of
� , ; reinforcement. -
� 6. Insta1126 gauge plaster guards to protect tapped holes.
� 7. Punch frames to receive silencers.
� �
I2.4 � PREPARATION FOR GLAZING
� ; '
: A. Where doors and frames have glazed openings,provide openings with integral stop on one side.
, Provide 20 gauge steel removable glazing stops for other side. Butt corners of removable stops,
and prepare them for installation with countersunk sheet metal screws spaced at not more than
� i 12 inches o.c.
� 2.5 SHOP COATING '
A. Level and grind surfaces smooth.
� ! B. � Apply full, smooth, even coat of Palmetto's standard rust- inhibiting primer suitable as a base
for finish paint.
� PART 3'-EXECUTION
� 3.1 � FRAME INSTALLATION
� ' A. � In Metal Stud Partitions:
I 1. Install hollow metal frames in close coordination with metal stud and gypsum drywall
1 trades.
2. Weld anchors for drywall partitions to the frames, four per jamb to 7'-6" in height. Leave
spreaders in place until partitions are rigidly installed.
;� 3. Where door frames are scheduled to be reinforced by structural steel members built into
� � partitions, attach jamb anchors to structural steel. � �
� 3.2 DOOR INSTALLATION
I
A. I Install doors with proper tolerances at head,j ambs, and sill.
�
3.3 TOUCH-UP
� A. After installation, the General Contractor shall touch-up scratched and damaged surfaces.
, Dented or bent frames shall be repaired as required with metal putty, sanded and primed with
shop coat similar to original.
� '
END OF SECTION 08100
� I
I
March 3I, 2000 - 08100-3 99048.00
1 '
�I �
,�
�
�
� i
i
I
SECTION 08215 -WOOD DOORS
;� II
P,IART 1 -GENERAL _
1 �
l:C WORK INSTALLED BUT FUItNISHED BY OTHERS
�� A. Division 15 -Metal Louvers.
�
IFIIZE RESISTANCE RE UIREMENTS
� 1. Q
� A. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. and/or Warnock-Hersey International, Inc., fire rating tests and
_� ,� labels are acceptable. _
�I �
i B. Affix applicable� labels to doors designated in door schedule to have fire resistance
� classification.
� C. Provide doors at stairwells�which meet temperature rise criteria that temperature on unexposed "
side of door will not exceed 450°F. at the end of 30 minutes when tested by standard fire test
� ' exposure.
�
�
- ; D. Doors designated as "20 minute doors" shall bear actual fire labels whether hung in single,
� � � paired or double egress openings. If label is not required, provide manufacturer's letter of
;� certification.
�
1'3 QUALITY STANDARD
� I ,
'i A. Doors shall meet the requirements of National Woodwork Manufacturers Association, "Industry
� Standard 1 -Wood Doors," Commercial Standard CS 171.
!
�
i B. Doors shall meet the requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, Section 01300.
� � Minimum standard for wood doors-AWI PC-5. '
�
1 F4 SUBMITTALS
� �
, A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300. �
� B. Submit shop drawings indicating door types, sizes, Architect's numbers, fire resistance ratings
� � where a licable and other ertinent data.
PP � P
� '' 1. Indicate details of door construction. Include full size molding section detail for glazing
�. and louver installation. �
� 2. Indicate sizes of glazing and louver openings.
� 3. Indicate doors which are to have thresholds,undercut bottom edges,lead lining, and other
special features.
�
�
March 3, 2000 08215-1 99048.00
� f
I
i
�
C. Submit finish samples, showing the complete finish appearance, to the Architect for approval. �
Sample size shall be not less than 8-1/2" x 11" x 1/4". Indicate on the sample the Project,
Architect, General Contractor, Door Manufacturer, and a listing of the operations used to attain �
the finish.
1.5 PACKAGING - �
A. Each individual door shall be packaged with-dark colored polyethylene or similar material.
B. Package doors in normal palletized quantities in such a manner that the doors will be fully � �
� protected during shipment,handling and storage.
� �
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING i
A. Deliver doors to site onl after laster and concrete are and buildin has reached avera e
�"Y g g
Y P �
prevailing relative humidity of locality.
B. Store doors in an area where there will be no a reciable variations in heat and humidi .
PP tiY �
1. Stack flat on 2"x 4" lumber, laid 12 inches from ends and across center. I
2. Under bottom door and over top of stack, place plywood or heavy corrugated cardboard � �
to protect door surfaces.
C. Handle doors carefully to avoid damage. When moving doors, carry them. Do not drag one �
door across another.
1.7 GUARANTEE �
A. Guarantee doors for life of installation against defects in materials and worlananship, and
against warp or twist exceeding as determined by C5171. Replace doors not meeting guarantee. �
PART2 -PRODUCTS �
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS �
A. V.T.Industries,Holstein, Iowa.
B. Weyerhaeuser Company,Tacoma,WA.,Marshfield Series. �
C. Eggers Hardwood Products Corp.,Neenah,WI.
�
�
,
March 3,2000 08215-2 99048.00 �
i .
i
�
1 �' �
2.2 TYPES OF DOORS
; i
i
� � A. Non-Rated Doors:
I I
� 1. 5 ply minimum hot pressed particleboard construction, 5502.
� 2. Face: Grade I Wood Veneer, Grade Red Oak,match existing,
Cut:Plain sliced. Veneer Match: Book matched.
�
B. � 20 Minute Doors:
� ;
1. 5502 particleboard construction.
' 2. Face: Grrade I Wood Veneer, Grade Red Oak,match existing,
� Cut: Plain sliced. Veneer Match:Book matched.
i
C. U.L. "C" Labeled Doors:
� 1. Mineral core 45 minute, 5545.
2. Face: Grade I Wood Veneer, Grade Red Oak,match existing,
� - , Cut: Plain sliced. Veneer Match: Book matched.
i
D. U.L. "B" Labeled(60 minute)Doors:
� 1. Mineral core, 5511.
I 2. Face: Grade I Wood Veneer, Grade Red Oak,match existing,
, Cut: Plain sliced. Veneer Match: Book matched.
� E. U.L. "B" Labeled(90 minute)Doors:
' 1. Mineral core, 5511.
, ' 2. Face: Grade I Wood Veneer, Grade Red Oak,match existing,
, Cut: Plain sliced. Veneer Match: Book matched.
�
2.3 I ACCESSORIES
� A. ; Provide glazing stops for installing glazing material and louvers for all doors.
B. Provide steel stops meeting fire rating requirements at "B" and "C" label and "20 minute"
� doors.
� 2.4 � FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI standards and quality assurance technicians who
� , monitor the product process from start to finish. STILES AND RAILS MUST BE SECURELY
BONDED TO THE CORE AND THEN ABRASIVELY SANDED SMOOTH TO
THICKNESS TOLERANCE. DROP IN CORES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.
� B. Prepare doors at factory for finish hardware from templates furnished by hardware supplier.
i .
; C. Make cutouts for glazing and louvers at the factory. _
i � �
� 112arch 3, 2000 08215-3_ 99048.00
- �
D. Doors shall be fmished at the factory, in accordance with AWI TR-6 Finish, All U.L, labeled ,
(fire) doors shall have all edges sealed, following fitting, per door manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Doors rovided for "B" & "C" label ratin s are to have reinforced stiles on the 'amb side to �
P g J
accent full mortise butt hinges.
" �
PART 3 -EXECUTION
; . ,
3.1 INSPECTION ,
A. Verify that door frames are of type required for the particular type of doors, i.e., fire-rated �
frames for fire-rated doors; lead lined frames for lead lined doors.
B. Owner, Architect, or Contractor has the right to randomly select and verify construction �
methods utilized in any particleboard core door. Manufacturer will provide replacement at no
charge. ,
' �
' 3.2- � INSTALLATION
A. Apply finish hardware and install doors. � �
B. Adjust doors and hardware for correct function. ,
' _ �
C. Adjust strikes so that there is no play when doors are latched.
D. No more than 5/8" undercut will be allowed at any door to finish concrete floor regardless of �
any finish or threshold added.
E. Install vision panels as shown on drawings.
�
F. Replace any doors chipped or damaged.
' � �
END OF SECTION 08215 �
_ �
�
� �
�
i ,
March 3;2000 08215-4 99048.00 �
�
� '� �
�
SECTIOIN 08300 -ACCESS DOORS
� � ,
PART 1;-GENERAL
� ' ,
1.1 � I SUBNIITTALS
1 � A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300. Submit four copies of manufacturer's
' brochures and installation instructions.
I
� 1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate delivery of panels with applicable trades who will install, to avoid delays and
� � interferences.
� B. Coordinate locations so panels will provide proper access to equipment to be served.
C. i Coordinate size,location and quantities of panels with mechanical and electrical trades.
� 1.3 � DELIVERY
� �
A. � Deliver panels in manufacturer's original shipping containers. At time of delivery examine
� ; ' panels and doors with tradesmen who will install to ensure that they are in good condition. If
� panels and doors are damaged,obtain and deliver new,undamaged items.
� �
PART 2-PRODUCTS
� I
2:1 , ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
� A. � Inryco/Milcor,KARP, or approved equal. -
� '
� 2.2 PANELS
A. Minimum size: 18" x 18", Size as required for complete access to items requiring the door.
Refer to M.P. &E. documents for locations.
� B. I Doors: 14 gauge steel.
�
� ` C. Frames: 6 gauge steel.
�
D. Latches: Screwdriver operated.
� � E. Finish: prime coat of rust inhibitive paint.
�
� March 3, 2000 08300-1 99048.00 ,
�
F. Types: � I,
1. For drywall ceiling or walls: Milcor, Style M or approved equal.
2.- For ceramic or quarry tile walls: Milcor, Style M, stainless steel or approved equal. �
PART 3 -EXECUTION � �
3.1 INSPECTION '
A. Inspect access door openings and assure they meet requirements for type and size. 'B' Label
doors will be required for chase, shaft, stairwells, etc. when 1-1/2 hour fire rating must be �
provided. - � I
3.2 INSTALLATION �
A. Install access doors in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and anchor in place.
�
END OF SECTION 08300 _ �
. i
�
� � �
. , � �
; � '
. ' �
, �
�
� 1
' i
�
�
� � !
� 1
�
March 3,2000 08300-2 9 048.00 -
_ �
�
�
I� � I �
�
;�
, �� .
SECTION 08400 -ENTRANCES &STOREFRONTS
� �I
PART 1 -GENERAL
� 1.1 SUBMITrALS
�
, , A. Shop drawings: Before starting falirication,provide shop drawings for review by the Architect.
�� B. Samples: Provide samples of storefront showing finish for review by the Architect.
� i i
� C. � Wind Loading: Select wind loads from code book and manufacturer's tests and comply with
� local area codes where product is to be used.
� � D. Warranty: Two-year warranty on all materials.
E. Substitutions: See Section 01630.
� -
1.2 RELATED WORK •
� ' A. I Rough Carpentry: Wood blocicing in surrounds- Section 06100.
B. Sealants: Caulldng at surrounds-Section 07900.
� �
� C. Glass and Glazing-Section 08800.
� ' � �
PART 2-PRODUCTS
� 2.'1 MATERIALS -
� A. � Storefronts:
; 1. Kawneer 451T - Provide a thermally broken backplate full width of section at head and
� ' j amb.
B. Entrances
� , 1. 350 Medium stile as manufactured by the Kawneer Co. Aluminum alloy shall be 6063-
� T5.
' � a. Bottom rail shall be 10".
' b. Hinging shall be offset pivot with offset arm concealed.
' c. Closer shall be concealed overhead.
' 'i d. Door hardware shall be concealed rod panic,manufacturer standard. ,
�
� March 3,2000 � 08400-1 99048.00
I
�
I �
I
C. Finishes �i ,
1. Anodic Coatings ; �
� a. Standard—Dark Bronze.
�
;
,
D. Miscellaneous , �
1. Provide backs on the head and jamb sections as listed above. Backs to be sriap in or
, permanently attached and thermal broken as required to match system. ;� ,
��
E. Sill Pan: !
l. Provide a .063 thick aluminum sill pan with 3_vertical sides and bottom for the storefront '
window sill section to sit in. Sill pan to be completely sealed at corners and screw holes. ,
i �
PART 3 -EXECUTION ,
3.1 INSTALLATION , �
I,
A. Storefront: ;
� �
1. Secure tubular frames to floor by means of anchors. ,
2. Anchor channel frames by means of steel cores securely fastened to jambs and with �
aluminum frames attached to anchors in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.
,
B. Doors: Erect plumb and square in frames and adjust hardware for proper clearance. '
C. Break Metal: Include .050 in. aluminum closures as detailed,with finish to match storefront. �
i�
END OF SECTION 08400 ; �
, ' �
� i,
�
'
�
. �
�
March 3, 2000 08400-2 99048.00
�
I
,�
� ;
��l
1 �
SECTION 08424-ELECTRO-MECHANICAL SLIDING DOORS
� � .
PART 1 -GENERAL
1 1.1 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
I �
� ; A. This section covers the fumishing and installation of a complete automatic sliding door system.
� It includes operator,track, doors, and activating devices all as required for installation as shown
and specified. ,
> ,i �
1.2 RELATED WORK
, � A. ' Preparation of Opening
, B. Floor Preparation
aC. Electrical Supply and Connections(120 VAC, 15 amp Dedicated Circuit) '
� 1.3 ; QUALITY ASSURANCE
� A. ANSI A156.10 STANDARD: Provide automatic entrance doors complying with applicable
requirements of Power Operated Pedestrian Door Standard where applicable to door type.
� .
� ; B. UL 325: Provide powered door operators complying with UI.. 325, Electrical Door, Drapery,
�
Gate,Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.
j C. MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Provide units produced by a firm with not less
1 'I than 5 years successful experience in the fabrication of automatic doors of the type required for
this project.
' D.� � INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Engage an installer who is an authorized representative of
the automatic door manufacturer for both the installation and maintenance of the type of units
; required for this project. � I
� I
1.4 SUBMITTALS
' ; A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
;B. Submit four copies of manufacturer's product data and standard details, including fabrication,
' ! finishing, hardware, operators, accessories, and other components of the work. Include
' roughing-in diagrams, wiring diagrams, parts lists, maintenance instructions, and certified test
data.
� �
, '
�
� March 3,2000 08424-1 99048.00
i �
. i '
;
� ;
C. Submit four copies of shop drawings for assembly and installation of doors, frariies, and ,
associated components. Indicate anchors, joint systems, expansion provisions, hardware and
other components not included in manufacturer's product data. Include glazing installation
details. '
�
1.5 WARRANTY
; '
A. Units to be wananted against defect in material and workmanship for a period of one year from I
the date of installation. ,
PART2 -PRODUCTS •
� �
2.1 SLIDING DOORS AND-FRAMES �
'� - ,
A. Doors and Frames: Powerglide by Besam, Inc., East Windsor, N.J.; The Stanley Works, Horton
Automatics Division of Overhead Door; and Dor-o-Matic. ,
B. Model Type 110 from Horton Automatics. � �
2.2 EQUIPMENT � �
A. DOOR UNITS: Shall include operator, header and track, jambs, sliding door, threshold and
sidelite as required. All structural aluminum sections shall be 6063T-5, allow not less than .125 ,
' inch thickness with safe radius corners on all vertical rails. Continuous extruded header
�
section shall conceal the four hi h uali ball bearin wheels on n lon-covered su ort track.
� g q tY, g Y PP, �
Concealed guides shall stabilize bottom of door. Anti-derailing means shall be cor_tinuous
extrusion full length of door travel. Track must be replaceable without having to remove the
operator. An adjustable astragal with double mohair weatherstrip shall be provided on all strike
rails. Joining vertical panel rails shall have complementing mohair weatherstrippiri�, while ,
horizontal rails shall be weatherstripped with mohair type fabric. Door panel construction shall
be by means of tongue and groove key fitted gussets that have two tempered bolts in each
corner section to assure against racking failure. Sliding door (and swinging sidelite) shall ,
include a spring to reclose the door if pushed open. '
1. Provide doors for heavy duty, with 3/8 inch diameter rod bolted construction and 1-3/4 ,
inches thick rails. Major extrusions: 6063-TS_ aluminum alloy with a minimum wall
thickness of.125 inch. Finish: Match aluminum doors and frames, specified in;sections
for storefront and windows. '
2. Equip sliding doors with Delrin roller wheels, Delrin anti-riser wheels, and a cantilever '
support and pivot system which will allow sliding doors to swing outward for emergency
egress in accordance with BMHA 1601. When sidelights are located on the interior of
the sliding doors, they may be fixed; when the sidelights are located on the exterior of �
the sliding doors, they must swing out to allow the sliding doors to swing out at any
point. Doors shall be vertically and laterally adjustable.
3. Provide neoprene glazing channels for one inch thick insulating glass for exterior and 1/4 �
inch glazing for interior. See Section 08800 -Glazing.
, I
March 3,2000 08424-2 99048.00
• �
I
i I
I �
�
�
I
, � 4. Miscellaneous items: Provide molding, trim, and accessories required for a complete,
� � finished, and functional installation.
� �
B. ' Operator:
�
; 1. Provide, in the headers of doors, sliding door operators consisting of a DC motor, belt or
' ' linear drive assembly, and a solid state, integrated circuit, electronic control system with
magnetic limit switches. Structural members of the operator shall be 6061-T6 aluminum
alloy, and shall be of sufficient thiclmess to span 15 feet with less than 1/4 inch
, deflection. `
2. Provide bolt-on cover for operator.
% 3. Provide five separate, easily accessible adjustments for opening speed, closing speed,
' opening check, closing check, and time delay.
4. Operation:
� I a. A signal to the operator shall power the doors open to a limit switch which will
reduce power until the doors encounter a mechanical opening stop.
'� b. After doors are fully open, an adjustable time delay shall cause the operator to
� power close the doors to a limit switch which will reduce power until the doors are
, fully closed.
' c. Actuating Control - Unidirectional Motion Detector: A low power microwave
� emission type unit which shall have no effect on pace makers. Install one unit on
� � , inside, and one unit on outside (on the frame header) of each door opening. Motion
�i detectors shall be adjustable so they will be capable of detecting moving objects as
' per ANSI 156-10 BMHA 1601.
� C. � Safety Features:
1. Provide a light emitting diode device (recessed in the door jamb and spanning the width
' i of the sliding door opening) which will cause the doors to open, or remain open if the
' beam is obstructed.
� 2. Provide an integral sensing device which will automatically reverse the doors if an
' � obstruction is encountered when the doors are closing; and stop the doors if an
� ' obstruction is encountered when the doors are opening.
, 3. Provide a means for the doors to swing open (by pushing) in the normal direction of
, egress in case of power failure. Breakaway(push)pressure shall be field adjustable.
D. Energy Conservation Features for Exterior poors:
� �
1. Inclement weather switch: Provide an electric switch which allows door opening to be
reduced 25% during inclement weather.
' ' 2. Air infiltration at the installed unit shall not exceed ASHR.AE Standard#90-75.
E. Security:
' I 1. Provide an "Off-Exit-Auto-Hold" switch on the inside of the exterior sliding door frame.
Functions of switch are:
, a. "Off'position: Disconnects power to operator and controls.
b. "Exit" position: Supplies power to operator, to interior activators, and to exterior
keyed switches or card readers(if installed).
,
� March 3,2000 08424-3 99048.00
' - i
c. "Auto" position: Supplies power to operator and all activators. t
d. "IIold"position: Doors will be held open.
2. Provide a "hook type" dead latch on meeting stile(s) of sliding door(s). Provide a thumb `
, latch on inside, and master keyed cylinder on outside.
3. Sign: Directly above the thumb latch, provide a sign which reads "Do not lock door
while area is occupied". ' il
4. Before final installation, coordinate the locking preference with the hospital for after
hours use.
,
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which automatic doors are to be',installed ,
and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of work. Do not proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been _
corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer and in accordance with approved shop �
drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION �
A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. �
B. Set track and operator plumb, level and irue to line, without warp or rack of doors. Anchor
securely in place. Isolate aluminum and other corrodible materials from sources of electrolytic
action at points of contact. �
C. Install complete door operator system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including
drive mechanism, controls, and control switches. '
3.3 ADNST AND CLEAN '
A. Adjust operator and controls for optimum condition and safety. Lubricate operating equipment.
B. Clean surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage of the protective ,
coating(if any).
C. Advise Contractor of rotective treatment and other recautions re uired throu h the remainder
P P q g '
� of the construction period, to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration (other
' than normal weathering) at the time of acceptance.
'
END OF SECTION 08424
'
. '
March 3, 2000 08424-4 99048.00
� , -
i
'
, ��
SECTION 08700 -FINISH HARDWARE
� � i
PART 1 -GENERAL
i
I , � I
� 1.�1 ; SUBMITTALS
I ' i �
�� � � A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300.
� �j 1. Submit four copies of complete schedule of finish hardware and obtain Architect's
, ,� i approval before delivering finish hardware.
2. Submit four copies of the various hardware manufacturer's catalog data for the items
. listed in schedule.
' � - ! 3. Submit two copies of installation instructions for items requiring special field
� preparations.
' B. Templates: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit the necessary hardware templates to
those trades and/or manufacturers with whom hardware must be coordinated. Comply with
� procedures established in ASAHC-NBHA Handbook, for "Recommended Procedures for
' Processing Hardware Schedules and Templates."
� i
1.2 QUALITY STANDARDS
' A. Hardware supplier shall have in his regular employment a qualified Architectural Hardware
� Consultant who will be available to the Architect and General Contractor for consultation as
, , required to complete the work.
i
13 PRODUCT HANDLING
� A. Packaging of hardware on a set by set basis is the responsibility of the hardware supplier. As
i material is received by hardware supplier from the various manufacturers, sort and repackage
, I in containers marked with the door opening number as appears on the drawings.
� B. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier, General Contractor
� I and/or the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the quantities are correct.
� C. The General Contractor shall provide secure lockup for hardware delivered to the project site ' `
' and control access so that completion of work will not be delayed due to losses.
� '
� !
i
' ,
I
i
'
' March 3, 2000 08700-1 99048.00
i
�
'
PART 2-PRODUCTS '
2.1 HARDWARE ; �
A. Finish:
1. Provide US26D satin chrome finish for hardware. Where US26D is not available for the '
specified item,provide finish to match US26D.
2. Door closers shall have sprayed lacquer finish to match US26D. ,
. B. Keying:
1. Provide cylinders with six active pins,keyed,keyed alike, master key,ed and grand master , �
keyed as directed by Owner's Representative. Provide four change keys for each
cylinder. Provide six master keys for each master key group and six grandmaster keys
for each grand master key group. ALL keys are to be stamped DO NOT DLTPLICATE. ,
Provide cylinders as required for aluminum storefront doors. � ,
2. Provide original key blanks of nickel silver alloy only.
3. Deliver all permanent keys, master keys, and grand master keys to the Owner. The ,
Contractor shall review keying with the Owner or the designated representative.
C. Key Cabinet: �
1. Provide one Telkee, Inc. key cabinet complete with system components and instructions .
for dual tag system. Allow for expansion 20 percent in excess of actual requirements. '
' 2. Provide a key chart to Owner at completion of work indicating the schematic of the
' keying system.
D. Hinges: Butt hinges listed below are by Hager Hinge Co. Acceptable substitutes are: The '
Stanley Works; McKinney Manufacturing Co.; and Lawrence Brothers. Provide three 4- 1/2" x
4-1/2" hinges for each door up to 7 feet high. Provide one additional hinge for every 1 E inches
' or part thereof over 7 feet. �
1. Interior doors without closers:
a. No. 1279 for doors under 42 inches wide. '
b. No.BB 1168 for doors 42 inches or wider.
2. Interior doors with closers: ,
a. No.BB 1279 for doors under 42 inches wide. '
b. No.BB 1168 for doors 42 inches or wider.
3. Interior UL labeled wood doors.
a. No.BB 1279 for doors under 42 inches wide. '
b. No.BB 1168 for doors 42 inches or wider.
4. Exterior doors: '
a. No.BB 1191 for doors under 42 inches wide. �
March 3, 2000 � 08700-2 99048.00 '
I
� I �
1 � i
' �
! b. No.BB 1199 for doors 42 inches or wider.
c. Provide safety stud feature for all out-swinging exterior doors.
I � ,
5. Where security/safety is a concern provide hospital tips. (HT) .
, ' E. Locksets: Schlage (D Series-Rhodes Design). No substitutions. See Finish Carpenhy Section
06200 for sirike mounting heights.
� 1. Provide only UL listed locksets. Stamp latch bolt faces to indicate that locksets are UL
, listed.
2. Where lrnurled lmobs are indicated, only the lever on the space entrance side needs to be
� knurled. Provide machine knurled levers.
, � F. � Exit Devices: Exit devices shall be manufactured by Von Duprin Series 99. Acceptable
substitutions are Corbin/Russwin ED5000 series and Yale 7000 series. Trim shall match
, i lockset design.
� 1. Where panic devices are installed on UL labeled doors, provide UL labeled panic
' devices, and indicate that they are labeled by stamping or permanently affixing a tag to
! each device.
�� 2. Through bolt exit devices on all doors.
3. Provide spacer kits where push pad exit devices cross over lites in doors.
' G. ' Door Closers: Closers listed on schedule are by Sargent 1230/1231 Series. Acceptable
substitutions are Corbin/Russwin DC3200 and Yale 3501/3501BF. All closers to be standard
' �I application and comply with opening force requirements of applicable codes. All rated doors to
have closers. Delayed action (DA) where scheduled, or as required. (IF THERE IS NO
PLACE TO INSTALL A WALL STOP,USE A LIMITING CLOSER.)
' H. j Floor Hinges: Rixson Firemark
1. Provide Series L147-20 with intermediate pivot ML19-20 for labeled lead lined doors.
1 , 2. Provide Series L147 with intermediate pivot ML19 for non-rated lead lined doors.
� I. � Push and Pull Plates: .050 gauge. -
1 I - .
l. Push plates 1001-3
' 2. Pull handle 1013-3
, J. � Door Stops: Door stops listed in schedule are by Trimco. Acceptable manufacturers are: H.B.
; Ives,Baldwin Mfg. Co.; Quality Hardware.
' 1. Wall bumpers shall be W 1274CCS.
2. Where swing.of a door interferes with another door,provide roller bumpers similar to No.
1244 or 1245, as required to suit conditions.
' � 3. Provide overhead stops similar to Rixson 55 Series on all doors where there is no place to
install a wall stop. -
� ;K. Thresholds, Weatherstripping, Carpet Dividers/Firestops and Light Seals: Items listed on
� schedule are by Pemco Mfg., Inc. Acceptable manufacturers are: National Guard Products;
' Reese Enterprises; and Zero Weatherstripping Co.
� I�
� March 3,2000 08700-3 99048.00
4
. �
'
1. Threshold's: No. 2005AV with vinyl bulb at stop or No. 271A with No. 222AV door '
bottom.
� 2. Weatherstripping: No. 303AV at jambs and heads of doors.
3. Light Seals & Sound Seals: No. 320CN at jambs and heads of doors, and Na. 412C ` �
automatic door bottoms at sills. i
4. Carpet Dividers: Provide Pemko 236A firestops under all "C" rated doors where carpet I
occurs each side of door, No. 2364A firestop under all "B" rated doors whei•e carpet '
occurs each side of door, and No. 174C stop where carpet occurs one side under�any fire
rated door. '
5. Tile Dividers: Provide a 4" wide aluminum plate under all "B" and "C" label doois where � I
tile occurs each side of door. Butt tile into plate. Plate to match thickness of tile.i
�
L. Rubber Silencers: Provide three per single door, and two per double doors.
� '
M. Door Gaskets: Pemko S88D in continuous lengths. See Door Schedule for doors requiring
gaskets at heads and jambs. � ,
;
N. Miscellaneous Hardware: Items of hardware such as flush bolts, automatic flush bolts, dutch
door bolts, etc. are identified in the various hardware sets on Finish Hardware Schedule by
manufacturer's numbers, and are manufactured by firms listed above. '
O. Fastenings: �
� � �1. Provide fasteners required to install hardware items, including wood and machine screws,
and through bolts. Furnish fasteners to match finish of product. Where security/safety is
• a concern, provide spanner head screws (SHS) for all items of hardware with,exposed '
fasteners. '
�
P. iTL Labels: All doors which are labeled are to have UL labeled hardware on them.
� �
� - PART 3 -EXECUTION
, �
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. See Finish Carpentry, Section 06200 for installation of Finish Hardware. ; '
B. Install Finish Hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper ,
templates.
C. Install at heights recommended as industry standards unless noted otherwise or as dictated by ,
applicable codes.
D. Install carpet dividers under all fire rated doors where carpet occurs.
'
,
, � I
March 3, 2000 08700-4 99048.00
r
� . ��
I .
I
1 ,�
' HARD ARE SCHEDULE NOTES:
I � "
, l.,l Hardware schedule is generic and hardware items listed are to show basic. operation/function of
� doors. Hardware supplier to furnish items by actual manufacturing catalogue numbers, making sure
� eacli item fits door use, and meets all fire/safety codes, i.e., iJL etc.,regardless of whether called for
� in schedule or not as hardware set numbers are used on different types of doors.
' 2. Ma'ori of door hardware functions are listed usin ANSI numbers. When there is no ANSI number
J� tY g
'� to use,manufacturer number is used to establish function onlv.
' i
• HARDWARE SCHEDULE BEGINS ON NEXT PAGE
,
i
� I
'
' I
, , �
, I �
�
1 �
�
'
' � -
;
' I - �
I
� �
' ;I
� ,
�
'
' March 3 2000 08700-5 99048.00
I'
�_ �
, '
� '
SET 1
ALL HARDWARE BY OTHERS `
�
SET 2 ' ,
3 HINGES �
1 PRIVACY SET D40S '
1 STOP
1 SET SEAL 5050
, '
SET 3
3 HINGES - , �
1 LOCKSET D53 PD
1 STOP '
SET 4
3 HINGES ,
� 1 LOCKSET D70 PD
1 STOP '
SET 5 '
3 HINGES
1 PUSH i ,
1 PLTLL
1 CLOSER 3501BF SNB
1 STOP ' '
- SET 6
6 HINGES ,
i 1 LOCKSET D80 PD
2 FLUSH BOLTS 282D �
2 CLOSERS 3501BF SNB
2 STOPS
� - '
- - 1
'
March 3,2000 08700-6 99048.00 �
II
, fl
I
' I
I SET 7
I
' � 3 HINGES
i 1 LOCKSET D70 PD
! 1 CLOSER 3501BF SNB
, � 1 STOP
i
�
' � SET 8
I6 HINGES
2 EXIT DEVICES 7110F SNB
, 2 CLOSERS PA3501 PF SNB
�
END OF SECTION 08700
, ,
, o
I
' I '
1 ,� '
i
�
�
�'
'
' i ,
� .
' �I
1
' �I
�
� _
� � �,
, , ,
' -
' Mazch 3,2000 08700-7 99048.00 I
( _ �
1
1 '
�
�
� �i
SECTIO 08800 -GLASS AND GLAZING
1 '
i
PART 1 -GENERAL
i
� 1.1 RELATED WORK
;�
� � A. Submittals - Section 01300.
; B. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames-Section 08100.
' I C. Wood Doors-Section 08215.
� D. Entrances and Storefronts-Section 08400.
� '
, E. Electro-Mechanical Sliding Doors-Section 08424.
�
' ; F. Toilet and Bath Accessories-Section 10800.
� 1.2 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE
� A. Comply with Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR 1201) of the
' Consumer Product Safety Division.
i B. Comply with Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing
� Systems Manual for glazing installation methods.
; C. Glass Labels
' a� 1. Deliver glass with labels intact, and indicating name of manufacturer,type,thiclmess, and
i quality of each piece.
i 2. Leave labels on glass until it has been inspected, except that labels shall be removed from
' j exterior glass prior to exposure to sunlight.
3. Where required,provide U.L.labels on all wire glass.
' 1.3 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
�A. Schedule delive of lass so that it can be installed rom tl
' I rY g P P Y•
B. Deliver sealants and puriy in manufacturer's unopened,labeled containers.
t � C. Deliver and handle glass so that it is not damaged. Immediately remove damaged glass from
project site.
' D. If necessary to store glass at job site, store in a well protected, dry area.
,
' March 3,2000 08800-1 99048.00
;
�
�
'
PART 2 -PRODUCTS I
2.1 GLASS �
A. Tinted Glass: PPG Industries, match existing color of the facility, '/4" tempered float glass or '
approved equal.
B. Clear Glass: PPG Industries, 1/4 inch Clear tempered float glass or approved equal.
C. Insulating Glass: '/4"thick double pane glass composed of exterior pane of 1/4 inch thick tinted r
float glass, and inner pane of 3/4" thick laminated glass. Seal edges of glass surround air tight
and purge interpane space with dry air. ,
D. Polished Plate Glass: PPG Industries 1/4 inch thick clear or approved equal.
E. Wire Glass: "Misco" clear polished wire glass 1/4 inch thick. �
F. Mirrors: 1/4 inch thick polished plate glass, mirror quality with backs silvered 2 coats, heavily '
electroplated with copper and pamted with mirror backing paint. Grind and polish edges of
mirror glass with eased edges.
G. Clear Laminated Glass: PPG Industries, three lites of clear heat strengthened glass and two ' ',
layers of vinyl to provide a 7/16" thick laminated glass thickness. In insulated units the
laminated glass will be the inboard lite and the tmted glass specified above will be the outboard
lite. '
2.2 GLAZING ACCESSORIES �
A. Setting Blocks and Shims:Neoprene of sufficient hardness to support glass without settlement.
B. Glazing Tape: Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. extruded elastic compound especially ,
made for glazing.
C. Elastic Glazing Compound: Pecora"Synthecalk" or DAP No. 1012 or approved equal. '
D. Sealant: General Electric 5E-1201, one component,ready-to-use type or approved equal.
,
2.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Insulated glazing system shall be tested with the curtamwall system. Refer to curtainwall t
specifications for testmg submittals.
B. Glass and storefront components shall be tested m accordance with ASTM 1886-97 standard '
test method for performance of exterior windows curtainwalls, doors and storm shutters
impacted by missile(s) and exposed to cyclic pressure differentials (Reference 1.6).
C. Provisions of SBCCI test standard for determining impact resistance from windborne debris, ''
SSTD 12-97 (Reference 1.4).
'
March 3, 2000 08800-2 99048.00 �
`�' i
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
!
i3.1 INSPECTION
IA. Inspect frames, sashes and recesses to verify that they are clean and ready to receive glazing.
� ' Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
'I
;�
� 3.2 PREPARATION
. �i
�A. Clean contact surfaces and wipe dry.
� B. Seal porous glazing channels and recesses.
i C. Prime surfaces to receive sealant.
� �
'� 3.3 INSTALLATION /
��; I
;A. General:
i
�� ; 1. Center glass in glazing rabbets to maintain required clearance on all four sides.
2. Where glass dimensions are larger than 50 united inches,provide set blocks and shims at
� sill in accordance with FGMA Manuals.
� 3. Provide sealer on both sides of glass where required by FGMA Manuals.
��
- � B. Glazing in Metal Frames with Non-Gasketed Stops:
� � 1. Backbed with glazing compound.
2. Apply glazing tape to both loose and fixed stops. Use tape of such thiclrness that it will
be slightly compressed when loose stops are installed.
� 1�C. Glazin in Metal Frames with Glazing Gaskets:
g
� I 1. Install so that gaskets are in continuous contact with glass and so that gaskets are not
deformed.
2. Comply with aluminum manufacturer's instructions.
� ' D. Glazing in Wood Cabinetwork
i
� ; 1. Seal wood with a lacquer type sealer.
� � 2. Backbed glass with glazing compound.
i
3. Apply glazing compound to loose stops and press into glass. Attach loose stops in frames
� in accordance with approved cabinetwork shop drawings.
� 1
�
� ,
March 3,2000 08800-3 99048.00
�
`��
3.4 CLEANING �
A. After glass and mirrors have been inspected and permission is received from Architect to �
remove labels, clean and polish glass.
END OF SECTION 08800 �
�
�
�
�
^ �.
�
�
;�
�,
�
�
�
�
�
March 3,2000 08800-4 99048.00 1�
i
1 ,'
I
� i
1�' I
SECTION 08900 -GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS
� I
PART 1 -GENERAL
r I
� 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIl'TION
;A. Load-bearing Strength (Wind Resistance): Provide manufacturer's stock system, adapted to
�� ! application indicated to withstand at least a uniform pressure of 33 psf inward and 20 psf
i outward.
� '
� B. Deflections and Thermal Movements: Provide manufacturer's stock products and system which
i are capable of withstanding building movements and weather exposures including wind loading,
' and which are capable of performing within the following limitations:
�� I
, 1. Normal-to-wall deflection not exceeding 1/175 of span, except 1/300 for glass-supporting
�� members.
� ; 2. Parallel-to-wall deflections not exceeding 75% of glass edge clearances.
i 3. Thermal movements resulting from ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F., which
� may cause curtain wall framing range of 180 degrees F.
� C. Leakage Resistance, Water and Air: Provide manufacturer's standard curtain wall system
� which has been tested to demonstrate permanent resistance to leakage as follows, with a test
�� � pressure differential of 20% of design loading (excluding operable window/door edge joints, if
� any);
�
�� � 1. Air Leakage:Not more than 0.03 cfm per sq.ft. wall area; ASTM E283.
� 2. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled leakage; ASTM E331, when tested at a pressure of
I 10 psf. �
� 3. Thermal Performance: When tested in accordance with AAMA 1502.6-1976 a CRF of no
� less than 57.
i
-
�� 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� A. Installer: Not less than 5 years of successful experience in erection of curtain wall systems
� similar to systems required for this project.
B. Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of"Metal Curtain Wall,Window, Storefront and
:`,� ; Entrance Guide Specifications Manual"by AAMA.
� ;
I
� 1:3 SUBMITTALS
I
� A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for materials and fabrication of curtain wall
j work, and instructions/recommendations for installation and maintenance. Include certified
� ! � test reports showing compliance with requirements where a test method is indicated.
�
�' f
� March 3,2000 08900-1 99048.00
�
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing adaptation of manufacturer's standard system to �
project; include typical unit elevations at 1/2 in. scale and details at 3 in. scale, to show
dimensioning, member profiles, anchorage system, interface with building construction, and �
glazing. Show section moduli of wind-load-bearing members, and calculations of stresses and
deflections for performance under design loading.
1.4 RELATED WORK
�
A. Fire Retardant Wood Blocking: Wood blocking in surrounds -Section 06102. �
i
B. Sealants: Caulkmg in surrounds - Section 07900.
f�C. Glass and Glazing- Section 08800. �
PART 2 -PRODUCTS i��
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS �
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wmdow wall products of one
of the following: �
1. Kawneer 1600 wall system,thermally broken.
2. U.S. Aluminum. �
3. EFCO.
2.2 MATERIALS � �
A. Aluminum Members: Provide members (extrusions, formed members, sheet and plate) oi alloy,
temper and thiclrnesses recommended by manufacturer to comply with requirements; ASTM �
B221 for extrusions,ASTM B209 for sheet/plate.
B. Exterior glazing seal: Synthetic polymer tape secured by extruded pressure plates fastened to J'
main gnd members. Provisions shall be made to isolate each light opening at all sealed �
horizontals to lead moisture accumulation to the extenor. A cover shall be snapped over
pressure plate to show only a sharp,uninterrupted exterior profile. �
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high- strength aluminum umts where
feasible, otherwise nonmagnetic stainless steel; except, at fabricator's option, brackets not
exposed to weather or abrasion may not be hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM �
A386. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for installation and alignment of curta�n wall
work. �
D. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft stainless steel, 26 ga., type selected by manufacturer for
compatibility.
E. Provide closed cell neoprene inboard glazing gaskets to include injection molded corners. �
�� ,
March 3, 2000 08900-2 99048.00 •�
� '
�
�- ' '�
�F. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard with exposed portions matching finish of
icurtain wall system. Provide slip joint linings of sheets, pads, shims, or washers of
i fluorocarbon resin, or similar material recommended by manufacturer at joints where movement
� i must be accommodated.
�, �G. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast-iron, malleable iron or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with �
1 � ASTM A386.
�
2.3, FABRICATION
� �A. General: Fabricate curtain wall system at manufacturer's shop to greatest extent possible.
�' � Conceal fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Make provisions to weep penetrahng water and
condensation to exterior.
� 2.4 PERFORMANCE
�A. Curtamwall systems shall be tested to ASTM E 1886-97 standard test method for performance
�; � of exterior windows, curtainwalls, doors and storm shutters impacted by missile(s) and exposed
to cyclic pressure differenhals.
i
�� B. Curtain Wall Systems shall meet the debris impact requirements as required in the South Florida
Building Code (SFBC, Reference 1.3). Provisions of SBCC I test standard for determining
' impact resistance for windborne debris, SSTD 12-97 (Reference 1.4).
� ;C. I Manufacturer to perform test and provide test results with the laminated glass specified in
� Section 08800.
� �
2.5 FINISH
� I A. Kynar painted exterior and baked enamel interior.
�, PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
� 3.1 INSPECTION,PREPARATION
i A. Furnish inserts at proper times for setting in concrete formwork, masonry, and similar work
~` , � indicated to support curtain wall work.
�� �
i
3.2 INSTALLATION/ERECTION
1 �
IA. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for protection, handling and installation of fabricated
� curtain wall components, with particular attention and care in preservation of applied finishes.
� ' Discard or remove and replace damaged members. -
�I ,
� March 3I, 2000 08900-3 99048.00
,
\�
B. Erection Tolerances: Install curtain wall components plumb, level, accurately aligned and '�
accurately located m reference to column lines and floor levels; adjust work to conform���ith the
following tolerances (maximum variations).
�
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet, 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
3. Alignment: Limit offset of inember alignment to 1/16 inch where surfaces are flush or �
flu h and se arated b less than 2 inch reveal or rotrudin
less than 1/2 inch out of s
, P Y �Y P b
work); otherwise limit offsets to 1/8 inch.
4. Location: 3/8 inch maximum deviation from measured theoretical location (any member �,
or location).
C. Anchor components securely in place in manner mdicated, shimmmg and allowing for required �
movements, and provide separators and isolators to prevent corrosion and elec7olytic
deterioration, and to prevent"freeze-up" of moving jomts.
�
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean completed system, mside and out, promptly after erection and installation of glass and �
sealants (allow for nominal cure of liquid sealants).
END OF SECTION 08900
�
�-
�
,,
�.
, �
� �
f�-
��
�
��
�
March 3, 2000 08900-4 99048.00
i
� I
i !
i
� '
SECTION 09100 -METAL ST'UD FRAMING SYSTEM
� �
PART 1 �GENERAL
,, �
�' ,
I �
l.li WORK INCLUDED
I
� �A. Steel stud exterior wall framing with anchorage and bracing.
i
�B. Steel stud interior wall framing and anchorage.
�
,iC. Steel stud furring at steel columns.
;D. Overhead bracing where required.
� '
E. Furring down soffits over casework.
�f i
1.2' RELATED WORK
i
�A. Submittals-Section 01300.
��
B. Miscellaneous Metal: Steel angles, channels, and miscellaneous steel - Section 05500.
� ;C. Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers -Section 06100.
�' b. Fire Retardant Wood Blocking-Section 06102.
� �
- iE. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames- Section 08100.
� F. Gypsum Board Ceiling Suspension-Section 09121.
I ,
�G. Metal Furring and Lathing-Section 09206.
I
' �H. Gypsum Wallboard Systems-Section 09260.
, I
,� 1.3 REFERENCES
� A. ;ASTM A446 - Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip
Process.
B. ASTM A525 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Sheet Steel, Zmc Coated
�l (Galvanized)by Hot Dip Process. I
C. AWS D1.3 -American Welding Society, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel."
� �D. AISI-American Iron and Steel Institute, "Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members."
� �
, '
� March 3,2000 09100-1 99048.00
�
,�
1.4 SUBMITTALS �
A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300. ���
�
B. Submit manufacturer's product data which clearly describes quality, performance and
galvanizmg thiclrness. ��
� �
C. Submit manufacturer s catalog illustrations depicting cutaway plan views of wall systems for
fire-ratings indicated and manufacturer's instructions for installing.
D. Structural Calculations: �
1. Submit structural calculations prepared by the manufacturer/supplier for approval by the �
' Architect/Structural Engineer. _
2. Calculations shall include,but not be limited to the following:
a. Engmeenng analysis depicting stress and deflection calculations for each framing �
application. Deflection of steel studs shall not exceed L/360. See Sm.�ctural �
General Notes for applicable wind speed. �
b. Selection of framing components and accessories.
c. Attachments to structure.
d. Calculations sealed by a Structural Engineer licensed in the pro�ect state. �
��
E. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit drawings prepared by manufacturer/supplier for approval b�� the �
Architect/Structural Engineer. These drawings should mclude the following:
a. Drawmgs, cross-sections, or elevations as necessary to adequately depict �
component locations. ,
b. Connection details showing screw types and locations, weld lengths or other
fastener requirements. �
f
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE � i
A. Comply with: -
1. Manufacturer's installahon instructions. �
2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. or other approved testing laboratories' requirements for
meeting fire-ratings indicated.
3. Cons�-uction methods for applicable seismic requirements. ;�
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufactunng the products specified in this Section
with a minimum of 3 years documented experience. Acceptable manufacturers are: Dietrich �
Industries and Ummast,Incorporated. �
C. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with a mmimum of 3 �
years documented experience.
�
March 3,2000 09100-2 99048.00 =�
�,� 'i
i
I
�' ID. Design framing system under the direct supervision of a professional Structural Engineer
licensed in the state where the project is located.
� �
1.6 COORDINATION
I
�l ��A. Coordinate with all trades required to install_work in walls and partitions. Install studs in proper
sequence with other work.
� B. Thicken walls as required to accommodate electrical, mechanical, plumbing and other in-wall
components.
� PART 2-PRODUCTS
�
2.1� MANUFACTURERS
��A. Acceptable manufacturers are Unimast Incorporated and Dietrich Industries.
�� �
'B. Products of other manufacturers are acceptable only after compliance with requirements
specified in Section 01630.
`�l
2.2 INTERIOR WALL MATERIAI.S
,�
�� �A. Interior Studs (general): Unimast, or approved equal, 25 gauge roll formed, punched steel,
galvanized.
� B. Interior Studs (heavy duty): Unimast, or approved equal, 20 gauge roll formed, punched steel
studs, galvanized. For use at door and window jambs, window sills and header framing and for
back-up of wall hung cabinet work.
� C. Interior Runners: Unimast, or approved equal, galvanized steel runners, 1-1/4 inches deep,
; compatible with studs.
��, �
�' �
! 1. Where walls include heavier gauge studs, provide runners of gauge to match heaviest
, gauge studs.
� i
�D. Furring members for gypsum board on concrete block walls: Unimast 26 gauge roll-formed,hat
;I shaped, galvanized steel.
,�,
) I E. Furring at fireproofed columns:
I
1. For 2 hour fire-rating: Unimast, or approved equal, 25 gauge roll-formed galvanized steel
� studs, approximately 1 5/8" deep x 1 7/16" wide with 1/4" folded flange in legs. Sizes I
may vary in accordance with UL design or other approved testing laboratories.
2. For 3 hour fire-rating: Same as for 2 hour rating. Sizes vary in accordance with UL
� � design or other approved testing laboratories.
i
�l ,
� March 3 2000 09100-3 99048.00
�
�
2.3 ACCESSORIES -INTERIOR WALLS �
A. Attachments (Non-Seismic):
1. Runner attachment to metal roof deck (with rigid insulation or insulating concrete only):
U.S. Gypsum 7/16"�long S-12 high/low pan head screws.
2. Studs and fumng attachment to masonry and concrete: Hilti or approved equal Powder �
Driven Pins or hardened concrete nails of appropriate size. .
3. Stud to runner attachment: USG Type 5-12,Pan Head Screws or approved equal.
4. Stud to door and window frame attachment: USG, 3/8" long, Type 5-12, Pan Head �,
Screws or approved equal.
5. Furring members to steel columns: Tek Screws of appropriate size.
6. Weldmg electrodes: Match to material being welded. �
7. Fasteners at three (3) hour columns: 1" , 1 5/8" and 2 1/4" long, self drilling, self-tapmg �
screws.
8. Fasteners at two (2) hour columns: 1" and 1 3/4" x No. 6 Phillips head self drilling, self- �
tapping double lead screws, and 1 1/4" x No. 8 screws of same type.
9. Anchorage Devices: These devices to be used where appropnate. Contractor to
determine location of powder actuated devices versus expansion anchors. �
Powder Actuated Fasteners shall be manufactured from AISI 1062 or AISI 1055 steel
austempered to a minimum core hardness of 50-54Rc and possess the following
properties: � i�
a. Tensile Strength=270,000 psi
b. Shear Strength= 162,000 psi �
c. All fasteners shall meet the requirements of ASTM B-633-78.
d. Fasteners shall be a minimum of 9/64" diameter.
e. Fasteners shall be zinc plated.
f. All exterior anchors to be galvanized. �
Minimum Design Values for Powder � I
Driven Fasteners in Concrete(Pounds) j
Shank Dia Penetration Loadm T e 3000 si Conc. 4000 si Conc.
0.145" 1-1/8" Shear 225 265
0.145" 1-1/8" Tension 115 145
0.177" 1-7/16" Shear 285 330 �
0.177" 1-7/16" Tension 205 275
0.205" 1-1/4" Shear 445 500
" " 345 � y
� 0.205 1-1/4 Tension 280
Values are for semi-lightweight or normal weight concrete �
Minimum fastener spacing of 4" and Minimum edge distance of 3"
See product literature for values in structural steel �
10. Expansion anchors shall be stud type and shall be zinc plated (and galvanized) in
accordance wrth ASTM B633, Type III Fe/ZnS. Expansion anchors shall be a minimum �
of 3/8 inch diameter with 2 1/2 inch embedment into concrete unless noted otherwise m '
the drawings.
�
March 3, 2000 09100-4 99048.00 ;�
i �
�� � �
l� I
, '
'��' I i
.,1� 2.4 EXTERIOR WALL MATERIALS
i
;�� � A. Exterior studs and accessories which are 12, 14 or 16 gauge shall meet the requirements of
� ASTM A446, Grade D with a minimum yield of 50,000 psi. Studs and accessories which are 18
� �or 20 gauge shall meet the requirements of ASTM A446, Grade A with a minimum yield of
, ,,; - � �33,000 psi.
�� �B. IStuds and accessories shall have G90 galvanized coating meeting the requirements of ASTM
�A525.
�� C. j Stud Size for Specialty Configurations as shown on drawings or listed here:
I I
!y � i 1. 6-inch, CSJ Studs with 1-5/8 inch round flange and minimum 1/2 inch return lip with
�� punched web. Stud gauge shall be determined by engineering analysis outlined in 1.03C.
� Minimum 18 gauge studs shall be provided. Stud size, gauge, configuration to be
� determined by manufacturer.
,i� '
` - �
2.5 i ACCESSORIES -EXTERIOR WALLS
:�' �
A. I Bridging: 1 1/2" deep by 16 gauge minimum.
� � I
B. I Strap Bracing: Minimum of 1-1/2 inch wide by 18 gauge unless noted otherwise.
��' i
C. � Tracks: Deep leg type, unpunched, same gauge, size and finish as studs with minimum 18
'� i gauge thiclrness. Where exterior walls require heavier gauge studs, provide tracks of gauge to
_ � match studs.
'�' �I D. � Plates, Gussets, Clip Angles: Minimum 14 gauge. Chp angles shall be a minimum of 2"x 2".
�' '� I
� E. � Self-drilling, Self-tapping Screws: Hot-dip galvanized conforming to minimum values set forth
i in table below. Gauge is referenced to material which is being anchored. Material heading is
��� I screw size.
- Minimum Design Values For Self-Tapping
i ;� Screws I(Pounds)
, I
i Matenal i #6 Screw #8 Screw #10 Screw
I �� Gau e, � Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension
20 I I 133 53 140 68 141 69
18 ! ! 188 83 248 94 263 98
� �� 16 i ! NA NA 236 142 261 151
��� 14 ; NA NA NA NA 286 205
j Note: Values based on thinnest material in the attachment.
�I � I Values may be increased 33%for wind or seismic loading
`�! � I NA indicates screw size is inappropriate for material thiclrness
I
'�-' F. � Welding: AWS D1.3-8 Structural Welding Code-Sheet Metal (field welding of material shall
�I,, � not be permitted for 20 gauge material or thmner).
I j
`� i I
,M;'. � I
' I
�� March�3, 2000 09100-5 99048.00
�- ---- —- ----_ _ _- _ _ - _- ---- =__ - _ _---- - - - -- - - - -
�
��D. Attach moldings, drip screeds and soffit vents with rust-resistant fasteners. _
END OF SECTION 09206 ;�
�
��
�
;�
�;.
'
�L
i��
��
I��
'v
i.l
��
I �
+�!l`'�
y"J�
r
�fi
'�i
:�I;)I
.�l.,I
��1J,',
�1����,
,�
March 3,2000 09206-4 99048.00 � i
�.�
i
� ,
�� �I
,I
�
,!
SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) (CONTRACTOR'S OPTION FOR
; THE EXTERIOR FINISHES)
� �
� PART 1 -GENERAL
`� �
�
1.1 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE
� ' A. Em lo onl ualified 'ourne en for this work.
P Y Y 9 J Ym
.� i
� ' B. Where fire-rated systems are required, comply with UL designs indicated.
i
1.2 ; ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
� 'A. Provide tem ora enclosure
p ry s,heat, and ventilahon m areas where work is performed.
,� B. Maintain minimum temperature of 50°F during installation and for 7 days after completion.
,C. Take precautionary measures to ensure that plaster is not subjected to excessive temperature
� � changes.
,D. Exterior work must be protected from wind by protective enclosures and/or temporary wall
� � baffles or screen walls.
il
PART 2 i PRODUCTS
�
2.1 MATERIALS
� I
A. Cement: ASTM C150,Type I. (Trinity White Portland Cement)
B. iHydrated Lime: ASTM C206,Type L. Similar to Bondcrete or Mortaseal.
iC. Sand: ASTM C144, graded from sieve size No. 8 to No. 100 with intermediate sizes 16, 30,
� and 50.
;I
D. Water: Clean water free from elements which might adversely affect plaster.
f
�, E. Stucco Finish Coat: U.S. Gypsum Oriental White Exterior Stucco, or approved equal, mill
;prepared mix requiring addition of water only.
�
� 2.2� MIXING
',
A. Mixing—General
� �
1. Machine mix plaster. Hand mixing is not permitted.
i 2. Mix only as much plaster as can be applied in one hour.
��
I
� March 3,2000 09220-1 99048.00
�
3. Mix materials dry,to uniform color and consistency,before adding water. �
4. Adjust plaster mixes to suit job requirements.
5. Do not retemper mix after initial set occurs. .�
B. Mixing Plaster: (Note: The followmg proportions are taken directly from American National
Standards Institute,ANSI A42.2.)
`�
1. First coat: One part white portland cement, 3/4 zero to one part lime, 2 to 4 parts sand.
(Variations for lime and sand contents are given due to vanation in local sands.
Workability of plaster mix will govern the amounts of sand and lime.) ��
2. Second coat: One part white portland cement, one part lime, 3 to 5 parts sand. (See note
above.)
3. Oriental White Stucco: Mix m accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. �
Finish to match existing.
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 PREPARATION
��
A. Provide temporary grounds and screeds at angles, corners, and at 8'-0" intervals where
permanent grounds do not occur. ,��
3.2 PLASTER APPLICATION �
A. First coat: Apply with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through and to embed
metal reinforcement and build to a thiclrness of 3/8 inch on outside. As soon as first coat has
become firm, scratch in one direction only to provide mechanical bond for second coat. Moist ��
air for 48 hours.
B. Second coat: Dampen first coat before applying second coat. Apply second scratch coat and �
bring the combined thickness on outside of inetal reinforcement to 5/8 inch. Bring surface to a
true, even plane, and correct surface defects. Float surface and leave uniformly rough to
provide a bond for the finish coat. Moist air for 48 hours. ��
C. Finish coat: Dampen second coat before applying finish coat. Apply finish coat with sufficient
material and pressure to ensure tight contact with complete coverage of second coat, and build �
out finish coat to a thiclrness of 1/8 inch. Trowel fimsh coat smooth, without trowel marks. �_
Moist air for 48 hours.
�,
3.3 PATCHING �
A. When plaster has completely dried, carefully examine it. Patch cracks or defects to the 1� I
satisfaction of the Architect. '
,
END OF SECTION 09220
,�
March 3,2000 09220-2 99048.00 � �
�� '
�- '�
SECTION 09260 -GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS
�� ,
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
'� 1.1 SUBMITTALS
�
�
� � A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
; B. Submit four copies of manufacturer's product data and instructions for installing.
�'
� 1.2 COORDINATION
�
� � A. Coordinate with all trades required to install work in walls and partitions. Do not install
wallboard until such work has been installed and tested.
�
1.3 ' QUALITY ASSURANCE
� ; A. Where systems with fire-resistance ratings are indicated or required, comply with detailed
, drawings and/or in accordance with local and state codes if they are more stringent to produce a
� satisfactory fire-rated system. ,
� I
1�4 HANDLING AND STORAGE
l� � A. Handle materials to avoid damage.
B. Store materials inside,under cover, in a dry place.
� 1. Stack flat, off floor.
� 2. Support boards to prevent sagging.
� 3. Store adhesives and joint material in a warm, dry place.
� C. � Overloading is prohibited.
� �
1:5 JOB CONDITIONS
� f A. Maintain medium constant temperature in areas where work is performed before, during, and
� after gypsum board and joint treatment applications.
�� �
� B. Provide ventilation during and following application of adhesives and joint treatment.
' i
C. Protect system from drying too fast.
� �
�� �
�
� March i,2000 09260-1 99048.00
�
PART 2 -PRODUCTS ��
2.1 MATERIAI.S ,
A. Gypsum Board—General
1. When double layered board is installed, bottom layer may be square edged instead of �
"� tapered edge.
B. Gypsum Board Types: Documents are based on USG and compatible with steel studs and/or �
other components of rated assemblies identified in drawings or other areas of specifications. �
Alternate acceptable manufacturer, Gold Bond or Georgia Pacific, must be a complete system �
as listed by test results.
' « �, „ -_
l. Sheetrock gypsum panel,Type SCX(Type X), 5/8 thick,tapered edge.
i 2. "Sheetrock" gypsum panel, Type WRX (Type X - water resistant), 5/8" thick, tapered �
edge.
C. Fasteners: �
,�
1. Screws: USG, Type S, self-drilling, self-tappmg, bugle head, screws for use with;�ower
driven screw drivers. Lengths to fit conditions.
2. At fireproof columns: Provide fasteners required to meet UL Design Assembly.
D. Laminating Adhesive:
1. Use adhesive complying with wallboard manufacturer's recommendations. (For use �
when second layer of gypsum board is not part of rated assembly.) �
E. Sealants: �""
1. Acoustical Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant �
2. Water Resistant Sealant: USG W/R Sealant _
F. Joint Treatment Materials: � i'j
��
1. Adhesive Joint Treatment: USG Perf=A-Tape, or approved equal.
�
2. Joint Compound: USG Ready Mixed Compound-All Purpose, or approved equal.
3. Joint Reinforcement: USG 2" wide Imperial Glass-fiber open-weave tape, Type P or
approved equal. �
G. Trim: �
1. Outside Corner Tnm: USG, or approved equal, No. 100 Perf-A-Bead, galvamzed �
reinforcement.
2. Control Joint. USG, or approved equal,No. 093 Control Joint, galvamzed.
3. Channel Tnm: USG, or approved equal No. 200A, galvanized. --
�
�
March 3, 2000 09260-2 99C448.00 �
�
� �
i
I
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
- I
� 3.1 � SAMPLE WALL MOCK UP
A. Contractor is to provide at least one or more, if the job warrants, free standing sample gyp.
�, � board wall panel at the site; minimum size is to be 4'-0" wide X 8'-0" high and constructed to
- one hour specifications. A sample of each penetration is to be built into this wall by all trades,
- i ' M-P-E, which will penetrate wall. Provide a minimum of the following: fire damper, pipe
� � sleeve, pipe penetration, conduit penetration, wire penetration, and a multiple pipe or conduit
jpenetration and a junction box over 16 square inches. The top of the wall should have a piece
� of decking similar to actual decking on the job. One side of wall should be tight to deck as per
� i � smoke wall details. One side should be constructed as per fire wall details.
; B. � Notify the appropriate building officials to review this panel before actual wall construction
� begms.
C. Architect/Engineer to approve the mock up before actual wall construction begins.
�'�
3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION ACTIONS
� A. Notify Local inspecting authorities prior to beginning installation of wallboard.
� ,
B. Review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure that everything preceding
�. ; installation of wallboard has been completed.
� C. Inspect surfaces of applied wallboard to assure that board is plumb and true. Do not commence
� � work until deficiencies have been corrected.
I ;
` ; D. After tub, shower pan or receptor is installed,place temporary 1/4" spacer around lip of fixtures.
� Precut board to required sizes and make necessary cutouts for installation of tile backerboard.
� I �
3.3 CEILING BOARD INSTALLATION
1� A. Install ceiling gypsum board before board is installed on walls unless walls are required to
' extend to the deck above. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for installing.
� �
3�.4 WALLBOARD INSTALLATION
� � A. Install all wallboard vertically and m accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions: High
; priority walls shall be installed first and the lessor priority walls shall be installed thereafter as
� ' required.
�
� I 1. Leave a 1/4" -3/8" max. space between floor slab and bottom edge of wallboard and seal
- � with acoustical sealant.
� ; 2. Where double studs are installed to act as control jomts, leave 1/2 inch wide separation m
. wallboard for installation of specified metal control joint. Control joints not to exceed
� 30 feet on center.
�
� March Ia, 2000 09260-3 99048.00
�
3. Where gypsum board walls form 135 degree angles, install galvanized steel angles .�
running full height of gypsum board to reinforce joints.
4. Where wallboard extends to bottom of inetal or concrete decks, etc., cut wallboard to
clearances as required on drawings. See details for all smoke walls, fire and smoke walls, �
fire walls, and all other wall types. �
5. Mud and tape all vertical and horizontal drywall joints. Joints mudded and taped above
ceiling spaces need not be sanded. IN NO CASE shall drywall mud be used at joint ,,:
between drywall and structure above. This�oint shall be caulked as required for t-�pe of
wall construction. See drawing details.
B. Stencil all corridor partitions, smoke, fire, horizontal exit, exit enclosures and other rated �-
partitions with permanent 2 inch high letters identifying the name and hour ratmg of the
partition, approximately 8 inches above the ceilmg every 20 feet on both sides of partition, or �
10 feet from corners, and identified once in each space having fire-rated or smoke walls.
Identify walls as applicable, "1-HOUR FIRE," "2-HOUR FIRE & SMOKE," "Sn�10KE
RESISTNE WALL TO DECK," etc. '
�
C. Water Resistant Wallboard
1. Install water resistant wallboard where walls are scheduled to be finished with ceramic �.
tile plus walls of latchen/dishwashing/serving spaces, m all toilets, baths, physical
therapy, and in other obviously high humidity rooms. Install water resistant board �
Iimmediately adjacent to all scrub sinks, sterilizers, janitor sinks and soiled utility sinks.
2. Treat cuts, edges of utility holes, fastener beads, joints and intersections with Water
� Resistant Sealant.
D. Double Layer Wallboard �
1. Screw first layer to studs and runners with specified screws. Space screws at studs 8 �
mches staggered o.c. at joint and 12 inches o.c. at intermediate studs.
2. For non-rated consh-uction: Install first layer of wallboard with long edges of-board
vertical and install second layer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. �
3. For fire rated construction: Install second layer of wallboard with joints offset from those
of first layer. Screw attach second layer m accordance with manufacturer's printed �
instructions.
I +
E. Tile Backerboard e �
(LTs as a substrate where shower walls are ceramic tile. Other light use areas
to be WR board). -
1. Fasten boards to steel studs spaced 16" o.c. with 1" Type S or S-12 screws spaced �" o.c. �!
Apply glass-fiber tape over joints and corners; embed with mortar or adhesive used to set
tile.
,
F. One Hour Walls:
,
1. One layer of 5/8" Type X or Type C wallboard applied to each side of 3 5/8" metal studs. ��
The wallboard shall be applied with the long dimension vertical. The vertical�omts shall
be staggered one stud spacing on each side of wall. The horizontal joints shall be �
• staggered on each side of the wall. The wall shall extend tight to the deck above and be
sealed to the deck. All joints not to exceed 1/4" shall be taped and sealed with drywall
mud and or Thermafiber safing. �
March 3, 2000 09260-4 99048.00
, �
�
.�
I
i
� � G. Columns Fireproofed with Wallboard:
� 1. Install Type X or Type C gypsum board in accordance with UL Design numbers
� ; indicated or other approved standard testing laboratories.
i
�
� 3.5 WALLBOARD FINISHING
' A. Walls shall be plumb and true and all corners shall be plumb and square.
� �
�! B�. Finish joints in accordance with wallboard manufacturer's printed instructions. -
� C. The Contractor shall be familiar with the finishing levels as described by the Gypsum
� , Association from Level 1 to Level 5, and apply these finishes as required for final finish as
; called for in the drawings, i.e.,painting, different types of wall covering, etc.
� I
Examples: (These notes are brief and are guidelines only, use Gypsum Association pamphlet
#GA214-90.)
��.
' 1. Level 1 - Above Ceilings.
i 2. Leve12 - Where water resistant gyp board is used.
' 3. Leve13 - Where heavy grade wallcovering is used.
� � 4. Leve14- Where light grade wallcovering and flat paint is used.
i 5. Leve15 - Where gloss enamel, semi-gloss enamel, and epoxy paint are used.
�, , D. Employ only qualified wallboard finishers for this work.
; E. After finishing is completed and before pamt or wall covering is applied, inspect walls and
`� make corrections to provide smooth surfaces free from defects.
�
3.�6 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION
�
� A. Design: Refer to USG SA-926 or approved equal for 2 hour assembly, as rated by U of C 4-2-
� 75.
1� � B. Install shaft wall systems in accordance with applicable portions of current edition of USG
-- ' Systems Folder SA-926 and SA-925.
� C. Install horizontal shaft wall application as required for kitchen hood exhaust duct as per USG
, report"Horizontal Two-Hour Shaft Wall System for Duct Protection" dated January 19, 1983.
�
�., � D. At angled corners in shaftwall assembly insta114" wide, 25 gauge steel straps spec'ed vertically
� at 24" o.c. Attach to C-H studs with 1/2" pan head screws. Fill corner void with safing
�' ' insulation and precut liner panel and attach to straps with 1-5/8"USG type `S' bugle head, self-
��� � drilling, self-tapping screws. '
i
�
� END OF SECTION 09260
�
� March 3, 2000 09260-5 99048.00
l i
1�
I
l�� .
I SECTION 09262 -FIBERGLASS SURFACED GYPSUM SHEATHING
~ �I
�
� PART 1 -GENERAL
I
� 1:1 SUBMTTTALS
�� A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
' ' B. Submit four copies of manufacturer's product data and instructions for installing.
��
1.2 COORDINATION
�� A. Coordinate installation of sheathing with trades required to install work in areas where
� sheathing is to be installed.
� � B. Coordinate installation of building wrap material with trades in order to prevent damage to
- - building wrap material.
'� 1.�3 HANDLING AND STORAGE
� A. Handle materials to avoid damage.
�
, B. Store all materials inside,under cover,in a dry place.
I ;�, ' 1. Stack flat,off of floor.
, 2. Support to prevent any sagging.
3. Store joint mastic in a warm, dry place, do not allow to freeze.
�� � C. Overloading floors is prohibited.
�' 1.4 WARRANTY
, � � A. Provide six-month guarantee against exposure damage and a five year warranty against
manufacturing defects. Provide a 10 year limited substrate warranty for E.I.F.S. systems.
' ,�, PART 2-PRODUCTS
��. 2:1 MATERIALS
A. Fiberglass Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Georgia Pacific Corporation or approved equal 1/2"
� thick, Dens-Glass Gold, 4' X 8' (or 9' or 10') sheathing to comply with ASTM C-79.
Flamespread O, smoke developed O,in accordance with ASTM E-84.
�
II�
� March 3, 2000 09262-1 99048.00
- �
i
� ;
� i
� I
� �
SECTION 09300 -TII,E
� '
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
�' I
y 1.;1 SUBMTTTALS
I
� A. Samples:
i
; 1. Unglazed natural clay type cerariuc tile.
� ,
a. Panel for each color and type.
b. Minimum panel size: 8 x 8 inches.
� , 2. Quarry Tile: One tile per sample for each color and type.
3. Glazed Wall Tile: One tile per sample for each color and type.
�� � 4. Marble: 6 x 6 in., one for each type.
� B. Certificates:
, � ; 1. Master grade Certificate: .
;
I _ i a. Comply with ANSI A137-1.
� ; b. Furnish for: Standard Grade Tile.
c. State grade, kind of tile, identification marks for tile packages, and name and
I � location of project.
I � i d. Issued and signed by manufacturer when tile is shipped.
2. Manufacturers of mortars, adhesives, and grouts to certify that materials:
,� a. Are suitable for intended use.
b. Meet or exceed the standards of American National Standards Institute or other
' , specified standards.
i � ,
1.2 PRODUCT LABELING,DELNERY AND HANDLING
i
� ; A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original sealed containers.
�
� 1. Labels legible and intact identifymg brand name and contents.
�, I 2. Tile cartons grade-sealed by manufacturer in accordance with ANSI A137.
3. Grade-seals unbroken.
1 4. Manufactured mortars and grouts shall contain hallmarks certifying compliance with
� reference standards and be types recommended by hle manufacturer for application.
5. Adhesives in containers labeled with hallmarks certifying compliance with reference
standards.
� � 6. Organic adhesive containers to bear hallmark of either Adhesive and Sealant Council or
,�
, ,� Tile Contractors Association of America certifying compliance with ANSI A136.1.
' B. Deliver mastic grout ready for use.
�� �
� March 3,2000 09300-1 99048.00
�
C. Deliver dry set mortar in sealed moisture-proof containers. �
• D. Store materials under cover in manner to prevent damage or contamination. ,�
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS �
A. Environmental:
1. Set and grout tile in portland cement mortar when ambient temperature is at least 50 �
degrees F. and rising.
2. Comply with minimum temperature recornmendations of manufacturers for bonding and
grouting materials in other than portland cement mortar.
- B. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work begins.
�
PART2-PRODUCTS
'�
2.1 TII.E �
A. General Requirements: �
1. Standard Grade: ANSI A137.7. �
2. Factory mounting: Factory mount unglazed natural mosaic clay type ceramic tile and �
other tile designated as "mounted" into sheets of patterns selected.
3. Colors and Patterns: See Fmish Schedule.
B. Unglazed natural clay type ceramic mosaic tile: �
1. Complying with SEC. 5, ANSI A137.1. �
2. Edge: Square.
C. Quarry Tile:
1. Complying with SEC. 5.2,ANSI A137.1. �
2. Square edges.
3. Minimum Thiclrness: 1/2 inch. ��
D. Glazed Tile:
1. Complying with SEC. 6,ANSI A137.1. �
2. Finish: See finish list for materials and colors.
3. For wall tile-provide spacer lugs on edge of tile. �
E. Trim Shapes and Bases:
1. Same type as wall tile: Subsection .2 of related tile section, ANSI A137.1. �
2. Include cove at base and surface bullnose at external corners and other shapes ta finish
installation.
�
March 3, 2000 09300-2 99048.00 �
,i
i
`� �
1
�
I
� i F. Thresholds and Window Stools:
i
� 1. White Georgia Marble.
� 2. Thiclrness: 7/8 in., width as noted on drawings.
� 3. Thresholds beveled on outer edge, and eased edge on intenor edge. �
� '
� 2.2 SETTING MATERIALS
i
� A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150,Type 1.
f
i B. Sand,ASTM C144.
� �
� C. Latex and Epoxy mortars as manufactured by Laticrete International and supplied by Dal-Tile
�
Corporation,Nashville,Tennessee.
� i D. Plaster of Paris (Window Stools).
� E. Hydroment #428 Flexible Grout Admixture for use with Tile Mate #710, 713, 760, 971, as the
�, ; situation requires.
l
� 2.3 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Floors:
� , 1. Bostic Hydroment.
; 2. Laticrete No. 3701 Grout Mix.
�, i 3. Latapoxy No. 210 Epoxy Grout. '-
� B. Hydroment#428 Flexible Grout Admixture-use only with dense or sand grout. '�.
, '�
,� � C. Walls:
;
1. Dry Wall Grout.
� �` 2. Laticrete No. 3701 Grout Admix.
I 3. One part Silicone Sanitary Sealant. See Installation Section 3.02.
i
�
2.4 THICK BED MORTAR(FLOORS)
� A. One bag portland cement(941b).
�
- � B. 3 cu. ft. of sand.
I
�, ,� C. 5 gals. Laticrete No. 3701 Mortar Additive (Adjust quantity to provide proper consistency).
i D. Slurry bond coat.
� , E. Tile to be installed over thick bed mortar with Latapoxy No. 210 Thin Set Mortar.
� i
� M arch 3,2000 09300-3 99048.00
�
,�2.5 THIN LOAD BEARING WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Laticrete trowel applied waterproofing No. 9235. �
2.6 LATEX THIN SET MORTAR(Interior Walls) �
A. Laticrete No.4237 and Dry Set Mortars or Laticrete UTS-150 Latex Thin Set Mortar.
2.7 THIN SET MORTAR(Floors) �
A. Laticrete No.4237.
�'
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION OF SURFACES �
A. Inspection: �
1. Examine surfaces to receive ceramic tile, setting beds, or accessories before tile
mstallation begins for: �
a. Defects or conditions adversely affectmg quality and execution of tile installation.
b. Deviations beyond allowable tolerances of surfaces to receive tile: �
� 1) Portland Cement: Maximum variation in subfloor surface: 1/4 inch in 10
� � feet. �
;� 2) Organic adhesive method: Maximum vanation in vertical surfaces: 1%8 inch
�
/ m 8 feet.
- 2. Do not proceed with installation work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. �
B. Condition of surfaces to receive tile:
1. Surfaces to be firm, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy films. ��
2. Grounds, anchors,plugs, hangers,bucks, electrical and mechamcal work in or behmd tile
to be installed prior to proceeding with tile work.
,�,
3.2 INSTALLATION �
A. Install all materials, including finish details, as per Tile Council of American Handbook and
recommendations.
B. Waterproofing Membrane: �
1. Apply over all floors to receive ceramic tile,pavers and quarry tile in "wet" areas (Floors �
where floor drains occur). �
2. Comply with OSHA Reg. 1910.141.
.�
March 3,2000 09300-4 99048.00 �
i
,,
�- ' �
i
�
�
I
I 3. Installation shall be made by an approved Contractor in strict accordance with the
� manufacturer's printed instructions.
i
`� C. Ceramic tile: Prepare surface, fit, set, or bond, grout, and clean in accordance with applicable
requirements to ANSI standards for setting method specified, except as otherwise noted.
� 1. Latex-portland cement mortar: A108.5.
- � 2. Before placing the tile on a green or wet screed bed, a slurry bond of Laticrete No. 4237
� and portland cement shall be applied to the mortar bed using a flat trowel. Thiclrness of
� the bond coat shall be approximately 1/16 inch.
3. All floor tile is to be grouted with Bostic "Hydroment" or approved equal gauged with
; Laticrete No. 3701 grout admix.
' 4. All floor tile in food preparation area to be grouted with Latapoxy No. 210 Epoxy Grout.
� Color to be as specified by Architect.
i 5. All wall tile to be grouted with approved dry wall grout and gauged with Laticrete No.
� 3701 Latex grout admix.
6. Provide one part Silicone Sanitary Sealant at plumbing fixtures, pipe penetrations,
, corners, and floor intersections where tile meets tile.
� �
END OF SECTION 09300
� ��
I
� I
�
I� �
i
� j
�
��
,�.
�
�
�
� �.
I �,
I
i
� �
i
March 3, 2000 09300-5 99048.00
� '
i i
! '
�. i I
i
,I
�
SECTIOO N 09500 -ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
�
� PART 1 -GENERAL
� 1.1 I QUALITY ASSURANCE
� A. 1�� Qualifications of Installer:
� 1. Minimum of three project installations of comparable extent as proposed project.
� ! 2. Submit written description of material mstaller, listing name of material manufacturers,
qualifications of installation personnel, and years of concurrent contracting expenence.
� B. Tolerances:
� '�
; 1. Deflection:
�
�I � a. Suspension system components, hangers, and fastening devices supporting light �
fixtures, ceiling grilles, and acoustical units: Maximum deflection L/360 of the ��
� span.
� � b. Deflection Tests: ASTM C635.
I
� i 2. Allowable tolerance of finished acoustical ceilings system: Level within 1/8" in 12 feet.
� I
�
� C. Fire Ratings:
�
�I 1. Fire Hazard Classification:
� I ,
! a. Maximum flame spread: Underwriter s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 0-25; smoke
; developed: 0-450.
,� � b. ASTM E84.
�
_� 1.2 SUBMITT'ALS
� A. Shop Drawings (Include the following):
� � 1. Layout indication.
� � 2. Insert and hanger spacing and fastening details.
I
� ; 3. Splicing method for main and cross runners.
4. Change in level details.
j 5. Acoustical unit support at ceiling fixture.
� I B. Manufacturer's Literature:
' 1. Submit manufacturer's recommendation for installation of suspension system.
�' � C. Certificates:
� , � 1. Furnish certification of flame spread index of fire rating organization.
�
� March 3�2000 09500-1 99048.00
� I
' 2. Furnish certification of materials and systems conforming to Specification requirements. .� I�
D. Maintenance Materials: � '
1. Furnish extra materials equal to 1% of each type of acoustical material supplied.
2. Furnish suspension system components in amount sufficient to install extra ceiling units. ��
�
13 PRODUCT DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective packaging, with manufacturer's labels �
indicating brand name,pattern, size,thiclrness and fire rating as applicable, legible and intact.
B. Store materials in onginal protective packaging to prevent soiling,physical damage or wetting. .�
I C. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.
D. Do not begin installation until sufficient materials to complete a room are received.
�
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS �
A. Complete installation of dampening materials before beginning work. �
B. Maintain humidity of 65-75% in area where acoustical matenals are to be installed, 2� hours
before, during and 25 hours after installation. �
C. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 to 70 degrees F. prior to and during
installation of matenals. �
PART 2 =PRODUCTS
�
2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM ,
A. Type: Exposed Tee Grid. �
1. ASTM C635. �
2. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty systems.
3. All components of system from one manufacturer.
4. Size: 24 x 48 in. and 24 x 24 in. (See drawings). �
B. Main, Cross, and Concealed Members:
1. Web design: Single. Exposed flange 15/16 in. wide. �
2. Cold rolled steel, electro-zmc coated with prepainted finish to match color of ceilmg tile
units.
��
�
March 3, 2000 09500-2 99048.00 �
T
�" � I
i
i
� I C. Edge Molding:
� � 1. Minimum 0.020 in. steel, channel or angle-shaped, with minimum flange width of 15/16
� in.
' D. Hold down clips:
�. �
1. Type as supplied by suspension system manufacturer.
�
� E. � Rough Suspension:
1. Hanger wire: Minimum 12 ga., galv. soft-annealed,mild steel wire.
� ' 2. Wire ties: 18 ga., galv. annealed steel wire.
3. Hanger clips: Prefabricated metal clamps for fastening as required.
4. Carrying channels: 16 ga., 1-1/2 in., cold rolled steel.
� �
2.2 CEILING TILE UNITS
� A. Mineral Fiber Acoustical Units:
� 1. AT-1: Umted States Gypsum No. 562, Auratone Fissured, 24" x 48" x 5/8" — color -
� � , white.
', ' 2. AT-2: United States Gypsum No. 76775, Echpse Clima Plus, 24" x 24" x 3/4"— color—
i white.
� � ; 3. At-3: United States Gypsum No. 76775, Eclipse Clima Plus, 24" x 24" x 3/4"—color—
mist.
� r B. ' Vinyl Faced Gypsum Units:
, 1. AT-4: "Vinylrock X" as manufactured by Capaul Div. of Acoustiflex Corp. or "USG
Gypsum Ceiling Panels", Stipple White,as manufactured by United States Gypsum.
�, 2. Size: 24 x 48 x 1/2 inches.
PART 3 I-EXECUTION
� �
i
. � '
3.1 INSTALLATION
�
�A. Suspension System: ASTM C636.
�. � 1. Hangers:
; a. Install hanger clips as recommended by manufacturer.
� ; b. Space hanger wires 4 ft. o.c., each direction.
c. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member 6 in. from vertical
, surfaces.
� ; d. Do not splay wires more than 5 inches in a 4 ft. vertical drop.
e. Wrap wire a minimum of three times horizontally, turning ends upward.
� f. Saddle tie carrying channels to main structure for mdirect hung suspension system.
�
� March 3,2000 09500-3 99048.00
i
�
� g. Install additional hanger wire at each corner of recessed light fixture not supported �
b re ular id han er.
Y g �' g
2. Main and Cross runners: ��
a. Space mam runners at 4 ft. o.c., at right angle to carrymg channel. Level and �
square to adjacent walls. Wire clip to channels at all intersections.
b. Space cross runners at 2 ft. on centers.
3. Wall molding: �
a. Install wall molding at mtersections of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces.
b. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. �
c. Attach to vertical surface with mechanical fasteners.
B. Ceiling Tile Units: ",�
1. Install in level plane in straight line courses.
2. Place materials to bear all around on suspension members. �
3. Minimum width of border tiles: One-half unit dimension.
4. Provide field cut, scored, square edges on all tegular edge tiles,to match factory eCge.
3.2 CLEANING �
A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after mstallation. �
B. Touch-up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces.
C. Remove and replace damaged, or improperly installed units. '�
END OF SECTION 09500 �
�
�
_�
�
�
�
March 3, 2000 09500� 99048.00
i
i I
� �
!
� �
SECTIO,N 09650 -RESILIENT FLOORING
� I
PQRT 1 -GENERAL
� '
1.1 ! RELATED WORK
� A. Section 01300 -Submittals.
B. Section 03300 -Cast-In-Place Concrete: Finish troweling of floor slabs.
� i
1.2 I SUBMITTALS
� �A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
B. ' Submit four copies of manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for types of
� I resilient flooring and accessories specified.
�C. 'When work is completed, submit two copies of manufacturer's written instructions for
� i maintenance of flooring and accessories.
I
� 13 EXTRA MATERTAT.
A. ,Furnish additional resilient flooring material for replacement and maintenance.
I �. B. �Furnish materials of each size, color pattern and type of materials installed.
' C. Furnish materials at the rate of one carton for each 1500 sq. ft. or fraction thereof installed.
�
1.4 �DELNERY AND STORAGE
� A. �Deliver materials m manufacturer's original, unopened containers with manufacturer's labels
�legible and intact.
1 '
�B. Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's pnnted instructions.
� 1.5� ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
'I
�A. Maintain temperature of spaces and materials at a minimum of 65 degrees F. for at least 48
� � hours before installation and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Subsequently,
! maintain temperature of at least 55 degrees F. in areas where work has been completed.
�
B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting,
have been completed,but before casework is placed.
i
� i
� March 3, 2000 09650-1 99048.00
I
� �
PART 2 -PRODUCTS �
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTiTIZERS (Refer to Fmish Drawmgs for Actual M�terials � I
Specified)
2.2 MATERIALS
�
A. Vinyl-Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type N, 12" x 12" x 1/8", asbestos free, tapered or �
bullnose edge.
B. Resilient Sheet Flooring: 6'-0" wide rolls, .085" gauge. �
C. Resilient Base: 4" high. Provide factory molded inside and outside corners.
1. Standard top-set, cove base on resilient floonng and carpeted areas. �
2. Standard straight base where areas are carpeted.
D. Resilient Edge (Terminal) Strips: 1/8" thick x 1" or more wide,homogeneous rubber,tapered or �
bull nose on outer edge.
' E. Adhesive Systems: Use adhesives as specified by the manufacturer for the specific floonng and �
substrate as required.
F. Integral Base Fillet Stnps: Cove stick by manufacturer to back-up resilient sheet floonng is
turned up walls to form an integral base. �
G. Cap Strips: Supplied by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer to cap integral base tuned up �
walls.
H. Feature Strips: Supplied by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for division of adjacent floor �
finish under doors. 1
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 PREPARATION ��
A. Examme floors and walls for defects which might adversely affect tile work or its appearance.
Do not begin work until defects have been corrected. �
B. Thoroughly clean floors before applying adhesive.
C. Verify the subfloor is acceptable to begin resilient flooring installation. Perform bond and �'
moisture test and calcium chloride test per manufacturer's recommendations. Acceptance of the
subfloor is the responsibility of the flooring contractor.
�
�
March 3, 2000 09650-2 99048.00
i
� ,
I
� I
3�2 INSTALLATION
� A. I; Use care in installing materials so that no stains appear on finished work.
� f
� B. Apply adhesive with clean,notched trowels.
� I �
; 1. Place adhesive only on that amount of area, which can be covered by flooring material
, wrthin the recommended worlang time of the adhesive.
2. Water base adhesive should be allowed to dissipate to where the mastic changes color
' before floormg material is placed.
3. Place adhesive uniformly.
� C. � Lay tile from center of space so that no tile less than half size occurs in width or length of the
� space.
i
� i 1. Lay tile square with room axes. Lay tile with grain of each tile perpendicular to
' adjoimng tiles.
2. Cut tiles neatly and fit to and around fixtures, recesses, pipes and butting surfaces. Fit
� ' within 1/64 inch.
' 3. Butt edges of flooring material tightly together.
� 4. Use a roller, or firmly press tiles into adhesive so that they are well bonded.
� 5. Neatly trowel adhesive on wall and install rubber base.
� '
� D. �� WELDED SEAM VINYL FLOORING
� , I 1. Install flooring as specified above malang sure that all inside and outside comers are
consistent,radiuses are tight and true and all work is done in a worlm7anlike manner.
�; 2. Machine route seams, install PVC thread in routed seams, and heat weld seams in
� � accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
E. INTEGRAL BASE
� ; 1. Where flooring material turns up walls to form an integral base:
a. Install cove fillet strips at floor/wall mtersections with adhesive.
� b. Turn flooring material or pre-moulded base up walls as shown on drawings and set
to walls with adhesive. �
, c. Carefully miter corners and heat seal seams.
� d. Install cap sh-ip at top of base.
� F. � BASE IN CARPETED AREAS -
� I
� 1. Install straight base in all areas to receive carpet over 1/2" in height in accordance with
, the finish schedule.
� �
a. Straight base shall be installed prior to installation of carpet.
�
� 2. Install cove base in all areas to receive carpet 1/2" in height or less in accordance with the
� ; finish schedule.
�i
� ' i
� i
� March 3, 2000 09650-3 99048.00
I
�
3.3 CLEANING �
A. When installation in each space is completed, clean floor and base. Cover floor with heavy �
paper or plastic material taped in place.
B. Just before final inspection, clean floor and base and perform maintenance in accordance with �
manufacturer's printed instructions.
END OF SECTION 09650 �
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�'
,�
'
� �
March 3, 2000 09650-4 99048.00 � I
I ,
� I
� I
I
I �
�
' SECTION 09680 -CARPET GLUE-DOWN INSTALLATION
� �
PART 1 -GENERAL
� !
1.1 SCOPE&COORDINATION
1 A. Arrange for job site storage in advance of arrival of materials. Do not deliver materials to job
site until arrangements have been made.
� B. Coordinate carpet mstallation with other trades required to work in the same areas. _
C. Furnish and install all supplementary or misc. items incidental to or necessary for a sound,
� ' secure and complete installation.
� 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTORS
� A. Approved as an installation contractor by carpet manufacturers whose carpeting is selected.
i
'� � I B. Employ only expenenced, qualified, competent foremen and journeymen installers.
�
1.3 SUBMITTALS
� �
� A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
i '
� B. Carpet Samples, Specifications&Warranties: Submit 3 carpet samples (minimum size 6" X 6"),
, 4 sets manufacturer's specifications and 4 sets manufacturer's warranty for each pattern and
� color used to the General Contxactor for submittal to the Architect.
C. Installation Data: Submit six copies of manufacturer's data for adhesive to be used, and pnnted
mstructions for installation to the General Contractor for submittal to the Architect.
� D. Mamtenance Instructions: Submit 6 copies of manufacturer's maintenance instructions to
General Contractor for submittal to Architect.
� I
E. i Seaming Diagram: Submit 3 copies of seaming diagram to the General Contractor for approval.
� Location of transition and edge pieces should be indicated on drawing. Include samples of
I ' proposed manufacturer,model#and color of these transinon and edge pieces.
1. Submit notarized certificates from carpet manufacturers stating that carpet supplied meets
o with requirements of this specification.
� 2. Submit certified laboratory test reports for flammability in accordance with Part 2.02.
F. Submit copy of letter or other positive approval from State Fire Marshal. See APPROVALS
� paragraph below.
i
I
�
�� ,
;
� March 3, 2000 09680-1 99048.00
�
1.4 apr�ovaL.s '
A. Submit, in states requiring it, a certified laboratory test report for flammability to State Fire
Marshal of the state where project is located stating that carpet meets or exceeds required �
Flame Spread Rating and obtain Fire Marshal's approval before ordering carpet.
� B. Comply with State,Local and Federal codes. ��
1.5 USABLE SCRAP CARPET
�
A. Deliver usable carpet pieces of leftover carpet to Owner. Neatly package and wrap such
carpeting for storage protection. �
1.6 STORAGE �
A. Arrange, in advance of delivery,with General Contractor for secure, clean, dry storage space.
B. Owner will not accept responsibility for safeguarding carpet and accessories. �
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS �
A. Heating and Ventilating: Maintain uniform temperature between 65 degrees and 95 degrees F.
in spaces receiving carpet for a period of at least 72 hours before carpet is mstalled, dunng �
installation, and for at least 72 hours after installation. Provide ventilation in spaces where
carpet is installed during installation and for at least 72 hours after installation.
B. Conditioning: Unroll carpet 24 hours before installation. �
PART 2 -PRODUCTS ;�
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS �
I A. Refer to finish drawings for carpet manufacturers, styles and colors.
B. Tnm and Edge Accessones -Mercer Products Co. or approved substitute. �
2.2 CARPET PHYSICAL REQUIltEMENTS �
A. Fire Rating:
l. All carpet shall meet requirements of Standard for Surface Flammability of Carpets and �
Rugs,DOC FF-1-70 (Methenamine Pill Test).
' 2. Carpet shall have a mimmum critical flux of 0.45 per square centimeter as determined by �
Flooring Radiant Panel Test ASTM E-648.
3. Carpet shall have a smoke density development of 450 or less per NBS Smoke Chamber
Test NFPA 258.
�1
March 3,2000 09680-2 99048.00 �
� i
� B. Permanent Static Protection: 3.0 KV or less at 20% relative humidity and 70 degrees F.; when
tested by AATCC 134, Electrostatic Propensity.
� ', C. Vermin Proofing: Treat carpet to make it completely moth and vermin proof.
� D. Dampproofing: Treat carpet materials so that carpet is compatible with installation over
concrete slab subfloors.
i
�
! E. Factory Runs: Produce carpet, of each type specified, in one factory run and from one dye lot.
� I Guarantee colors and shades to be uniform throughout the run of material.
� 2.B CARPET ACCESSORIES
�
; A. Furnish and install accessory trim pieces at all transitions to another floor material and all
� exposed edges of carpet. Submit samples in accordance with 1.03 E.
i
�
2.� ADHESNES AND SEALERS
i � I
I A. Adhesives-General:
i � 1. Provide adhesives as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Comply with requirements for flame spread rating, same as specified for carpet.
, B. Waterproof cement: As recommended by carpet manufacturer. Comply with requirements for
�� flame spread rating.
� C. Seam Sealers: Provide sealers and other materials, if required, in accordance with carpet
� manufacturer's printed instructions.
�
�
� PART 3 -EXECiJTION
3.�1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
�
I A. Examine floors for defects or conditions which might adversely affect carpet installation or
� appearance. Do not install carpet until defects or conditions are corrected.
' B. Clean floors thoroughly of substances detrimental to proper installation. Allow floors to dry
� completely.
�
3.2 INSTALLATION
� ,A. Install carpet in accordance with approved shop drawings, seaming diagram, and manufacturer's
printed instructions.
�� B. j Cut carpet, where required, to allow proper seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight and
' �I true,without frayed edges. Small patched areas and seamed pieces of carpet are not acceptable.
� I
�
� March 3,2000 09680-3 99048.00
I
i
, �
C. Locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. �
D. Doorway seams shall be centered directly under the door. �
E. Join seams so as not to detract from appearance of carpet installation. Coat cut edges with seam
sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer.
F. S read adhesive in uanti re uired after nmer a lication if manufacturer recomm�nds a �
P 9 h' q , P pP �
primer.
G. Do not change run of pile where carpet is continuous through a wall opening. �
H. Fit carpet snugly to walls and other vertical surfaces. �
I. Lay entire carpet tight and flat to subfloor, well attached at edges, and so that it presents a
uniform appearance. �
J. Install edge stnps and trim in accordance with manufacturer's printed mstructions.
3.3 INSPECTING, CORRECTING,AND CLEANING �
A. As installation in each space is completed, carefully inspect entire installation for defects.
Especially examine seams for signs of raveling and separation,and excessive adhesive.
B. Make corrections as required. If defects are visible after attempted correction,replace defective
carpet. ��
C. Thoroughly clean carpet. �
D. Owner reserves the right to test installed carpet for compliance with specifications within time
period covered by manufacturer's warranty.
�.
3.4 PROTECTING
A. Furniture placement and heavy traffic shall not occur for 48 hours following installation. �
B. Place plastic on carpet to protect from construction dirt and traffic. Do not remove until all �
phases of construction are complete.
END OF SECTION 09680 �
�
��
�
March 3,2000 09680-4 99048.00 �
I
�
i
�
SECTION 09900 -PAINTING
�
PART -GENERAL
� l.11 SECTION INCLUDES
�
1 � A. Painting. The work required under this section consists of all painting, finishing and related
items necessary to complete the work indicated on Drawings, described in the Specifications
and listed in the Painting and Finishing schedule.
� i
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
� I
I A. Section 05100 -Structural Steel.
I B. Section 05200 -Steel Joists and Joist Girders.
� C. Section 05300—Metal Decking.
� � D. Section 05500—Miscellaneous Metal.
� �
�
1 I3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� �
, A. Qualifications:
� 1. Employ only skilled mechanics experienced in applying commercial painting products.
I B. Include on labels or containers:
� � 1. Manufacturer's Name
I 2. Product Name and Number
� 3. Color
4. Batch Number
� , C. Field Quality Control:
1. Request review of first finished room,item or area.
� 2. Use the first acceptable room, item or area as the project standard for the rest of the work.
3. Each room, item or area used as a project standard shall be no smaller than 100 sq. ft. in
surface area unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
, D. Color Consistency should be maintained in all materials by the manufacturer. All tinting is to
� be done by the manufacturer unless the Architect a roves other arran ements.
PP g
' � 1.4 SUBMITTALS
� i A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
,�
� I
March 3, 2000 09900-1 99048.00
�
B. Submit an actual paint sample for each color and finish to be provided. Refer to the finish �
schedule and/or the Drawings.
. �
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. �'
B. Storage of Materials:
1. Store materials in a protected area at a temperature between 35 degrees F. and 110 �
degrees F.
2. Open and mix materials in storage area. �
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS �
A. Apply coating only under the following prevailing environmental conditions:
1. Air and surface temperatures are not below 50 degrees F. or above 120 degrees F. unless �
otherwise approved by the manufacturer.
2. Surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F. above the dewpoint.
3. The atmosphere is relatively free of airborne dust. �
B. Cover or otherwise protect surfaces not to be painted.
�
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Insure that all materials used are in compliance with current State and Federal EPA regulations �
with regard to Volatile Organic Compounds (V.O.C.).
' B. Insure that all materials used meet NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) No. 101 Class �
A requirements for Flame Spread and Smoke Density.
C. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for environmental conditions under which
painting systems are applied. �
PART2 -PRODUCTS �
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACT'iTRERS ,
A. Materials shall be products of the Sherwin-Williams Co., as listed in Section 3.06, Painting and
Finishing Schedule. These establish performance requirements and a standard of quality, unless �
otherwise specified. PPG, Porter, & Ben�amm Moore Co. are accepted as equals. Equivalent
products, when submitted according to Section 01630 Product Options and Subshtutions, will
be considered.
B. Use products of the same manufacturer for each coating system and for each type of surface. �
�
March 3, 2000 09900-2 99048.00 �
�
� ; C. Requests for substitutions shall comply with all conditions in Section 01630 and the following:
� 1. Materials supplied by other non-specified suppliers will be considered if the following
prevailing conditions exist:
� a. Performance criteria of the specified materials are exceeded by the submitted
alternate materials as listed on the technical data sheets of each specified product.
b. The submittal must compare the performance criteria of the specified material with
�i that of the submitted material and be documented in a side by side manner for the
� Architect to review.
c. Substitute materials must be for complete systems and not individual products
combined with the specified materials, and the performance criteria for all products
' within a system must meet or exceed the specified materials.
d. Only one alternate submittal will be received for this Specification and must be
accompanied by a detailed statement of the sum to be added or deducted from the
� base bid should alternate materials be accepted.
�
2��2 MISCELLANEOUS
� ired to accom lish this work shall be first uali
A. Oils, turpentine, and other matenals requ p q ty
,
materials.
B. Primers shall be specified by manufacturer of the finish paints used and detailed in Section 3.06.
� � C. Thinners shall be of a type as recommended by the paint manufacturer for each product
specified in Section 3.06.
� ' D. Turpentine shall comply with requirements of Federal Specification TT-T-801.
E. Mineral Spirits shall comply with requirements of Federal Specification TT-T-291 Grade 1.
� �
213 MATERIAL PREPARATION
� i
i A. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturer's latest printed instructions.
B. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer's recommended shelf life.
� , C. Do not use mixed materials beyond manufacturer's recommended pot life.
, PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
� 3I1 PRE-WORK INSPECTION
i
� A. Examine surfaces to be coated and report any conditions that would adversely affect the
� appearance or performance of the coating systems and which cannot be put into an acceptable
� condition by tlie preparatory work specified m paragraph 3.02.
i
� ,
I
I
� March 3, 2000 09900-3 99048.00
�
B. Do not proceed with surface preparation and application until the surface is acceptable or �
authorization is given by the Architect to proceed.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
�
A. General: �,
1. Always follow manufacturer's recommendations for proper surface preparation for each
specified product. Faulty finish due to improper use of material or workmanship shall be �
replaced by the applicator at his own expense.
2. Dislodge dirt,plaster nibs, mortar spatter and other dry material by scraping or bnishmg.
Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming or blowing with �
high pressure air.
3. Remove oil, wax and grease by scraping off heavy deposits and cleaning with nineral
spirits or a hot tnsodium phosphate solution followed by a water rinse. �
4. Remove mold and mildew with a household bleach (Sodium Hypochloride) in water
solution: 7 parts water to 1 part bleach. Wash off bleach and allow to dry.
5. Verify that surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, wax, grease or �
other contaminants.
B. Steel: �
1. Remove all rust, mill scale and other foreign matter by the most appropriate method for
the service level and environment as recommended by the primer manufacturer.
C. Nonferrous Metal: �
1. SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning to remove all contaminants. �
D. Galvanized Metal:
1. Remove contaminants and protective mill coating by SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning or �
Steam Cleaning.
E. Concrete,Masonry and Cement Stucco: �
1. Allow new concrete and masonry to cure 28 days.
2. Scrape and grind fins and protrusions flush with surface. �
3. Patch holes and cracks flush with surface.
4. Rake mortar joints clean.
F. Plaster: t
1. Allow to cure for 28 days. �
2. Remove nibs and other protrusions by scraping flush with surface.
3. Patch voids and cracks with spackling compound to match texture of surface.
G. Gypsum Board: �
1. Sand joint compound smooth and flush with surface using fine grit sandpaper.
�
March 3,2000 09900-4 99048.00 �
i � ' .
� '
2. Fill nicks, scratches,holes and uneven spots with spackling compound and after dry, sand
flush with surface.
� H. Wood:
� 1. Remove surface deposits of sap and pitch by scraping and cleaning with mineral spirits.
2. Seal lrnots and pitch pockets with a product manufactured for this specific purpose.
3. Sand rough spots of smooth siding and finish woodwork.
, 4. After prime coat is dry, fill cracks, holes and scratches with suitable wood filler or
� spackling compound and when dry, sand flush with surface.
5. Sand lightly between coats.
� , I. Concrete Floors:
�
1. Prepare concrete floors by acid etching, ship blasting or mechanical sand blasting in
� � accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure.
�
3.3 APPLICATION
� I
A. Mix and thin materials in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
'� � � B. Apply materials at specified film thiclrness by method recommended by the manufacturer.
; C. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before recoating. i
I
, ' D. Vary color slightly for each successive coat.
,� � E. Cut in edges clean and sharp where work joins other materials or colors.
; F. Make finish coats smooth, uniform in color and free of brush marks, laps, runs, dry spray,
� overspray and skipped or missed areas.
G. Prime glazing stops and glazing beads before glass is installed.
� � H. Backprime exterior woodwork which is to receive paint finish, with exterior primer.
i
! I. Remove grilles, covers, and access panels and paint separately.
i � .
J. Replace identification markings when painting over or spattered.
� K. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible
through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint. Paint dampers exposed
immediately behind louvers, grilles, etc. to match face panels.
� L. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before backboards
are installed and equipment is mounted.
� I M. Remove electrical cover plates, hardware and other items not scheduled to be painted before
� painting surfaces on which such items are mounted. When painting is completed, re-mstall
� items.
� i
i
, I �
March 3,2000 09900-5 99048.00
�
N. Paint exterior metal housing of inechanical equipment on roof or ground where color is not �
compatible with adjoining facades or existing conditions as directed by Architect and in
accordance with materials specified in Section 3.06. �
O. Stencil all corridor partitions, smoke, fire, horizontal exit, exit enclosures and other rated
partitions with permanent 2 inch high letters identifymg the name and hour rating of the �
partition, approximately 8" above the ceiling every 20 feet on both sides of partition, or 10 feet
from corners, and identified once in each space having fire-rated or smoke walls. Identify
walls as applicable, "1-HOUR FIRE," "2-HOUR FIRE & SMOKE", "SMOKE RESISTNE
WALL TO DECK," etc. �
P. Paint one coat of Surface Sealer 540149 1.0 -2.0 mils on all walls scheduled to receive Type I
vinyl. ��
3.4 INSPECTION �
A. Request acceptance from the Architect of each coat before applying succeeding coats.
B. Touch-up and repair all work that is not acceptable to the Architect and request final �
acceptance. �
', 3.5 CLEANING � �
A. Remove paint spatters from glass,plumbing fixtures and adjoining surfaces. � ,
B. Repair any damage to coatings or surfaces caused by cleaning operations.
C. Remove debris from job site and leave storage area clean. �
3.6 PAINTING AND FII�IISHING SCHEDULE � I
A. Surfaces not to be painted unless otherwise scheduled:
l. Face brick. �
� 2. Pre-finished wall panels,partitions and ceiling tile.
3. Items with facto a lied final finish.
rY PP
4. Concealed ducts,pipes and conduit. �
B. Contractor is responsible for the protechon of surfaces determined not to be coated and to ,
correct defects produced in the process of application. The following schedule calls for the
recommended amounts of material to be applied. However, if sufficient hiding and protection is �
not accomplished, apply enough additional material to the satisfaction of the Archrtect. �equest �
final approval of each substrate and area.
C. Exterior Painting and Finishing Schedule: (EPS=Exterior Paint System)
EPS 1: Not Used. '�
EPS 2: Not Used. �
March 3,2000 09900-6 94048.00 �
i
,
� �
� ' EPS B: Steel, Galvanized Steel or Nonferrous Metals.
Alkyd Enamel. Finish: Semi-Gloss.
' lst coat-DTM Primer Finish B66W1.
2nd coat-Metalatex B42 Series.
i � ,' EPS 4: Not Used.
i EPS 5: Not Used.
� I
EPS 6: Not Used.
� EPS '
� 7: Not Used.
� �
��D. Interior Painting and Finishing Schedule: (IPS =Interior Paint System)
� i
' I IPS : Not Used.
IPS 3: Not Used.
� ' !
�
IPS 4: Not Used.
� IPS 5: Not Used.
IPS 6: Not Used.
� , � IPS 7: Not Used.
�
� ' IPS 8: Not Used.
I II'S 9: Gypsum Board
Water-Based Epoxy. Finish: Gloss, Semi-gloss.
� lst coat-ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
' 2nd&3rd coat-Water-Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70 Series
� � i
IPS 10: Not Used.
� i
' � IPS 11: Gypsum Wallboard
, � Latex Enamel-Semi-Gloss
1 j ' lst coat-ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200
2nd&3rd coat-ProMar 200 Latex Semi-Gloss B31W200
I ; IPS 12: Not Used.
� � IPS 13: Not Used.
'
�
� �
I
� I
March 3, 2000 09900-7 99048.00
�
IPS 14: Wood Surfaces to have Transparent Finish: �
lst coat- Wash Coat: One part sanding sealer B26V3, 3 parts mineral spirits. �
2nd coat- Stain: Interior Oil Stain A48 Series. Architect to select color.
3rd coat - If wood has open pores: Apply a high grade paste filler, tinted to match stained finish, in
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. �
4th coat- Sealer: ProMar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3
Sth coat- Finish: Oil Base Varnish A66F90
IPS 15: Pipe Identification. �
All piping within each mechanical room, fan room, boiler room, powerhouse and other
exposed areas shall be painted in its entirety with Metaltex B42 Series. '
1. Natural Gas-Vibrant Violet SW1545
2. Propane-Valencia SW1616 or Safety Orange �
3. Fuel Oil- Soft Sand SW1079
4. Standpipe and Sprinkler Piping-Theater Red SW1602 or Safety Red
5. Steam Condensate-Kona Orange SW1650 �
6. Chilled Water-Grass Green SW1728 or Safety Green
7. Condenser Water-Island Bay SW 1747
8. Hot Water Piping-Strawberry Cream SW1575 '
9. Domestic Cold Water-Keen Blue SW 1790 or Safety Blue
10. Domestic Hot Water-Rose Chintz SW 1587
11. Elevator Hydro Lmes-Acapulco Sun SW 1607
12. Chemical Feed Piping-Costa del Sol SW1679 or Safety Yellow �
Stenciling of all exposed and concealed piping shall be in accordance with Division 15, Mechanical
using the same coating materials. �
END OF SECTION 09900 �
�
�
�
� �
�
_ �
�
March 3,2000 09900-8 99048.00 �
il
,
� �
SECTION 09952 -VINYL WALLCOVERING
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
� 1:1 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
� 'I A. Only use materials which have Fire Hazard Classifications meeting requirements set forth
below.
I
� i
� B. Only employ qualified wallcovering mechanics for this work.
i
iC. Install test panels for full width and corner applications of vinyl wallcovering materials in areas
' i designated by Architect. Test panels accepted by the Architect will be used as the standard of
�� comparison for the work.
I
I
ll2 COORDINATION
'
A. Coordinate this work with other trades required to install work in areas to receive wallcovering.
' ; Do not install wallcovering until work which might cause damage to wallcovering has been
_ completed.
� 1!3 SUBMITTALS
� � A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit five copies of selected manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
� selected type of wallcovering. �
� �
I C. Submit five copies of certificate from adhesive manufacturer stating that adhesive will permrt
� removal of vinyl wallcovering from gypsum drywall without damage to drywall paper facing.
� I D. Submit two copies of selected manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed
� materials for transmittal to Owner. Include manufacturer's name, material brand name, and �
� ; color and pattern designation.
I �
� 1.4 DELNERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in original packaging clearly labeled to identify manufacturer, brand name,
quality and grade of material, and fire hazard classification.
� �
' B. Store materials in a dry, warm place in original, undamaged packaging. Do not store rolled
goods on ends.
, ,
C. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40° F and not less than 65° F for at least 24 hours
,I before installing.
� ,
j
' March 3, 2000 09952-1 99048.00
i '
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS �
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations concerning environmental conditions under �
which wallcovenngs should be installed.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS �
A. Do not apply materials in unclean areas, or where dust is being generated.
B. Areas to receive applications must have a reasonably constant temperature of 60-70 degrees F. �
measured at the floor level.
, �
� PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS ,
A. Fire Hazard Classification Required: iJL Label indicating fire hazard classification determined �
by ASTM E84. '
1. Flame spread: Not more than 25. �
2. Fuel contributed:Not more than 15.
3. Smoke developed:Not more than 450.
B. Provide wallcoverings of colors and patterns shown on the Finish Schedule on the drawings. �
2.2 WALLCOVERINGS �
A. See Finish Schedule for approved materials and manufacturers.
B. Class and Types: Comply with FS CCC-W-408. �
1. Type 1: Light duty, total weight 11 to 16 ounces/linear yard, 54 inches wide. Prime �
gypsum board walls one coat white primer in conjunction with Type I wallcoverings.
2. Type 2:Medium duty,total weight 19 to 27 ounces/linear yard, 54 inches wide.
3. Type 3: Tedlar (Dupont) or equal finish required on Type 2: Wallcovering, as per Finish �
Schedule.
23 ADHESNE
,
A. Type: An adhesive manufactured expressly for use with selected wallcoverings.
1. Mildew-resistant and non-staining to wallcovering. �
2. Strippable type adhesive is optional for Type I vinyl wallcovering as these walls are
painted one coat of primer. Strippable adhesive is required for all Type II & III vinyl �
wallcovering.
. �
March 3,2000 09952-2 99048.00 �
�i
1
;
I�I � PART 3 -EXECUTION
, ` 3.,1 INSPECTION
' i A. Before commencing work, inspect surfaces for defects which might adversely affect installation
' � or appearances. Do not commence work until defects have been corrected.
� B. Assure that proper environmental conditions exist before work is begun and while work is in
� ' progress.
� 3 2 PREPARATION
� A. Remove vinyl wallcovering from packaging and allow it to acclimatize for at least 24 hours
' � before installation.
i
I B. Check materials for defects before installing. Re�ect damaged matenals and promptly remove
i them from job site.
' �
I C. Remove switch and receptacle plates, and surface mounted fixtures from surfaces where vinyl
wallcovering is to be installed.
�
3.3 INSTALLATION
, i A. Install wallcovering before equipment and casework is placed if possible.
� '� B. Install materials only on clean dry walls.
, ' C. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
I D Use wallcoverin anels in exact order as cut from rolls. Use rolls in consecutive order as
' � • gP
� numbered by manufacturer. Fill in spaces above and below windows, above doors and similar
' areas in sequence from rolls.
� � E. Trim deeply textured patterns, or where patterns must be matched, on a flat work table.
I
, F. Hang smooth, non-matched patterns by applying strips on wall, overlapping the edges and
double cutting through both thiclrnesses.
' G. Apply fabric secure, smooth, clean and without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air
' pockets and ensure full bond to wall surface.
� H. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.
� � I. Make seams straight and plumb, and a minimum of 6 inches away from corners.
� ! J. Remove adhesive from surface at each seam before proceeding to next.Wipe clean. Do not use
� solvents.
�
;
� '
i
' March 3', 2000 09952-3 99048.00
� 1
K. Replace switch and receptacle plates, and surface mounted fixtures, and ensure that cut edges of �
wallcovering are completely concealed. Trim bottom of sheets 3" from finish floor to allow for
application of rubber base. �
L. If vinyl wallcovering of different color changes at outside corners, provide full height vinyl
cover corner strips, approved by Architect. �
M. Before final inspection,repair damaged wallcovering.
3.4 CLEANING '
A. Clean wallcoverings of adhesives, dust, dirt and other contaminants. - �
B. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean.
I END OF SECTION 09952
,
i ,
'
�
�
�
�
'
' ' I
'
�
�
March 3,2000 09952-4 99048.00 ,
:i
i �
!
SECTION 10161 -LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS
� ,
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
� 1!1 SUBMITTALS
�
', , ,i A. Samples: Submit representative samples:
1. One of each item of hardware including brackets, fastenings, and trim.
� 2. Three 12 x 12 in.pieces of selected colors of plastic laminate.
3. One 12 x 12 in. sample of panel showing finished edge on two sides and core
construction on two sides.
I, ' B. Shop Drawings:
;
� 1. Show fabrication and erection of partition assemblies, to extent not fully described by
manufacturer's data sheets.
� 2. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes.
3. Provide location template drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for
� � attachment of partitions.
� � C. Manufacturer's Data:
' ,� 1. Data Sheets.
� 2. Parts lists.
� ' 3. Installation instructions.
4. Maintenance procedures.
, I
1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
�
� A. Deliver items m manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging.
�
B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling,physical damage, or wetting.
' : C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
;
' PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.�1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS �
1 ' A. The Mills Co.
IB. Global Steel Products Corporation.
,
�
' March 3,2000 10161-1 99048.00 �
I
I
,
2.2 MATERIALS �
A. Partitions,Pilasters, Screens, and Doors: �
1. Plastic laminate: FS L-P-508,minimum thickness 0.050 inches.
2. Core: Particleboard, CS 236,Type I,Density B, Class 2. �
B. Adhesive: Urea resin,FS MMM-188.
C. Hardware and Fittings: '
1. Metal: Stamless steel,ASTM A167,Type 302/304.
a. Stainless steel: ASTM A167, bright polished finish, AISI Fmish Designation t
Number 4.
D. Fasteners: - ,
1. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588.
2. Masonry anchors: FS-FF-S-325. �
3. Exposed bolts and screws: Theft resistant, one way heads, finished to match hardware.
2.3 FABRICATION '
A. Partitions,Pilasters, Screens, and Doors: �
1. Bond plastic laminate in one piece sheets to core under continuous heat and pressure.
2. No sphces or jomts in faces. �
3. All edges sealed against moisture.
r 4. Conceal reinforcement for installation of hardware and fittings.
5. Notch recesses and drill holes for hardware and fittings. �
B. Pilasters, Supports and Hangers: Equipped with leveling devices, anchor studs, and loclang
nuts.
C. Pilaster Shoes: Plinths, one piece,hemmed top and bottom, formed to fit pilaster, equipped with �
concealed clips.
D. Wall Brackets: Panel brackets,two ear, "T" style, 1 in. stock. '
E. Panel to Pilaster Brackets: Stirrup style brackets. ,
F. Door Hardware:
1. Hinge: Self-lubricating, inward swing, surface mounted type, gravity return mo��ement, '
adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch: Combination rubber faced door strike and keeper, equipped for emergency access.
3. Coat Hook: Combination unit with hook and rubber tipped pin. �
4. Door Pull: Outswing door type for handicapped toilets.
'I G. Overhead Brace: Anti-gnp design. �
March 3, 2000 10161-2 99048.00 �
�
� PART3 -EXECUTI
�, ' ON
I
I
� 3.1 INSPECTION
� A. Check areas scheduled to receive partitions for correct dimensions, plumbness of walls and
' soundness of wall surfaces that would affect installation of holding brackets.
i B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of partitions.
, I
�C. Do not begin installation of partitions until conditions are satisfactory.
� 3.2 ERECTION
�iA. General:
' �� 1. Install artition ri idl strai ht lumb and level.
� P g Y, g ,P �
� 2. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 in.between pilasters and panels.
, 3. Provide clearances of not more than 1 in.between panels and walls.
� 4. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets, attached near top and
bottom of panel.
i� ' ; 5. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints
, where applicable.
� �
� 3IB. Overhead Braced Partitions:
; 1. Attach pilasters to supporting floor with pilaster supports.
� 2. Level,plumb, and tighten installation with leveling device.
; ; 3. Secure pilaster shoes in position.
j 4. Secure handrail to pilaster face with not less than two fasteners per face.
� 5. Set tops of doors parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
� �
END OF�SECTION 10161
, I
'
'
' �
� I .
� '
I
� March 3,2000 10161-3 99048.00
� �
' �
SECTION 10400 -INTERIOR SIGNAGE/EXTERIOR DOOR SIGNAGE
� I
' PART 1 -GENERAL
� 1.1 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
�
, � A. Manufacturer shall appoint a Project Manager to this job prior to bid date. Project Manager
� shall work with Architect to develop an adequate graphics system for the Facility.
Manufacturer shall submit a cost estimate of the graphics package, based on the preliminary
' � sign schedule, on or before bid date.
�� B. Manufacturer's Project Manager shall arrange a consultation with the Owner and or Architect to
review traffic flow, decision points and informational requirements. The preliminary graphics
' i system shall be presented to Owner for his input. After final graphics system is approved,
manufacturer shall submit final quotation. All changes to the preliminary system shall be
� approved by the Architect.
1 �
i C. Signage shall comply with the ADA Rules and Regulations as in Federal Register Volume 56,
No. 144 dated July 26, 1991.
� �
�
1.2 SUBMITTALS
I , ; A. Manufacturer's Project Manager shall submit six copies of final sign schedule and location
Idrawings to the Contractor upon receipt of Owner's approval of content.
' 'B. � Submittals to show letter size, style, and availability of matching existing sign types (if
; applicable).
� 1.3 WARRANTY
i
,A. � Manufacturer shall submit one year written warranty on all products.
' �
, PART 2-PRODUCTS
, 2.1
� A. Manufacturer:
� 1. Signs shall be made according to the IM System as manufactured by APCO Graphics,
Inc. or approved equal.
' �
I
� , ,
� March 3,2000 10400-1 99048.00
� i
B. General: �
1. The IlVI system is a series of modular inserts and holders. All parts shall be mjection '
' molded, high impact, fracture resistant, matte finish plastic. Wall holders shall be 1/2"
deep, sized to accept standard inserts. Inserts shall feature radiused corners and a
molded-in self aligning reveal. Inserts are retamed within the holders by specially �
designed PresLock fasteners which require a suction tool for removal and change.
C. Finishes:
1. Color shall be an integral part of each component. Painted and other "applied" finishes �
on molded parts are not acceptable. Standard imprinting shall be accomplished by using
a photographic screen printing technique whereby the image forms a chemical bond with �
the plaque surface. No handcutting of artwork or letterforms is acceptable. The finish is
to be matte, eggshell or nonglare. Colors as selected by Architect.
D. Typography: i
1. Primary message copy shall be Helvetica Medium, upper and lower case. Helvetica ,
Regular,upper and lower case, shall be used for secondary copy.
E. Contrast:
1. Light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. '
F. Tactile Signs: '
1. Tactile signs are those which are permanent signs including but not exclusive of room
number signs, restroom signs, department signs, office signs, fire exit door signs, '
elevator signs.
2. Where tactile signs are required, characters are to be raised 1/32" thiclrness above sign
surface and grade 2 braille is also to be on the sign. �
3. Letters to be at least 5/8" high,but no more than 2" high based on an upper case 'X'.
4. Type style to be upper case letters only.
, 5. Symbols: �
a. Where symbols are required, symbol must be accompanied by raised and braille
verbal message placed directly below the symbol. The border dimensions of the
symbol are to be 6". The symbol is not required to be tactile. '
G. Symbols of Accessibility:
1. Areas or rooms within the facility that are required to be identified as accessible '
according to section 4.1 of the ADA Rules and Regulations as in Federal �egister
Volume 56, No. 144 dated July 26, 1991 shall use the international symbol of �
accessibility.
2. Text telephones required by Section 4.1.3 of ADA Rules &Regulations mentioned above
shall be identified by the International TDD Symbol. If a facility has a public text '
telephone. Signage must be provided at all non-text telephones, directing persons to the
location of the nearest text telephone.
�
March 3, 2000 10400-2 99048.00 �
' i I
� I
� 3. Where main entrance is not handicapped accessible, signage is required directing persons
to nearest accessible entrance.
, � 4. When a toilet facility is not handicapped accessible, signage is required directing persons
� to the nearest accessible toilet facility.
�
' � H. Character Proportion and Height: �
� 1. Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a
j stroke width to height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10 using an upper case X to calculate
' ' ratios.
2. Letters and numbers on signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from which
they are read. Upper and lower case letters acceptable. Generally one inch of character
� , height for 50 feet of viewing distance.
�I. Sign Types:
' 1. Type IA-1, a wall mounted directional sign with floor identification, shall be used to
� � indicate directions at corridor intersections and/or major decision points. The IA-1 has
� � modular message panels and can be expanded or contracted with the number of listmgs
� , required.Insert width is constant at 18". Height of the unit varies with the quantity of
' message panels used at a particular location.
� 2. Type IA-2, a wall mounted directional holder and insert, shall be used as an alternate to
, IA-1 for those areas where minimal information is required. Insert width is 12", height is
6„ �
+ 3. Type IB-1, a ceiling mounted directional sign, shall be used to supplement the wall ''
�
' � mounted directional system in those locations where wall space is restricted. Messages
on the IB-1 can appear on one or two sides of each unit. The IB-1 is designed to accept
up to two lines of inessage copy per sign face. Insert width height is 7". Message copy
' ' must be 3" in height based on capital 'X'.
4. Type IC-1, a wall-mounted holder and insert, shall be used to display Fire Evacuation
Drawings. The 12" x 12" insert retains 8" x 12" paper map behind a clear acrylic cover.
, � Evacuation routes and fire equipment symbols are applied by facility staff with
� impressions transfer type.
' S. Type ID-1, a wall mounted floor level identification holder and insert, shall be located
� ' opposite elevator banks where an IA-1 does not appear. Insert size is 12" x 12".
� ; '6. Type ID-2, a wall-mounted fire warning holder and��insert, shall be located near the
elevator button panel. Insert width is 12 , height is 8 . The copy is to be raised 1/32
' with grade 2 braille below.
7. Type IE-1, a wall mounted identification holder and insert, shall be used to designate
areas of primary importance to the public. IE-1 features a large symbol reinforced with
! message copy. Insert size is 12" x 12".
, 8. Type IF-1, a wall mounted identification holder and insert, shall be used to designate
iareas of secondary importance to the public. This sign has small symbol reinforced with
� message copy. Insert size is 8" x 8".
� , 9. Type IG-1, a wall mounted identification holder and insert, shall be used to designate
, Rest Rooms. Insert size is 8" x 8". This sign has symbol with copy raised 1/32" and
� grade 2 braille below.
' , 10. Type IK-1, a wall mounted floor identification holder and insert, shall be located inside
the stairwell adjacent to the fire door. Insert size is 6" x 6". The copy is raised 1/32"
� with braille below.
�
'
, March 3, 2000 10400-3 99048.00
i '
11. Type IL-1, a fire exit holder and insert, shall be mounted on the corridor side of each exit �
door. Red insert standard 8" x 8", integrally colored white acrylic letters are chemically
bonded to the insert. The copy is raised 1/32" with braille below. '
12. Type IM-1 a wall mounted room identification holder and insert, shall be used to
designate individual rooms. This sign has message copy only. Insert size is 8" x 8".
� The copy is to be raised 1/32"with grade 2 braille below.
13. Type IN-1, a wall mounted informational holder and insert, shall be used when the "in '
use" feature is required to discourage interiuptions of those using the room. Insert size is
14. Type IO-1, a wall-mounted holder and insert, shall be used to number patient rooms. The
IO-1 has two windows that accept 15/16" x 8" message strips. The IO-1 is specially ,
molded to allow strips to be inserted and removed without removing the insert from the
holder. Insert size is 8" x 8". The copy is to be raised 1/32" with grade 2 braille below. '
15. Type IP-1, a wall-mounted holder and insert, shall be used to number rooms within a
department. Insert size is�6" x 6". The copy is to be raised 1/32" with grade 2 braille
below. '
16. Type IQ-1, a wall mounted holder and insert, shall be used in stairs serving four or more
, stories, in place of sign IK-1. Sign shall be within stair well, at each landing. The sign
shall indicate the floor level, the terminus at the top and bottom of the stair enclosure and �
the identification of the stair. The sign shall also state the floor level of and direcnon to,
exit discharge. Sign shall be mounted to be visible with door open or closed. See detail
on signage schedule. '
17. Type IR-1, wall mounted holder and insert shall be used on corridor side of stair�vays or
other main doorways that do not provide building exit in case of emergency. Sign shall
have copy"No Exit" where "No" is 2"high and"Exit" is 1"high.
18. Type IZ-1,wall mounted dimensional lettering, specify height and depth of charac�ers. '
PART 3 -EXECUTION '
3.1 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR SIGNS
1
1. Wall mounted signs shall be installed plumb and level. The center point of the signs
shall be 60" above the finished floor. Signs are to be mounted on wall adjacent�.o latch ,
side of door, including double leaf of doors. Sign shall be placed on nearest adjacent
wall. Type IA signs are generally wall-mounted at corridor intersections, 6" from the
edge of the wall or in elevator lobbies. Type IC signs are located in elevator lobbies and '
where required. Vinyl foam tape is standard as the method of attachment to smooth
nonporous surfaces. Silicone adhesive is used with vinyl foam tape on textured or
irregular surfaces.
2. Type IB signs are attached to the ceiling grid with a projecting fixture. A special bracket '
is built into the module, which slides onto an aluminum track that mechanically fastens
to the ceiling T-Bar grid. Special end caps lock the module in place. Ceiling height
should range from 7'6" to 9'0" for Type IB to be most effective. '
END OF SECTION 10400 ,
,
March 3, 2000 10400-4 99048.00 '
I �
, � i
� �
SECTION 10800 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
�
' PART1 -GENERAL
' 1.1 ITEMS FURNISHED TO OTHERS FOR INSTALLATION
i
i A. Furnish grab bars and feminine napkin disposals for installation in laminated plastic toilet
, partitions.
' 1.2 � SUBMTTTALS
i
' iA. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300.
;B. Submit certificate from an independent testing organization verifying grab bar load bearing
; �strength.
� �;C. Submit four copies of manufacturer's product data sheets illustrating every type of item
� specified,and installation instructions for each type.
, D. At final construction inspection turn over keys to lockable cabinets to Architect. �
' I
� ' i
1.3I DELNERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
' ;A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to
' receive them.
B. Deliver and store individually packaged accessories.
' 1 ;
�C. Maintain protective packaging until individual accessones are ready to be installed.
�
I '
, 1.4� KEI'ING
IA. Key all cabinets and other accessories with identical lock. Furnish two keys for each lock.
1
t 1.Si GUARANTEE
I
�A. Mirrors: Manufacturers shall guarantee mirrors for five years against silver spoilage.
� i. Deliver guarantee, signed by a responsible official of mirror manufacturer to Architect.
I
,f
, �
�
� �
' March 3,2000 10800-1 99048.00
i
'
PART 2 -PRODUCTS �
T RS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFAC URE '
A. Model numbers listed below are taken from Gamco catalog (unless otherwise noted) and are
used to establish quality. '
B. Bobrick
C. American Specialties,Inc. '
D. Products of other manufacturers may be submitted for approval by Architect. '
2.2 MATERIALS '
A. Stainless Steel
1. Type 302/304,ASTM A167. �
2. Finish:No.4 satin.
2.3 FASTENERS '
A. Wood Screws, Machine Screws, and Bolts: Stamless steel, commercial quality, of proper sizes '
to develop full holding powers.
1. Where heads will be exposed: One way oval heads. '
2. Where heads will be concealed: One way flat heads.
B. Masonry and Concrete Anchors; Phillips Red Head, self—drilling type.
'
PART 3 -EXECUTION
1
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect surfaces and recesses, where accessories are to be installed, for defects which might '
adversely affect a proper installarion. Do not mstall accessories until defects are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLING '
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and approved shop �
drawings.
B. Install items at heights and in locations indicated on drawings. '
SEE ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE ON FOLLOWING PAGE
�
March 3, 2000 10800-2 99048.00 '
fl
, I I
il
� SCHEDULE FOR
T�OILE &BATH ACCESSORIES
'I ,
' m er li w ke 1 T x
MI del nu b s sted belo are ta n from Gamco,Dal as, e as catalog unless otherwise noted.
� A. Feminine Napkin Disposal Unit: Model No.NV-1, surface mounted.
� B. ' Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Model No. 5161, surface mounted.
� ' C. Grab Bars(Handicapped Toilets): Model No. 150CX 42T and 150CX 36T. (42" side bar w/36"
backwall bar). �
� � D. Robe Hook: Model No. 5154. ,
I
, � E. Metal Framed Mirror: Model No. C-18x36, 18 inches wide by 36 inches high.
I F. Towel Cabmets: Model No.TD-2 or TD-2-8.
'' G. Partition Mounted Double Sided Feminine Napkin Disposal Unit: Model No.ND-6.
H. Soap Dispenser: GA 58AP wall mount.
' !
j I. Countertop Soap Dispenser.
i
' � J. Partition Mounted Multi-roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser: T'I'D-7.
I �
' END OF SECTION 10800
� �
�
� �
� �
, ��
.1
� I
� �
March 3, 2000 10800-3 99048.00
�
�
I
� �
� �
S i CTION 10850 -CORIAN COUNTER TOPS &BOWLS
' I
PART 1 -GENERAL
� 1.�1 SUBMTTTALS
I
' I
� A. Shop drawings showing full size details, sections, dimensions, jointing, bonding, anchoring,
connections to other work and other pertinent details and notes.
� , B. Submit 12 in. sq. samples showing color, shading and variation. Only lavatory counter tops
� equal to or exceedmg standard samples will be accepted.
' C. Product certification and independent laboratory test results shall comply with ANSI Z124.1,
' Z124.3 - 1987.
i
� PART 2-PRODUCTS
!
�
� 2.1 Counter tops shall be molded of DuPont "Corian" and shall be complete with an integrally cast
bowl, overflow, drain openings, openings for plumbing fixtures including drain operator,
backsplash and large endsplashes.
' ; �I
2.2 Fittings shall be as specified in the plumbing specifications.
� �
2.3 Surfaces exposed to view shall have smooth polished finish.
' 2.4 Care shall be taken in casting bowl to obtain uniform marblization to the surface as well as flat
� area. Failure to do so will result in rejection of entire lavatory.
� � �
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
3.1 Where lavatory splash backs and sides contact walls, apply silicone antibacterial caulking.
� END OF SECTION 10850
1
'
' I
i
�
� March 3,2000 10850-1 99048.00
i
'
� ,
SECTION 11131 -PROJECTION SCREENS
1 �
PART 1 -GENERAL
'I
1 I
1.1 DESCRIPTION
' i A. Electrically operated remote controlled screens. The electrical service and connection to the
unit shall be provided under Division 16, Electrical.
' PART 2-PRODUCTS
�
;
' 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Da-Lite Screen Company of Warsaw, Indiana or approved equal.
' I
2.2 MATERIALS
' I
�A. Provide units for the type of mounting shown on the drawings, completely housed in a metal
lined wood case with double top for extra rigidity and sound deadening. Provide complete
' I screen units listed by U.L. and bearing re-examination markers by U.L. Mount top of screen
fabric to metal roller supported on brackets with self aligning bearings.
' B. Fabncate wood case with metal-lined motor compartment, hinged or removable access panel to
I motor compartment, electrical outlet box, and finished with manufacturer's standard prime coat.
�,C. I Provide motor units of the size and capacity recommended by the manufacturer. Use instant
� ; reversing, gear driven motor with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal
, overload protection and limit switches to automatically stop screen in "up" and"down"position.
Provide a three-button remote control switch (up, down and stop) in a box with cover plate for
' flush wall mounting. Stop action to be positive to prevent coasting.
�D. Screen fabric shall be manufacturer's standard, flame and mildew resistant to maximum size
' limitations, and glass beaded with chemical coating.
E. Projection screen shall be Senior Electro170 x 70 inches.
' � EXECUTION
PART 3
� I
3.1 INSTALLATION
IA. Install projechon screen units and accessories at the locations shown in accordance with the
' manufacturer's instructions. Install level, plumb, secure and at the proper height. Cooperate
! with other trades for securing projection screen units to finished surfaces.
'
� March 3,2000 11131-1 99048.00
I
'
B. Provide protections for installed units so that they will be in perfect operating condition,without ,
damage,blemishes, or indication of use at completion of project.
,
END OF SECTION 11131
,
'
'
'
,
�
,
'
�
�
,
'
1
, '
'
March 3, 2000 11131-2 99048.00 �
!
1
'
SECTIO 12300 -HOSPITAL CASEWORK
' I
PART 1 -GENERAL
,I
' 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
- I
' I A. Provide all plastic laminate casework and accessory items as specified herein. Refer to plans
for specific details and requirements.
' B. General Conditions: The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special
Conditions and General Requirements apply to all work in tlus Division. Refer to other
Sections,Divisions, and Schedules for work in connection with the Section.
I
1 �
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
' A. General millwork and custom cabinetry unless specified herein or so noted on plans as included
within this Section.
' �B. Rubber,vinyl or other finished toe base.
a
'C. Locks master keyed to room doors and other special locks.
� �I D. Blocking in walls.
' �E. Sinks, fittings, traps, stops, tail pieces, vacuum breakers and other fixtures, electrical and
� mechanical runs and connections.
�F. Service Connections to Equipment: Final setting of non- integral trim and utility connections to
' ' equipment under this Section (including waste) are provided under other relevant Sections of
.i the projeot Specifications, governing the utility.
�
' 1.3 SUBMTTTALS
� ;A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
;B. Submit four copies of shop drawings for approval. Show materials, dimensions, sink locations,
' fittings and other accessories. Show relation of material furnished under this Section with
i connecting or related work of other suppliers and trades. -
�C. Samples of colors shall be submitted upon award of contract for selection and coordination with
' other suppliers. Architect may request and retam samples and catalog cuts as required for
accessory and special items.
�
,
i
M�rch 3,2000 12300-1 99048.00
�
I
,
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS '
A. Drawings and Specifications are based upon casework as manufactured by LSI Corporation of '
America, Inc., 2100 Xenium Lane, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55441; Case Systems, Inc.,
Midland, Michigan 68641. Construction and design shall be L44 series with 3 millimeter
edges. Equal senes by T.M.I. or other manufacturers will be accepted provided they meet '
Specifications.
B. Casework of other nationally recognized casework manufacturers may be considered for '
approval provided a written request is received ten (10) days prior to opemng of bids.
Mimmum requirements that MUST be met in order to be considered for approval are.
1. All backs must be 3/8 inch thick and must be fully let in on all four sides of cabinet. The '
back must be sealed with hot melt glue. Stapled backs will not be accepted.
2. Cabinet sides may not extend to floor. Cabinet base shall be exterior grade plywood.
3. All edges of doors and drawer fronts shall be 3 millimeter, color to match adjacent plastic '
laminate color with both edges and all 4 corners radiused to 1/8". Edges shall be
� polished to prevent scuff marks. Self edge or"T" mold will not be acceptable.
4. All cabinets to be fastened to the wall through a 1 inch thick mstallation rail on back of ,
� cabinet.
5. All cabinets must have a minimum 3/4 inch thick core before laminate. Finished thickness
shall be not less than 13/16 inch. '
6. Provide stretchers between all drawers in drawer cabinets.
7. Tops and bottoms of all wall cabmets shall be 3/4 inch minimum thick.
8. Door/Drawer Spreaders: Provide minimum 3/4" X 6" X full width puriy finished cabinet ,
body spreaders immediately behind all door/drawer and multiple drawer horizontal �omts
to maintain exact body dimensions and close off reveal. Front edge to be 1 mm flat edge
PVC to match door and drawer edge.
9. All exposed interior of open cabinets or behind glass doors shall be decorative laminate '
in same color and finish as cabinet exteriors.
10. All cabinet elevations shall have a nominal 1 inch scribe where elevation abuts w�all. On
wall to wall elevations, center the cabmets and put equal scribes on both ends. '
11. Countertop end splashes shall be installed at all conditions where cabinet abuts wall.
12. All countertops shall be scribed to the wall be means of a 1/2 inch scribe strip at the top
of the backsplash. �
13. After countertops and cabinets are properly scribed to wall, all joints at tops and cabinets
will be caulked with polyseam seal clear adhesive caulk or equal. Caulking is a part of
� this Section. ,
C. Manufacturers requesting approval shall submit evidence of at least 10 years experience and
installations for similar type of pro�ect. Manufacturers shall also show evidence of financial '
, stability, plant facilities, catalogs and specifications. Full-sized samples, catalogs and
, specifications, shall be submitted with wntten request for approval. Samples may be
impounded by Owner and retained until completion of�ob for verification and compliance of
' Specifications. �
D. ArchitecdOwner's opinion and decision shall be final in the evaluation of manufacturer's
products for approval to bid, or award of contract.
'
� '
March 3, 2000 12300-2 99048.00 ,
I
� �� I
��
' 1.5 SCHEDULING
IA. j Schedule delivery only when casework can be promptly installed.
' �
;B. Do not install casework until wall and floor finishes have been completed.
'I �
' PART 2;PRODUCTS
i
I2.1 MATERIALS
�I A. Laminated Plastics/Finishes:
, �
� 1. High pressure plastic laminate and exposed interiors of open cabinets or behind glass
' � doors,VGS:028 grade, for exposed surfaces to meet NEMA Standards.
2. Color Selection Available (See Finish Schedule):
! 3. Plastic Laminate Balancmg Sheet (Back of Door or Drawer): Manufacturer's standard
' , � heavy gauge plashc laminate to provide balanced construction. Backing sheet shall be
, textured. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
' 4. Counter Top High Pressure Plastic Laminate:
i
'
a. High pressure plastic laminate, HGS .048 per NEMA Standards. Color as per
finish schedule.
b. Provide heavy gauge neutral colored backing sheet for balanced construction
' i (unsupported countertop over 5'-0" only).
5. Polyester Laminate (Interior Liner):
, a. Thermosetting acid resistant polyester resin impregnated laminate, permanently
, � bonded to substrate.
' b. Polyester laminate shall be 9 to 11 mills in thiclrness 62% resin content, color fast
and putty in color.
i c. Putly colored or manufacturer's standard polyester laminate for semi-exposed
� � cabinet interiors behind doors and drawers.
, � I d. Must meet:NEMA Test LD3-1995.
B. High Performance Particle Board Core:
� 1. Particle board shall be of 471b. density, and balanced construction with moisture content
not to exceed 8%. All particle boards shall meet or exceed the requirements for its type
' and classification under Commercial Standard CS-236-66 Federal Specification LL- B-
800A,ASTM-D-1037-87, and ASTM A208.1-1993,M3.
' C. Hardboard: Hardboard shall meet or exceed Commercial Standards, CS-251 and Federal
Specification LLL-B-00810. Tempered Hardboard 1/4" thick-smooth both sides.
' ' D. Edging:
1. Solid color thru laminate matching cabinet face, machine applied to all drawer fronts and
' doors and flat edge design for cabinet body.
' ! �
i �
' March 3 2000 12300-3 99048.00 I
_ i '
'
E. Hardware: '
1. Hinges: '
a. Totally concealed hinges of all metal construction, Blum #71.6530, 170 degree ,
swing. Fully adjustable for clockwise, counterclockwise, toe in and out door
alignment. Provide base plates to maintain 1/8 inch reveals between door/drawers
within the same cabinet, and between doors of adjoining cabinets. Doors to be self ,
closing, and fitted with silencer bumpers.
b. One pair per door to 48 inch height. One and one- half pair over 48 inches in
height. Hinge to accommodate 13/16 inch thick laminated door, and allow 270
degree swing. '
c. Finish to be LH-301 Dull Chrome for fixed cabinetry.
2. Pulls: Hafele pulls#103.21.630,finish—nickel. '
3. Sliding Door Hazdware:
a. Sliding glass doors 1/4 inch thick: Stylmark #910007 double track rolling door ,
assembly.
b. Sliding glass doors 3/4 inch thick Stile and Rail Doors; Sterling No. 602 top '
mounted track with dual roller hangers. Vertical adjustment for accurate
alignment.
4. Drawer Slides: ,
a. Standard Drawers: LSI Lab Series Slide, Epoxy Powder coated to match drawer
body color, with positive in-stop, out-stop and out-keeper to maintain drawer in '
80% open position. Captive nylon rollers, both front and rear. Minimum 100 lb.
load rating, full extension. Provide adjuster to regulate body slide sway.
b. Shallow Drawers: Grant No. 328,full extension. '
c. File Drawers: Grant No. 329,full extension.
d. File Drawer Followers: Knap &Vogt No.476 follower and track assembly.
e. MRI room drawers-Wood slides with stops. '
5. Catches:
a. LH-340 5 lb. magnetic catch for base and wall cabinets. Provide two 7 lb. pull at �
each tall cabinet door.
b. LH-345 roller catch for mobile cabinets.
6. Adjustable shelf clips: To have locking device to prevent shelf slide-off and to be of such �
design as to support a tested load of minimum 150 lbs. each without failure, ref�renced
1.04.D. Cabinet interior sides shall be flush,without shelf system permanent projection. '
7. Wardrobe Rod: To be 1/16 inch chrome steel rod - LH- 362, supported by #73� flange �
chrome.
�
March 3, 2000 12300-4 99048.00 '
i
' j
�
' 8. Coat Hooks:
' I a. Single coat hooks -Ives No. 581 Satin Aluminum, or ABS plastic,putty colored.
b. Double Coat Hooks-Ives No.405 Satin Aluminum, or ABS plastic,putty colored.
i
' 9. Locks: Shall be disc tumbler lock keyed alike and master keyed. Dull chrome finish.
' a. Hin ed doors and drawers National Lock No. 68-504.
g ,
b. Sliding doors, 13/16 inch thick,National Lock No. 68-057.
� c. 1/4 inch sliding panel doors,K&V#963.
!F. Detailed Requirements for Cabinet Construction:
' 1. Sub-Base:
' I a. Cabinet Sub-Base: To be separate and continuous (no cabinet body sides-to-floor),
I waterproof plywood with concealed fastening to cabinet bottom. Ladder-type
construction; of front, back and intermediates, to form a secure and level platform
' � to which cabinets attach.
I
2. Cabinet Top and Bottom-Wall and Base:
I , a. Base Cabinet bottoms to be putty colored polyester laminated particle board
interior side, 3/4 inch thick with phenolic neutral colored backer sheet on
' concealed side.
' b. Solid sub-top shall be furnished for all lower base cabinets to be phenolic overlay
neutral color.
c. Exterior exposed wall cabinet bottoms shall be putty colored polyester laminate.
, ' Assembly devices shall be concealed on bottom side of wall cabinets.
d. Exposed body edges shall be flat edge (1 mm).
� e. If wall cabinet is over 54"A.F.F. the cabinet bottom is to match the face color.
' , 3. Cabinet Ends
' a. 3/4 inch thick particle board with polyester laminated interior side, color as
selected from manufacturer's standards, and phenolic neutral colored backer sheet
on concealed side. Library stack end panels 1 inch thick. Holes drilled for
adjustable shelves 1-1/4 inches on center.
' b. Exposed edges shall be matching flat edge.
I � c. Exposed exterior cabinet ends to be laminated with plastic laminate.
' 4. Fixed and Adjustable Shelves:
a. Concealed Shelving: Polyester laminated particle board two sides. Leading
' exposed edge of shelves to be edged with Flat Edge PVC. Color of shelf and
edging to match cabinet interior liner.
b. Exposed Shelving: High pressure larr�inate, VGS .028 on both sides to match
' cabinet exterior. Leaving exposed edge of shelves to be edged with Flat Edge
PVC, color to match cabinet edging.
c. Thiclrness: 3/4 inch standard shelving to 36 inches wide, one inch shelving 36
' , inches wide and over.
I
� March 3,2000 12300-5 99048.00
1
5. Cabinet Backs: '
a. Standard cabinet back to be 3/8 mch thick, for use on all cabinets with or without ,
doors. Rear, unexposed, side of back to receive continuous hot melt glue at�oint
between back and sides/top/bottom for sealing against moisture and vermin, and
further contribute to case rigidity. ,
b. Exposed exterior backs shall be 3/4 inch particle board faced with high pressure
plastic lammate.
6. Doors and Drawer Fronts: �
a. Plastic laminated doors and drawer fronts to be 13/16 inch thick for all hinged and
sliding doors. Core material to be 3/4 inch thick, 47 lb. density particle board ,
bonded on exterior with high pressure laminate and with putty colored or
manufacturer's standard heavy gauge balance sheet on interior face.
b. Exposed edges shall be as specified in Section 1.04. '
c. Stile and Rail doors to be 13/16 inch thick plastic laminate door with 1/4 inch plate
glass. Available hinged or sliding. All exposed edges to be trimmed an� glazed
with extruded vinyl glazing bead. '
d. Sliding glass doors to be 1/4 inch thick plate glass with ground and polished edges,
fitted with etched and anodized aluminum shoes and nylon rollers.
7. Drawers:
'
a. Drawer fronts shall be applied to separate drawer body component sub-fron�.
b. Sides and back of drawers to be 1/2 inch thick puriy colored polyester laminated ,
fiberboard, sub-front same, except 5/8 inch thick.
c. Exposed top edge to be Flat Edge PVC, color per finish schedule.
d. Drawer sides to be dadoed to receive front and back, machine squared a�d held '
under pressure while glued and pinned together.
e. Drawer bottom shall be putty color polyester laminate, 1/4 inch thick, housed and
glued into front sides and back. Underside of drawer to receive continuous hot '
melt glue at joints between bottom and back/sides/front for sealing and rigidity.
� Reinforce drawer bottoms as required with mtermediated spreaders.
f. Paper storage drawers fitted with hood at back. '
' g. All drawers shall have roller guides as specified under Paragraph 2.O 1.E.4.
8. Vertical and Horizontal Dividers: One of the following as indicated by cabinet number: '
a. Tempered hardboard 1/4 inch thick, smooth both faces. Secured in cabinet wrth
' molded plastic clips.
b. Putty colored polyester laminated particle board 1/2 inch thiclrness. Secured in '
cabinet with molded plastic clips. Edges to be PVC, color to match cabinet.
G. Countertops � '
1. See Section 10850 for Corian countertops and refer to the drawings for locations.
'
'
March 3,2000 12300-6 99048.00 �
1
� I
I
' 2. High pressure plastic laminate, HGS .048, bonded to particle board core. Thiclrness as
shown on plans and Specifications. Underside to be properly balanced with heavy gauge
� backing sheet. Edges shall be high pressure plastic laminate to match horizontal surface
, color. Furnish countertops in design as shown on drawings. Provide continuous tops for
counter type cabinets fixed m a line.
�i ' H. Worlananship:
� 1. All exposed exterior cabinet surfaces shall be 1/32" high pressure plastic laminate, U.S.
' according to Finish Schedule, minimum 48 colors/wood grains. Laminate
surface/backer to core under controlled conditions,by approved and regulated laminating
methods to assure a premium lamination. Natural settmg adhesives that cure thru
' chemical reaction are required. Methods requirmg heat are not allowed; "contact"
methods of laminating are not allowed.
2. Cabinet parts shall be accurately machined and bored for premium quality grade joinery
' construction utilizing automatic machinery to insure consistent sizing of modular
components.
3. End panels shall be doweled to receive bottom and top. Back shall be fully housed into
I ' cabinet sides,top and bottom to insure rigidity and a fully closed cabinet.
4. Drawer bottom shall be fully housed into sides,back and sub-front. Sides of drawer to be
fully dadoed to receive drawer back, locked in fully to sub-front, fastened with glue and
mechanical fasteners.
' S. 3/4 inch thick hand rails shall be applied to back side of all wall,base and tall cabinets for
extra rigidity and to facilitate installation. Rails, cabinet backs, drawer bottoms shall be
' ' addihonally secured by a continuous bead of hot melt glue.
� 6. All cases shall be square,plumb and true.
7. Provide removable back panels and closure panels for plumbing access where shown on
drawings.
' ,
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' I
3.1 COORDINATION
, �A. Coordinate work of this Section with related work of other Sections as necessary to obtain
proper installation of all items.
' B. Verify site dimensions of cabinet locations in building prior to fabrication.
' 3.2 INSTALLATION
�
�A. Storage and Protection: casework shall be protected in transit. Store under cover in a ventilated
' building not exposed to extreme temperature and humidity changes. Do not store or install in
building until concrete,masonry, and plaster work is dry.
' 'B. Worlanen: Install casework under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative with
factory trained mechanics authorized by manufacturer.
'
March 3, 2000 12300-7 99048.00
'
' i
C. Worlananship: '
1. Erect casework straight, level and plumb and securely anchored in place. Scribe and '
closely fit to adjacent work. Cut and fit work around pipes, ducts, etc.
2. Install all items complete and adjust all moving parts to operate properly.
3. Leave surface clean and free from defects at time of final acceptance. ,
D. Guarantee: All materials to be guaranteed for period of one year from manufacturer's defects
and worlananship.
E. Clean up: Remove all cartons, debris, sawdust, scraps, etc., and leave spaces clean and all �
casework ready for Owner's use.
�
END OF SECTION 12300
'
� ,
'
�
'
. �
'
� ,
1
'
,
,
March 3, 2000 12300-8 99048.00 '
' �
, I
SECTION 12510-BLINDS &SHADES
'
PART -GENERAL
� �
1,1 SUBMITTALS
' ' A. Samples: One complete,returnable,blind or shade of each type utilized.
i
� B. Shop Drawings:
' 1. Dimensions of openings scheduled to receive blinds or shades, based on field
. measurements.
' � 2. Illustrations of special components not detailed on manufacturer's data sheets.
3. Details of divisions between adjacent units,abutments at corners,head and sill.
�� ' ; C. Manufacturer's Literature: Manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions,for
� each type of unit utilized.
' 1�.2 EXTENT OF WORK
� A. It is the intent of this document that all glazed openings on exterior of building in occupied
' � spaces be equipped with venetian blinds.
' PART 2-PRODUCTS
I
2�1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
a
I A. Levolor Lorentzen,Inc., "Riviera".
' � B. Marathon Carey-McFall Co., "Bali-Custom mini blinds".
' 2.2 HORIZONTAL VENETIAN BLINDS
� i A. Slats: Spring-tempered aluminum.
' ; 1. Minimum thickness: 0.008 inch.
2. Slat Width: 1 in.nominal.
� 3. Corner Radii:Manufacturer's standazd.
' ' B. Head Rail:
' 1. Material: Steel.
2. Shape: Manufacturer's Standazd "U" Channel.
3. Minimum Thickness: 0.024 inch.
' 4. Cross-braced for rigidity.
' March 3, 2000 12510-1 99048.00
.I
'
5. Equipped with top brace,end braces,top cradle,and accessories for installation. '
C. Bottom Rail: ,
1. Material: Steel.
2. Shape: Manufacturer's standard top surface contoured to match slat. ,
3. Minimum Thickness: 0.028".
4. Reinforced to prevent twisting or sagging.
5. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard metalor plastic. '
D. Tapes:
1. Type: Manufacturer's standard braided ladder. ,
2. Size and rung spacing to match slats.
E. Tilter:
1. Manufacturer's standard enclosed, lubricated mechanism with 180 degree rilt range,
designed to hold slats at set angle: ,
2. Worm and gear drive actuated by wand.
F. Cords: '
1. Manufacturer's standazd braided nylon. �
2. Plastic tassels attached to ends.
' G. Cord Locks: Manufacturer's standard crash roof rollin e desi ed to h 1 �
p g typ , gn o d blind in full
Y
raised position.
H. Equalizers: Self-aligning,nylon,designed to maintain blind slats in horizontal position. '
I. Exposed Metal Finish: '
1. Primer: Zinc chromate.
2. Finish: Baked a d resin enamel.
�' '
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Check that surfaces to which work will be secured are sound and free of irregularities ,
interfering with installation.
B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. '
3.2 INSTALLATION '
� A. Install blinds and shades in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures, and
� accepted shop drawings.
'
`March 3,2000 12510-2 99048.00
'
i
� ;
�
� ; B. Assure adequate clearance to permit unencumbered operation.
� ' C. Position units plumb and true,and securely anchor in place with brackets, clips, and fasteners.
3.3 ADJUST'MENT
' I
� A. Adjust clearances and overlaps to insure free operation.
' B. Replace damaged items with new material.
C. Repair surfaces damaged by improper installation.
'
3.4 CLEANING
' � A. Remove protective coverings and devices.
i
IB. Clean soiled components and leave work site free of debris.
� '
i
END OF SECTION 12510
� I
� ;
�� i
I i
I
�
1 I
i
�
'
� '
'
;
' I
i ,
' f
I
'I
' March 3, 2000 12510-3 99048.00
�
, �
��, � �
' SECTION 15010
I � ; GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
' i ,
■ �.
�PART - 1GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
�' I
', ' �A. All labor, materials,tools and services for a complete installation of equipment and
, � ' systems contained in contract documents.
� �B. Principal features of work included are: -
� j 1. Modifications and additions to the existing heating, ventilating, air-conditioning -
�� ! systems, controls, ductwork and piping systems.
2. Adjusting fan speed, replacing belts, replacing drives and motors on existing air
� � handlers, return fans and exhaust fans to accommodate modifications.
� 3. Cleaning coils on existing air handlers and refurbishing controls on existing units
I
- ' where indicated on drawings or in specifications.
1 �'� 4. Firestopping all mechanical,plumbing and fire protection system penetrations
through fire and/or smoke rated assemblies.
' , , 5. Automatic temperature controls.
� 6. Additions and modifications to existing control system.
� 7. Plumbing system and related piping insulation.
' 8. Connect to existing sanitary sewer, domestic water and storm sewer inside the
� building.
9. Connect to existing water main and fire main inside the building.
� i 10. Excavating and backfilling for site utilities and other underground mechanical
work.
1 l. Furnish anchor bolts, sleeves, supports and similar items to be built into concrete
� ' and masonry.
� 12. Preparation and submittal of inechanical maintenance manuals, shop drawings and
� ; product data.
� �� 13. Fire protection system.
14. Sealing (Hardcasting) of existing ductwork joints where indicated on the drawings.
, 1 S. Demolition of existing piping, ducts and associated equipment which will not be _
� i reused.
� I
� � 1.02 ��RELATED WORI�
;A. Section 01045: Cutting and patching.
, i
� IB. Section 01300: Submittals.
�
� C. Section 01300: Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples.
March 3, 2000 15010 - 1 99048.00
� �
� I
�
D. Section 01600: Storage and Protection.
E. Section 02050: Demolition. �
F. Sections 02222: Utilities Excavating and Backfilling. �
G. Section 07270: Firestopping.
H. Section 07600: Flashin and Sheet Metal. Flashin fo ec I�
g ( g r m hanical rtems penc,trating
walls and roof.) �
�
I. Section 09900: Painting.
J. Section, 16923: Individually Mounted Starters. �
K. Division 16: Power wiring for Division 15 equipment including installing and �
corinecting starters to be furnished under Division 16.
L. Division 16: All control wiring above 50-volts and associated conciuit for Division 15 �
equipment to be furnished under Division 16.
M. Demolition of e�cisting pipes, ducts and associated equipment. �
� 1.03 PRE-DEMOLITI01�1 WORK �
' �
A. Take static pressure readings across existing fans, filters and coils. Take air flo�N
measurements (traverses), motor amp readings and fan rpm readings at existing air �
handling equipment(AHU's, return fans and exhaust fans) involved in the renovation
work prior to starting any demolition work or construction.
B. Take temperature readings on entering and leaving airside and waterside of all coils at �
� existin air handlin units rior to startin an demolition.
g g P g Y
C. Check the condition of existing temperature controls on all air handlin e ui ment �
g q P
involved in the renovation. Verify and report on the condition of existing damp�rs,
actuators, valves, control devices and actual operation prior to starting any demolition. �
D. Submit a written report on all findings during pre-demolition to the Architect aiid
Engineer. �
. �
�
March 3, 2000 15010 - 2 9�9048.00 �
, '
� I .
�1.04 DEMOLITION
� A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify the existing condition of all
, ; equipment affected by this project and the exact location of material to be removed (or
i relocated) before demolition wark is started. Report any inconsistencies with the
� Contract Documents immediately to the architect.
B. Demolition work shall be phased to accomplish replacement with minimum downtime.
� � Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating shut-downs or service interruptions
j with the Owner's representative.
, C. Schedule/phase demolition work in advance with the O.wner's representative.
Coordination with facility operating hours and access to areas affected by this project
� sha11 be the Contractor's responsibility. _
� ,
D. Remove existing ductwork, diffusers, grilles and piping which are not shown on the
� i drawings to remain Qr to be reused.
E. Where existing piping (hot water, cold water, domestic water, gas,medical gas, chilled
' water, steam, condensate, drain, sanitary sewer, storm, etc.) is found in walls to be
removed, offset and reroute piping into the new partition layout. Reinsulate pipe in �
, accordance with Section 15250. If pipe service is to be abandoned, remove piping in
� ; , wall and cap in ceiling above wall and in space below wall.
�
� 'F. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing, storing and reinstalling any
equipment noted as existing to be relocated. The Contractor shall repair or replace any
such equipment that is damaged or lost throughout the duration of this project without
� ; additional cost to the Owner.
i
G. All equipment to be demolished is the property of the Owner and shall be turned over
'� to the Owner's representative by the Contractor. At the discretion of the Owner's
representative, any or all of such equipment may be refused and released to the
� Contractor for disposal.
� I
1.05 ITEMS FURNISHED FOR INSTALLATION BY OTHER TRADES
� � A. Electrical control components including but not limited to controllers, relays,
' j thermostats, etc.
� 1.06;PHASING
jA. Project will require multiple phases of construction in order to maintain hospital
, � functions.
� B. Provide temporary connections of ductwork and piping where required to maintain
� �
March 3, 2000 15010 - 3 99048.00
� �
�
ventilation and temperature control in areas adjacent to construction. ',
C. Sensitive andlor occupied areas must be maintained under positive pressure and soiled
and/or construction areas under a negative pressure at all times.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS �
A. Submittal of bid implies:
� 1. Bidder has visited job site. �
' 2. Bidder is familiar with site conditions.
3. Bidder has read applicable paragraphs of the specifications and will be bound by �
their conditions.
1.08 LOCAL CONDITIONS _
,�,
A. Conform with-local conditions.
B. Coordinate with local utilities on size of utility services. �
1.09 INTENT �
A. The contract documents (drawings,plans and specifications) describe the mechanical
work of this project. �
B. Any item mentioned in one part is binding as though mentioned in both. --
�
C. The contract documents form a guide for a complete mechanical installation.
- D. Furnish all items which are reasonably necessary for a complete system, but wI-uch are ,�
not specifically mentioned, such as duct hangers or transitions,piping offsets, crains,
etc. �
E. In areas of renovation, survey the site and be informed of existing conditions u1
particular above ceilings which will require offsetting and/or relocation of existing �
piping, ductwork and conduit.
F. Mechanical layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical only. � �
G. Coordinate exact locations of ducts,pipes and equipment with the work of other trades.
H. Architect reserves the ri ht to make reasonable c e ' �
g hang s in location of inecharucal
equipment and appurtenances. � 'I
� �
March 3, 2000 15010 -4 49048.00 �
�
�� 11.10 I UALITY ASSUItANCE
Q
� A. Comply with applicable local, state and federal codes.
. ,
B. Comply with applicable requirements of recognized industry associations which
� � publish standards for the various trades.
C. Employ only qualified journeymen for this work.
� , �
D. Do not route any piping directly above or 42" in front of electrical switchgear,panels
� or transformers.
E. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and equipment will require
� � offsetting,raising and in some instances relocation of existing piping, ductwork and _
! conduit. Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions in particular above
ceilings which will require offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and �
� ; conduit and include the cost of this work.
` F. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and equipment will require
� removal of the existing ceiling and ceiling grid. Survey the site and be informed of
existing conditions which will require ceiling removal. Include the cost of the ceiling
� work or coordinate its removal with the General Contractor.
� , ;
G. Additional installation costs associated with substituted equipment requiring additional
�- � work on the part of this contractor or other subcontractors to satisfy the manufacturer's
� installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the submitting contractor.
,� H. Supervise all work by competent mechanic specifically qualified in his discipline.
i
1.11 FEES AND PEItMITS
� � A. Secure and pay for permits, licenses and inspections required for work under this
, � division, including water and sewage tap. �
� B. Give notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to
work.
� ' I
'1.12 FIRESTOPPING
�
, A. Manufacturer of materials sha11 specialize in the manufacture of the products required
' for firestopping.
I
� 'B. Provide manufacturers' certifications of all materials used for firestopping.
,C. All penetration methods shall be tested and listed in accordance with the Underwriters
� ; -
Marc'h 3, 2000 15010 - 5 99048.00
� '�
,�
Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory. �
D. Penetrations and openings for all mechanical,plumbing and fire protection services in �
fire and/or fire/smoke rated assemblies shall be firestopped with tested firestopping .
design assemblies. These penetrations include but are not limited to the follov��ing:
l. Ductwork,piping, conduit and control tubing through above grade floor s:.abs. �
2. Ductwork,piping, conduit and control tubing through rated walls and partitions.
3. Ductwork,piping, conduit and control tubing through vertical shafts such as pipe
chases, duct chases, stairwells, elevator shafts and utility chutes. �
4. Voids around i es, sleeves, ducts, conduits, cable tra s cables and wires
P P. Y �
penetrating above grade floor slabs and fire rated partitions, fire walls and smoke �
walls.
E. Refer to Section 07200 for additional information and requirements for firesto��ping. _ �
1.13 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 01060 for general building code requirements. �
B. Mechanical installation to be in accordance with applicable local, state and fed:,ral �
codes having jurisdiction.
C. Codes considered applicable to this project include but are not be limited to: �
1. SBC: 1997 Standard Building Code.
2. SMC: 1997 Standard Mechanical Code. �
3. SPC: 1994 Standard Plumbing Code.
4. State of Florida Energy Efficiency Code for Building Construction.
5. Florida AHCA requirements.
6. NFPA 13: Sprinkler System Installation. �� �
7. NFPA 90A: Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
8. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code.
9. ANSI Handicapped Code Al 17.1 � � �
10. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act. '
11. AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Associations, Inc. � '
12. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
13. ARI: American Refrigeration Institute _
14. ASHRAE: American Society Of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning � ,
Engineers.
15. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
16. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. �
17. MSS: Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry
18. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association.
19. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. �.
20. SMACNA: Sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air-Conditionin;
Systems �
March 3,2000 15010 - 6 �9048.00 �
;i
,1
�
� -
� I 21.. UL. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.
�
;� � D. Install all work in strict conformity with applicable codes.
;I .
E. Submit and/or file with proper authorities necessary contract documents as required by
� ' governing authorities.
F. Other than the signed and sealed Contract Documents,the Contractor is responsible for
� any Professional Engineer's signature and seal required-by authorities having
- jurisdiction. �
� �
' '1.14 COORDINATION
;� ; A. Refer to Section 01040 for general space coordination requirements. _
�i
; B. Visit site and be informed of conditions under which work must be performed.
� I
� C. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and equipment as well as
, ' higher ceiling heights will require offsetting,raising and in some instances relocation
� ' of existing piping, ductwork and conduit. Survey the site and be informed of existing
� conditions in particular above ceilings which will require offsetting and/or relocation of
,� existing piping, ductwork and conduit and include the cost of this work.
� '
�I D. In certain areas where higher ceilings are being installed, existing conduit,wiring, i
'�� �� piping, sprinklers, rainwater leaders and ductwork will require offsetting, raising or ��
j relocation to accommodate the renovation. Survey the site and be informed of existing I
' conditions which require offsetting andlor relocation of existing piping, ductwork and '
I conduit and include this work.
� 'I
'! E. No subsequent allowance will be made because of error or failure to obtain necessary
�I information to completely estimate and perform all work involved.
�
F. Carefully examine drawings and specifications to be thoroughly familiar with items
� which require plumbing or HVAC connections and coordination.
� ' ,
G. Notify other trades of any deviations or special conditions necessary for installation of
� work.
j H. Resolve interferences between work of other trades prior to installation.
�
i. Advise other trades to leave proper chases and openings. Place outlets, anchors, sleeves
and supports prior to pouring concrete or installation of masonry work.
� ' _
i . Advise other trades to leave�floor depressions where required for proper installation of
� showers or other equipment.
1 � . -
►
�March 3, 2000 15010 - 7 99048.00
� ''I
�
, , ��
��
K. In areas of renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and equipment will require ,
removal of the existing ceiling and ceiling grid. Survey the site and be informed of ' '
existing conditions which will require ceiling removal. Include the cost of the ceiling � '
work or coordinate its removal with the General Contractor. I
. L. Additional installation costs associated with substituted e ui ment re uirin additional "
q p q g
work on the part of this contractor or other subcontractors to satisfy the manufacturer's
installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the submitting contractor. �
M. Coordinate all necessary power connections as recommended by the manufacturers of �
i installed equipment with Division 16 tradesmen.
N. Coordinate with Division 16 tradesmen for proper sizing of circuit breakers, fiises, _ �
safety switches, conduit and wiring for all Division 15 equipment prior to rough-in or
� bid.
O. Provide belts, sheaves, dampers, and duct modifications as recommended b the Test �
Y
and Balance Agency. �
P. Do not route an i in directl above or 42-inches in front of electrical switch ear �
YPP g Y g ,
panels or transformers.
. Should this coordination be ne lected an cuttin and/or atchin re uired to be '�
Q g , y g p g q done
at contractor's expense.
1.15 SUBNIITTALS
�
- - A." Refer to Section 01300 for general submittal requirements. �
B. Submit for approval seven copies of complete brochures and shop drawings of �
materials, fixtures and equipment,proposed, giving names of manufacturers, trade
names and specific catalog numbers.
C. Submit all brochures with the possible exception of temperature controls at one time, �
- bound in a single 3-ring binder or side-stitched laminated cover with the Project name, __
General Contractor and subcontractor identified on the cover and a table of contents. �
D. Include a cover sheet for each section with section identification number, Conta�actors'
approval stamp and sufficient space for Engineers' stamp and comments. �
E. � Identify or LIST any and ALL EXCEPTIONS taken with the specifications and -�
drawings in tlie submittal manual. Failure to pla'inly note non-complying items, ,
features or deviations from the specifications will result in immediate rejection of the
submittal. , �
March 3, 2000 15010 - 8 99048.00 -
. ''
il
I '
�
j ' � � �
►
F. Brochures:
� I 1. Submit complete descriptions, illustrations, specification data, etc., of materials
'I and equipment proposed.
:I 2. Clearly indicate proposed items when other items are shown on same sheet.
� 3. Submit samples on request and/or set up for inspection and approval. Samples will
� be returned.
� . G. Specifically submit information and brochures on the following: - �
1. All HVAC and plumbing equipment.
� 2. All pipe and pipe fittings including origin of manufacture.
3. All pipe hangers and support/anchorage methods.
4. All valves and strainers.
1 � 5. Materials and installation details for all firestopping. _
6. Duct and pipe insulation including list of proposed thicknesses for each service,
, flame spread and smoke development ratings for all materials including adhesives
� i and sealers.
7. Low Pressure Duct: Sheet metal gauges,method of fabrication and longitudinal
� seam construction and joint sealant(Hardcast).
,i
, I 8. Sheet metal accessories including diffusers, registers, grilles, louvers,vents, fire
,f dampers and fire/smoke dampers with sleeve gauges indicated.
,{ 9. Temperature controls including brochures on all components.
� ;I . 10. Qualifications of Test and Balance Firm including references and sample report
� forms.
_ '� '
H. Shop/Coordination Drawings:
' 1. NOTE: Disks of the Architectural backgrounds will be made available for creation
I, � - I � of coordination shop drawings, copies of the engineering drawings will NOT be
I
available.
2. Submit specific shop/coordination drawings for major materials where called for
� ; ` or when requested by Engineer and for the following:
� a. Automatic temperature control systems.
b. Interlock and control wiring.
� ; c. Complete dimensioned shop drawings for location of all sleeves, anchors,
pads, chases and other openings required for installation of the mechanical and
' plumbing systems in the building.
'I d. Fire protection system coordinated with ductwork, mechanical piping,
� � lumbin conduit and electrical e ui ment..
P g, q p
� i 3. Submit brochures and shop drawings in time to allow three weeks from date of
, receipt in Engineer's office before final approval is required to meet construction
, schedule.
,� 4. Include Contractor's stamp of approval on all submittals evidencing he has �
I examined and checked same and information contained therein is in accordance
� � with contract requirements,with any deviations clearly marked.
� i 5. Do not construe approval of shop drawings as pernutting departure from
'I
;March 3, 2000 15010 - 9 99048.00
1 -
�
, contractual documents. `�
6. Additional installation costs associated with substituted e ui ment re uirin
q P q g
additional work on the part of this contractor or other subcontractors to sa�isfy �
manufacturer's installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the w
submitting contractor. `
7. Submit above mentioned brochures and shop drawings and receive approval before �
' any materials are installed.
1.16 AGENCY SUBMITTALS: A COPY OF THE FINAL WATER AND AIR �
BALANCING REPORT SHALL BE AVAILABLE FOR RE
VIEW BY THE ,
FLORIDA'S AHCA REPRESENTATIVES AT THE FINAL INSPECTION. �
. �
1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section 01730 for general data requirements. ��
B. Prior to final acceptance of project, furnish to Owner required number of bound �
manuals of instructions for operation and maintenance of inechanical equipment and
systems furnished under this division.
C. Furnish data in a 3-ring,hard-cover type binder. �
,D. As a minimum include the following product data: �
1. Equipment performance data. .
2. Operating and maintenance instructions. � -
3. Spare parts list. �
,4. _Copies of approved submittal data.
5. Equipment warranties. ' �
6. Testing and balance report. � �
E. Clearly indicate items furnished on this project. �
�
F. Furnish a list indicating names and addresses of nearest supply house carrying
recommended spare parts for equipment furnished and name of installation - �
subcontractor. '
G. Written description of complete mechanical systems operation. �
H. Supervise initial operation of systems and equipment and verbally instruct Owner in
such operation in addition to manuals mentioned above. ,�
I. Obtain letter from Owner stating manuals and instructions as mentioned above have
been received. Furnish a copy of this letter for Architects's files. �
� r
March 3, 2000 15010 - 10 99048.00 �
i
� !
� �
� I
� I
;1.18 PROTECT'ION OF MATERIALS
� A. Refer to Section 01600 for general storage and protection requirements.
B. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened packaging.
' i
� C. Other materials and equipment to be covered or otherwise protected against damage
�� i from water, dirt, chemical or mechanical injury. This includes during on-site storage,
I
after installation and until fmal acceptance.
i
, D. Store items in a clean, dry place and protect from damage.
� , I
� E. Damaged painted surfaces of equipment to be touched up to match original paint.
� I ��
F. Any materials shown on the contract documents as existing to be relocated are the
' property of the owner. The contractor shall be responsible for removal, storage and
� ! reinstallation of these materials for the duration of the project. Any of these materials
; suffering damage or loss while under the responsibility of the contractor shall be
; repaired or replaced without additional cost to the owner.
� �I
1.19 IdECORD DRAWINGS
- I
� - A. Refer to Section 01720 for requirements for record drawings.
i
� B. Keep a record set of blue line prints at job site exclusively for recording deviations
from the drawings which are necessary because of job conditions.
�I
�
� C. Mark deviations in colored pencils for ease of identification of various systems.
�I
D. When work is complete,record all deviations on clean sepia copies of drawings and
� � i submit sepias of completed "Record Drawings" to Owner's representative for
, distribution.
i
1 ; E. Provide record drawings with dimensional references for all underground utilities.
� i
� � I i
� i I
� � ��
, ,
� '
� I
I ` -
� �
March 3, 2000 15010 - 11 99048.00
1 � .
�
1 _ �
, �
PART -2 PRODUCTS �
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT , �
A. Specifications and drawings indicate name,type or catalog numbers of materi�ils and
equipment to establish basic standards for the project. These standards shall be used �
exclusively in preparation of the Contractor's bid. Unauthorized substitution of non-
approved manufacturers, equipment or materials shall constitute automatic rejection of -
submittal. Upon completion of the bidding process, the Architect will review�vritten #
requests from the Contractor for alternate manufacturer's including appropriate changes
- to the bid price for the substitutions requested. The Contractor shall not utilize the �
alternate manufacturers in the preparation of bid unless approved by written addendum
from the Architect.
B. Specific references are made to one or more manufacturers'names and model �r �
catalog numbers. This does not indicate that the material and equipment specified is
necessarily an "off the shelf' item; requirements for specific finishes, materials or other �
modifications may introduce variances from manufacturers' standards. Contractor shall
ascertain that such modifications are fully considered.
C. Where multiple items of equipment or materials are required, they shall be the product �
of a single manufacturer.
D. Refer to Section 01630 for additional re uirements. �
q
E. Provide IJL or ETL labels when available. r _
F. Use products and materials of domestic manufacturer unless specifically noted �
otherwise.
PART -3 EXECUTION . �
3.01 LOCATIONS ,
A. Mechanical layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical.
B. Exact locations of ductwork,pipes and equipment may vary because of conflicts with �
work of other trades.
C. Work out conflicts such that relocations do not affect o eration or a earance � 'I
p pp of
I systems.
I D. e � �
Wh re conflicts cannot be worked out between trades, Owner s representative�Nill I
decide. Owner's representative reserves the right to make reasonable changes in - �
March 3, 2000 15010 - 12 99048.00
�
i �
� '� .
� locations. �
E. Locate equipment requiring periodic servicing or adjustment so that it is readily �
� ,� -
.accessible.
� � F. In projects involving renovation, installation of new piping, ductwork and equipment ,
fl as well as new ceiling heights will require offsetting,raising and in some instances 'i
j relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit. Visit site,be informed of
� � conditions under which this work must be performed and include the cost of this work
in bids.
� G. In certain areas where higher ceilings are being installed, existing conduit,wiring,
', � piping, sprinklers, rainwater leaders and ductwork will require offsetting, raising or
� � i relocation to accommodate the renovation. Survey the site and be informed of existirig
; conditions which require offsetting and/or relocation of e�usting piping, ductwork and
; conduit�and include this work.
�
i
� � ' H. Do not route piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical switchgear,panels 'I
� ' or transformers. . 'i
� � '
� ,i I. Do not backup service sides to walls or place it too close to other equipment to make
' � service impractical.
� �
�3.02 EXISTING SERVICES �
� _
' � �. Provide tem or work, e ui ment and materials to maintain existin services in
� p �'Y q P g
; operation.
, � I
j B. Coordinate all shutdowns to Owner's convenience.
,;
� ,3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
�
, �. Refer to Section 01045 for general requirements of cutting and patching.
� B. Repair or replace routine damage caused by cutting in performance of contract.
C. Correct dama e caused due to installation of inechanical work. .
� g
' D. Perform repairs with materials which match existing and install in accordance with tlie
� appropriate section of these specifications.
� ;3.04 COUNTERFLASHING: COUNTERFLASH DUCTS,PIPES,ETC.,WHERE '
PENETRATION OF ROOFS AND OUTSIDE WALLS OCCUR.
� �
IMarch 3, 2000 15010 - 13 99048.00
�
,�
- � �
3.05 UTILITIES EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING � �
. A. Refer to Section 02222,Utilities Excavating and.Backfilling for additional �
requirements.
� B. Trench and excavate rock in accordance with Division 2, Section 02222. �
i �
C. Provide trenching, excavation and backfilling necessary for installation of inechanical
, - work. . ' _
D. Depth of excavation to provide a minimum of 36 inches above top of pipe. �
E. Excavate to a depth at least 6 inches below bottom of pipe elevation.
��F. Fill below pipe and around pipe at least 6 inches and a minimum of 12 inches above
pipe with sand or Class "B" crushed stone tamped firm and even.
� G. Trench at least 18 inches wider than pipe and hand-grade wrth batterboards placed �
'i every 25 feet. ,
� �H. Separate topsoil during excavation. ,
I. Provide a minimum of 12 inches of topsoil as final layer of dirt. �
J. Backfill by hand. Do not use rock or stone above sand or Class "B" crushed stone:
, �
3.06 CONNECTION TO OWNER FU1tNISHED EQUIPMENT -
A. Connect or install equipment shown on mechanical drawings requiring plumbia�g �
andlor mechanical hookups.
B. Rough-in piping and connect equipment. �
. C. Provide piping, shutoff valves, strainers and unions required for a complete ins��allation. �
D. In addition,provide steam strainers, steam traps, shutoff valves and line size strainers -
in steam lines at equipment connections. �
E. Provide operating valves and controls as an integral part of Owner furnished
equipment. , ,,
3.07 ACCEPTANCE OF SYSTEMS � -'
A. Complete the following before requesting a final inspection:
� 1. Complete "CRITICAL SYSTEMS CHECKLIST" located at the end of Division - �
March 3, 2000 15010 - 14 , 99048.00 �
I
I
� I
I
� I �
, � 1 S specification.
' � 2. All work required under this division of the specifications except as permitted.
� , i 3. Pay special attention to completion of work required under Sections 15020, 15025,
i 15030 and 15035.
'� 4. System testing and balancing report.
' ; 5. Control system completion and operational checkout.
j 6. Furnish required operating instructions,wiring diagrams and pneumatic or electric
� ;� "Project Record Documents" control diagrams in accordance with Division 1. `
� ; ', 7. Mount one copy of each control diagram in the appropriate equipment rooms as
� �
; specified elsewhere.
� ' ' 8. Owner will accept job on basis of tests and inspections.
I
! 9. A representative of firm that performed test and balance work is to be in
; attendance to assist with final inspection.
' ! 10. Furnish necessary mechanics to operate system and make necessary adjustments . ,
i during final inspection.
3.08 WARRAI�ITY AND SERVICE
� , ,
A. Submit warranties in accordance with Section 01700.
; � ' �
B. Guarantee all work installed under this Division to be free from defects in
� workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of substantial usage, I
� i from date of occupancy of project or from date of final acceptance, whichever is
� earliest.
, I
� � C. Above parties further agree they will repair and replace defective material or
I, workmanship which becomes defective within terms of this warranty-guarantee.
� ; ! ,
D. Upon final acceptance of work, Owner will assume responsibility of supervision,
' ' operating and maintaining equipment.
� E. After final acceptance, owner will lubricate motors and other�operating components,
� j clean strainers, make minor adjustments for proper operating conditions and report
� � ' defective materials or workmanship to Contractor.
; F. Owner will make emergency repairs only if Contractor is unavailable. Such repairs
� � '� shall in no case void a warranty or guarantee. -
� I
� .
, G. Replace defective material,parts ancl equipment and correct defective workmanship
� � without dela and without cost u on bein notified of such defect.
I � , � Y P g
3.09 �CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS AND I2EPORTS
� � I
; A. Contractor shall provide written response to each comment on job observation reports
� i prior to the scheduling of the next job observation.
;March 3, 2000 15010 - 15 99048.00
� ' �
�
�
, �
B. Upon expiration of each of these limits noted herein,maintenance including labor and
materials costs will be at Owner's expense. �
END OF SECTION �
�
�
. _ �
_ �
, �
. � �
�
_ �
�
� ��
, �
. �
'
� �
March 3, 2000 15010 - 16 99048.00
� I
,
1 �i
I -
,� SECTION 15020
�I
I IDENTIFICATION AND PAINTING
� `
i,
� PART -1GENERAL �
i
11.01 WORK INCLUDED
� � I ,
A. Comply wrth the applicable provisions of Section 15010.
' B. Identify piping,painted under Section 9900.
� _ �
, � C. Painting of Standpipes and Fire Protection Piping. _
,
I1.02 RELATED WORK
I t
� ,� A. Section 09900: Painting. �
,; ,
i � I B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
� �
�1.03 SUBMITTALS: SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR APPROVAL 1N ACCORDANCE
� � ; WITH SECTION 01340 (01300).
�
- I
�1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
� I
� A. Do not apply painting materials to unclean or improperly prepared surfaces, or where
� dust is being generated.
� I , �
B. Protect items not scheduled to be painted by covering with protective materials.
� I .
i
�PART -2 PRODUCTS
1 ��
'�2.01 �CCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: REFER TO SECTION 09900 FOR
� PROVED PAINT MANUFACTURERS.
�
, . '
I
� �
I
�
1 ;�
�
1 �,March 3, 2000 15020 - 1 99048.00
�I
�
PART-3 EXECUTION � ��
�
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Identify exposed piping with snap-on or strap-on type markers indicating servi�ce, ',
direction of flow and pipe size. Install markers at valves, access panels and at least � I
once above each space but not more than 50 feet apart. Color code markers in
accordance with ANSI-B 13.1. Provide Seton "Setmark" markers.
` ' �
B. Identify concealed piping above ceilings with painted stencils indicating pipe service,
direction of flow and pipe size. Install markers at valves, access panels and at least
once above each space but not more than 50 feet apart. �
C. Color code Standpipes and Fire Protection piping: CC13 Safety red. _ �
D. Requirement for identification of piping is in addition to the requirements for any color
coding of inechanical and electrical piping specified in Section 09900. �
E. Waste, vent, control compressed air and buried lines need not be marked. , �
, �
� END OF SECTION �
I _ �
� �
r �
' �
� � r
. �
� ��
: r
March 3, 2000 15020 -2 99048.00 �
� �
� i
� ,
j SECTION 15025
i
,� ; EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
,,
�
� ;PART - 1 GENERAL
_ ;
' j 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' ,�
_ 'I A. Nameplates,tags, stenciling and similar items for identification purposes.
� ,I
,� �. Valve tagging.
��1.02 RELATED WORK _
�
A. Section 09900: Painting. �
� I
B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
�
� • ' C. Section 15020: Identification and Painting
�
� '
�1.03`SUBMITTALS: SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR APPROVAL IN ACCORDANCE
I , � WITH SECTION 01340 (01300). - -
' I
, �PART -2 PRODUCTS
� ;2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: SETON NAME PLATE CORPORATION
OR EQUAL.
�
� �2.02 NAMEPLATES,TAGS,ETC. ' -
i
�� A. Nameplates: Rigid plastic, "Setonite" or bakelite, with engraved lettering of 3/4"
/ � minimum height. Fill engraved lettering with a permanent coloring material which
� � contrasts with color tag material for easy reading.
� , B. Fasteners: Commercial quality,rust resistant nuts and bolts with backing washers, self-
tapping screws or rivets.
, C. Stenciling: Stencil large pieces of equipment with an oil based enamel�or semi-gloss
latex. , -
� �i
�
1 �
;�
'iMarch 3, 2000 � 15025 - 1 99048.00
1 �� �
.�
1
2.03 CONTROL DIAGRAM FRAMES: SETON NAME PLATE CORP., N0. 11IlP - �
ALUMINUM FRAMES WITH "PLEXIGLASS" OR "LUCITE" GLAZING OR
EQUAL BY BRADY OR AVERY. �
PART-3 EXECUTION �
3.01 BAKELITE NAMEPLATES �
A. Provide en raved ri id lastic name lates showin name and number of inechanic 1 �
g g P p g a
equipment in a conspicuous location on items such as starters,pumps, fans,VAV
boxes, air conditioning units,rooftop units, condensing units, air handlers and control �'
panels. .
B. Nameplates to have at least 3/4" high lettering. �
, C. Use names and numbers appearing in schedules on drawings.
�
- D. Submit ro osed identification list for a roval rior to makin name late
p p pp p g s. Use
P
abbreviations only where approved. �
E. Fasten nameplates to equipment using nuts and bolts, screws,brads, rivets or other type
� fasteners. Glue or adhesive is not acceptable. �
F. If unsuitable surfaces, such as high temperature, lack of space, etc. do not allotiv for
direct attachment, use copper or brass rings or chains to attach tags. � '
3.02 VALVE IDENTIFICATION -
,�
A. Identify each valve with engraved anodized aluminum identification tags indicating .
� valve manufacturer, style and size on one side and valves normal position, conients of �
pipe and sequential identification number on other side.
B. Color code tags to differentiate valve types. ;
C. Tags to be Seton Style M4963.
� D. Attach tag to valve handle with nickel plated bead chain. �
� �
END OF SECTION
, �
� '
March 3, 2000 15025 -2 99048.00 ,
;i -
� ��
; n
� � � SECTION 15030
,� CLEANING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
' i
,�
� � PART - 1GENERAL , ,
�I .
;I 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' _
� A. Cleaning of all mechanical equipment, apparatus casings, etc.
� B. Cleaning of Duct Systems. "
.I
'� C. Cleaning and flushing of inechanical piping systems. _
�
I
� D. Cleaning of Domestic Water System.
� I J
'; 1.02 RELATED WORK: SECTION 15010: GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
� -
' �
,; PART -2 PRODUCTS: NOT APPLICABLE
� � ,
� PART-3 EXECUTION
� � ,
,� 3.01 GENERAL
�
� A. Upon completion of contract and progressively as work proceeds, clean up dirt, debris,
, � oil materials, etc., and remove from site.
� ; B. Keep premises in neat and clean condition to satisfaction of Owner.
I
� C. Thoroughly clean ducts and apparatus casings before fans and filters are operated.
� � .
+ D. Touch up factory applied fimshes, if not to be repainted, covenng all bare places,
i scratches, etc.
� ,'I 'r without cost to Owner all sto a e discoloration or other dama e to arts of the
E. ReP� PP g � g P
building, its finish or furnishings resulting from failure to properly clean piping system.
�
�' 3.02 MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS �
� , A. Make joints in pipe and tubing with brazed joint fittings, except at equipment requiring
�I screwed connections.
� '
�
, ; March 3, 2000 15030 - 1 99048.00
, .
�
� '
B. Wash joints with hot water after assembly to crack and wash off flux. Use wire brush. ,
- C. Circulate a solution of trisodium phosphate (21bs per 50 gallons of water volurne) or �
sodium carbonate (1 lb per 30 gallons of water) or sodium hydroxide (1 lb per�0
gallons of water)through the piping system at design temperature for 3 hours.
D. After i e cleanin is com leted drain s stem and remove clean and e �
p p g p , y , r p l a c e s tr a i n e r
baskets. Clean dirt legs. � �
� E. Replace suction diffuser startup strainers with conventional strainer.
3.03 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM � � ,
A. Flush domestic water system progressively by opening building outlets and permitting �
flow to continue from each until water runs clear.
B. Sterilize system in accordance with requirements of State Deparhnent of Public Health �
by the following method or other method acceptable to local authorities:
1. Introduce chlorine or a solution of calcium or sodium hypochlorite, filling lines
slowly and applying sterilizing agent at a rate of 50 ppin of chlorine as determined '
by residual chlorine tests at ends of lines.
2. Open and close all valves while the system is being chlorinated.
3. After sterilizing agent has been applied and left standing for 24 hours, test for �
residual chlorine at ends of lines.
4. If less than 25 ppm is indicated,repeat sterilizing process. �
5. After standing for 24 hours and tests show at least 25 ppm of residual chlorine,
flush out system until all traces of chemical used are removed.
6. Arrange for local health department to check and approve system before
connecting to existing system. �
� ' � �
END OF SECTION
�
� �
� �
� - �
�
March 3, 2000 15030 -2 ` 9'9048.00 ,
�
i
;
� i SECTION 15035
�
� � TESTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
� �
i
� PART - 1GENERAL
, 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� A. Test mechanical systems and equipment to demonstrate proper operation.
�
� � B. Testing of existing air handling equipment.
� � C. Testing of existing mechanical systems and equipment prior to renovation. _
I
' D. Testing of Domestic Water Piping.
� E. Testing of Drainage and Vent System.
� � F. Testing of HVAC Piping System.
�
G. Testing of Fire Protection Piping.
� �
; H. Records of Testing.
, 1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
� �
' B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
� 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
i
� ! A. Employ competent, qualified mechanics to test the HVAC systems.
� B. Employ a reputable, recognized organization regularly engaged in the work to test and
� , balance the HVAC systems.
I
' ; C. Provide written documentation of all testing witnessed by General Contractor or
Owner's representative.
1 1.04 COORDINATION
�
1
March 3, 2000 15035 - 1 . 99048.00
� �
i
�
A. Advise Architect of scheduled systems testing and completed system demonstration �
schedule so that he may witness tests and/or demonstration, if he so desires.
�
PART -2 PRODUCTS: NOT APPLICABLE
. �
PART -3 EXECUTION
' 3.01 GENERAL TESTING �
A. Test all equipment and systems installed and demonstrate proper operation. `
B. Submit notices of readiness for inspection. _ _
�'
C. Correct and retest work found defective when tested.
D. Make repairs to piping system with new materials. Peening, doping or caulking of �
screwed joints or holes is not pertnitted. �
3.02 EXISTING AIR HANDLIl�TG EQUIPMENT �
A. Take static pressure readings across fans, filters and coils, air flow measurements �
(traverses), motor amp readings and fan rpm readings at existing air handling
equipment (AHUs, return fans and exhaust fans)involved in the renovation wor'�c prior
to starting any demolition or construction. ,
B. Take temperature readings on entering and leaving airside and waterside of all coils at �
existing air handling units prior to starting any demolition.
C. Have control tradesman check the condition of existing temperature controls on all air
handling equipment involved in the renovation. Verify and report on the condition of �
existing dampers, actuators,valves, control devices and actual operation prior to
starting any demolition work. �
D. Submit all readings and findings immediately to Architect and Engineer.
E. On existing air handlers,return fans and exhaust fans, contractor shall make cha-� es in �
g
pulleys and belts required for correct balance of existing system as recommende,3 by
� Air Balancing Agency. ,
' F. Where indicated on the drawings, verify air quantities as shown on the contract ,
documents at demolished and existing to remain air distribution and terminal devices
before demolition work is started. Report any defienciencies immediately to Architect.
Rebalance to new air quantities as shown when construction is completed. '
March 3, 2000 15035 -2 9�048.00
�
I
i � -
! '
�
�
3.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
� � A. Test hot and cold domestic water piping system upon completion of rough-in and
! before connection to fixtures at a hydrostatic pressure of 125 psig for a period of one
� I
hour.
' 3.04 DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM
A. Test draina e and ventin s stem with necess o enin s lu ed to ermit s stem to
, � g gY �'Y P gP gg P Y
� ; be filled with water and subj ected to a water pressure of 10 feet of head.
B. System to hold water for 30 minutes without a water level drop greater than 4 inches in
� ' a 4 inch standpipe and without visible leakage. _
I
' C. Test system in sections if minimum head can be maintained in each section. Provide a
� minimum "10 foot head" pressure at top joint.
� D. Conduct air or smoke test if in opinion of Architect reasonable cause exists to suspeet
� I leakage or less than quality workmanship.
E. Test foundation drain system in sections of 100 foot lengths before and after I
� backfilling. Pass plumbers tape or Roto-Rooter through drain sections to ensure no �
i
, restrictions to water flow.
, 3.05 HVAC PIPING I
� , , A. Hydrostatically test piping at 125 psig pressure with no evidence of leaking for a period
� of at least 6 hours.
!
� 3.06 FLUSH VALVES
� A. Test flush valves for proper operation.
� I .
3.07, FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PIPING
� A. Test fire protection system with no evidence of leaking at minimum of 200 psi for
period of 2 hours.
� 3.08 RECORDS OF TESTING
, A. Maintain records of system testing and test results.
i .
�
i _
1 M ich 3, 2000 15035 - 3 99048.00
'
B. Furnish copy of test records to the Architect. !
�
END OF SECTION
�
,
� I
_ �
. ,
� �
. �
- �
. '
�
�
�
�
�
�
March 3, 2000 15035 -4 9�048.00 �
,� �
� �
I
I
i '
� SECTION 15050
' � BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS __
�
. � •
�
�i � ; PART - 1 GENERAL .
. , j .
' 1.0 WORK INCLUDED
'
A. All work specified in this section shall comply with the provisions of Section 15010.
� ,i _
' 1.02 DRAWINGS
1
A. The mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and show the relation of equipment and -
' connections. Do not scale drawin s for exact sizes and locations.
g
i
�i� � ! 1.03 SUBMITTALS �
�I A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01300.
,�
' i 1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING '
�
�
'� A. Protect materials and equipment,at all times from damage, weather and exposure to dirt
i and moisture.
� {
� I
i B. Any materials shown on the contract documents as existing to be relocated are the
' property of the owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for removal, storage and
� ' reinstallation of these materials for the duration of the project. Any of these materials
; suffering dainage or loss while under the responsibility of the Contractor shall be
, i repaired or replaced without additional cost to the Owner.
, I ,
PART -2 PRODUCTS '
1 �
f 2.0 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
I
, � A. Specifications and drawings indicate name,type or catalog numbers of materials and
equipment to establish basic standards for the project. These standards shall be used
� exclusively in preparation of the Contractor's bid.
1 �i
B. Unauthorized substitution of non-approved manufacturers, equipment or materials shall
� � result in automatic rejection of submittal. "
;( C. Upon completion of the bidding process, the Architect may review written requests
from the Contractor for voluntary alternate manufacturers including appropriate f
I �
i
! March 3, 2000 15050 - 1 99048.00
� � .
I
_ '
changes to the bid price for the substitutions requested. " t
r
D. The Contractor shall not utilize the alternate manufacturers in the preparation of bid '
unless approved by written addendum from the Architect.
E. Do not construe standards as limiting competition. Base bid on one or more of the �
approved manufacturers listed.
F. Equipment shall bear UL or ETL labels when available. '
G. Use products and materials of domestic manufacturer unless specifically noted �
otherwise. - �
_ H. Refer to Section 01630 (01600) for additional requirements. � _ �
2.02 EQUIPMENT .
A. Structural Fastening ,
1. Provide concrete inserts,expansion shields, lag bolts,bolts, washers and nuts for
structural fastening of equipment, materials,piping and ductwork. � �
2. All bolted devices to use jamb nuts.
3. Inserts to be continuous type equal to Unistrut Corp. Series P3200 for beams and
P3300 for floor and roof slabs:� A
4. Inserts to be complete with springs,nuts, end caps and plastic coated filler to
prevent concrete seepage.
' S. Use of power drive "shot-pins" 'is permitted only for ducts up to 20 inches in width �
and pipes up to 1 inch diameter.
6. Do not use any power drive "shot-pins" in Post-Tensioned structures. �
B. Miscellaneous Supports and Framing:
; 1. Where light weight concrete/decking or other non-structural materials are used that �
will not support inserts,provide angles, unistrut and channels to span between
steel beams andlor baz joists to support ductwork, equipment, and piping. �
- 2. Provide all angle iron or channel framing at irregular wall and floor slabs �
penetrations required to provide a smooth surface for mounting of angles around
fire and combination fire-smoke damper sleeves.
3. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring special framing or '
drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's installation requirements shall be the
responsibility of the submitting contractor.
4. Provide all screws, bolts,nuts, inserts, required for attaching sheet metal specialty ,
items to duct,walls, floors and ceilings.
C. Access Panels �
1. Furnish ceiling and wall access panels for installation by other trades.
2. Furnish access doors with UL labeled fire rating comparable to the wall, floor, '
March 3, 2000 15050 -2 99048.00
�
I
' �
� I
!� shaft or ceiling rating where they are installed.
3. Provide panels of sufficient size and locate to permit servicing of all equipment
/ furnished under this section.
4. Minimum size to be 18-inch x 18-inch.
� 5. Construct doors as follows: �
, � a. 14-gauge steel.
� b. 16-gauge sfeel frame.
' c. Screwdriver operated locks.
v d. Finished with prime coat of rust inhibitor.
� 6. Provide Milcor, Bilco or approved equal doors for the following applications:
� � a. Milcor Style A for acoustical tile ceilings.
b. Milcor Style M for exposed masonry walls.
c. Milcor Style DW for drywall installations.
� � d. Milcor Style M with stainless doors for ceramic tile or glazed structural tile. -
�
� PART -3 EXECUTION
, 3.01'; INSTALLATION,APPLICATION,ERECTION
� i _
I
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
, B. Route piping and ductwork to avoid conflicts and interferences with building structure
' and other trades.
� C. Install ductwork and piping to provide maYimum possible clear height underneath.
� , � D. Install equipment requiring service to be readily accessible.
�
�
, END OF SECTION
i
� ; ,
1 -
�
i
t ��
�
1 �
� _ March 3, 2000 15050 - 3 99048.00
i
.+
I
i � . . .
�
�
1 '
i SECTION 15060
I
' �� PIPING AND FITTINGS
� �I
� �j
'� � i PART- 1 GENERAL
+i 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
' ,i
�j A. All piping associated with mechanical systems. ,
' B. The following piping systems are not covered in this section. Refer to other sections for
specifications:
'
1. Section 15300: Fire Protection. _
i 1.02 RELATED WORK � -
� I
iA. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
'I
B. Section 15035: Testing Mechanical Systems. ��
1 ,
► �
,; C. Section 15061: Pipe Hangers. I
, j
� D. Section 15062: Valves.
, -
� � I
�; E. Section 15250: Insulation.
;
� ; F. Section 15515: Hydronic Specialties.
, � 1.03 DEFI1vITIONS
' � - � A. References to low and medium ressure a lies to i in with 125 si and lower
i P PP P P g P
working pressure.
� 'I
1.04 SUBMITTALS ,
� A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01300.
;I
i
� �� B. Submit pipe,valves and fittings for approval prior to starting installation.
C. Submit welders's certificates specified in Quality Assurance below.
� I
i
, -
I
�
� ; March 3,2000 15060 - 1 99048.00
I
• '
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ' '
A. Pipe and fittings to be new domestic manufacture and marked clearly with �
manufacturer's name,weight and classification or working pressure. �
B. Foreign pipe and fittings installed in the project will be removed at contractors �
expense.
C. Welders' Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASN�E; ,
- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
D. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ASIVIE Code for Pressure Pig�ing, ,
B31.9 Building Services Piping and The American Welding Society, Welding
Handbook. _ ,
_ E. Soldering and brazing procedures for piping shall comply with ASME Code for
Pressure Piping,B31.9 Building Services Piping. �
1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING �
A. Provide facto a lied lastic end ca s on each len of i e. Maintain end ca s �
rY pP P p � P P P
, through shipping; storage and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent
entrance of dirt, debris and moisture. '
, B. Protect stored pipe, flanges, fittings and specialties. Elevate above grade and enclose
with durable waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural �
capacity of floor.
C. Pipe, cleanout and floor drain openings shall be temporarily plugged with oakum or ,
test plugs until final connections are made.
'
PART-2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL PIPES ' � �
A. Mill wrap all uninsulated underground steel pipe with Republic X-Tru-Coat or e�qual. �
B. Steel pipe shall comply with ASME B36.1 OM.
�
C. Standard Weight, ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E, electric resistance welded or A�TM U
A53, Grade B,Type S, seamless black steel pipe with butt welded joints and fittings for �
the following services:
1. Chilled water piping: 2%2" and larger diameter. ' ,
2. Heating hot water piping: 2%2" and larger diameter. �
March 3,2000 15060 -2 99048.00 '
,
i
, !
2.02 STEEL PIPE FITTINGS
� ' A. Flanges, Fittings;Unions and similar Items:
! 1. Commercially available products marked in accardance with MSS SP-25.
' 2. Markings on products of small size or odd shape may be omitted provided they are
listed in the sequence allowed by MSS SP-25:
; 3. Mark products with the manufacturer's name and trademark.
' � ��
- , B. Fittings 2 and smaller:
' 1. Class 125 cast iron, manufactured in accordance with ANSI Standard B 16.4.
r Materials shall meet the specifications of ASTM A-126, Class B. Threaded with
, ANSI/ASME Standard Taper Pipe Threads B 1.20.1 and chamfered.
' I _
_ i C. Fittings 2%z" and larger:
1. Factory made,wrought carbon steel,butt welded fittings.
' ; 2. ASTM A234,ANSI B 16.9 and B 16.28.
i D. Provide factory forged fittings and flanges forged in USA.
a E. Machined, remarked, ainted and otherwise altered non-domestic for in s are not
P g g
� acceptable.
' F. Branch connections from Mains or Headers 2'/z" or larger:
� 1. Welded tees or welding outlets, equal to Bonney Forge Weldolets or Threadolets.
2. Use forged outlets only if branch line is at least one pipe size smaller than main or
header.
' � G. Flanges: ASTM A105 and ANSI B16.5, carbon steel,raised face with butt welded end
' connection. ASTM A105 and ANSI B16.5.
� ; H. Unions: ASME B1639, malleable iron, Class 150. Hexagonal stock with ball and _
' ; socket j oints and bronze seating surfaces. Threads shall conform to ASTM B 1.20.1.
' , I. Bolting Materials:
� � 1. Semi-finished carbon steel bolts and hex nuts, ASTM A307.
� , � 2. Threads and Dimensions: ANSI B 1.1 and B 18.2.
' �
' , J. Thread Lubricant:
1. Crane "Fortnula 425" or equal.
I 2. Approved Teflon tape may be used except on fuel oil, natural or propane gas and
� i � medical gases. `
I
. ; K. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gaskets shall match full-faced for cast iron flanges and
1 ; raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in
� -
� i Ma'rch 3, 2000 15060 - 3 99048.00
�i
,
which installed and conform to the respective ANSI Standard(A21.11, B16.20 or '
B16.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and
thermal conditions of the fluid being carried. Gaskets containing asbestos will h10T be '
accepted. Gaskets to be Cranite, Sepco or equal.
2.03 COPPER PIPE -
,
A. Type L, hard drawn seamless, ASTM B-88 for the following services. Piping
dimensions indicated on drawings as 1-5/8", 2-1/8", etc. are outside diameter(G�D). '
1. Domestic hot& cold water piping.
2. HVAC hot water pipe: 2-1/8" OD and smaller. Contractor's option to use c�pper '
pipe up to 4" inside building.
3. Chilled water piping: 2-1/8" OD and smaller. Contractor's option to use copper
pipe up to 4" inside buidling. _ ,
4. Condensate drains from cooling coils.
5. Control air tubing-Refer to Control Section.
B. Type K, hard-drawn seamless for the following services: ,
, 1. Domestic hot and cold water piping located under concrete slabs.
C. Type K, rolled, soft drawn seamless for use under concrete slabs and undergrourid '
where length of pipe runs between fittings exceeds ma�cimum hard-drawn lengths.
2.04 COPPER PIPE FITTINGS '
A. Sweat type, wrought copper,ASTM B62, with dimensions conforming to ANSI �
B 16.22 and sweep patterns for copper tubing.
B. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Victaulic Company of America. Electroplated steel or ,
brass nipple with an inert and non-corrosive thermoplastic lining. Provide separate
union if dielectric fitting is located at equipment connection. '
� C. Dielectric Connections (dry piping systems): I
1. Dielectric unions with screwed, flanged or sweat ends to isolate dissimilar metals, ,
prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
2. Epco Sales,Inc., Watts Regulator Co. or Lochinvar "V" line dielectric couplers. �
3. Use couplers at junction of steel pipe and equipment with copper piping systems. '
4. Do not use steel or cast iron fittings in copper piping systems.
' D. The use of T-Drill fittings is NOT permitted under any circumstance. �
E. Nipples: Brass. � �
'
March 3, 2000 15060 - 4 _ 99�48.00
,
1 '
I2.05 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE
' ; A. Standard weight cast iron pipe shall conform to ASTM A74 (hub & spigot) or ASTM
� A888 and CISPI 301 (hubless) with drainage fittings for:
! 1. Waste, vent and drain pipe: 2" and larger diameter.
' � 2. Storm water pipe.
3. Rainwater leaders inside building.
' ; 4. Drain lines under exterior concrete or paving and under buildings. Extend cast iron
' � j piping at least 5 feet outside of building. �
�
B. Joints in Cast Iron Pipe:
' , 1. Provide neoprene compression type gasketed joints in hub and spigot cast iron soil
� pipe. Compression gaskets shall comply with ASTM C564.
� ; 2. Cast iron soil pipe aboveground may be hubless with neoprene gasketed couplings.
Do not use hubless pipe below on-grade slabs or underground.
a. Couplings shall be constructed of 24 gauge,type 304 stainless steel.
' b. Neoprene gasket shall comply with ASTM C564.
� c. Coupling assembly shall be FM approved and labelled to Class I of Factory
�i Mutual Standard 1680 for 15 PSI working pressure.
' '� d. Coupling assembly shall conform with CISPI 310.
e. Couplings and gaskets shall be Clamp-All.
, 2.06 STRAINERS
i
� A. Cleanable, line size, Y-type strainers.
i
B. 20 mesh monel screen for 2" and smaller.
' I
;� C. 1/16" perforations for 2%2" thru 4".
� D. 1/8" perforations for 5" and larger.
; E. Provide back-up screens where necessary for support of screens.
� '' F. Provide the following type strainers: _
1. Screwed end: 2501b., Muessco #11.
' � � 2. Flanged end: 1251b.,Muessco #751.
i3. Solder end: 250 lb., Muessco#353. -
, , G. Strainers to be Armstrong Machine Works, Mueller Steam Specialty, Spirax Sarco or
Victaulic Co. of America.
,' � I
' ' 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Sleeves:
, �
�
' March 3, 2000 15060 - 5 99048.00
� �, -
,
1. Provide schedule 10 or 40 steel pipe sleeves at wall and floor penetrations. 1
2. Use 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal for floor penetrations in mechanical rooms
except where UL penetration details require a different method. ,
3. Sleeve penetrations of rated walls and floor slabs must comply with approved
penetration details and firestopping methods shown in the latest edition of the UL
Fire Resistance Directory. �
B. Escutcheons: Chrome pipe escutcheons, slip-on or split type where pipe passing
through finished walls is visible. '
C. Exposed Metal Pipe and Trim: Chrome plated. ' I
D. Control System Connectors: Crane No. 386, 1" steel half couplings or 1" female pipe ,
thread connectors. _ ' �
E. Pipe Saddles: 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal installed to protect insulation. I
'
PART -3 EXECUTION '
3.01 INSTALLATION '
A. Ream pipe after cutting to full bore. '
B. Remove foreign matter from inside of pipe before installation.
i
C. Foreign pipe, valves and fittings installed in the project will be removed at contractors
expense. ,
D. Hang piping so equipment, flanges and connections do not bear weight of piping.
E. Install piping to prevent stresses and strains to piping and hangers from expansion or '
contraction. .
F. Provide loops, offsets or expansion joints as indicated on drawings. '
G. Adequately support vertical lines at their bases or by a suitable hanger placed in '
horizontal line near riser or by a base fitting set on pedestal.
H. Run piping in straight lines and square with building. Riser lines to be plumb. Ivlalce '
offsets only where indicated or where necessary.
I. Provide flanges and unions throughout piping systems to facilitate installation an,d '
removal of piping and equipment.
'
March 3, 2000 15060 - 6 99048.00
�
�
' � I
�
� � J. Tees and Taps: In general all branch tee connections should be made on the top of the
, mains to avoid circulating grit and trash into the smaller branch lines serving coils.
� I K. Make rovisions for servicin and removal of e ui ment without dismantlin i in .
I P g q P gPP g
� , L. Grading pipes for drainage:
� � 1. Uniformly place storm drainage, sanitary sewer and footing drain pipes at
' elevations and slopes indicated on drawings.
'� ' ; j 2. Unless noted otherwise, slope pipes at not less than 1!8" per foot.
' 3.02 ROUTING
' �
A. Route piping approximately as indicated on drawings or as structural and architectural
, I� conditions permit. -
B. Do NOT route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical switchgear,
� ; panels or transformers. � `
I C. Do NOT route any water or drain piping directly above Radiology rooms, C.T. Scan
' , Rooms, computer rooms, control rooms, R/T, R/F, MRI or other rooms with electronic
idiagnostic equipment. Route all main piping outside these areas.
� � D. Do not install water piping, other than fire protection piping, in Transformer or �
� Elevator Equipment Rooms.
' � E. Collect plumbing vents below roof and terminate above roof at least 25 feet away from
fresh air intakes at air handling units and rooftop units. .
� � F. Install piping not to interfere with opening of doors.
� �I G. Route.piping to intersect and cross fire-rated walls and partitions at a 90 degree angle.
� ! H. Do not route piping over any electrical equipment where the possibility of damage
/ ; exists.
�
3.03 PIPE SLEEVES
� � .
i� A. Provide sleeves for all piping installed under this division. Locate sleeves at permanent
, walls,partitions and floors.
�
i
; B. Floor sleeves to extend 1%z" above finished floor.
, I
� C. Wall sleeves to extend 11/2" beyond face of wall �n each side.
, I D. Mount sleeves flush with bottom side on concrete or decking in floor slabs and
March 3, 2000 15060 - 7 99048.00
�
'
coordinate method of penetration with General Contractor. '
E. Sleeve penetrations of rated walls and floor slabs must comply with approved
� enetration details and firesto in methods shown in the latest edition of the UZ Fire '
P PP g
Resistance Directory.
� �
F. Provide pipe sleeves and appropriate UL-listed penetration details as follows:
� 1. All piping penetrating masonry walls of any type or fire rating.
2. All piping penetrating 2-hour fire rated walls. '
3. All piping penetrating floor slabs.
4. Chilled water piping at all wall penetrations. '
5. Hot water reheat piping at all wall penetrations.
G. Non-sleeved penetrations of 1-hour fire rated and/or smoke walls: - ,
1. Extend all piping not subject to movement or sweating such as gas piping, rnedical
gases, waste piping, etc. through one-hour fire and smoke walls void of insulation.
2. Cut wallboard to fit pipe tight to both sides of wall. Refer to Architectural d�tails '
and Section 02720 for additional sealing, caulking and firestopping.
, H. Sleeved penetrations of non-rated walls: '
1. Void space between pipe and sleeve to be packed with Thermafiber Safing
Insulation as manufactured by United Gypsum Company.
2. Pack safing material tight to within %2" of ends of sleeve. '
3. Install a primary seal at sleeve ends using Childers Chillpen CP-30 for chilled
water piping. '
4.- Refer to Architectural details and Section 07270 for additional sealing and
firestopping requirements at penetrations.
5. Stop pipe insulation at sleeve and wrap 1%2" of insulation and protruding end of �
pipe sleeve with 2 layers of"Hardcast" duct joint wrap.
6. On cold piping,void space between sleeve and piping to be minimum 1" aYl
around. �
7. On hot piping,void space between sleeve and piping to be minimum %z".
I. Finish all sleeve sealing with a final application of fire stopping caulk using "3M Fire '
Barrier" FS 195 or CP 25N/S and CP 25S/L for floor applications.
3.04 FIRESTOPPING �
A. Penetrations and openings for all mechanical piping,plumbing piping and fire '
protection piping services in fire and/or fire/smoke rated assemblies shall be
firestopped with tested firestopping design assemblies. These penetrations includ�but
are not limited to the following: �
1. Piping and sleeves through above grade floor slabs. Do NOT use non-sleev�d
penetration details on piping subject to longitudinal movement (Steam, steam
condensate, hot water reheat and putnped steam condensate). '
March 3, 2000 15060 - 8 99048.00 �
' �
� i
� �
, 2. Piping and sleeves through rated walls and partitions.
I 3. Piping and sleeves through vertical shafts such as pipe chases, stairwells, elevator
, ' shafts and utility chutes. -
, 4. Voids around pipes and sleeves penetrating above grade floor slabs and fire rated
� partitions, fire walls and smoke walls.
� ' B. Manufacturer of materials shall s ecialize in the manufacture of the roducts re uired
, ; P P q
� , for firestopping.
� � � .
C. Provide manufacturers certifications of all materials used for firestopping.
�
'
; D. All penetration methods shall be tested and listed in accordance with the Undervvriters
' , Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory.
�, � I E. Refer to Section 07270 for additional information and requirements for firestopping.
i `
'� � 3.05 PIPE JOINTING
I � A. Pipe End Preparation:
1. Cut pipe ends square with pipe cutters only. Do not use hack saws or torch.
' � 2. Ream i e ends to full diameter after cuttin .
i pp g
� ! 3. Where pipe is threaded, die-cut right hand,pipe standard, clean cut, full depth and
taper threads. Make threaded joints leakproof without caulking.
j 4. Apply a thin layer of approved pipe lubricant to male threads only.
5. Where pipe is to be welded, die-cut end of butt joints at 30 degree taper. Provide
' j full penetration weld with no bubbles or holes. Remove all slag.
' ' B. Soldered and Brazed Joints:
1. Make soft copper joints with suitable flux and 95/5 Tin-Antimony solder except
� plumbing joints.
� ; 2. Make all domestic water plumbing piping joints with certified lead free solder such
as Taramet Sterling by Taracorp Industries or approved equal.
� 3. Make type K copper pipe joints with suitable flux and high melting point silver or
' ' phoscopper solder.
I C. Cast Iron Pipe Joints: For hub and spigot pipe with compression gaskets, install in
' ' accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
i
� � D. Hubless Pipe Couplings:
' j 1. Install couplings in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
2. Support horizontal piping within 24" of each coupling. �
� ; 3. At changes of direction, support piping within 18" of coupling used to make
! change of direction.
4. Brace piping and fittings 6" and larger to prevent the swaying of pipe in a
' � horizontal direction.
, Ma'rch 3, 2000 15060 - 9 99048.00
I
1
5. Support vertical piping at the base of each stack and at every floor level. �
E. Bracing Joints: '
1. Provide braces and bridle rods as required to reinforce joints.
2. If inechanical lock type couplings are used, prepare pipe ends and make joints in
accordance with pipe coupling manufacturer's printed instructions. �
3. Where large pipes underground are subject to shock because of sudden chariges in
liquid flow rate, provide concrete "kicker" blocks at joints, fittings and char_ges of
pipe direction. �
3.06 ESCUTCHEONS '
A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons where uninsulated pipes visibly penetrate w�lls of
finished spaces. . �
3.07 AIR VENTING '
A. Provide manual air vents at high points of vertical risers and at each water coil to '
eliminate air from systems.
B. Provide air vents at all reheat coils. '
3.08 VALVE ACCESS , . '
A. Locate shut off and control valves for easy access and operation.
'
B. Where valves are located in enclosed spaces,provide access doors of sufficient size for
operation. '
C. Furnish these access panels to proper trades for installation.
3.09 CONTROL SYSTEM CONNECTORS: �
A. Weld 1-inch steel half coupling Crane No, 386 or equal or provide 1-inch female pipe ,
thread connection at locations indicated on drawings for installation of thermometers
and automatic controls.
3.10 RECHECKING AND REPAIRING t
A. Before piping is concealed,recheck for leaks. '
B. Remake or replace defective, leaking or otherwise unsatisfactory joints or material. ,
i
March 3, 2000 15060 - 10 9Q048.00 '
' " i
t �
. C. Peening, caulking or doping of piping is not permitted.
' � -
� END OF SECTION
� '
i
� i
1 �
i
, i _
�
' I
I
� � .
, �
, �
, � .
'
1 I ,
; i
' , �
, i
1 ; �
i
� '
,
' ; .
� I
Ma'rch 3, 2000 15060 - 11 99048.00
'
i
I
1 .
�
, SECTION 15061
, ; PIPE HANGERS
�
� PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� '
�, A. Furnish and install pipe hangers for all mechanical piping systems.
' ; B. Furnish and install pipe supports and alignment devices for all plumbing rough-in
� ; piping in stud walls.
' I � '
, 1.02 RELATED WORK
' A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
i
� B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings. -
, C. Section 15300: Fire Protection.
� � D. Section 15250: Insulation.
�
� 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01300.
� 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
, A. Comply with the applicable provisions of Section 15010.
, I
�
� PART -2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HANGERS
� �
, ( A. Grinnell Figure 260 (MSS SP-69, Type 1) adjust-able clevis hangers for the following
, 9 ' ' applic-ations:
1. Non-insulated steel piping: 2" thru 24" diameter with no longi-tud-inal movement.
, i 2. Non-insulated cast iron pipe: 10" thru 15" diaineter.
' � I B. Grinnell Figure 260 (MSS SP-69, Type 1) adjust-able clevis hanger, with Figure 167
(MSS SP-69, Type 40) galvan-ized insulation protection shields (4 psi compressive
tstrength) sized for maximum 10 foot span for the following applications:
i
� ; March 3, 2000 15061 - 1 99048.00
_ '
1. Insulated steel piping: 2" thru 24" diameter. � '
2. Insulated galvanized steel piping: 2" thru 24" diameter.
3. Insulated copper piping: 2" through 8" O.D. '
C. Grinnell Figure 104 (MSS SP-69, Type 6) adjustable swivel ring, split ring type hanger
for the following applications: t
1. Non-insulated steel pipe, galvanized steel pipe and copper pipe: 2" thru 12"
diameter.
2. Non-insulated cast iron soil pipe thru 8" diameter. �
D. Grinnell Figure 97c or CT-99 (MSS SP-69, Type 9) adjustable pipe ring hanger, either
plastic covered or copper plated for the following applications: '
1. Non-insulated copper tubing with no longitudinal movement.
E. Grinnell Figure 171 (MSS SP-69, Type 41)pipe roll complete with Figure 167 (MSS - 1
SP-69, Type 40) galvan-ized insulation protection shields (4 psi compress-ive st_�ength)
sized for maximum of 10 foot span for the following applications: '
1. Insulated copper piping: 2-1/8" OD and smaller with longitudinal movemei�t
including hot water reheat piping.
2. Insulated steel piping 1" thru 30" with longitud-inal movement including: all steam '
piping, steam condensate return piping,pumped steam condensate return piping
and supply and return hot water reheat piping.
F. Grinnell Fi ure 261c or CT-121 MSS SP-69 T e 8 riser clam eithe �
g ( , y p ) p, r p l a s t i c c o a t e d
or copper plated at floor penetrations for the following applications: '
1. Copper pipe risers.
- G. Grinnell Figure 261 (MSS SP-69, Type 8)riser clamps at floor slab penetrations to �
support steel pipe risers. _
H. Unistrut Trapeze Hangers: Where three or more lines of pipe run parallel,provide '
trapeze hangers.
I. Grinnell Figure 282 (MSS SP-69, Type 18) universal concrete inserts, adequatel�� sized �
and correctly positioned to support full operating weight of piping, fittings, valv�s, etc.
J. Grinnell Figure 86 (MSS SP-69, Type 23) C-clamps with locknuts for the follo�ring �
applications:
1. Attaching hangers to steel beams.
2. Note: Welding hanger rods to steel members is not permitted. '
K. Grinnell Figure 218 (MSS SP-69, Type 30)beam clamps with Grinnell Figure 1{7 '
extension pieces for attaching hangers to bar joists.
, 1
March 3, 2000 15061 -2 99t)48.00 �
�
1
� ;
1 '
2.02'� SUPPORTS/ALIGNMENT DEVICES
�, � , ; A. Sumner Manufacturing Company's pipe support and alignment system for all plumbing
� i rough-in piping to provide support and isolate dissimilar materials:
� I 1. Posifix: Support to align hot& cold lines with waste piping in a lavatory/sink
, rough-in for wall clearances greater than 32".
2. Pipefix: Support to align hot& cold lines with waste piping in a lavatory/sink
� , ; rough-in for 32" wall clearance.
j 3. Stakfix: For use inside of chases,provides two or three pipe support off a vertical
� stack riser.
� �' 4. Channel: Sized to fit over P-2000 Unistrut as an isolator for pipes.
� B. Furnish all necessary accessories including clamps, mounting screws, u-bolts, stainless
� ' � steel bands and metal clips required for complete installation.
C. Do not locate any plastic support materials above ceilings used as return air plenums.
t' �
PART -3 EXECUTI011e11
� 3.01 IloTSTALLATION
� ' � A. Support piping on specified hangers such that equipment,pumps,valves and fittings do
! not bear weight of pipe.
� 1. Support pipe risers at regular intervals in pipe shafts in accordance with good
practice.
2. Do not use perforated metal, strap iron or band iron for support.
, � 3. Do not make offsets in hangers.
' �
B. Isolate dissimilar hanger and piping materials where pipe is not insulated.
� � ; C. Provide neoprene grommets to isolate and clamp medical gas piping where supported
i with trapeze hangers to isolate dissimilar metals.
i � ��
D. Suspend hangers from building structure.
� j E. The following tables indicate maximum allowable spacing of hangers and brackets.
� 1. Space hangers and brackets at closer intervals where required to maintain levels,
� �� slopes and drainage or to prevent sagging.
2. Provide hangers and brackets within 2' of all valves and fittings (elbows,tees,
j etc.).
� I
3.02 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SPACING - STEEL PIPE
A. 1/2" : 5 ' on center
, ,
' March 3, 2000 15061 - 3 99048.00
� �
�.
�
B. 3/4" TO 1-1/4" : 6' on center
C. 1-1/2" TO 2-1/2" : 9' on center �
D. 3" : 12' on center �
E. 4" TO 6" : 14' on center
F. 8" TO 12" : 19' on center �
G. 14" TO 24" : 25' on center �
3.03 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SPACING - COPPER PIPE , _ '
A. 5/8" TO 1-1/8 " : 5' on center r
B. 1-3/8" TO 2-1/8" : 7' on center � �
C. 2-5/8" TO 5-1/8" : 9' on center �
D. 6" TO 8" : 12' on center
3.04. CAST IRON PIPE �
A. Support each fitting at intervals of not more than 5 feet and at every joint �,�
� �
END OF SECTION
_ �
�
_ �
. '
�
. �
March 3, 2000 15061 -4 99048.00 _ �
' '
i
� � SECTION 15062
, ; VALVES
i
i
� PART - 1GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� ;
� A. All valves required for mechanical piping systems.
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
� � A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. -
B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings
� � 1.03 SUBMITTALS.
� I� A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01300.
� � 1.04 DEFINITIONS
i
' ' A. Low/medium (LP/MP)pressure duty references up to 125 psi working pressure (wp).
,
PART -2 PRODUCTS �
� 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
' A. Furnish and install Nibco valves or approved equal by Powell, Apollo, Demco,
� Dezurik, Rockwell or Victualic.
� i
� I
B. Valves are specified by Nibco model numbers unless otherwise noted.
� C. GATE VALVES:
,� , i 1. Steel Pipe: 2" & less - T-124; 2-1/2" & up -F-617-0 .
� 2. Copper Pipe: 2" & less - 5-111; 2-1/2" & up -F-617-0
I ,,
� , D. CHECK VALVES:
, ; 1. Domestic Water: T-413-B
� j 2. Sweat Valves: 5-413-B
� � 3. Circulating Water: 2" &less -T-413-B; 2-1/2" &up -F-918-B
E. BALL VALVES:
� �
Ma'rch 3, 2000 15062 - 1 99048.00
� '
�
1. Domestic Water: 2" & less - T-585-70 �
2. Sweat Valves: 2" & less - 5-585-70
3. Circulating Water: 2" & less -T-585-70 i�
F. BUTTERFLY VALVES �
1. Circulating Water: 3" & less - LD-2000-3; 4" &up -LD-2000-5 �
- 2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish new valves manufactured in the United States of America and ��
marked clearly
with manufacturer's name, model and classification or working pressure. �
B. Gate Valves '
1. Steel pipe systems, 2" and smaller: _ �
a. Nibco T-124.
b. Threaded end, bronze body, solid wedge disc.
c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 80. �
d. Rising stem,union bonnet.
e. Body, bonnet and wedge shall conform to ASTM B-62 bronze.
f. Stem shall be of dezincification-resistant silicon bronze ASTM B-371 or low . �
zinc alloy ASTM B-99.
g. Non-asbestos packing and malleable or ductile iron handwheel.
2. Steel pipe systems larger than 2": �
a. Nibco F-617-0.
b. Flanged, iron body,bronze mounted. �
c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 70. �
d. Outside stem and yoke, bolted bonnet.
e. Body and bonnet shall conform to ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. �
f.. Non-asbestos packing and malleable or ductile iron handwheel.
- 3. Copper pipe systems, 3" and smaller:
a. Nibco T-111 or 5-111. '
b. Threaded or solder end, bronze body, solid wedge disc.
c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 80.
d. Rising stem, threaded bonnet. �
e. Body, bonnet and wedge shall conform to ASTM B-62 bronze.
� f. Stem shall be of dezincification-resistant silicon bronze ASTM B-371 or low
zinc alloy ASTM B-99. ,�
g. Non-asbestos packing and malleable or ductile iron handwheel.
4. Copper pipe systems larger than 3":
a. Nibco F-617-0. ,�
b. Flanged, iron body, bronze mounted.
c. Class 125,manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 70. �
d. Outside stem and yoke, bolted bonnet.
e. Body and bonnet shall conform to ASTM A126 Class B cast iron.
f. Non-asbestos packing and malleable or ductile iron handwheel. ��
March 3, 2000 15062 -2 99048.00
�
'
I
, I
�
C. Ball Valves
� ' 1. Copper piping systems 2 " and smaller:
i a. Nibco T-585-70.
i
i b. Bronze body with threaded ends.
� c. TFE seats and packing.
d. Full ported, chrome plated, solid bronze or solid brass ball with machined
� ' ! port.
ie. Brass or Silicon Bronze blow-out proof stem.
' ', f. Rated for 600 psi WOG (-20 to 150 deg F).
� _g, Provide extended lever stems for valves in insulated piping.
, h. Install valves with brass sweat to thread adapters.
� , I� D. Butterfly Valves �
1. Steel pipe systems:
' a. Nibco LU-2000, Demco NEC5114351 or Dezurik BGSXLIDIEBS2.(NO '
� � SUBSTITUTES)
� b. Rated for bidirectional, bubble-tight, dead-end shut-off service at 200 psi wp.
�,' c. Rated for 200 psi wp water service (-20 to 200 deg F).
1 ' d. Ductile iron, lug type body conforming to ASTM A536.
e. Molded in EPDM liner.
' � f. Aluminum bronze disc.
� i g. Stainless steel stem with EPDM or Buna-N O-ring stem seals.
� 2. Operators:
' ' . a. CLG-O (inside service) gear operator.
b. Fully enclosed worm and quadrant unit.
c. Valve-position indicator on operator. .
� I ,
� '
�
I
� I
� i
� I
, I 'i
� i
' I
� March 3, 2000 15062 - 3 99048.00
i
E. Check Valves �
� 1. Steel pipe systems 2" and smaller:
- a. Nibco T-413-B. '
b. Threaded end, bronze body, Y-pattern with renewable bronze seat and disc.
c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-80.
d. Body and bonnet shall confrom to ASTM B62 bronze. ,�' 'I
2. Steel pipe systems larger than 2":
a. Nibco F-918-B. i
b. Flanged, iron body,horizontal swing with renewable bronze disc and s�:at. �
c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-71. -
d. Body and bolted bonnet shall conform to ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. �
3. Copper pipe systems 3" and smaller:
a. Nibco 5-413-B. -
b. Sweat end, bronze body, Y-pattern with renewable bronze seat and disc. _ �
c. Class 125, manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-80.
d. Body and bonnet shall confrom to ASTM B62 bronze.
�
PART -3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION �
A. Locate all shutoff and control valves for easy access and operation. �
B. Where valves must necessarily be located in enclosed spaces, furnish with access doors
of sufficient size for operation. �
C. Furnish these access panels to proper trades for installation. �
D. Install isolation service valves on all coils and other locations shown on the dra���ings.
E. Install butterfly valves in water piping systems such that ordinary maintenance��•ork �
can be performed on equipment isolated by these valves,without having to drain the
system beyond the valve. �
F. Furnish valve insert spools for flanged gate valves 2%z" and larger.
. �
, END OF SECTION r
�
,
March 3, 2000 15062 -4 99�)48.00
�
I I
� Illi
I
�
I I
1 �
SECTION 15250
; INSULATION
� ,
i
' PART - 1 GENE�tAi,
' 1.01� WORK I1vCLUDED
� i
, A. Insulation for piping, duct systems and equipment specified in Division 15.
� i
�
� B. Certain equipment and/or systems to be factory insulated by the manufacturer. Factory
' applied insulation shall comply with all requirements specified herein.
1 � _
� C. Provide all necessary labor,materials,tools and equipment to perform work required
'� on the drawings and specified herein. �
� I
D. All pipe, fittings, valves and strainers in insulated piping systems to be insulated.
�
� ; 1.02 RELATED WORK
' ! A. Section 07270: Firestopping. -
� �
B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
'r C. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
� � D. Section 15890: Sheet Metal Ductwork-Low Pressure.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
� A. Submit roduct data for a roval in accordance with Section 01300.
p PP
i
� 1.04 DEFINITIONS -
i
! A. Thermal resistance "R" values are expressed in units of"Hour deg F ftzBtu per inch of
' Thickness" on a flat surface at a mean temperature of 75 deg F unless noted otherwise.
�
, i B. Thermal conductivity (k)values are expressed in units of"Btu in/Hour deg F ftZ" on a
� , ' flat surface at a mean temperature of 75 deg F unless noted otherwise.
� i
� i C. Insulation to consist of insulating materials,jacket, mastic and adhesive, either as a
' "system" or as an individual component when used separately.
�
�
March 3, 2000 15250 - 1 99048.00
� j -
��
�
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CERTIFICATION �
A. Certify all insulation, adhesives, coatings, sealers and tapes as having a flame spread
, rating of 25 or less and smoke development of 50 or less when tested in accorda.nce �
. with ASTM E 84,NFPA 225 and LJL 723. '
� B. All insulation shall be labeled by the manufacturer. The label shall include the "R" �
value, thickness, density, flame spread and smoke developed rating.
- C. All insulatin materials to meet the re uirements of F �
g q N PA-90A.
D. Products to meet applicable national,model, state and local building, plumbing and �
mechanical codes. Products to be UL listed for intended service.
E. Deliver and store all insulating materials in manufacturer's containers and keep free ,
from dirt, water, chemicals and mechanical damage. Do not repair, dry nor install
insulation which has been damaged or wet. Such materials shall be removed frorn the �
project site.
F. Apply insulation in a neat, workmanlike manner using experienced, qualified �
tradesmen.
G. Do not apply insulation until all leak and pressure testing has been completed, �
inspected and released for insulation application.
H. Clean and dry surfaces prior to insulation application. �
I. Butt insulation joints firmly together, smooth and securely install all jackets and tapes. �
J. Insulation for duct,pipe and equipment exposed to weather to be certified as self-
extinguishing for 1" thickness in less than 53 seconds when tested in accordance with �
ASTM D1692.
K. Certify that all duct and piping insulation meets the�minimum requirements of the �
current State Energy Code for New Building Construction.
1.06 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS �
A. Refer to Section 15010 for applicable codes and standards.
B. ASTM E-84 �
C. NFPA 255 �
D. UL 723 �
March 3, 2000 15250 - 2 99048.00
�
� � � II
�
� (
; E. NFPA 90A
� -
�
- PART -2 PRODUCTS
1 ALS FOR PIPE AND E UIPMENT
2.01 MATERI Q
r ! A. Provide factory premolded or shop mitered segment type insulation for pipe, fittings
� and valves,unless otherwise noted.
� I B. Fitting insulation to be of same thickness and material as adjoining pipe insulation.
1 � � C. Cellular Glass (Foamglas) -
1, Product to have continuous operational temperature limit of not less than 900 deg
; F and shall comply with requirements of ASTM C552, Type II, Class 2.
� � ! 2. Inner and outer diameters of rigid insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM
C585 for nominal sizes of pipe and tubing.
I 3. Thermal conductivity (k) at 75 deg F mean temperature shall be 0.33 maximum
' ; when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
, ,� 4. Cellular glass pipe insulation installed indoors shall be jacketed with all-purpose,
; laminated, glass-fiber reinforced, flame-retardant, white kraft paper and aluminum
� ; foil complying with ASTM C921, Type I.
' a. Jacket shall be field applied.
'', � b. Water vapor permeance sha11 be 0.02 permeance inch maximum when tested
� in accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A.
� c. Beach puncture shall be 50 oz in/in tear minimum when tested in accordance
� ,� with ASTM D781.
d. Tensile strength shall be 351bs/in width minimum when tested in accordance
� with ASTM D828.
'� ' I 5. Provide Pittsburgh Corning "Foamglas" pipe insulation for the following services:
� a. In lieu of pipe saddles where other piping insulation is used (ie: Fiberglass,
� j flexible elastomeric).
� '� D. Flexible Tubular Elastomeric
I
� 1. Product to have continuous operational temperature limit of not less than 220 deg
' ; F and shall comply with requirements of ASTM C534, Type I.
� ! 2. Thermal conductivity(k) at 75 deg F mean temperature shall be 0.28 maximum
� , when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
� � 3. Provide 2-pound density, fire-retardant elastomeric, slip-on flexible type insulation
� with pre-mitered and pre-glued joints.
� � 4. Maximum allowable flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum allowable smoke
� development density of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. Product
to be FM approved.
� i 5. Maximum water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm-inch in accordance with ASTM
March 3, 2000 15250 - 3 99048.00
�
. 1
E 96 and LJV stabilized. ,
6. No material that exhibits melting, dripping or flowing when tested by the ASTM
E-84 test method shall be allowed. �
7. The ASTM E-84 test shall not employ the use of steels rods or wire mesh to hold
the test specimen in place.No metal baffle may be used during the test to d�:ter
flame impingement on the test specimen. �
8. Provide AP Armaflex manufactured by Armstrong for %2" and 1" application
thicknesses. �
9. For indoor applications provide AP Armaflex SS with self-seal seams. Sea�butt
ends with Armstrong 520 Adhesive.
10. Do NOT submit polyethylene or polyolefin foam insulation. It is NOT acce ptable. �
11. Provide flexible tube elastomeric insulation for the following services:
a. Moisture condensate drains: %z" thick.
b. Domestic cold water piping: %2" thick. _ ,
c. Domestic hot water piping: 1" thick for piping less than or equal to 4"
diameter.
d. Chilled water piping: '/4" thick for pipe sizes less than or equal to 1" di�neter �
and runouts less than or equal to 2" diameter which do not exceed 12' long to
an individual terminal unit.
E. Glass Fiber Pi e Insulation �
P
1. Product to have continuous operational temperature limit of not less than 650 deg
F and shall comply with requirements of ASTM C547, Class 2. �
2. Inner and outer diameters of rigid insulation sha11 be in accordance with AST1V�
C585 for nominal sizes of pipe and tubing. '
3. Thermal conductivity (k) at 75 deg F mean temperature shall be 0.26 maximum
when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.
4. Glass fiber pipe insulation installed indoors shall be jacketed with all-purpose, �
laminated, glass-fiber reinforced, flame-retardant, white kraft paper and aluminum
foil complying with ASTM C921, Type I.
a. Jacket shall be factory applied with self-sealing lap. �
b. Water vapor permeance shall be 0.02 permeance inch maximum when�t��sted
in accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A.
c. Beach puncture shall be 50 oz in/in tear minimum when tested in accordance �
with ASTM D781.
d. Tensile strength shall be 351bs/in width minunum when tested in accordance
with ASTM D828. �
5. Insulation density to be a minimum of 41bs/ft3.
6. Product to be equivalent to Schuller International "Micro-Lok" with Type "��P-T" �
jacketing. Applicable products manufactured by Certainteed, Knauf or Ower.is
Corning are acceptable.
7. Provide glass fiber pipe insulation for following services: ��
a. Chilled water piping:
1) '/z" thick for piping less than or equal to 1".
2) 3/a" thick for piping> 1" and less than or equal to 2". �
March 3, 2000 � 15250 -4 99��48.00 ,
� '
_ �
� I�I
3) 1" thick for piping> 2" and less than or equal to 6".
b. Domestic hot water piping:
, ' ; - 1) 1" thick for piping less than or equal to 4".
j 2) 1%z" thick for piping>4".
` ; c. Domestic cold water piping: '/2" thick.
�' d. Domestic trap primer piping: '/z" thick.
. e. Heating hot water piping:
� 1) %2" thick for piping runouts which serve single terminal units, are less that
12' long, and less than or equal to 2".
2) 1%2" thick for all piping.
' f. Horizontal rain water piping including fittings from horizontal to vertical and
� vertical to horizontal and roof drain bodies: 1" thick.
� ; F. Flexible Sheet Elastomeric -
� 1. Product to have continuous operational temperature limit of not less than 220 deg
F and shall comply with requirements of ASTM C534, Type II.
� � 2. Thermal conductivity (k) at 75 deg F mean temperature shall be 0.28 ma�cimum
� when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C518.
' 3. Apply with full coverage of Armstrong 520 Adhesive on surface and at butted
� ' joints.
4. Product to be "AP Armaflex Sheet" as manufactured by Artnstrong.
5. Provide flexible sheet elastomeric insulation for the following services:
� ; a. Chilled water valves and strainers: 3/4" thick.
' � b. All equipment and piping which is subject to sweating.
� 2.02 MATERIALS FOR DUCTS
� ; A. Blanket Type Duct Insulation
, 1. Insulation shall comply with requirements of ASTM C553, Type I, Class B2 for
service up to 250 deg F.
� 2. Thermal conductivity (k) at 75 deg F mean temperature shall be 0.27 maximum at
labeled thickness and 0.25 maximum with material compressed 25%when tested
� in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
1 3. Insulation shall be minimum 1 pound per cubic foot density.
4. Blanket type duct insulation installed indoors shall be jacketed with foil-scrim-
kraft(FSK) facing. �
� ' a. Jacket shall be factory applied. ,I
� b. Water vapor permeance shall be 0.02 permeance inch when tested in �
1 ; accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A.
c. Beach puncture shall be 25 oz in/in tear minimum when tested in accordance
with ASTM D781.
, ! 5. Product to be manufactured by Schuller International or equivalent by Certainteed,
' ' � Knauf or Owens-Coxning.
� 6. Provide glass fiber blanket insulation for the following:
� a. Unlined conditioned supply ducts concealed from view: 1%2" thick.
i
� March 3, 2000 15250 - 5 - 99048.00
�
b. Tops of supply air diffusers: 1%2" thick. ,
c. In addition, insulate any duct surface, air device or hangers subject to
sweating. '
2.03 MATERIALS FOR FITTINGS AND VALVES
A. Premolded insulation and/or one-piece PVC insulated fitting covers. �
B. Provide factory pre-molded one-piece PVC insulated fitting covers, precut insul.ation ,
inserts and installation materials for the following services:
1. PVC covers sha11 be rated for a flame spread of 25 and a smoke development
rating of 50. �
2. All pipe fittings, elbows,tees, unions, valves, flanges and couplings.
3. All grooved couplings in insulated piping systems. � - _ �
4. OPTION: Miter insulation for tees and elbows 2" pipe diameter in concealed
locations. This option does NOT apply to chilled water systems.
C. Materials to be LoSMOKE 25/50 PVC by PROTO PVC Corp of Clearwater,Florida or �
equal by Foster Seaglass, LTNI-FIT inserts and accessories, Molded Acoustical
Products, Inc., Hamfab,Zeston Division of Schuller International or Armstrong �
Products.
PART -3 EXECUTION �
3.01 GENERAL �
A. Do not cut insulation where a hanger is located.
�
B. Test piping and duct systems for leaks prior to installation of insulation covering.
C. All surfaces to be clean and dry when covering is applied. Covering to be dry when ,
installed and during application of any finish.
D. All adhesives, cements and mastics to be free of asbestos and compatible with �
materials applied without attacking materials in either wet or dry state.
E. Install insulation using professional insulators who have substantial experience and �
ability.
F. Ex osed to view insulation to have a well tailored a earance. !
P PP
G. Install insulation to allow clearances and access for service and maintenance to all �
equipmerit.
. �
March 3, 2000 15250 - 6 99��48.00
� -
� � .
�
� ; H. Pipe Wall Penetrations:
i1. Do not pass fiberglass pipe insulation through fire rated partitions.
1 2. Stop insulation at each side of partition.
� 3. Install foamglas insulation on chilled water, domestic cold water and horizontal
, runs of rainwater leaders in wall cavity,where lines pass through rated partitions.
' � ; 4. Refer to Sections 07270, 15010 and 15050 for information on firestopping of wall
I penetrations.
ii I. Duct Wall Penetrations:
' �1. Stop all duct coverings, including jacket and insulation, at fire dampered
1 ; penetrations of walls, floors above grade and roofs.
' ` 2. Flare-out or extend jacketed insulation at least 2" beyond angle frames of fire
� dampers and secure to structure.
� ; � 3. Maintain vapor bairier. �
4. Install covering over damper access door readily removable and identifiable.
' S. Stop all duct coverings including jacket and insulation at all penetrations of rated
� walls and smoke partitions.
� 6. Seal air tight around duct penetration of drywall, full circumference.
I 7. Refer to Sections 07270, 15010, 15890, 15895 and 15896 for information on
i , firestopping of wall penetrations.
�
� ' 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND EQUIPMENT COVERING
! A. Where glass fiber or flexible tubular elastomeric insulation is used on piping sized 2"
1 , and larger, insert a section of foamglas insulation at hanger or support points,between
pipe and metal shield for full length of shield, to prevent crushing of insulation.
� ! B. Maintain same insulation thickness as adjoining insulation.
, i C. Where insulation passes through pipe hangers and across trapeze supports,provide 12"
� , ; long, 18 gauge galvanized metal saddles for support where foamglas is not acceptable.
� I D. On cold pipes subject to sweating, cany vapor barrier through the hanger and sea1.
� I
; E. Do not apply insulation until all leak and pressure testing has been completed,
� inspected and released for insulation application.
� '
I F. Within equipment rooms, additionally secure jacketed covering using " wide stainless
steel or aluminum bands located on 18" O.C.
� �
, � G. Foamglas Insulation:
� 1. Butter the full inside surface of the insulation and the transverse and longitudinal
� joints with fire-resistive pliable sealer.
2. Voids and cracks shall be filled with sealer.
� j 3. Mastic shall be Benjamin Foster CP-95-44 or equal.
March 3, 2000 15250 - 7 99048.00
,
i
i
�
4. Secure insulation with 1" wide aluminum bands 9" O.C. `
5. Stagger transverse joints.
6. Insulate fittings, valves, flanges,traps and air vents with same thickness of �
insulation using factory fabricated fitting sections or premolded insulated fittings.
7. Adhere block type insulation with stick-clips or bands, in addition to the sealer as
required to provide support for the insulation. '
8. Install expansion joints in all foamglas insulation at all unit run-outs and ir� all
straight runs at intervals not in excess of 40 feet.
H. Flexible Tubular Elastomeric Insulation: '
1. Apply to pipe and fittings with all joints tightly fitted and sealed with Armstrong �
520 adhesive.
2. Where self sealing type insulation is permitted,joints shall be made in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. _ �
3. For flexible tubular elastomeric pipe and fitting insulation when exposed ta view
inside building or exposed to the weather, finish with two coats of fire retar��ant
self-extinguishing vinyl lacquer type highly flexible coating equivalent to �
Armstrong "WB Armaflex Finish", custom color blended to match surrounding
surfaces.
I. Flexible Sheet Elastomeric Insulation: ,
1. Prior to application, thoroughly clean and dry all metal surfaces.
2. If surface has been primed, test a two square foot section using adhesive eqtuvalent �
, to Artnstrong 520 Adhesive in order to determine whether solvent in adhesive will
loosen or lift the primer.
3. If primer is loosened, then remove it before proceeding. ,
4. When testing proves acceptable, adhere insulation with smooth side out, using thin
coating of same adhesive. Follow manufacturer's instructions. �
5. Coat a11 butt edges of each sheet and stagger all joints.
6. Insulate all standing seams or flanges with same thickness of insulation matf:rial as
that used on main surface. ,
7. Apply insulation in layers carefully fitted to the shell or casing curvature of the
equipment.
8. Allow for removal of nuts and bolts at flanges, etc. by using multiple layers on �
insulation and tapering at these points.
9. Finish insulation with 2 coats of Armstrong "WB Armaflex Finish", custom color
blended to match surrounding surfaces. I
J. Provide removable, insulated, sheet metal access sections for chiller water boxes.
3.03 INSTr�I,LATION OF DUCT COVERING
�
A. All duct joints shall be sealed and pressure testing shall be completed prior to �
installation of any covering.
_ ,
March 3, 2000 15250 - 8 99048.00 �
i �
� '
B. Jacketed Blanket Type Insulation:
� i 1. Apply covering to ducts pulled snug but not more than '/a" compression at corners.
, , 2. Use insulation having 2" tab or cut insulation long enough to allow for "peel-off'
� of insulation from jacket to effect a minimum overlap tab of 2".
I 3. Staple lap with flare Type staples 1" O.C.
I ' 4. Cover standing seams, stiffeners and braces with same insulation blanket, using 2"
� � jacket lap and staple lap.
5. Secure jacket to covering using Foster No. 85-20 or 85-75 adhesive or equal.
� ; � 6. For duct 24" and wider,mechanically fasten insulation to duct bottom,using weld
� I pins or nylon "stick-clip" base plates having, self-locking, coated metal or nylon
� ; ; discs, locating fasteners on 12" centers laterally and longitudinally.
� 7. For ducts up to 18" deep, mechanically fasten insulation to duct sides,using one
, row of pins or plates located on 12" centers horizontally and equal distance
� i laterally between duct top and bottom. For ducts over 24" deep, use minimum of-
' two rows.
i
� � C. Cover a11 joints,pins, rips, tears,punctures, disc heads, staples or breaks in vapor
, barrier jacket with FSK tape or 4-inch wide woven glass fabric tape embedded in
! equivalent of Childers CP-82 or Benjamin-Foster No. 85-20 "Sparkfast" vapor barrier
' fire resistant adhesive.
� D. After Test and Balance of air systems is accepted, repair insulation at all test ports in
i ' ducts. Mark locations of ports on insulation jacket with permanent marker.
, ,
' �, � E. Fire rated duct enclosures shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
! instructions and the terms of all agency approvals.
' 3.0,4 INSTALLATION OF ONE-PIECE PVC INSULATED COVERS
� A. Premolded fitting covers to be precisely cut or mitered to fit or be tucked snugly into
' i the throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe covering,tufted,tucked and taped to
form a fully insulated pipe covering.
, i
� ' B. Use adhesive and/or tape specified for type of insulation to insure a thorough vapor
� barrier.
i
' ; C. Tape ends securely to adjacent pipe covering. Tape to extend over adjacent pipe
, � insulation with an overlap of at least 2-inch on both sides.
� ;i
1 i END OF SECTION �
� I
March 3, 2000 15250 - 9 99048.00
� _
i
� � -
� i
SECTION 15300
�
1 FIRE PROTECTION
� PART - 1GENERAL
�
1.01 WORK INCLUDED �
� � I
� A. Materials, accessories, equipment,tools, transportation and performance of all sezvices
' � and labor required to completely execute the sprinkler and fire protection work for this
! project as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
, ; B. Cutting of holes necessary for the installation of work specified under this section. _
' , �
iC. Patch using the same material and finish neatly.
� � � D. Provide all OS & Y valves and zone valves with electrical contacts for supervision.
�
� E. All electrical power wiring and interlock wiring furnished and installed by other trades.
;
F. Extent of work:
� 1. Shop drawings. .
! 2. Exterior pipe, fittings and valves.
3. Interior pipe, fittings and valves.
, ; 4. Hangers, supports and sleeves.
5. Sprinkler heads, extra sprinkler cabinet.
1 � 6. Alarm check valves and accessories.
7. Testing and flushing.
8. Excavation and backfill.
1 � 9. Jockey pump and fire pump.
10. Hose house and related equipment.
i
1 G. Provide a wet and/or dry sprinkler system as required by the drawings.
�
� H. Color code Standpipes and Fire Protection piping in accordance with the following
' , schedule: CC13 Safety red. Refer to Division 09900.
I
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
' �
� A. Section 07270: Firestopping.
1 �
' `i B. Section 09900: Painting
, '� C. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
March 3, 2000 15300 - 1 99048.00
� ,
�
i
�
�
D. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
E. Section 15062: Valves. �
F. Section 15310: Fire and Jockey Pump. �
G. Division 16: Electrical Wiring. I
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE �
A. Pipe and fittings to be new domestic manufacture and marked clearly with - ,
manufacturer's name, weight and classification or working pressure.
B. Materials to be UL and FM approved,where such approval is applicable or required by �
� the agencies having jurisdiction over fire protection work.
C. Foreign pipe and fittings installed in the project will be removed at contractor's �
expense.
D. All hose threads, operating nuts and accessories for hydrants, Siamese connections, etc. �
to be local Fire Department standard.
E. Install s stem s in accordance with the drawin s and s ecifications however n�� �
Y � ) g P > >
requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 are to be violated. ,
F. Furnish all materials and labor necessary to fully comply with the drawings,
specifications, rules, regulations and ordinances. �
G. Do not route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical switchgear,
panels or transformers. - ,
H. Do not route any sprinkler mains directly above Radiology rooms, R/F, R/T, Ca� Scan
Procedure, Computer rooms, control rooms, MRI rooms, Operating Rooms, Delivery ,
Rooms or other areas containing electronic diagnostic equipment. Only branch piping
permitted in these areas.
I. Coordinate routing of all sprinkler piping with other trades (mechanical i in �
P p g�
ductwork and electrical). Failure to coordinate routing of piping with other trades will
result in relocation and rerouting of sprinkler piping at contractors' expense. ,
J. No subsequent allowance will be made because of error or failure to obtain necessary �
information to completely estimate and perform all work involved.
1
March 3, 2000 15300 - 2 99048.00 �
' ,
� �
1.04 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
IA. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340 (01300).
� �
I B. Prepare complete detailed working drawings for Fire Protection System.
� I C. Drawin s to be submitted to State Fire Marshal and Owner's Insurance Undervvriter for
. � g
� i ; approval.
�
' D. After receiving this approval, submit drawings to the following individuals for review
� ; and approval prior to starting installation:
I 1. Architect.
2. Local Authorities.
', ' j 3. Factory Mutual. -
I E. Equipment submittal drawings and data are required on all items named by
I ' manufacturer, including the following:
1. Sprinkler Heads -Type and Manufacturer.
� 2. Valves -Manufacturer.
� I 3. Fire Cabinets and Valves.
, 4. Siamese Connection Manufacturer.
' S. Water Flow and Tamper Switches.
i , � -
� 1.05 APPLICABLE CODES
' i A. NFPA 13: Sprinkler Systems
�
, � B. NFPA 14: Standpipe and Hose Systems
�
, C. NFPA 20: Centrifugal Fire Pumps
1 �
D. Refer to Section 15010 for applicable state; local, fire and plumbing codes.
I
1 PART -2 PRODUCTS
i
' 2.01 VALVES
i
IA. Exterior
' i 1. Detector check valves: Hersey Model DC or equal, with 2" bronze by-pass meter
or local water department standard.
j 2. Cutoff valves in valve pit: Crane No. 467 or equal, UL flanged pattern, outside I
� ' screw and yoke, wedge gate valves.
3. Bronze cutoff valves up to 2": Crane No. 459 or equal.
, ' � 4. Cutoff valves 2-1/2" and 3": Crane No 467-1/2 or equal.
March 3, 2000 15300 - 3 99048.00
� �
I
,
�
B. Interior
1. Check valves: Crane No. 375 or equal, UL approved flanged pattern, iron body, �
swing check valves:
2. Cutoff valves: Crane No. 467 or equal, UL flanged pattern, outside screw and
yoke, wedge gate valves. �
, 3. Cutoff valves up to 2": Crane No. 459 or equal, bronze.
�� ��.
4. Cutoff valves 2-1/2 and 3 . Crane No. 467-1/2 or e ual.
q
5. Cutoff valves 4" to 6": Clow F-5733 or equal. �,
2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS �
A. Exterior
1. Piping underground and up to each first joint above building floor to be either - ,
Class 53 cement-lined ductile cast iron bell and spigot pipe or mechanical joint
pipe.
2. Fittings: Either Class "O" short body cast iron bell and spigot or mechanical joint ,
fittings.
3. Provide blocking (thrust blocks) at all fittings and valves. �
4. Provide plugged openings as indicated for future use. �
5. Joints subject to blowing off of the line under pressure to be braced or have bridle
rods as required.
6. Underground pipe to be laid with a minimum cover of 30 inches over the top of the '
pipes, except 36 inches under drives.
7. Provide cutoff valves, underground, in supply lines to sprinklers equal to Crane '
No. 462-1/2 UL pattern wedge gate valve,with indicator post equal to Crane No.
510 and operating wrench.
8. Indicator posts to be of proper lengths to provide the required minimum cover over �
the top of the pipe.
9. Provide underground sectional cutoff valves equal to Crane 462-1/2 UL with cast
iron roadway box extended to grade. �
B. Interior
1. Furnish all sprinkler pipe inside of building using: �
a. Schedule 10 pipe ASTM-135 with mechanical couplings.
2. Fittings: Sprinkler service, cast iron, screwed, flanged or mechanical coupled to
be rated for 125 250 pound service. '
2.03 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES �
A. Piping to be supported with UL and FM approved hangers. Refer to Sections 15060
and 15061. �
B. Alarm Check Valve Assemblies to be complete with necessary appurtenances.
,
March 3,2000 15300 -4 99048.00 �
i I
' '
i '
C. Drains to discharge outside of building into open air.
I
1 2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS,EXTRA SPRINKLER CABINET
� A. The following sprinkler heads to be the proper types, ratings and spacings for areas
' , involved.Appropriate finishes must be compatible with space finishes being served.
i Slip-type escutcheons will not be permitted. Equal products of other manufacturers will �
� be considered. �
� , 1. Brass Up-right: Star Sprinkler Co. Model "SG". ��
,� 2. Horizontal Side-wall: Star Sprinkler Co. Model "Recessed Sidewall Model LD-2". '
, 3. Concealed Full Recess Type: Star Sprinkler Co. Model "Quasar".
' � �' 4. Semi-recess "Cup" Type: Star Sprinkler Co. Model "Galaxy Starmist".
� 5. Dry Pendent: Star Sprinkler Co. Model "ME-1".
' j 6. Brass Up-right: Automatic Sprinkler Co. Model "F". - I
� 7. Chrome Pendent: Automatic Sprinkler Co. Model "F".
� � 8. Horizontal Side-wall: Automatic Sprinkler Co. Model "F".
� 9. Concealed Full Recess Type: Automatic Sprinkler Co. Model "F".
' � 10. Semi-recess "Cup" Type: Automatic Sprinkler Co. Model "F".
,I 11. Dry Pendent: Central Sprinkler Co. Model "A-1".
' , B. All automatic s rinkler heads new used throu hout the smoke com artments
P � ) g P
containing patient sleeping rooms shall be Listed Quick Response Type.
' i ; C. Install high temperature heads in Boiler rooms, in front of umt heaters and other areas
subject to high heat conditions.
I ' ;
D. Provide (1) sprinkler cabinet with 12 extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler wrench for
' , emergency use at a location selected by Owner.
,
2.05 FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE
' i
, A. Croker Standard 2-1/2" polished brass chrome plated with cap and chain.
�
� , 2.06 FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE AND CABINET (CLASS I): CROKER STANDARD
� 9000 RECESSED ALUMINUM WITH 1/4" WIRE GLASS DOOR,2-1/2" ANGLE
, � HOSE VALVE, CAP AND CHAIN,ALL CHROME PLATED.
' 2.07 FLOW SWITCHES: NOTIFIER MODEL NO. WFD-6 VANE TYPE FLOW
; SWITCH WITH PNEUMATIC RETARD ADJUSTABLE FROM 0 TO 90
r � � SECONDS AND COMPLETE WITH DOUBLE POLE,DOUBLE THROW MICRO
' FEATURE.
� I�
i
i ; '
�
' ; March 3, 2000 15300 - 5 99048.00
�
i
� --
� . �
2.08 TAMPER SWITCHES: NOTIFIER MODEL NO. SGV FOR 4" AND LARGER, �
POTTER MODEL NO. OSYSU-A2 FOR PIPE SIZE LESS THAN 4",TAMPER
SWITCH DOUBLE POLE,DOUBLE THROW MICRO FEATURE FOR 1/2-INCH '
TO 12-INCH VALVES. "
2.09 WATER FLOW ALARMS ' '
A. Connect water flow alarms�to alarm check valves with bell located on outside of �
building. �
B. Provide other flow switches as indicated on drawings and connect to fire alarm system. '
2.10 DRAIN VALVES: PROVIDE DRAIN VALVES AS REQUIRED.
2.11 ROOF MANIFOLD: ROOF MANIFOLD TO BE ROUGH BRASS, THREE-VWAY, I I
2-1/2" X 2-1/2" X 2-1/2" X 4" COMPLETE WITH HOSE VALVES, CAPS A1�TD
CHAINS. ' '
2.12 SIAMESE CONNECTION , , '�
A. Wall T e � I�
YP
1. Croker Standard No. 229, 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 4",with independent clapper valves,
caps and chains all chrome plated brass. ,
2. Provide ball drip Croker standard No. 181 to drain siamese.
- _ ,
PART -3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION - _ �
A. Coordiriate installation to assure there is no conflict with the work of other trades. '
B. Do not route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical switchgear,
panels�or transformers. � ,
C. Coordinate routing of all sprinkler piping with other trades (mechanical piping,
ductwork and electrical). Failure to coordinate routing of piping with other trades will �
result in relocation and rerouting of sprinkler piping at contractors' expense.
D. No subsequent allowance will be made because of error or failure to obtain necessary �
information to completely estimate and perform all work involved.
. �
i
March 3, 2000 15300 - 6 99048.00 ,
�
� i
� 3.02 INSTALLATION
� A. Foreign pipe and fittings installed in the project will be removed at contractor's
' '
; expense.
i
� B. Install wet and dry sprinkler system.
� i I C. Provide head spacings appropriate for hazards involved.
i
i
� D. Hydraulically calculate the sprinkler system.
' E. Refer to the architectural reflected ceiling plan for head location.
� F. Refer to Architectural details and specifications for sealing of pipe penetrations at rated
� � walls and slabs.
� , G. Connect to the water main as indicated on drawings.
�
H. Provide sufficient size masonry meter box to house the following:
' � 1. 8" x 2" "Detector" check valve and bypass meter.
2. Cutoff valves.
3. Siamese connection.
, ; ; 4. Other appurtenances indicated on drawings. �
� I. Pit to be Local Utility Company standard.
� J. Attach hangers to structural steel work by clamping or other approved methods. Do not
' I drill or punch structural work.
' K. Do not route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical switchgear,
' , ; ,panels or transformers.
; L. Wherever necessary, furnish, install and securely anchor to or between building
� ,� members with suitable angle iron or other steel members to support sprinkler work.
M. Support for grooved piping to conform to requirements of MSS-SP-69, "Pipe Hangers i
' � and Supports - Selection and Application". ',
i
� N. In addition to these requirements, do not leave horizontal pipe unsupported between
r �, any two couplings nor whenever a change in direction of flow occurs.
. �
� ' ; O. As a minimum, support piping at the following intervals in addition to the locations ��
! stated above.
1. Pipe size/Max span between hangers: up to 1"/ 8'o.c.; 1-1/4" to 2"/ 10' o.c.; 2-1/2"
, to 4"/ 12' o.c.; 5" to 8"/ 14' o.c.; 10" to 12"/ 16' o.c.
i
' March 3, 2000 15300 - 7 99048.00
' �
_ '
�
P. Support vertical piping at every other floor or every other pipe length,whichever is
most frequent. '
Q. Set the base of the riser piping or base fitting on a pedestal or foundation.
R. Install sprinkler lieads and required piping in areas such as concealed spaces, lab hoods ,
and other special areas and spaces as required by NFPA 13,NFPA 101, applicable state
and local building codes. t
S. Provide drain valves,pipes and test connections as required by NFPA 13.
. ,
T. Pipe drain lines and test connections to outside of building.
U. Originate drain lines from the most hydraulically remote point of each sprinkler zone. �
3.03 FIRESTOPPING '
A. Penetrations and openings for all fire protection piping services in fire and/or
fire/smoke rated assemblies shall be firestopped with tested firestopping design ,
assemblies. These penetrations include but are not limited to the following:
1. Piping and sleeves through above grade floor slabs.
2. Piping and sleeves through rated wa11s and partitions. '
3. Piping and sleeves through vertical shafts such as pipe chases, stairwells, elevator
shafts and utility chutes.
4. Voids around pipes and sleeves penetrating above grade floor slabs and fire rated ,
partitions, fire walls and smoke walls.
B. Manufacturer of materials shall specialize in the manufacture of the products required '
for firestopping.
C. Provide manufacturers' certifications of all materials used for firestopping. '
D. All penetration methods shall be tested and listed in accordance with the Underv�Yiters �
Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory.
E. Refer to Section 07270 for additional information and requirements for firestopping. '
3.04 TESTING, STERILIZING AND FLUSHING
A. Test fire rotection s stem with no evidence of leakin at minimum 2 �
p y g of 00 psi far
period of 2 hours. �
,
�, March 3, 2000 15300 - 8 99��48.00
,
�
� ' .
i
� �
, � �
I B. Refer to Section 15030 and Section 15035.
I,
,
I
', ' END OF SECTION
�
' '
�
�
� I
I
,
, � �
' � � - _
' 1 .
i
i
� .
I
'
' ;
� �
' I
i
'
I
' I�
I
� I
� �
1 -
1 '
� March 3, 2000 15300 - 9 99048.00
1 �
�
�
i
��
i
�
� � - �
, ,
' , SECTION 15400
I
, PLUMBING
, � PART- 1GENERAL -
i
� ;i 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
�� A. Backflow preventers.
' B. Cleanouts.
�
' - ;I C. Domestic Water Service Connection. �
i
�I D. Fire extinguishers and cabinets.
' � ' -
E. Grease Interceptors.
' ;� F. Hot water circulating pumps.
,�
�
' i i G. Natural Gas Connection.
�
- � ' H. Shock Absorbers.
� ' '
� I. Sanitary Sewer Service Connection.
a
� i J. Trap Primers.
' �
, i
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
, � I -
' A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
' ' B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
' � 'C. Section 15061: Pipe Hangers. �
D. Section 15250: Insulation.
i � 1.03 SUBMITTALS
ai
ii A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340 (01300).
�
'
,�
,f
, ' M�rch 3, 2000 15400 - 1 99048.00
� �
; �
'
PART -2 PRODUCTS . '
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS '
A. Beeco. ,
B. Cla-Val. '
C. Febco. r
D. Josam. '
E. Orion.
F. Precision Products. �
G. Wade. ,
H. Zurn.
I. J.R. Smith. . ,
J. Pumps: Bell &Gossett, TACO. '
2.02 EQUIPMENT '
A. Backflow Preventers ,
1. Beeco, Febco, Cla-Val or Orion. '
2. Completely automatic and be fitted with tight closing shut-off valves and test '
cocks at each end. �
3. All parts replaceable without unit removal from line. '
4. Maximum allowable pressure drop of 12 psi at rated flow.
5. Provide backflow preventers on the following services and at other locations
shown on the drawings: ,
a. New domestic water service entrance to building.
b. Domestic water supply to irrigation system.
c. Domestic water makeup for boilers,hot water heating system, chilled water ,
system and cooling towers.
B. Cleanouts '
. 1. Josam, Zurn, Wade,J. R. Smith or Ancon.
2. Access Covers: • ,
a. Minimum size: 12" x 12".
b. Furnish for access at valves, shock absorbers,trap primers, etc. '
3. Carpet: '
March 3, 2000 15400 -2 99048.00 '
�
� �
a. Josam 56000-2-14 inside caulk round brass scoriated frame and cover.
� b. Furnish carpet marker and permanent marker in ceiling above.
' ' 4. Exteriar:
, a. Josam 56040-15 cast iron cutoff ferrule.
I b. Round cast iron scoriated frame and cover, secured.
, ' S. Finished Concrete Floor: Josam 56000-2 inside caulk round Nikaloy scoriated
� frame and cover. .
� 6. Resilient Tile Floor: Josam 56000-2-12 inside caulk round Nikaloy scoriated
' i frame and cover.
; 7. Wa11:
, , � a. Josam 58700-2-15 cast iron caulking ferrule.
� b. Nikaloy smooth round access frame and cover.
c. Satin finish bronze top.
' � j d. Secured cover vandal proof screw. _
8. Waterproof Floors: Furnish cleanouts in waterproof floors with clamping devices.
� C. Domestic Water Service Connection:
' 1. Provide tapping sleeve and valves for connection to existing water mains.
� 2. Furnish domestic water meters, gate valves, check valves,by-pass feature and
' meter pit in accordance with local utiliiy company standards.
� D. Fire Extinguishers (F.E., Wall hung)
, 1. General purpose ABC type, 10-pound capacity and UL rated 4A60BC.
2. Furnish complete with wall mounting bracket.
, E. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets (F.E.C.)
1. Elkhart, Croker Standard or Potter Roemer.
, , 2. Fully recessed cabinet tub constxucted of 18 gauge steel, frame and door satin
anodized extruded aluminum.
3. Door style: 1/4" wire glass.
' �� 4. Fire extinguishers (F.E.)to be general purpose ABC type, 10-pound capacity and
UL rated 4A60BC. Furnish complete with wall mounting bracket.
, �
' F. Grease Interceptor:
, i 1. Josam, Zurn, Wade or J. R. Smith.
� 2. Cast iron enameled lined.
' , ; 3. Grease draw-off feature and flow control device.
;� 4. Model Number, capacity and accessories as scheduled on the drawings.
' S. Exterior grease interceptors to be constructed of reinforced concrete. Unit shall be
� i of capacity as detailed on drawings.
' _ i G. Hot Water Circulating Pump:
�� 1. In-line centrifugal type with all bronze construction and flanged connections.
� 2. Provide pump shaft construct hardened steel with bronze sheathed, diamond bared, �
' � sleeve bearings and mechanical seals.
' March 3, 2000 15400 - 3 99048.00
,
i
_ '
3. Flexible coupled motor supported from pump casing. '
4. Provide manual motor starter with thermal overload protection.
5. Refer to drawings for model number, capacity, electrical characteristics and ,
accessories.
6. Manufactured by Bell & Gossett, TACO or Armstrong.
H. Natural Gas Corinection: - �
1. Provide connection to local gas company's line on building side of gas meter. '
2. Furnish shut-off valve, wall sleeve and gas pressure regulator for building.
I. Sanitary Sewer Service Connection: ,
1. Provide saddle, cut-in-wyes and/or connection to existing manhole in accordance
with local utility company standards.
J. Shock Absorbers: '
1. Josam,Zurn, Wade, J. R. Smith or Precision Products.
2. Refer to drawings for location and size of shock absorbers. '
K. Trap Primers:
1. Josam,Zurn, Wade or J. R. Smith. ,
2. Provide all bronze valve, chrome plated with removable operating parts, integral
vacuum breaker and gasketed access cover.
3. Provide trap primers on all floor drains except shower drains. ,
PART -3 EXECUTION '
3.01 INSTALLATION �
A. Backflow preventers:
1. Pipe relief thorough fixed�air gap and discharge to sewer. '
2. Install adjacent to wall and/or on floor utilizing stand-off brackets, angle frame
andlor concrete piers.
3. Test unit for leaks and pressure drop. ,
� 4. Clean and/or replace soiled strainer media.
5. Do not install above or adjacent to electrical panels, switchgear or transformers.
B. Cleanouts: '
1. Locate line size cleanouts for all lines 4" and smaller at base of all soil and waste '
stacks, at all changes in direction and in straight runs.
2. Spacing in straight runs not to exceed 50 feet inside building and 100 feet outside
the building. '
3. Cleanouts which cannot be made easily accessible otherwise shall be extendLd up
through floor and/or wall.
'
March 3, 2000 15400 -4 99048.00 ,
, I
�
' 1 C. Domestic Water Service Connection:
' � 1. Arrange and coordinate with local utility company for service connection, meter
� 1 � type and manufacturer,fees,permits, etc.
, 2. Field venfy exact location, size, pressure and elevation of existmg water main.
! 3. Flush system and test at 200 psi for 24 hours without evidence of any leaks.
� ' . .
' � D. Fire Extinguishers and Cabmets:
� 1. Locate top of extinguisher 5 feet above finished floor.
, , i 2. Identify on cabinet with 1-1/4 inch high red lettering "Fire Extinguisher."
� 3. Install in accordance with all requirements of NFPA-10.
' ; � 4. Where FE cabinets are mounted in fire-rated or smoke-rated walls, enclose all
� sides (5-siding) of recessed cabinet in 5/8-inch layers of Type-X drywall.
, , � E. Grease Interceptors: _
' 1. Locate for easy access and cleaning.
� I 2. Obtain installation approval from local and state health department.
' I
i F. Natural Gas Connection:
� � 1. Arrange and coordinate with local gas company for service line,meter,regulator,
, ' � fees,permits and pressure desired on house side of ineter.
. . ; i 2. Maintain clear access and protection from mechanical damage to meter.
�� 3. Maintain minimum 10 foot separation of ineter from fresh air intakes to building.
'
G. Sanitary Sewer Service Connection:
1. Arrange and coordinate with local utility company for service connection, fees,
� . ; permits, etc.
, 2. Field verify exact location, size and elevation of existing sewer.
' j 3. Flush system, fill with water and let stand for 24 hours without evidence of any
leaks.
� H. Shock Absorbers:
' � 1. Install shock absorbers such that access and maintenance can be performed without
' � disturbing walls and non-lift-out ceilings.
' � I 2. Shock absorbers to be tested and certified by Plumbing and Drainage Institute.
' I. Trap Primers:
' ; 1. Install primers under sinks and/or lavatories out of line of sight.
! 2. Provide trap primers on all floor drains except shower drains.
' 3. Trap primers to be approved by Plumbing and Drainage Institute.
I
' I
� END OF SECTION
' �
; Ma'rch 3, 2000 15400 - 5 99048.00
� �
i
_� -
i
i �
, `
� �
',I � I .
, SECTION 15410
f
, '
PLUMBING PIPING
� '
�
' j PART- 1 GENERAL
�I
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� i
! A. Acid Waste and Vent Piping.
,i ' i
I B. Acid Neutralization Basin.
I
I , �i 1.02 RELATED WORK _
; A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
, ' I
� B. Section 15061: Pipe Hangers. -
' �{
� i 1.03 SUBMITTALS ,
� A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340 (01300).
, � I
' B. Submit evidence of suitabili and acce tance for use b State and Local fire officials.
tY P Y
' : 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
" A. Furnish and install piping in strict accordance with code requirements for sleeves and
� ; firestopping for penetrations of rated walls,partitions and floors.
, B. Submit evidence of suitability and acceptance for use by State and Local fire officials
;, in similar facilities.
;I
, I PART-2 PRODUCTS
� � -
' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
i A. Orion.
' i
;I B. Labline.
' �I C. GRS Sloane.
� � �
�� March 3,2000 15410 - 1 99048.00
1 ' �
'
2.02 EQUIPMENT '
A. Acid Waste and Vent Piping and Fittings: �
1. Polypropylene with fuseal and/or mechanical coupling joints.
2. Durion with mechanical coupling joints. - ;
3. Kimax glass with mechanical coupling joints. '
B. Acid Neutralization Basin: '
1. Furnish basin size, shape and inlet/outlet as detailed on drawings. '
2. Furnish cast aluminum access cover by J.R. Smith, Josam, Wade or Zurn.
3. Fill basin with limestone chips.
, 4. Provide basin manufactured by Orion, Labline or GRS Sloane. , ,
PART -3 EXECUTION • '
3.01 INSTALLATION � '
A. Acid Waste and Vent Piping:
l. Install at minimum slope 1/4" per foot. �
� 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for hanging and buriai.
3. Flush,fill with water and let stand for 24 hours without leaks.
B. Acid Neutralization Basin: �
1. Install basin in underground concrete pit. '
2. Furnish two extra sacks of limestone chips for replenishing media in basin.
3. Vent basin(s) individually to the outdoors with vent piping as specified abor;e.
C. Do not route any piping directly above or 42-inches in front of electrical switchgear, , �
panels or transformers.
, '
END OF SECTION '
'
- ,
" � _ ,
. �
March 3, 2000 15410 - 2 99048.00
'
'
1 �
SECTION 15450
' � PLUMBING FIXTURES
I
i
tPART - 1GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� I
A. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures, trim and related items including:
'� ' � 1. Supplies.
� 2. Traps.
� 3. Drains.
' � 4. Cleanouts. _
j 5. Water closet seats and covers.
6. Fixture supports.
' 7. Other accessory items.
I
' ; B. Provide white fixtures unless specified otherwise.
� � �
1.02 RELATED WORK
' ' A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
, ' B. Section 15400: Plumbing.
'
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS:
' ; A. Perform all work in accordance with applicable codes and standards enforced by local �
authorities.
, j B. Furnish and install outlet devices which limit the flow of hot water to lavatories and
; � sinks to a minimum of'/z GPM, sized as recommended by the manufacturer and as
� I required under ASHR.AE Standard 90-1989, paragraph 7.7.2 or local or the current
State Energy Code.
' � C. Install all fixtures in strict accordance with ADA and ANSI A117.1 requirements for
� i handicap fixture clearances. _
�'
' D. Refer to Architectural plans for exact dimensional placement of ALL plumbing
� fi�ures.
i ' �
' 1.04 SUBMITTALS
� � -
�
; March 3,2000 15450 - 1 99048.00
1 � �
. �
A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340 (01300). '
PART -2 PRODUCTS I
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS , '
A. Plumbing fixtures: Eljer or equal fixtures by American Standard, Crane or Kohier.
1. Wall hung lavatories furnished complete with wall mounting brackets or chair '
carriers.
2. Counter top sinks furnished complete with mounting rings where required. 1
B. Roof drains, hydrants, floor drains, shock absorbers, carriers and traps: Ancon, Josam,
Zurn, J. R. Smith or Wade.
'
C. Flush valves: Sloan Royal, Zurn or Delaney.
' D. Toilet seats: Church, Olsmite, Beneke or Bemis complete with self-sustaining check '
hinges. "
E. Faucets: T& S Brass and Bronze Works, Water Saver,Zurn or Chicago Faucet �
Company.
F. Stainless steel sinks: Elka or Just. . �
Y
G. Thermostatic and/or pressure balancing valves: Symmons or Leonard. �
H. Flow control devices: Dole Flow Controls Company.
�
I. Caulking: General Electric silicone sanitary sealant.
, �2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Lavatory�Shields: �
1. For all handicap lavatories,provide soft-cover sheilds on drain lines and hoL�cold
supply line piping to protect occupants from sharp edges and scalding
temperatures. '
2. Covers shall be ADA approved.
' 3. Covers shall be durable and professional-looking with Velcro snaps.
4. Covers shall be offered in colors including black, white, light gray, seafoam green, '
dusty rose, ivory and baltic blue. Provide color as selected by Architect.
5. Furnish Handy Shield Safety Covers as manufactuted by Plumberex Specialry ,
Products, Cathedral City, California.
,
March 3, 2000 , 15450 -2 99048.00 �
� I I
� I
� B. Refer to drawings for specifications, location and quantity of"P" ntunbers: �
� I
PART -3 EXECUTION
i
� -
3.01 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS
i
A. Connect to plumbing fixtures and equipment provided under this and other sections of
� i specifications, all drawings and/or manufacturers approved shop drawings.
� , , B. Provide rough-in connections where indicated. 'I
I �
- C. Follow schedule, details on plans or manufacturers approved shop drawings for
I connection sizes to fixtures. _
� '
� D. Connect wall hung urinals to waste piping with red brass nipples.
� �
, E. Furnish all toilet seats complete with self-sustaining check hinges.
�
� � F. Each fixture, floor drain and piece of equipment to have separate trap(s) installed as
� close to fixture as possible.
� � G. Provide p-traps under floor drains complete with trap priming connection.
i ,
� H. Provide deep seal traps in air conditioning unit plenums, walk-in cooler and freezer
j units, storage rooms and drying rooms and where noted on the drawings.
i I. Furnish and install outlet devices which limit the flow of hot water to lavatories and
� sinks to a minimum of%z GPM, sized as recommended by the manufacturer and as
; j required under ASHRAE Standard 90-1989, paragraph 7.7.2 or local or state energy
� I codes.
i J. Install all fixtures in strict accordance with ADA and ANSI A117.1 requirements for
� ! handicap fixture clearances.
�� �
� i� K. Refer to Architectural plans for exact dimensional placement of ALL plumbing
� , I fixtures.
� �
� � i ; L. Install lavatories and sinks with a minimum of 4" clearance on each side, from a wall
i or partition.
' ' M. Install water closets with a minimum of 18" clearance from the center line of the bowl
� to each side, from a wall,partition, divider or another fixture.
� I N. Provide a minimum of 21" clearance in front of water closet bowls.
�
March 3, 2000 15450 -3 99048.00
� i
�
i
��
'� I
' � �I
O. Coordinate floor depression requirements for showers General Contractor. , �
P. Caulk around joints at fixtures mounted on wall or floor and where backed up to walls. �
Q. Mount fixtures rigid to walls as shown on drawings or details. _ _�
R. Install a dropped eared "L" mounted on treated wood backing for rigid support on all
shower heads installed throughout the building. �
3.02 TESTING AND CLEANING - �
A. Inspect and test all work to insure installation in accordance with plans and
� specifications and proper operation. - . ,�
B. Refer to test procedures and pressures are required under Section 15035. '�
_ C. Correct all deficiencies found and retest. �
D. All work to be turned over to Owner in a clean, sanitary condition. �
END OF SECTION �
. �
,�
. �
_ �
�,
,�
,�
�
March 3, 2000 15450 -4 99048.00 �
� �
;
� � �
SECTION 15515
, HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
� �
�
�, PART - 1GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� i
i A. P.T. Test Plugs.
�' ,
B. Pressure Test Kit.
; C. Flow Balancing Valve. _
� �
� D. Flow Measuring Meter.
� 1.02 RELATED WORK:
�
I �
i A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
�
i B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
� I
1.03 SUBMITTALS
�� A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01300.
� PA�RT -2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
�' � �
� i A. Refer to individual equipment specifications for acceptable manufacturers.
� 2.02 EQUIPMENT
�; � A. P.T. Test Plugs
, i 1. Provide '/4" solid brass pressure/temperature test plugs at locations shown on
� �;' drawings.
� ` � 2. Nordel self-closing valve to be rated for 275 deg F service.
� , 3. Peterson Engineering or SISCO.
� . ; i 4. Provide PT test plugs on entering and leaving sides of all water coils or other
� locations shown on drawings.
�,
B. Pressure Test Kit
l
' March 3, 2000 15515 - 1 99048.00
� � .
'
1. Provide Owner complete portable pressure and temperature test kit. ��
2. Kit to be complete with pressure test gauge, necessary connector hoses,
temperature test thermometer with adapter, shutoff and vent valves and carrying '�
case.
3. Readout kit to be Bell & Gossett ITT.
C. Flow Balancing Valve System (Up to 2-inch) �
1. Calibrated non-ferrous valve with provisions for connecting a portable differential
pressure meter for flow measurement and balance. �
2. Y-pattern design with a minimum of four(4) full rotations of the handwhee 1 for
accurate adjustment and for precise flow control.
3. Balancing valves shall have an accuracy of f5%within normal operating range. �
Valves shall be selected and sized to perform in a normal operating range of 75%
of the full open position with a differential pressure of 1 to 3 feet W.G. _
4. Valves shall have integral self-sealing metering ports for measuring differential �
pressure, flow rates and temperature. Ports shall be protected with individu�l
threaded caps. �
5. Construct valve for 100%positive, leakproof shutoff against the same fluid -
pressure as the valve body rating of 300 psig working pressure at 250 deg F.
6. Valves shall have a digital handwheel for positioning accuracy. Provide a hidden ,�
- memory feature to prevent unauthorized adjustment and to ensure a return to the
original setting after shutoff.
7. Provide a drain connection suitable for hose bibb attachment and with a threaded �
protective cap. _
8. Furnish valve with preformed polyurethane insulation for easy access to valve ,-�
without disturbing field applied adjacent insulation. �
9. Attach an engraved tag indicating design flow, pressure and flow characteristic of
valve.
10. Provide balancing valves at all reheat coils, flow balancing stations and at other �j
locations indicated on the drawings.
11. Tour&Andersson STAD/STAS. �
D. Flow Measuring Meter
1. Provide portable readout meter capable of indicating pressure differential across �
previously specified flow measuring devices.
2. Furnish complete with necessary hoses, shutoff and vent valves and carrying case.
3. Reading range to be mid scale of units to be read. ,r
4. Readout kits to be made by manufacturer of associated flow control devices. ��
PART -3 EXECUTION �
3.01 INSTALLATION �
,
A. Hydronic specialty items to be installed in locations shown on drawings. �
March 3, 2000 15515 -2 99048.00
�
,� �
�� 'I
_ ' B. Manufacturer's instructions to be utilized to install specialty items.
� ; C. Provide manual air vents at to of i e risers and other locations where air can be
, P PP
' � trapped.
� ; i
, D. Locate flow-balancing valves and P.T. ports in accessible locations with enough
� ; clearance to allow insertion of probes.
I
� E. P.T. ports and pressure ports on flow balancing valves shall be installed on the top or
� � sides of piping. Do nat install ports on bottom of pipes.
i
�' I
� 'I J
END OF SECTION
� I
�
' ,
� � ;
� �
�
� I
I
�, �
�
�
,
i
�
I
, i
� �
, I
I � � �
i
�
�'� ,
� I
; March 3, 2000 15515 - 3 99048.00
� -
� � i
I
� i SECTION 15790
;
'! COILS -HEATING
�
� �
� � PART- 1 GENERAL
� �
� 1.O1. WORK INCLUDED
'r� 1 .
� A. Hot Water Coils. -
� B. Refer to drawings for size, location, service, capacity and performance requirements for
� each coil.
� _ ' �
� '� 1.02 RELATED WORK .
, � A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. �
� �
B. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
� ; � .
�
C. Section 15062: Valves. .
�� D. Section 15515: Hydronic Specialties. ,
; 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE -
� i
- A. Certify coil capacities,pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with ARI
r� ; Standard 410. ;
� �
� 1.04 SUBMITTALS . -
�r� �
' . A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01300.
� B. Submit manufacturer's product data.
� � .
C. Submit performance ratings for each coil.
��,
; P T-2PRODUCTS �
�� , _
2.0�. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ,
:��
� A. Carrier.
. ; . -
�
B. McQuay.
��
' ; M ch 3, 2000 15790 - 1 99048.00
�
a
,�
\�
I
F. Compression Angles: ,�
1. Install steel angles on the top and bottom of ductwork compressed with all�thread,
washers and nuts. �
2. Place angles on 4' O.C. at the indicated locations.
3. Provide compression angles at the following locations: ,
a. All ducts over 60" in width which generate objectionable drumming. '�
b. All ducts with an aspect ratio above 4 to 1 which generate objectionable �
drumming.
l c. At locations indicated on the drawings. �
d. At locations directed by the Architect. �
G. Transitions: ��
1. Do not exceed 1/7 slope for increase-in-area transitions.
2. Do not exceed 1/4 slope for decrease-in-axea transitions. �
3. Do not exceed 30 deg slope on the approach side and 45 deg slope on the leaving ��I
side of transitions at equipment connections without the use of approved va.nes.
H. TDC/TDF/T-25 Transverse Joint Connector Systems ��'
1. If the contractor elects to utilize a formed-on flange, application shall be limited to
ducts less than 48" wide and the following criteria shall be required: ��
a. Flanges shall include a rolled on bead at the 90 deg bend. ��-!�
b. Provide 6" long flange cleats on 18" centers for all pressure classes up to 2" ,- �
w.g. Cleats shall be roll formed from 20 ga. galvanized steel. �
c. Flange faces MUST be sealed with HARDCAST FR-1902 -NO � r
EXCEPTIONS. �
d. For duct pressures up to 2-in.w.g., bolt flanges MUST be installed at all four �
corners.
e. The four interior corners of the joint must be sealed with HARDCAST FR- `�
1902. �`
2. If the contractor elects to utilize a TDC Connector System for ducts 48" and larger,
a factory-manufactured system furnished by Ductmate or Ward Industries shall be
provided as follows: ��
a. The flanges shall be factory roll-formed,knock-on type, constructed of 22 ga
galvanized steel with factory-applied sealant in the pocket. Connectors shall `
be Ward Industries H System or approved equal by Ductmate Industr�es. ��
b. Provide 6" long flange cleats on 18" centers for all pressure classes up to 2" ���,
w.g. Cleats shall be roll formed from 20 ga. galvanized steel. ' ,.�jl
c. Flange faces MiJST be cleaned and sealed with Hardcast's FLANGE CpRIP �'��
` FR-1902 -NO EXCEPTIONS.
d. Provide Ward Industries' H Corner constructed of 11 ga. galvanized ste�l. ,�J
Corner pieces MUST be installed and bolted.
e. For duct pressures up to 2" w.g., bolt flanges MUST be installed as follows: � ��
1) 48" to 96" duct: At four corners and 18" on center. `
2) Over 96" duct: At four corners and 12" on center.
f. The four interior corners of the joint must be sealed with Hardcast's IRON � ��I
+,,
March 3, 2000 15890 -4 99048.00 �
. �
� '
� �
� GRIP 601 -NO EXCEPTIONS.
� � I. Duct Sealing:
�, 1. Seal all supply, return, relief, exhaust and outdoor air intake �oints and
i connections using a 2-part system of mineral impregnated woven fiber tape factory
� � � impregnated with an activator type adhesive.
' 2. Gypsum impregnated close weave cotton DT tape and FTA-20 (indoor) or RTA-
,� 50 (indoor/outdoor) adhesive manufactured by Hardcast Inc. (NO other
substitutes). The use of any sealants without a reinforcing tape is strictly
� � prohibited.
� 3. If contractor elects to utilize TDC connectors,the gasketing for the TDC
connectors shall be Hardcast's FLANGE GRIP 1902-FR flame retardant sealant
and the four interior j oints shall be caulked with Hardcast's IRON GRIP 601-NO
� ' � SUBSTITUTES. If for any reason this sealant is not used,the following paragaph
_ I 4. shall be applicable.
; 4. If contractor proposes any substitute gasketing sealant for TDC connectors and
� interior joint caulking, be advised that the TDC flanges MIJST be sealed with the
2-part sealant and tape system described in paragraph 2.
� 5. In renovation projects where duct systems cannot be shutdown and must remain
� � under pressure or for areas that must remain occupied, seal duct system with
, HARDCAST's water-based, Aluma-Grip AFT-701 -NO SUBSTITUTES.
6. Should longitudinal joints prove to leak, longitudinal joints shall also be sealed.
� ;
� J. Low Pressure Round Duct
� 1. Round low pressure duct is to be constructed in accordance with the schedules on
the drawings.
2. Refer to SMACNA Table 3-1 for mitered elbow requirements.
3. Elbows may be die-formed stamped,pleated or segmented. Gages shall not be less
� than that for straight duct nor the minimum appropriate for forming and assembly.
� K. Provide Ells fabricated as conditions necessitate in the following order of preference:
l. Un-vaned elbow with throat radius equal to 3/4 of duct width and full heel radius.
2. Six(6) inch throat radius with full radius vanes and full heel radius.
�� � 3. Three (3) inch square throat and square heel elbow with closed-space double
i � thickness vanes.
4. The use of square throat elbows with radius heels is NOT permitted. Elbows of
� � this type will be removed at contractor's expense.
� L. Make Branch Connections and Tees in one of the following manners:
� I
1. Supply Branch:
' a. Un-vaned radius transition elbow with splitter damper when branch width is
' , 36" or smaller. '
1 ; b. Vaned square throat transition elbow w$en branch width is larger than 36"
_ ' with splitter damper equipped with locking rod and position indicator.
� ' c. For sub-branch supply, use straight tap with extractor, having manual control
� ; March 3, 2000 15890 - 5 99048.00
i
�
rod extended through main branch side with position indicator. �
2. Return Branch: -
a. Use 45 deg or radius entry clinch lock collar up to a maximum of 24" v,ridth. �'
b. Un-vaned radius transition to 36" width.
� c. Vaned square throat transition with splitter damper for sizes above 36".
� 3. Round Supply Take-offs: �
a. Factory fabricated beaded straight spin-in type galvanized steel fittings with
45 deg extractor and manual balancing damper. Fitting to be conical type.
b. Provide extended balancing quadrant to allow insulation to be applied without �
impeding operation of balancing damper.
c. Spin-in fitting to be minimum of 26 gauge galvanized construction. Fi�ttings �
constructed of less gauge material will not be accepted.
d. Raintree Products, Inc. Model 84MTSD, R& J Manufacturing Company
Model S 1-6, or approved equal. _ �
, 4. Round Return/Exhaust Taps:
a. Factory fabricated beaded straight spin-in type galvanized steel tap fittings
with manual balancing damper.
b. Raintree Model 84MTD, R&J or approved equal. ' �
M. Low Pressure Flex Connectors: Connect indoor fans to duct system with UL listed 20 �
ounce flame retardant canvas. .-
N. Low Pressure Flexible Duct: � �
1. Not permitted on this project.
2. For flexible connections from ducts to registers, grilles and diffusers provide
corrosion resistant steel wire reinforcing helix permanently banded in airtight �
polyester film.
3. Factory certified to meet requirements of NFPA-90A with flame spread not over ,�
25 and smoke developed not over 50. -
' 4. UL listed and labeled as Class 1 air duct connector per UL-181.
5. Pressure rating: Up to 6" w.c. through a temperature range of-20 deg F to 250 deg
F. �
6. For Return, Relief and Exhaust Air Duct Connectors: Provide Wiremold Type
WB flexible duct, Thermaflex, Flexmaster or approved equal.
7. For Supply Duct Connections: �
a. Provide factory pre-insulated type duct having core as previously descxibed -
with a 1" thick, 0.75 PCF density glass fiber insulating blanket covered with a �,
woven glass serim and sheathed in a polyolefin vapor barrier. �
b. Duct to meet additional requirements of NFPA-90B and U.L. labeled�s a
Class 1 Air�Duct Material. ,�
c. Thermal C factor: 0.23 maximum at 60 deg F.
d. Air duct material to be equal to Wiremold Type WGC or equivalent by � I
Thermaflex or Flexmaster.
8. Flexible duct connectors shall not exceed six feet 4'-0" in length.
9. Install flexible ducting with steel clamps or plastic strap clamps equal to "Panduit" �
March 3, 2000 15890 - 6 99048.00 �
�
,� 1 or "Young Quik-Clamp".
10. Refer to UL floor-ceiling and roof-ceiling assembly for minimum allowable duct
� gauge and wire hanger requirements. Do not install flexible duct in any U.L.
, floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly.
� 11. Do not pass flexible duct through fire rated�partitions. Stop insulation at each side r
� of wall and route metal duct through wall.
� i O. Round-to-Square Register Connectors:
1. For low pressure return and/or exhaust application of round duct connectors to
� � square ceiling grilles or registers, provide factory fabricated square-to-round
galvanized steel minimum 3" deep adapter boxes with 2" long beaded round collar.
� 2. Raintree Mode179, shop, or factory fabricated equivalent.
� ; P. Manual Dampers: -
' 1. Hand operated butterfly type dampers to be galvanized steel, 18 U. S. gauge or
heavier.
� 2. Dampers for ducts up to 12" depth and 12" diameter to be one blade on a 3/8"
� round steel rod mounted inside of duct without frame.
� 3. Fit damper with locking type quadrant with position indicator and brass end
� I bearing plate drilled and secured to duct.
4. Dampers for ducts over 12" depth to be multi-blade type:
a. Provide 12" maximum blade width up to 30" blade length.
� b. Provide 10" maximum blade width over 30" blade length.
c. Mount blades on frame with brass sleeve bearings, interconnected for
� operation from one locking type hand quadrant.
; Q. Fire Dampers: Refer to Section 15910 for fire dampers, combination fire/smoke
�� � dampers, sleeves, angles and other installation requirements.
,
R. Splitters, Extractors,Vanes and Deflectors:
� 1. Galvanized steel sheet same thickness as ductwork of corresponding size.
; 2. Vanes to be securely anchored to duct or casing and have freestanding edges
_ � rigidly braced.
� ' ,' 3. Provide adjustable rod with position indicator and locking device for splitters,
extractors and deflectors.
� � I
- ; PART -3 EXECUTION
� 3.01 INSTALLATION
;
' A. Hanging:
� ; 1. Support ductwork by suitable sheared strips or galvanized metals or one inch by
' � 1/8" galvanized steel band iron hangers on each side of duct. Refer to Figure 4-4,
� page 4-7 of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for details.
�
� M I ch 3, 2000 15890 -7 99048.00
� � �
,�
2. Attach hangers to the ductwork using sheet metal screws. ,�
3. Secure hangers to masonry portion of building by means of approved anchor
shields or other acceptable anchors, similar to Figures 4-1, 4-2 and 4-3 pages 4-4, �
4-5 and 4-6 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction manual.
4. Where light weight concrete and decking are used that will not support inserts,
provide angles and channels to span between steel beams and/or bar joists t� �
support ductwork.
5. Vertical risers and other duct runs, where method of support specified above is not
applicable,to be supported by angle brackets as shown on Figures 4-6 and��-7, �
pages 4-12 and 4-13 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction manual.
B. Sealing: �
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions with lap joint of 2" tape
occurring on top of horizontal ducts when hidden from view. _ �
2. Extend tape along sides of the joints onto flat duct for adhering the tape with
adhesive.
C. In areas of renovation, contractor shall field verify existing conditions and clear�nces �
for installation of new ductwork and coordinate with other trades prior to any
fabrication of sheet metal. Contractor shall furnish offsets, rises, drops and trans�tions ;,
and shall adjust to equivalent duct sizes as required to facilitate installation in the ��
existing conditions. _
D. Obstructions and Restrictions: �' �
1. Obstructions may not be located within ducts without specific permission of
Engineer for each instance. �
2. When obstructions cannot be avoided, obstructions shall be eased in accord�nce
with Figure 2-10,page 2-11 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction manual.
�
E. FIRESTOPPING
1. Penetrations and openings for all ductwork in fire rated assemblies shall be
, firestopped with tested firestopping design assemblies and in accordance with UL �
listed fire/smoke damper installation where dampers are required. These
penetrations include but are not limited to the following: ��
a. Ductwork through above grade floor slabs. _
b. Ductwork through rated walls and partitions.
c. Ductwork through vertical shafts such as chases. �
d. Voids around ductwork and duct sleeves penetrating above grade floor slabs
and fire rated partitions, fire walls and smoke wa11s.
2. Manufacturer of materials shall specialize in the manufacture of the products �'
required for firestopping. -
3. Provide manufacturers' certifications of all materials used for firestopping. �
4. All penetration methods shall be tested and listed in accordance with the
Undervvriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory.
5. Refer to Section 07270 for additional information and requirements for � _
March 3, 2000 15890 - 8 99048.00
�
� , .
I
\� i
! firestopping.
�
� ; F. Insulation: Where drawings and insulating specifications indicate that ducts are to be
i insulated, make provisions for neat insulation finish around damper operating
� ; quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access doors and similar operating devices.
� G. Counterflashin : Counterflash all ducts where the ierce the roof. Hav
g y p e General
� Contractor counterflash a11 roof penetrations unless specifically shown otherwise on
drawings.
� H. Pitot Ports:
1. Pitot ports for measuring airflow to be located in each main supply duct at the
downstream end of the straightest run of the main and before the first branch
�� ; takeoff. _
i 2. Pitot ports to be formed by drilling 7/16" holes in the duct, lined up perpendicular
� to airflow on maximum 8" centers and at least three to a duct, evenly spaced.
� 3. Holes in return and e�iaust negative pressure ducts to be plugged with plastic I
plugs.
' 4. Holes in supply and relief positive pressure ducts to be covered with gasketed
� screw-off type access caps equal to "Vent fabrics Ventlok#699 or#699-2".
� Provide access to these for future balancin .
g
� � �
�
� END OF SECTION
� � I
�
i
� I
� ,
I
I
�
, I
� � �
I
�
' March 3, 2000 � - 15890 - 9 99048.00 �
� , �
1
� �
,i
�
► .
�� � SECTION 15910 -
i
' SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES
� ;
� .i PART- 1 GENERAL
,I 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
� ,�
A. Fire dampers.
� I
�� B. Combination fire-smoke dampers.
, ��
� C. Damper sleeves. -
; D. Balancing dampers.
� '
,
� E. Access doors.
� F. Air distribution registers, grilles and diffusers.
- � 1.02 RELATED WORK
� I I
i A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
� ' �
B. Section 15250: Insulation.
� C. Section 15890: Sheet Metal Ductwork-Low Pressure _
� � ,
, 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�� ! A. Grilles, registers and diffusers to be tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70-
; . 1991 and ISO Standards 3741 and 5219.
� I
� B. Coordinate the device frame type and mounting requirements with the type of ceilings
, specified on the architectural drawings.
� all fire smoke and combination fire-smoke dam ers with inte ral sleeves.
; C. Furmsh , p g
� !
,� �, D. Fire dampers: Constructed and tested in accordance with U.L. Safety Standard 555 ,I
{ including dynamic testing.
� E. Combination Fire-Smoke dampers: Listed in accordance with U.L. 555 and U.L. SSSS.
i -
� :; F� Smoke damper operators: Listed in accordance with U.L. SSSS.
�.
�
- I Ma�ch 3, 2000 15910 - 1 99048.00
� !
i
;�
_ �
G. Fire dampers shall be dynamically tested and labeled. Static-rated dampers are 1�10T
acceptable. �
H. Provide a copy of fire and smoke damper manufacturers' installation instructions with
submittal and also at f nal inspection. �
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01300.
'
B. Devices and dampers to be submitted and approved before starting installation. �
PART -2 PRODUCTS �
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS �
A. Air Distribution products: -
1. Titus. ,�
2. Anemostat.
3. Krueger. -
4. Price Industries. �
5. MetalAire.
B. Fire Dampers, Fire-Smoke dampers, Louvers: �
1. Ruskin.
2. Air Balance. � �
, 3. American Warming and Vent.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
1�
A. Fire Dampers
1. Tested and labeled as a dynamic damper in accordance with U.L. 555-1990 and in � '
accordance with NFPA 90A.
2. Held in an open position with a 165 deg F fusible link and arranged to lock in
position on closure. `�
3. Type "B", multi-leaf, with spring closing for horizontal and vertical mounting for � ��
_ all low pressure rectangular ducts with velocities below 1500 FPM. Type "��" '�
dampers are NOT permitted. �
4. Style "LR" or "LO",multi-leaf, with spring closing for horizontal and vertical
mounting for all low pressure round and oval ducts with velocities below 1`00 �
FPM. Type "R" dampers are NOT permitteci.
5. Type "C",multi-leaf, with spring closing for horizontal and vertical mounting for
all medium pressure and other rectangular ducts with velocities above 1500 FPM. �
March 3, 2000 15910 -2 99048.00 �
,
� �
� '
�
i
�' � Type "A" and "B" dampers are NOT permitted.
i 6. Style "CR" or "CO", multi-leaf,with spring closing for horizontal and vertical
� � i mounting for all medium pressure and other round and oval ducts with velocities
, ; above 1500 FPM. Type "R", "LR" and "LO" dampers are NOT permitted.
I 7.- Style "G",multi-leaf, with spring closing for vertical mounting at grilles and
� ; registers in walls rated at 2 hours and less.
' 8. Steel construction with rust resistant finish and provided with factory installed
i mounting sleeve as required by structure.
I � 9. Mount per manufacturer's published U.L. approved installation instructions.
� 10. Fire dampers for use in walls and floors rated at 2 hours and less: Ruskin Model
� ! DIBD2, U.L. labeled for 1-1/2 hours.
; 11. Fire dampers for use in walls rated at 3 or 4 hours: Ruskin Model DIBD 23, U.L.
! labeled for 3 hours and approved for use in walls with ratings up to 4 hours.
j � � 12. Furnish all dampers with factory-mounted sleeves. Refer to sleeve paragraph for -
' minimtun gauge requirement.
' � 13. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring special framing or
, � i drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's installation requirements shall be the
- responsibility of the submitting contractor.
� 14. See Architectural and Mechanical drawings for hour-rating of ceilings, walls
� � and/or floors for fire damper locations indicated on mechanical plans. Dampers to
� be compatible with hour ratings.
' � ;B. Combination Fire-Smoke Dampers
1. U.L. classified and labeled both as dynamic fire damper and as smoke damper wrth
� � operator and meeting all NFPA,U.L. 555 and U.L. SSSS requirements.
� ! 2. Held in an open position with a 165 deg F fusible link and arranged to lock in
!
position on closure.
i � ; 3. Rate dampers for minimum of 350 deg F.
i 4. Class II leakage requirements for a maximum of 10 CFM/SF at 1" w.g.
I5. Steel construction with rust resistant finish and provided with factory installed
I � ; mounting sleeve as required by structure.
I ' 6. Ruskin Model FSD-36 Class II dampers with jamb and blade edge seals for all low
_ , pressure ducts with velocities below 1500 FPM. Maximum of 0.08" w.g.pressure
� ; drop allowed on any damper at 1500 FPM velocity. Provide oversized damper
� ' where required to limit maximum pressure drop.
� 7. Ruskin Model FSD-60 Class II low leakage dampers with airfoil blades and
�
I � ' � silicone rubber edge seals in all medium pressure ducts and other ducts where
- � � velocities exceed 1500 FPM. Construct frames of 5" x 16 gauge galvanized, hat-
'� ' shaped steel channel and blades of double skin, 14 gauge steel. IVlaximum of 0.18"
� w.g. pressure drop allowed on any damper at 2500 FPM velocity. Provide
� oversized damper where required to limit maximum pressure drop.
' i 8. Dampers in round or oval ducts to be provided with round or oval enclosures.
i9. Furnish all dampers with factory-mounted sleeves. Refer to sleeve.paragraph for
minimum gauge requirement.
� 10. Mount damper in accordance with manufacturer's published U.L. approved
I
� March 3, 2000 15910 - 3 99048.00
� �
I �
1
�
installation instructions. � � �
11. If multiple actuators are required on larger dampers, verify access space exists for
locations of multiple actuators. " ��
12. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring special framing or
drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's installation requirements shall be the -
responsibility of the submitting contractor. �
13. Smoke detectors to be furnished by Division 16. Coordinate wiring hook-ups. -
14. Damper operators shall be U.L. listed for the intended duty. Operators shall be '
factory mounted. Damper and operator shall be U.L. listed as an assembly in �
accordance with applicable U.L.-SSSS qualifications.
15. Unless otherwise noted, all fire-smoke dampers to be pneumatically controlled. �
Where electric operators are used, damper motor to be compatible with electrical
characteristics used for smoke detection and/or fire alarm system.
C. Damper Sleeves �
1. 1-1/2 hour fire dampers: 14 gauge. �
2. Smoke and combination fire-smoke dampers: 14 gauge. � �
3. 3-hour fire dampers: 14 gauge. " _
4. Where dampers are installed outside the vertical plane of the wall,provide ,
, minimum 10 gauge steel sleeves. �
5. Do not use sleeve of lighter gauge than duct.
, 6. Install minimum 2 x 2 x 1/8 angle on four sides of sleeves and on both sides of
_ wall. Angles must provide a minimum of 1" overlap of opening and cover the �
corners.
7. Fasten angles to sleeve only. Do not fasten angles to wall. �
8. Install nylon screws to attach ductwork at "break-away"joints.
, 9. Connect ducts to damper sleeves in accordance with manufacturers'published
installation instructions. �
10. Always install fire dampers and combination fire-smoke dampers in STRICT �
accordance with manufacturers'published installation instructions to maintain U.L.
listing. .
, 11. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring special framing or ��
. drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's installation requirements shall be the '
responsibility of the submitting contractor. �
12. Install access door at each damper for service and inspection. Provide fire-rated
wa11, floor and ceiling access panels in inaccessible ceilings, chases, etc. for access
to dampers. Refer to Section 15050 for additional information on Access Panels. �
. D. Manual Balancing Dampers
1. Hand operated butterfly type dampers to be galvanized steel, 18 U.S. gauge or �'
heavier. �
2. Dampers for ducts up to 12" depth and 12" diameter to be one blade on a 3/8" �i
round.steel rod mounted inside of duct without frame. � ii
3. Fit damper with locking type quadrant with position indicator and brass ena � I
bearing plate drilled and secured to duct. � �
March 3,2000 15910 - 4 99048.00
�
�
� I
� 4. Dampers for ducts over 12" depth to be multi-blade type:
,
a. 12" maximum blade width up to 30" blade length.
� b. 10" m�imum blade width over 30" blade length.
, c. Mount blades on frame with brass sleeve bearings, interconnected for
� operation from one locking type hand quadrant.
�
E. Duct Access Doors
� 1. Ruskin ADH24 (low pressure service),Ruskin ADHP-3 (medium and high
pressure service) and Ductmate (round and oval ducts) insulated doors in
i ductwork, floors, walls, ceilings or casings for equipment service at the following
� locations:
a. Automatic dampers
b. Fire dampers
c. Combination Fire/Smoke dampers
� ' d. Duct-mounted smoke detectors
� e. Entering airside of duct coils
� f. Other locations noted on drawings.
2. Refer to Section 15050 for wall and ceiling access panels.
; 3. Access door size at all fire, smoke and combination dampers shall be as follows:
� � a. DUCT SIZE/ACCESS DOOR: 12" to 20" = 12" x 12"; 22" to 36" = 18" x
18"; 3 8 " up=24" x 24"
� ' ; 4. Apparatus casing access doors to be pre-hung door and frame assemblies with
double wall construction, Ruskin ADW2 walk-thru doors.
� 5. Provide reinforced wire glass view windows 12" x 12" in access doors at
� humidifiers and at air handling units for viewing inlet vanes.
6. Doors to be double panel construction, using two sheets of 24 gauge galvanized
steel with one inch thick insulation between panels.
� � 7. Mount doors in a rigid frame of at least 22 gauge formed galvanized steel or
' aluminum.
8. Use angle iron bracing as required to make the door frame a rigid assembly.
�' 9. Hinge or cam type access doors with positive closing,tight sealing and easily
operated latches.
' 10. Provide factory identification labels at all concealed access doors to identify fire
� I dampers and combination fire-smoke dampers. ,
� 11. Latches:
� i a. Doors up to and including 16" high: One latch.
r , ' b. Doors 17" to 48": Two latches and inside release handle.
, c. l��rs �ver 4i lugh: Three cam-action door latches with comrression levers.
' ' 12. Gaskets: Sponge rubber(all doors).
; �
� , ,
, , F. Square Ceiling Diffusers
' 1. Titus Model TDC all steel construction at all locations designated by letters "SA",
�
� � "SB", "SC", etc.
' 2. Opposed blade volume dampers.
� - 3. Diffusers designated as two or three-way blow to be four-way diffusers with field
' March 3, 2000 15910 - 5 99048.00
� �
�
adjustable sheet metal plates installed in each direction. �
4. 24"x 24" extended panel modules (Border Type 3) for all lay-in ceiling
applications. , �
5. Border Type 1 (Surface Mount) for drywall ceiling installations.
6. Where extended panel modules are specified for lay-in ceiling applications do
, NOT submit fully louvered-faced diffusers or large louver blades for all sizes. �
7. Insulate diffuser tops with foil vapor barrier insulation.
8. Frame: Flush mount.
9. Finish: Baked-on, off-white enamel. �
G. Linear Ceiling Diffusers �
1. Titus Model ML-39 at all locations designated by the letters "LB".
2. Adjustable horizontal and/or vertical airflow pattern.
3. Flat black internal airflow pattern adjustment mechanism. _ �
' 4. Minimum continuous length: 4 feet.
5. Slot width: 1". Total number of slots required to be indicated on drawings.
6. Acoustically-lined boot with round side tap connection. Titus Model MPI. �
7. Border finish: Anodized, color selected by Architect.
H. Sidewall Register-Double Deflection Type �
1. Titus Mode1300 at locations designated by "SAR" with conc�alcd screw
mounting. No face screws allowed in finished areas.
2. Individually adjustable, front and rear blades spaced at 3/4". �
3. Opposed blade volume control and neoprene or extruded vinyl gasket.
4. Finish: Off-white baked enamel.
I. Aluminum Ceiling Return&E�aust Registers
�
1. Titus Mode150F with opposed blade dampers at locations designated by letters -
"RA","RB", "EA","EB", etc. with concealed screw mounting. No face scretivs �
allowed in finished areas.
2. 1/2" Aluminum grid. �
3. Finish: Off-white baked enamel.
4. Lay in ceilings: Type 3 mounting in a 24 x 24 metal extended panel suitable for
mounting in T-bar grid. �
5. Drywall ceilings: Border Type 1 for surface mounting.
6. Refer to Architectural plans for ceiling type in each area.
�
� - �
� � �
�
March 3, 2000 15910 - 6 99048.00 �
I '
�
� I
� J. Sidewall Return Register
1. Titus Model 350 flanged steel registers with 35 deg blades and 3/4" louver spacing
rat locations designated by "SWR" with concealed screw mounting.No face screws
� � allowed in finished areas.
; 2. Opposed blade volume control.
� 3. Blades parallel to the horizontal.
4. Mounting screws to be concealed type.
� 5. Finish: Off-white baked enamel.
�
I
� PART -3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
�
�A. Sheet metal specialty items to be installed in locations as shown on drawings.
B. Installation to be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations as
well as applicable sections of SMACNA manual.
� , C. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring special framing or
drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's installation requirements shall be the
� , responsibility of the submitting contractor.
'D. Provide all angle iron or channel framing at irregular wall and floor slabs penetrations
� required to provide a smooth surface for mounting of angles around fire and
combination fire-smoke damper sleeves.
,E. Provide all screws,bolts, nuts, inserts, required for attaching sheet metal specialty �
�' i items to duct,walls, floors and ceilings.
�
� � 'F. Install nylon screws to attach ductwork at "break-away"joints.
�G. Items to be installed approximately as shown on drawings taking into account
! differences in mechanical equipment submitted and that shown on contract documents.
� -
H. The fire and combination fire-smoke damper manufacturers' installation details and
� instructions as tested and approved by U.L. MLTST be used in lieu of installation details
, shown on the drawings where applicable.
'� ; �I. Provide factory identification labels at all concealed access doors to identify fire
dampers and combination fire-smoke dampers.
� �I J. Each item to be installed not to interfere with other adjacent items and be readily
� accessible for maintenance,repair and/or setting and balancing.
,�
March 3, 2000 15910 - 7 99048.00
� ' i
` ��
ta dxawin s for diffuser, sidewall registers, sizes and number of airflow �
K. Refer g
directions.
�
ElYD OF SECTION� �
_ �
�
. �
�
�
�
�
I
�
� �
, �
�
�
�
�
March 3,2004 15910 - 8 99048.00 ,�
� ,
� .
�
'� SECTION 15985
� ' DDC CONTROL SYSTEM
,;
� , PART - 1 GENERAL
i -
' � �
.� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
- A. Sofiware. �
� ' �B. Control Equipment.
� C. Control valves. -
� D. Damper actuators.
� E. Se uence of o erations.
�
q P
� ; F. Point lists.
i �
; fG. Pneumatic controls.
; I
� i
; 1.02�PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
� i A. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings: Installation of control valves,flow switches,• ,
� temperature sensor wells, gauge taps, flow meters.
� I
� B. Section 15910: Sheet Metal Accessories: Installation of automatic dampers. To
� include assembly of multipl"e section dampers with required interconnecting linkages, �
� � sYiafts and brackets and extend the required number of shafts through the ducts for
,j externally mounted damper motors. Jack shafts will be assembled with sealed roller or
i ball bearings of stainless steel construction.
� i
� C. Division 16: Equipment Wiring Systems: Installation and connection of all power
;i � wiring. Power wiring shall be defined as follows:
� ., 1. Wiring of power feeds through all disconnects, starters and variable speed
;I controllers to electric motors.
2. 120 VAC Emergency power feeds to all critical BAS and/or temperature control
� panels. ,
� 3. Wiring of a1150 VAC and higher interlock and control wiring.
, '
� 1.03 AGENCY LISTINGS
, ,
�; A. UL 916 Energy Management Systems.
�
� March 3, 2000 15985 - 1 99048.00
� ,
� I
r
��
B. FCC-Part 15 Subparagraph J. Class A.Emissions requirements.
1.04 GENERAL PROVISIONS: � �
A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions and �
supplementary General Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. This section forms an integral specification with the Pneumatic Control System �
specified under Section 15971.All work contained herein and under the pneumatic
controls section shall be coordinated and performed by a single subcontractor. ; �
1.05 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. 1�
B. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions. �
1.06 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS �
A. The BAS/ATC systems as specified herein shall be provided in their entire under �
tY
Division 15.
B. As art of his Bid, the Contractor shall submit for review b the Owner's authorize �
P y d
representatives a written description of his proposed BAS/ATC systems, including
block diagrams showing all major components and panels,printers and other ' �
processing devices and required cabling between each. Include environmental and
space requirements for panels and other major devices. -
1. Include manufacturer's literature for each type of panel, controller or device that '�
may be shown on the Riser Diagram.
2. Riser Diagram sha11 show, schematically,the entire building system(including �
existing) with all major components identified.
3. System points list.
1.07 SCOPE �
A. The BAS/ATC systems shall be supplied and installed completely under Division 15. �
Control components shall be mounted and wired und�r Division 15 except as noted in
_ paragraph 1.02.
B. The�en ineerin installation calibration software ro rammin �
g g, , , p g g and checkout ,
necessary for complete and fully operational BAS/ATC systems, as specified hereafter, -
sha11 be provided under Division 15. , �
C. New work shall be fully integrated into the existing BAS/ATC system. �
March 3, 2000 15985 -2 99048.00
�
I
�
� �
� 1.08 YEAR 2000 CERTIFICATION -
� � .
� `A. Provide written certification that all software andlor hardware supports the year 2000
' date format. The scope of the Year 2000 date format must include,but is not limited to,
� �, the following criteria: , . .
j 1. All date related calculations produce correct results for multi-century scenarios and
I � ' j after the Year 2000. This includes age calculations, duration calculations,
scheduling calculations, etc.
2. All manipulations and comparisons of date-related data produce the desired results
I � for all valid date values within the scope of the application. This includes the
following conditions:
a. Current date.
�� � b. Pre-Year 2000 date. -
� c. Rollover from 1999 to 2000.
' � d. Year 2000 Leap Year.
i � i e. Post-Year 2000 date.
� f. Calculations involving mare than one century.
3. The application functions correctly without ending abnormally.
� � 4. The application recognizes Year 2000 as a leap year.
; 5. The application provides correct results for all date-related calculations.
� I .
1.09� SUBMITTALS
�
� �A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01300.
� ;
- �
� B. The following data/information shall be submitted for approval:
� I �
� i � 1. Complete sequence of operation.
' � 2. Control system CAD generated drawings including all pertinent data to provide a
functional operating system.
� ! 3. Valve schedules showing size, configuration, capacity and location of all ,
i equipment.
�� 4. Data sheets for all hardware and software control components.
� ' S. A description of the installation materials including conduit,wire, flex, etc.
- 6. Thermostadsensor locations.
7. Computer panel locations. - �
� 8. Provide as part of the submittal five copies of all data and control drawings.
,
� � 1.10 QUALIFICATIONS: �
�
; -
' � �
� -
March 3, 2000 15985 - 3 99048.00
� ;�
,I
I
i - �
� �
i �A. All BAS/ATC devices and mstallatzon shall be wararanted to be free from defects m
��� workmanship and material for a period of one year from the date of job accepta�ce by
', the owner. Any equipment, saftwaxe or labor found to be defective during this period �
shall be repaired or replaced without expense to the owner.Factory authazzzed
� warranty service shall be available within 200 miles of job site.
. \ �
PART- 2 PR4DUCTS A�ND SYSTEMS �
2A1 MANUFACTURER:
A. System as specified sliall be by Trane. � �
2A2 GENERAL � �
, A. 'The Building Automation System shail include but not be limited to the-fallowing
components: , �
l.. Connection to existing Operatar Interface,
2. System Applicatic�n Contrallers shall manage the Energy and Building
� Management capabilities of the automation system as well as facilitate remc►te �
communications and central manitoring.
3. Application Specific Controllers shall pravide distributed,pre-engineered control,
specific to the mechanical equipment specif ed: �
4. Custom Application Controllers with distributed custam progranlming capability
shall provide control far nonstandard control sequences. �
5. The Data Cammunications capability shall allow data to be shared between the
va.rious cantrollers in the architecture.
6. The system software shall include system software far global application �
functions, application software for distributed conirollers and operator inte�face
software. '
'7. End devices such as sensars, actuators,dampers,valves and relays. �
B. The failure af any singie component shail not interrupt the control strategies of other
aperational devices. System expansion shall be thraugh the addition of end devices, �
� contrallers and other devices described in this specification.
2.03 OPERATUR INTER.FACE �
A. The Operator intexface is existing. Provide all necessary saftware,hardware, �
prograsnming,wiring, etc.to properly interface new and e�zsting systems.
�
, �
1Vlarch 3,2044 15985 -4 99048.OQ �
I �
� 2.04�SYSTEM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
�
� A. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, .
stand-alone,microprocessor based System Application Controllers to manage the
� global strategies described in Application software section.
� B. The S stem A lication Controller shall have am le memo to su ort its o eratin `
Y PP P rY pP P g
� system, database and programining requirements.
�C. The operating system of the System Application Controller shall manage the input and
�, output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual
point information and allow central monitoring and alarms.
� �D. Data shall automatically be shared between System Application Controllers when they
are networked together.
� E. The database and custom programming routines of remote System Application
Controllers shall be editable from a single operator station.
� I F. The System Applications Controllers shall have the capability of being remotely
- monitored over telephone modem. Additional capabilities shall include automatically
- dialing out alarms, gathering alarms, reports and logs, programming and downloading
� databases. ,
�G. The controller shall continually check the status of all processor and memory circuits.
� If a failure is detected,the controller shall:
1. Assume a predetermined failure mode.
� ' 2. Emit an alarm.
� 3. Display card failure identification.
� 2.05 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
�A. Application Specific Controllers shall be stand-alone, microprocessor based Direct
� ; Digital Controllers with sufficient memory to handle its operating system, database and
' programming requirements.
� �B. The Application Specific Controller shall be pre-programmed,tested and factory
i mounted on the mechanical equipment to ensure reliability. Where factory mounting is
� not possible,the controllers shall be factory programmed and tested prior to shipment
� � to the job site. The controllers shall be clearly labeled as to controller type,where it is
` to be installed and software address (if applicable). The controller shall be fully tested _
�, upon installation to ensure that it is properly matched to the equipment it is controlling.
�_ �
IC. The controller shall communicate with other devices on the communication network
� and be fully integrated with the other system components.
I ; Mari h 3, 2000 15985 - 5 99048.00
� �
�
D. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. '
1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within water �
proof enclosures and sha11 be rated for operation at-40 to 155 deg F. �
2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures
and shall be rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. ' �
2.06 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS '
�
A. The Custom Application Controllers shall provide stand-alone control and require no
additional system components for complete operation. It shall have sufficient memory �
to support its operating system, database and programming requirements. .
B. All programming required for operation shall be memory resident and sha11 be�etained . ;�
in permanent memory. Battery backup for a minimum of 72 hours is also permissible.
C. The Custom Application Controller shall be configured such that the Portable Operator �
Interface can be plugged directly into it or within sight for programming, editirig and
other operator functions. , � �
D. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. • �
1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within �
waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at-40 to 155 deg F. � �
2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures
and sha11 be rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. -�
2.07 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE �
A. Hard wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through System Application, �
Custom Application or Application Specific Controllers. Slave devices are also
acceptable. Any critical points requiring immediate reaction shall be tied directly into �
the controller hosting the control software algorithm for the critical function. �, ' ,
B. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The �
binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of 12 mA at 12 VDC to be compatible
with commonly available control devices.
C. All status oints shown on the oint list shall be ositive roof differential ressure or ,
P P P P P
current sensing binary switches.
D. �
Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage, current or resistance s��nals
and shall have a minimum resolution of 0.1% of the sensing range. Analog inp�ats shall �
be compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
- E. Binaryoutputs shall provide a continuous low voltage signal for on/off control c+f �
Marcli 3, 2000 15985 - 6 99048:00
�
' � i
�
I
� remote devices. Where specified in the sequence of operations or indicated on the
� points list,binary outputs shall have 3-position(on/off/auto) override switches, status
� i lights and shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed position.
i
�F. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices.
� � Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 milliampere signal as required
� to provide proper control of the output device.
� � �
, !G. System architecture shall allow for point expansion in one of the following ways:
� 1. The addition of inpudoutput cards to an existing System Application Controller.
j2. A slave controller may be used to expand point capacity.
' �
; 3. 20% expansion capacity for all point types in all DDC panels.
� 2.08�AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES _
�
' �A. CONTROL VALVES �
i � i 1. The Building Automation System supplier shall provide all automatic control
' valves not specified to be supplied integral to the HVAC equipment.
� � 2. Valve bodies shall be 2-way normally open or closed, or 3-way mi�cing as
� �i specified. Valve bodies 2" and smaller shall be bronze, screwed type and shall be
� rated at 250 psig. Valve bodies 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron,flanged and rated at
' 125 psig.
� ' 3. Valves shall have stainless steel stems and allow for servicing including packing,
stem and disk replacement.
� � B. VALVE ACTUATORS
1. Valve actuators shall be electronic, spring return, low voltage (24 VAC), and
properly selected for the valve body and service.
� , 2. Actuators shall be fully proportioning and be spring return for normally open or
� normally closed operation as called out in the sequence of operations.
� 'C. TEMPERATURE SENSORS
i 1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Detector(RTD) or
� ' Thermistor as dictated by the requirements of this specification.
, 2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as specified in the sequence of operations.
� Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 5 feet in length. _
� , 3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well.
� 4. Space sensors shall be equipped with set point adjustment andlor override switch
! � as specified on the plans or in the sequence of operations.
� � 5. Accuracies shall be+/- 1 deg F for standard applications. Where high accuracy is
� � required, accuracies shall be+/- 0.2 deg F.
(
�D. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
' � 1. Differential Pressure Switches shall be fiunished as indicated for status u oses in
� ' . . p 1P
� � � i air and water applications. Provide single pole double throw switch with fully
- i
; March 3, 2000 15985 - 7 99048.00
' � �
� '
. 1 �
adjustable differential pressure settings. �
_ E. STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS �
1. Static pressure sensors shall be differential pressure type. The sensor range shall be
closely matched to the system static pressure: -0.5" to 0.5", -1" to 1",or 0"'to 2.5".
2. Sensor accuracy shall be plus or minus 5% of the sensing range. �
F. HIGH LIMIT THERMOSTATS -
1. High limit thermostats shall be manual reset type set at 120 deg F. �
G. LOW LIMIT THERMOSTATS �
1. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with a 20 foot mi�imum , �
element. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by_any on�foot
section. - �
2. Low limit shall be manual reset only.
2.09 SYSTEM APPLICATION CONTROLLER SOFTWARE _ ' ,�
A. SYSTEM SECURITY
1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords for a minimum of �
eight users.
� 2. Passwords shall have at least three levels of user access with data entry restrictions
being assignable by password. �
3. User log on/log off attempts shall be recorded.
' ' 4. The system shall.protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off
� following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable. ��
B. ALARMS �
1. The Building Automation System shall provide audio, visual, contact closure and
remote telephone annunciation for:
a. Remote equipment failure. � �
v b. Equipment run time. _
c. Number of start/stops.
d. Program failure. ' �
e. ,Card failure. '
f. Sensor failure. ,
2. Each analog sensor and binary point shall be individually alarmed for values in �
' excess of individual high/low limits or status. -
3. When an alarm state is detected,the alarin shall automatically be stored and the
user notified by printing the alarm message, sounding an audible tone and flashing �
an alarm message on the CRT. ,
� � �
� ,
March 3, 2000 15985 - 8 99048.00 �
i
� ' � -
�
� : PART-3 EXECUTION
i
� � 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
�
� A. All electrical work performed in the installation of the BAS/ATC system as described
� in this specification shall be per the National Electrical Code (NEC) and per applicable
state and local codes. Conduit shall be run parallel to buildirig lines properly supported
; and sized at a maximum of 40%fill. In no cases shall field installed conduit smaller
� � than 1/2" trade size be allowed.
� '
� ; B. All BAS/ATC wiring below 50 volts shall be�run in conduit under Division 15 except -
� that wiring which is routed above lay-in ceilings may be properly supported,plenum
. � rated cable. Do NOT lay wiring on top of ceiling. �
� 3.02 OWNER,TRAINING
�A. The BAS/ATC vendor shall provide 3 copies of an operator's manual describing all
� � ' operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the temperature
control and Building Automation System supplied. This vendor shall instruct the �
'� - owner's designated representatives in these procedures during the startup and test
, period. The,duration of the instruction period shall be no less than 4 hours and during
� � normal working hours.
� '
3.03;CALISRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS
i .
�
� �A. After completion of the installation,perform final calibrations and adjustments of the
i � equipment provided under this contract and supply services incidental to the proper
performance of the ATC and BAS system under warranty below.
� '
� , 3.04 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
� , A. Upon completion bf the calibration, contractor shall startup the system and perform all
` i � necessary testing and run diagnostic tests to ensure proper operation. Contractor shall
� ;� be responsible for generating all software and entering all database necessary to
, perform the sequence of control and specified software routines. An acceptance test in
_ the presence of the owner's representative or engineer shall be performed.
� i
3.05 WARRANTY
� ' '
i . - .
!
;
� �
,; .
� � March 3, 2000 15985 - 9 99048.00
_ ��
�I �
- � �
A. All BAS/ATC devices and installation shall be warranted to�be free from defects in ,
workmanship and material for a period of one year from the date of job acceptance by
the owner. Any equipment, software or labor found to be defective during this period �
shall be repa�red or replaced without expense to the owner. Factory authonzed
warranty service shall be available within 200 miles of job site. �
� . j
- END OF SECTION , �
�
, ' �
,
. ,
` � �
_ �
, �
�
�,
�
_ �
, � ',
. �
March 3, 2000� 15985 - 10 99048.00 �
�
� . SECTION 15990
' , , TEST AND BALANCE
� PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED �
� �
i A. Review construction documents and make written recommendations to mechanical
� contractor on placement of dampers and other devices to facilitate balancing of the
i.
I system.
� B. Provide at least one job site visit during construction to observe sheet metal -
installation, identify possible duct restrictions and to verify placement and access to air
and water balancing devices. Furnish a written report on observation visit and
� i recommendations. ,
• _ , C. Airside balancing of inechanical systems and equipment specified in this division.
i � �
. D. Waterside balancing of inechanical systems and equipment specified in this division.
� , � E. In renovation projects,provide preconstruction air flow measurements and testing of
; _ existing air handling systems where indicated on the drawings.
� , �
F. Testing of inechanical systems and equipment to demonstrate proper operation.
� i G. All work specified in this section to comply with the provisions of Section 15010.
' H. Submit a final copy of the balancing report to the Florida Agency for Health Care
� �i Administration(AHCA). �
�
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
� �A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions.
� B. Section 15035: Testing Mechanical Systems.
� ! C. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods. �
,
; D. Section 15060: Piping and Fittings.
� ; E. Section 15890: Sheet Metal Ductwork-Low Pressure.
�, ' .
� -
,I
, ' March 3,2000 15990 - 1 99048.00
I
- ,
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE �
A. Procure services of an independent balance and testing agency, which specializes in �
baIancing and adjusting of HVAC systems,to balance and adjust water distribution
' systems, air moving equipment and air distribution systems specified in this division.
B. Review construction documents and make written recommendations to mechanical �
contractor on placement of dampers and other devices. - _
�
• C. Provide at least one job site visit during construction to observe sheet metal �
- installation, identify possible duct restrictions and to verify placement and access to air II
and water balancing devices. Furnish a written report on observation visit and , ' �I
recommendations. ,
D. Work performed to be under direct supervision of qualified technician. � �
E. Accurately calibrate and maintain instruments in good working order during balancing ,
and testing of systems.
F. Make any and all temperature,pressure and flow measurements requested by the , �
_ Project 1Vlechanical Engineer to verify that the air and water systems have been
` balanced and are operating in accordance with the contract documents. -
1.04 SUBMITTALS r
A. Submit written preconstruction report on air flow measurements and testing of existing �
air handling systems where indicated on the drawings.
B. Submit written recommendations to Architect and Mechanical contractor prior to start �
of construction on placement of dampers and other devices to facili+ate balancing of the
system. �
C. Submit written report during construction on sheet metal installation, identification of
possible duct restrictions,placement of air and water balancing devices and access to �
these balancing devices.
D. Submit air balance and testing agency for approval in accordance with S,ection Q1300 �
including qualifications and sample balancing report forms.
. ,� �
PART-2 PARTS (NOT APPLICABLE) �
, �
�
March 3,2000 15990 -2 99048.00 ,
i ,
� ' ,
IPART -3 EXECUTION
� 3.01;BALANCING AGENCY
I
�A. Certified member of Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or NEBB.
i '
B. Submit 7 copies of proposed reporting format and submittal data prior to starting
� , balancing and adjusting of HVAC systems.
�
' � C. Perform work, compile data and submit 3 copies of completed balance report for
' evaluation and approval upon completion.
D. Within 90 days after completion of work,Engineer may request a recheck or resetting
' I of outlet, supply air fan or exhaust fan as listed in report. Provide technicians to assist-
� in making tests and adjustments during this period of time.
� 3.02 GENERAL TEST][l�TG
I A. Where indicated on the drawings, verify air quantities as shown on the contract
� ' documents at demolished and existing to remain air distribution and terminal devices
before demolition work is started. Report any deficiencies immediately to architect.
1 Balance to new air quantities as shown when construction is completed. I
B. Test all systems and equipment installed under this division to demonstrate proper _
� operation.
C. Place HVAC systems and equipment into operation and continue operation during each
' ; working day of balancing and adjusting. I
' D. Terminal heating coils:
� � � 1. Set air handling unit discharge temperature for 52 deg F.
2. Set converter or boiler discharge water temperature at 180 deg F.
� 3. Verify airflow.
� � 4: Measure discharge air temperature and leaving water temperature.
5. Adjust leaving air temperature to scheduled setting at design water temperature
, drop using the coil balancing valve.
i � 6. After individual coil balancing, set all coils to full heat and measure zone flows
' ' with flow measuring devices.
I
� 3.03 AIRSIDE BALANCING PHASE
, i A. Adjust fan RPM to design requirements.
' � .
' B. Record motor full load amperes.
� �
, March 3, 2000 15990 - 3 99048.00
' '�
� ' �
. ,
C. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and adjust fans to design airflow rates. �
D. Record system operating static pressures, suction and discharge. �
E. Adjust system for design recirculated air CFM.
F. Adjust system for design CFM outside air. ' I
G. Record entering and leaving air temperatures: , � I�
1. Dry-bulb cooling.
2. Wet-bulb cooling. � ,
3. Dry-bulb heating. ,
H. Adjust main and zone supply,return and exhaust air ducts to proper design CFM. , , ,
I. Adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design airflow. �
J. Identify and record readings for each rille, diffuser and re ister includin location and �
g g g
area served.
K. Identi and list tested e ui ment size e and manufacture of diffu e �
fy q p , ,typ s rs, gnlles and
registers.
L. Use manufacturer's ratings on e ui ment to make re uired calculations. � . ,
q P q ,
M. Include required FPM velocity and test resultant velocity,required CFM and test �
resultant CFM after adjustments on readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers. I
N. Set automatic dampers to operate as specified. �
O. Check controls for proper calibrations and sequencing.
�-
P. Adjust diffusers, grilles and registers to minimize drafts.
Q. Check air velocity across each duct-mounted smoke detector. ��erify that the minimum �
velocity recommended by the smoke detector manufacturer's iristallation instructions is
present. If the required velocity is not present, contractor shall relocate to obtain �
necessary air velocity.
R. On existing air handlers,return fans and exhaust fans, contractor shall make changes in i
pulleys and belts required for correct balance of existing system.
3.04 WATERSIDE BALANCING ,
A. Preparation: - ; �
March 3, 2000 15990 -4 � 99048.00
, , , �
�
� 1. Open a11 system valves to full open position.
2. Set mixing valves to full coil flow.
� � � 3. Remove and clean strainers.
4. Verify p�.unp ratation.
' S. Examine water system and determine if piping has been treated and cleaned as
� ' hereinbefoare specified.
� 6. Verify no automatic air vents aze cannected to system.
I -
� 'i B. Set temperature controls at cails far full cooling. �
�
� ' �C. Use same procedure far balancing hot water cails, set for full heating.
� f D. Check and set operating temperatures of convertor ar boiler ta design requirements.
� ' E. Check leaving water tem eratures and return cuater tem exatures throu h converter or
� � P , g
i boilex and reset ta correct design tempexatures.
� F. Check water tem eratures at inlet side of coalin and heatin coils. Record rise or dro
, , P g g p
, � af temperature from saurce.
� �
, � G. Proceed to balance each chilled water coil and hat water coil using flow measurzng
, I devices. "
� � _
H. Plumbing: � '
� ' 1. Adjust hat water system for uniform circulation.
2. Adjust flush valves and automatic control devices for proper and quiet operation,
� I. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustment at coils, mark settings and record
' data.
i
I
� � 3.05 FINAL BALANCING PHASE
I
:i A. After coil adjustments,xecheck settings at pumps, chillers and boilers and readjust as
� required.
B. Install pressure gauges at each coil or use flow measuring devices provided and set ta
� + design flow rates.
� �
C. Set pressure drop across bypass valves to match coil full flow pressure drap.
� ; -
' D. Record and check following items at each cooling and heating element;
�
� 1. Inlet and leaving water temperatures. �
2. Pressure drop of each cail.
�
i E. List,water metering device readings.
� i .
- �
' M�ch 3,2004 15990- 5 99448.Q4
� ' -
_ '
. . �
3.06 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT �
A. Furnish a 3 co ies of written eneral re ort on�o erational checkout includin the �
, P g P P , g
, following:
1. Temperature readings taken in each area controlled by a thermostat. '
2. Check final air velocity across each duct-mounted smoke detector. Verify that the
minimum velocity recommended by the smoke detector manufacturer's insrallation
instructions is present. If detectors are equipped with a visual air flow wheel,, � _
verify that wheel is operating properly. ,
3. Airside and waterside temperature readings across each coil. �
4. Airside and waterside entering and leaving pressures across each air handling unit
component including filters, dampers, coil, fan, diffuser and the total unit. � �
5. RPM,voltage,nameplate rated amps and actual amps on each motor. -_ '
6. RPM,voltage, nameplate rated amps and actual amps, GPM on each pump. I,
7. RPM, voltage, nameplate rated amps and actual amps, static pressure, CFIVI, FPM, �
on each fan. ' '
8. Check systems for proper operation of equipment, controls, interlocks and safeties
on both heating and cooling cycles.
, 9. Record sling psychometric readings of both dry and wet bulb temperatures for the _ , �I
followmg:
a. Outside air conditions.
b. Air handling unit air entering and discharge conditions. �
c. Room conditions and thermostat settings for each location.
10. Operate systems for five days and instruct Owner's representative in operat�ori of I'�
systems. '
11. Furnish written report on checkout.
� 12. Report on procedure followed in making operational checkout on air and water �
systems. ,
13. Statement signed by Owner stating operating instructions have been received.�
3.07 ACCEPTANCE '
A. The following items are to be completed before requesting a final inspection. ,
1. All work required under this division of specifications except as permitted by
Engineer.
2. System balancing. � �
3. Control system checkout.
4. Furnish required operating instructions to owner.
5. Furnish wiring diagrams,pneumatic and/or electric control diagrams and m�ount � �
one copy of each in the equipment rooms.
B. Job will be accepted on basis of tests and inspections. �
C. After final test and balance report has been accepted,provide locations of all test ports �
March 3, 2000 .15990 - 6 99048.00
. , '
_
1 ' .
� in ducts to mechanical insulator. See Section 15250.
� „ D. A representative of balancing agency is to be present to assist during final inspection. '
i E. Furnish necessary mechanics to operate system,make any adjustments and assist with
' � final inspection. •
i
i
, I .
i
+ END OF SECTION
�
, ��
,
�
' � -
I
_ �I
' -
�
� ! -
i
1 ; '
' `
� � -
' :i
i
�
,
' I
,I.
;�
, � �
�
i -
�
I
1 I
'I
_ 'I March 3, 2000 15990 - 7 99048.00
, "
, i
�
� ' � SECTION 15999
CRITICAL SYSTEMS CHECKLIST
� '
i
� -
� ' PART - 1 GENERAL -
� 1.01 RESPONSIBLE PARTY
A. The General Contractor is THE responsible party for completion of the CRITICAL
' SYSTEMS CHECKLIST.
1.02' COMPLETION OF CHECKLIST
' A. The checklist provided in this Section must be completed by the General Contractor
and the appropriate subcontactors and returned to the Engineer at least two days prior
' to the Final or phased final on-site Observation visit.
B. A final observation visit will not made until this systems checklist is totally complete.
' C. If listed systems are not complete during final or phased final observation trip, General
Contractor will be billed for field engineer's time and expenses for the trip.
' 1.03 DOCUMENTATIOla1
� 1.04 REFERENCES
' A. ASHRAE Std 111 -Practices for Measurement, Testing,Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating,Ventilation,Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988.
' ; B. NEBB (STDS) -Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound
, i and Vibration;National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
� ' C. AABC MN-1 -National Standard for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and
, Air Conditioning Systems; Associated Air Balance Council. i
� � �
� I
� PART -2 PRODUCTS: NOT APPLICABLE
' �
� � �'
. �
' , .
; March 3,2000 15999 - 1 99048.00
'
' '
PART-3 EXECUTION '
3.01 AIR HANDLING UNITS CM/GC SUBCONTRACTOR '
A. Automatic shutdown on general fire alarm ,
- B. Automatic shutdown from devices within Fire Alarm zone. This includes ull stations '
P �
smoke detectors, flow switch, etc. .
C. Automatic shutdown from devi �
ce m ad�acent Fire Alarm zone where duct system
crossovers occur. This includes pull stations, smoke detectors,flow switches, etc. .
'
3.02 FIRE & FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS CM/GC �
SUBCONTRACTOR _ �
A. Verify sleeve clearances (1/8" per foot and maximum of 1").
B. Verify proper angle overlap (1" min on wall). . �
C. Breakaway joints (NO screws). '
D. Verify smoke damper operation on air handling unit shutdown and fire alarm
activation. '
3.03 FIRE PENETRATIONS CM/GC SUBCONTRACTOI�
A. Pipe sleeves firesafed or caulked.
i
B. Non-sleeved services: insulation stopped and penetration sealed. � �
3.04 AIR BALANCE CM/GC SUBCONTRACTOR . '
A. Complete air balance and report. Report to be typed and in AABC recommended
format and sent to the Architect/Engineer. '
B. Soiled areas under negative pressure.
C. Sensitive or clean areas under positive ressure. �
P
3.05 SPRINKLER SYSTEM CM/GC SUBCONTRACTOR �
A. Sprinklers: �
1. Flow test from inspectors test station and verify alarm activation. ,
2. Verify location and area covered by each flow switch. ,
3. Provide sprinkler system certification from contractor/installer per the '
March 3, 2000 15999 -2 99048.00 '
�
' `
i
�
�
, i requirements of NFPA-13.
;
' .
, END OF SECTION
' !
, I
� �
' ; � �
�
� ' _
i �
1 , .
i : �
, ,
1 ��
� ,
� ,
i � '
, ;
�
, ;
1 � -
;
1 ' .
; ;
i �
�,
1 �� �
,
1 �� �
1 � .
�
' i March 3, 2000 ` 15999 -3 99048.00
I
f
I
'
' I
' SECTION 16010
' - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
;
f
, PART - 1GENERAL
� 1.01, WORK INCLUDED
i
� A. Materials, labor and equipment required to furnish and install a complete electncal
' 'system as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.
,
B. Complete electrical distribution system and materials including:
, ; 1. Lighting -
2. Power
3. Control Switches
' 4. Receptacles
5. Branch circuits
� 6. Lighting fixtures
' C. Groundin .
g
' D. Fire alarm and detection system. I
� E. Division 16 trade shall coordinate with General Contractor such that verification takes
place that all required connections of Division 15 equipment have been provided for
prior to bid. Excluded items shall be documented and documentation forwarded to
� i Architect prior to bid.
F. Power wiring for equipment furnished under Division 15. Division 16 trade will
' � coordinate with final Division 15 equipment and include all necessary power
� connections recommended by Division 15 equipment manufacturers in the Division 16
� contract.
� I
G. All 120-volt control and interlock wiring and associated conduit for Division 15
� equipment shall be provided under Division 16 as defined in the Division 15
' ; specifications and drawings. Install control components furnished under other
� divisions including but not limited to controllers, relays,thermostats, etc. necessary for
� ' ' a completely operational system under Division 16 contract.
� H. Where substitutions are made by Division 15 trade,the cost for any Division 16 rough-
' ' in relative to the substitution will be the responsibility of the Division 15 trade unless
written documentation is provided five days prior to bid which notifies the Division 16
' trade of such substitutions. Division 16 trade shall notify the Division 15 trade of this
� requirement ten days prior to bid in writing.
March 3, 2000 16010 - 1 99048.00
� �
'
'
I. Exact locations of outlets for owner-furnished equipment or equipment furnished under
other Divisions must conform with manufacturer's rough-in drawings. '
J. Demolition to conform with demolition notes shown on drawings.
K. Communications to conform with res ective sections of these s ecifications. �
P p
1.02 RELATED WORK r
A. Furnish the following work as specified under other Divisions of these Specifications, ,
but coordinate with other trades prior to bid.
l. Section 09900: Painting. .
2. Section 01045: Cutting and patching. _ �
3. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data.
4. Section 01620: Storage and Protection.
1.03 DEFINITIONS �
A. Wiring: Wire and cable, installed in raceway with all required boxes, fittings, ,
connectors, etc. completely installed.
B. Provide: Furnish, install and connect, and put in good working order. ,
C. Engineer: Engineer of record whose seal is affixed to the contract specifications and/or '
drawings of Division 16.
1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES �
A. In general all equipment shall be furnished with U.L. label where such label is
r
available. Where equipment cannot be furnished with U.L. label, specific mention '
shall be made in the submittal for that particular item of equipment indicating that it is
not U.L. labeled. Install U.L. labeled equipment in conformance with applicable U.L.
Standards. �
B. Install electrical work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications, edition of NEC
in effect at project location,recommendations of NFPA, state and local electrica� and i
building codes and special codes having jurisdiction over specific portions of work.
This includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. 1992 Florida Administrative Code and Rules and Standards for Hospitals and !
Health Care Facilities, Pamphlet#59A-3., revised 7/97
2. 1999 National Electrical Code with applicable local amendments '
3. 1994 Life Safety Code,NFPA 101
4. 1997 Standard Building Code with applicable local amendments.
5. 1996-1997 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services Guidelines for �
March 3, 2000 16010 - 2 94048.00 �
� , '
' I
� Construction and Equipment of Hospital and Medical Facilities.
i 6. All currently adopted NFPA Standards including but not limited to: NFPA-13,
' NFPA-72 (1993),NFPA-90A,NFPA-90B,NFPA-91, and NFPA-99.
!C. In event of conflict between national, state, and/or local codes, the more stringent of the
' code requirements shall be followed.
I D. In event of conflict between Drawings, Specifications and such codes,notify Architect
' ; in writing prior to bid. A ruling will then be made by Architect in writing.
i
', , ; E. Obtain permits and certificates of approval from all authorities having jurisdiction over
� the installation and pay all fees required for scope of work being done.
I, I PART -2 PRODUCTS
2.01' (NO PRODUCTS SPECIFIED LTNDER THIS SECTION)
'
' PART-3 EXECUTION
�
3.01 SUBMITTALS
' e 'a and e ui ment rior to manufacturer order or installation and
A. Submit list of mat ri ls q p p ,
, within 20 days after award of contract for approval. Include each item of material and
equipment whether or not shop drawings are also required. Include in list
manufacturer's name, catalog number and other complete identification, as well as
'I ' dimensions and detailed data.
B. Submit seven sets of specification sheets, blue line prints or data sheets for the
, i following items, bound and identif ed according to Drawings and Specifications. Mark
reproducibles and return for proper distribution. Include a separate submittal section or
i brochure for each product listed below with all sections or brochures submitted at the
' � same time in one package. The first sheet in each product section or brochure to
summarize and list all components, manufacturer's name and catalog number.
1. Submittals to include, but not be limited to, the following:
' � 2. Lighting Fixtures including ballasts and lamps
� I 3. Wiring devices and plates
� 4. Fire Alarm and Detection system
� I
; C. Affix stamp of approval on certified shop drawings and submittals as evidence that
• i Drawings have been checked. Drawings submitted without this stamp of approval will
, i not be considered and will be returned for proper resubmission.
' � D. If submittals show variances from requirements of Contract, make specific mention of
Maich 3, 2000 16010 - 3 99048.00
,
, 1
such variation in letter of transmittal in order that, if acceptable, suitable action may be � '
taken for proper adjustment.
E. Contractor is not relieved of responsibility for executing work in accordance with '
, Contract even though such submittals have been approved.
F. If shop drawings/submittals are returned and stamped "Rejected,Revise and '
, Resubmit," resubmit with appropriate corrections made to the shop
drawings/submittals. ,
� G. ' If the shop drawings or submittals must be resubmitted a second time,the cost of the ,
Architect's time to review the second resubmittal is paid by the Contractor based on the
Architect's published hourly rates.
3.02 SITE VISIT '
� A. Visit job site prior to bid date to determine actual conditions under which work shall be
done,to familiarize oneself with project and to verify total scope of work required. '
B. Failure to do so does not constitute a reason for an extra charge. ,
3.03 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS SHUTDOWN
A. Contractor shall noti the local Fire De artment and Hos ital Staff rior to an ,
fY P P p Y
shutdown of Hospital Life Safeiy Systems such as Fire Alarm System, Emergeney
Power Generation System, or Medical Gas Alarm System. '
3.04 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS AND REPORTS t
A. Contractor shall provide written response to each comment on job observation reports
prior to the scheduling of the next job observation. ,
, �
_ ' ,
� I�
� ,
. '
March 3, 2000 16010 -4 99048.00 ,
I �
, I �
' I
3.05 FINAL OBSERVATION
i
' �A. Contractor shall verify Life Safety related systems are ready for final testing one week
i prior to scheduled visit by Architectural/Engineering construction observation team and
i
; conf'irm in writing. Written certification must be provided by the fire alarm system
' ; manufacturer that their systems have been completely checked and tested and that they
� meet all code requirements as well as the requirements of the plans and specifications.
' Should the Contractor fail to send written confirmation, and the manufacturer's
' ; certifications, the team shall not be sent. Should the Contractor send the confirmation,
� and upon arriving at the jobsite,the team finds the job is not ready,the team shall leave
, � the job and the Contractor shall be required to pay all costs to owner for delays in
occupancy of facility and all costs to A/E team including expenses and time which
shall be billed hourly including travel time. Refer to the general electrical notes on
� � contract documents for what is required for Life Safety Final Observation. _
� END OF SECTION
� , _
1 �
1 � -
'
�
� ' ,I
I
' �
, '�
' �
� �
' �
I
;
' �
' �
Ma'rch 3, 2000 16010 - 5 99048.00
1
, i
1 I
' I ,
SECTION 16050
�
' ' BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
�
�
' , PART - 1GENERAL '
' 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Use products for work m this Section produced only
' , by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with history of
' successful production acceptable to Architect.
' ' � B. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are -
thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who are completely familiar
� ' with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of
� I
this Section.
I
� PART -2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS
' t' 'st ne or more manufacturers and do not include "or
A. Where specifica ions li o
, equivalent", furnish materials made by one of manufacturers listed(no substitutions
will be permitted). Where "or equivalent" is included,the Contractor's bid shall be
based on the specified manufacturer(s), but the Contractor may submit after the bid
, , date equal products by another manufacturer subject to approval by the Engineer. If
' the Contractor bases his bid on a manufacturer other than the specified manufacturer(s),
� he does so at his own risk, since the unspecified manufacturer may not be approved.
�
1 I
B. Architect must approve substitution before purchase, fabrication, and/or installation.
� i Extensions of the contract time will not be allowed due to delays caused by rejection(s)
' �i of proposed substitutions.
' ;� C. If unapproved materials are installed, work required to remove and replace unapproved
� , items will be done at Contractor's expense.
I
ID. Include any and all additions or deductions needed in Division 16 contract for all
� , ' changes to project required by substitutions under other trades. Include changes to
I
' work furnished under other Divisions with proposal to make said substitutions as an
' j add to the Division 16 contract. Where related cost is not included in approved
! substitute proposal,the substituting trade will assume all such expense which will not
, be considered an extra charge to the owner.
� � .
' ' March 3, 2000 16050 - 1 99048.00
1
E. Owner reserves right to reject substitutions proposed. ,
PART -3 EXECUTION I
� 3.OlINSTALLATION ' �
A. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Do not scale for exact sizes or locations.
Drawings are not intended to disclose absolute or unconditional knowledge of a�tual '
field conditions.
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING '
A. Refer to Section 01045 for general requirements of cutting and patching. - '
B. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace damaged work with new materials. �,
3.03 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS - I
A. Refer to Section 01620 for general storage and protection requirements. �
B. Deliver equipment and materials to job site in original, unopened, labeled containers.
C. Store ferrous materials to revent rustin . Store finished materials and e ui ment to '
P g q p
' prevent staining and discoloring.
- '
D. Protect work and materials from damage by weather, entrance of water and dirt.
' E. Cap conduit during installation. '
F. Avoid damage to materials and equipment in place. '
3.04 COORDINATION
A. Failure to route conduit or other systems through building without interfering with '
other equipment and construction does not constitute a reason for an extra charge.
B. Locate equipment, conduit and fixtures as required to fit into available s aces in �
P
building.
C. Do not introduce electrical w rk ' t �
o in o buildmg at such times and manner as to cause
damage to structure. '
D. Make equipment requiring service readily accessible.
_ �
March 3, 2000 16050 -2 99048.00 ' �
�
' �
�
3.05,FIRESTOPPING AND SEALING
� �A. Seal conduits which pass through floor slabs (except ground floor) with material
� approved for use by local authorities and in accordance with architectural details and
; specifications.
� �
B. Seal around conduits or other wiring materials also passing through partitions which
� extend to the underside of the slab above, and those passing through rated walls in
I ��, i accordance with Architectural details andlor specifications.
� C. Use material approved for use by local authorities to prevent passage of smoke or fire
�f � � and in accordance with azchitectural specifications.
i
� 3.06� TESTING AND EQUIPMENT SERUICING -
� A. Install complete electrical system entirely free from improper grounds and short and
� � open circuits.
B. Make a11 required tests on conductors before energizing circuit and document in
� accordance with NFPA-70 and NFPA-99 requirements.
' C. Make test to insure that entire system is in proper operating condition, and that
adjustments and setting of apparatus (circuit breakers, fuses, control equipment, etc.)
have been made. Correct any defects discovered in new and existing system(s) during
� tests as required to meet with Architect's approval.
'� D. Turn equipment over to Owner in lubricated condition with instruction on fiuther
, lubrication included in operating instructions.
� ' ,
; E. Also instruct Owner on proper usage, care and maintenance of entire electrical system
,� � including all special systems or apparatus. ,
IF. At termination of work under this Division furnish Owner six com lete bound sets of
� ; equipment catalog sheets, manufacturer's specifications and service and operating
' instructions on equipment furnished under this Division.
� I
3.07 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
i
� A. Remove surplus materials and debris caused by, or incidental to, electrical work. ,
�
� � B. Remove such debris at frequent intervals (minimum of one clean-up day per week).
� ; Keep job clean during construction. ��I
G
3.08 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT I
� '
' March 3, 2000 16050 - 3 99048.00
�
'
3.09 RECORD DRAWINGS �
A. Maintain one set of blue line electrical prints on site,marked to show as-built �-
conditions and installations. All information recorded on record prints shall be
transferred by Division 16 Trade to a mylar reproducible following completion of
construction. As-built mylars to be turned over to Owner within four weeks of date job '�
is complete and final approval is obtained.
3.10 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER ��
A. Provide,maintain and remove after construction is completed, temporary lightia�g �
adequate for workman safety and temporary power for a11 trades including any =�-phase
power required.
B. Provide, all necessary components for a complete temporary electrical system ir_ �
accordance with NFPA 70 Article 305 and OSHA standard requirements including but �
not limited to the following: �
1. Feeders
2. Branch circuits
3. Receptacles - minimum of one 20amp, 120V duplex type device for each 1�00 ft2 .�
of renovated or new space.
4. Lamps with protective wireguards -minimum of one 150 watt pigtail for each 500
square feet of new or renovated space. �
5. Grounding -
6. Ground fault protection(all 120V receptacles used by construction crews shall be '
ground fault protected).
7. Provide documented assured equipment grounding conductor program in
accordance with NEC 305-6(b). � �
8. Guarding of high voltage equipment to be maintained in accordance with NEC 305
, requirements.
C. Owner to pay utility cost. - �
3.11 POWER OUTAGES �
A. Coordinate all power outages with Owner and submit for approval proposed schedule
of work indicating extent, number and length of outages required to perform wor'_c. �
B. Include in bid cost of overtime labor required for power outage to occur after O�Tner's
normal hours of operation. �
�
. �
March 3, 2000 16050 -4 99048.00 �
1
,� �
3.12 OTHER MATERIALS
�
� �A. Work of this Division also includes those items not specifically mentioned or
, , described, but which are obviously necessary to conform to the design intent,
! applicable codes and to produce a complete electrical system that functions properly.
� �
B. Materials as selected by Contractor are subject to approval of Architect.
� 3.13 GUARANTEE-WARRANTY
� i A. Guarantee work to be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of
one year from date of final acceptance of building by authorities having jurisdiction,
' Architect, and Owner.
� -
' � ; B. Repair and replace defective work and other work damaged thereby which becomes
defective during term of Guarantee-Warranty.
�
, ; C. Furnish Owner with three written copies of Guarantee-Warranty.
�
� �
END OF SECTION
� ,
� I
� �
�
,
� i ,
�
i
� '
� I
�
� i
I
� I �i
_ !
� �
� � March 3, 2000 16050 - 5 99048.00
i ,
�
� I
SECTION 16111
i i
� ; CONDUIT
�
� PART - 1 GENERAL
� 1.01' WORK INCLUDED
� '
A. Conduit
� I
� B. Conduit Fittings
� • 1.02� RELATED WORK -
� A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
'� I
B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
� -
� - D TS
PART 2PR0 UC
� 2.01 CONDUIT �
� ; A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Allied, Triangle, Wheatland or approved equal.
� B. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Allied, Triangle, Western, Wheatland or approved
� ; equal.
� C. Flexible Steel Conduit (Greenfield): Electriflex, Alflex, International Metal Hose, or
�� ; approved equal.
� D. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit(Sealtite): Alflex, Electriflex, International Metal Hose,
� � Triangle or approved equal.
�
� � E. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Allied, Triangle, Western, Wheatland or approved
� equal.
i
' 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS
� �
� A. Couplings and Connectors: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Thomas & Betts(Steel City),
� Raco, or approved equal.
�� �
i B. Bushings: Appleton, Crouse Hinds, Raco, Thomas & Betts, or approved equal.
� ! �
� March 3, 2000 16111 - 1 99048.00
r �
� _
C. Straps and Hangers: B-Line, Caddy, Minerallac, Raco Thomas & Betts, or approved �
equal.
- D. Group Pipe supports: B-line, Thomas &Betts, Unistrut, or approved equal. �•
E. Expansion Fittings: O.Z. Gedney Type AX or equal by Appleton, or approved �qual. �
F. Exposed Conduit Fittings: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, O.Z. Gedney, Thomas &Betts or
approved equal. #
PART -3 EXECUTION �
3.01 CONDUIT USAGE _ �
A. Underground or underslab conduit: use only rigid galvanized steel or IMC:
B. Interior conduit ex osed 8-feet or more above finished floor: use onl ri id alvanized �
P Y g g
steel, IMC, or EMT.
C. Interior conduit ex osed below 8-feet above finished floor: use onl ri id alvanized �
P Y g g
steel or IMC.
' c c a • u nl �\
D. Conduit on ealed in w lls or above ceilmgs. se o y EMT.
E. Use of type "MC", "NM", "AC", etc. prefabricated cable or ENT conduit is not �
acceptable.
F. Minimum conduit size to be 1/2" unless otherwise required by system or size of �
conductors.
3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION �
A. In general, conduit installation to follow layout shown on drawings. However, this �
layout is diagrammatic only and where changes are necessary due to structural
conditions, other apparatus or other causes, such changes will be made without c��st to -
Owner. Offsets in conduits axe not indicated and must be furnished as required. �
B. Coat metallic conduit placed in fill below concrete or underground with two heavy ✓
coats of asphaltum. Recoat any damage to asphaltum coating prior to backfilling. '
C. Support conduit and secure to forms when cast in concrete so that conduit will not be '�
displaced during pouring of concrete. Stuff boxes with cork fittings to prevent entrance
of water during concrete pouring and at other times during construction,prior to
completion of conduit installation. �
March 3, 2000 16111 - 2 99��48.00 �
� I
�
�D. Route exposed conduit and conduits installed above removable lay-in ceilings at right
1 i angles or parallel to walls of building, not "as the crow flies". Neatly rack parallel
; conduits together and make bends uniform to one another. Where installation is made
'� inferior utilizing poor practice contrary to these methods, said installation will be
� �� ,� removed and reinstalled at Contractor's expense.
�E. Use proper sized tools for bending. Do not heat conduit. Dents and flat spots will be
� � ; rejected. Cut and thread conduit so ends will butt in couplzngs. Make threads no
longer than necessary and ream pipe free of burrs.
� I F. Color-code essential electrical system conduits that are exposed or above accessible
ceilings by painting each coupling in accordance with NEC and General Electrical
� �� Notes on drawings. -
' G. Leave one#10 or equivalent nylon pull wire in empty conduits.
� �
H. Seal underground raceways entering building with duct seal at both ends.
� 3.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS
' , A. When cast in concrete slabs not on grade, use connectors and couplings for electrical
� metallic tubing (EMT) of the steel compression type, concrete tight.
B. When installed concealed in walls or above ceilings use steel fittings exclusively. For
� , sizes 1" and smaller, use single set screw connectors and couplings with two set screw;
� for sizes larger than 1", use double set screw connectors and couplings with four set
� .; screws.
i C. Use throated insulating bushing on a11 connectors.
-��' � �
� D. Diecast connectors and couplings are not acceptable.
� , E. Provide plastic bushings for all other feeder and branch applications.
�
3.04 CONDUIT SUPPORT
� !
, ' A. Support conduit vertically and horizontally by straps or hangers. Do not exceed these
' � ; intervals as described in NEC Section 346-12 for rigid metal conduit and as described
I �' ! in NEC Section 345-12 and 348-12 for IMC and EMT.
, ;
� B. Use expansion fittings,properly bonded to assure ground continuity, across expansion
' � , � joints in floors and ceilings. Use double lock nuts and bushings on rigid galvanized
; panel feeders at panel tubs.
� -
March 3, 2000 16111 - 3 99048.00
� i
�
C. Conduit shall be supported independently and not be su orted from ductwork �
PP ,
ductwork flan es i in other conduits or racewa s or ca 1 �
g ,p p g, y , b es.
� �r
END OF SECTION ,�
. �
;�
. �
�
, �
,
_ '�
�
I � �
.�
. '�
�
;�
�
March 3,2000 1611'1 -4 990.48.00
�.
� '_
i
� �
,� I
� SECTION 16120
i
� , WIRE AND CABLE
I
,� PART - 1 GENERAL
' 1.01!WORK INCLUDED
� ' I
A. Wire and Cable
� I
1.02�RELATED WORK
� ,A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions -
'B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
� �
PART -2 PRODUCTS
� 2.01 MATERIALS
,� � A. All wire and cable shall be manufactured within the United States of America.
�,� ! B. Use stranded copper, Type THWN for feeder and power circuits#8 and larger only.
' �� �� �� �� �� �� �� ��
Type NM , MC , SE , AC , etc. prefabricated cables are not acceptable.
� C. Use 600-volt wire and cable by Cablec, General Cable, Okonite, Rome, Triangle or
Southwire unless otherwise noted on drawings.
I
� i D. For line voltage control wiring, use#14 type THHN/THWN copper by one of the
� , manufacturers listed above. For low voltage control wiring use type wiring
i recommended by equipment manufacturer and as required by applicable section of '
� i NFPA 70.
� E. Use solid copper type THHN/THWN for branch circuit wiring#10 and smaller only.
� Type "NM", "MC", "SE", "AC", etc.,prefabricated cable or stranded conductors are
� not acceptable.
, i
� ; F. Conductors for branch circuit wiring smaller than#12 are not acceptable. �
_ I
� ; � G. Provide fixture wire in accordance with Article 402 of the National.Electrical Code.
j H. Provide color-coded wire with a different color for each phase and neutral and ground
' as follows:
� �
March 3, 2000 16120 - 1 99048.00
1 i
��
1. 120/208-volts circuits ��
I ase
a. ph s A, B, and C: black,red and blue respectively
b. neutral: white 'I
I c. ground: green or bare.
2. 277/480-volt circuits
a. phases A, B, and C: brown, orange, yellow respectively � ��
b. neutral gray
c. ground: green.
��
I. Approved color tape is acceptable for feeders only. Branch circuit conductors s hall
have color-coded insulation. Also provide color-coded wire for control circuits. �
�
J. Use Scotchlok or ldeal wire connectors for#14 through#8 conductors. Use Burndy or
equivalent by T& B, compression connectors with crimpit cover, type CC, for#6-600 ��
MCM conductors.
K. Where branch circuit homeruns exceed 70 feet in length for 120-volt and 150 fe�t in �I
length for all other voltages, use No. 10 wire, or as otherwise required to prevent
voltage drop in excess of 3% as allowed by N.E.C.,tthroughout circuit to farthest
device. �I
PART -3 EXECUTION �
3.01 INSTALLATION �
A. Complete conduit system before pulling any wire or cable. Use only approved cable
lubricants (such as soapstone) as necessary. ��
B. Install conductors continuously from outlet to outlet or to branch circuit overcurrent
devices. �
C. Make splices only in junction boxes. Splices made in panelboards are not acceptable.
No more than a single conductor shall be terminated at each circuit breaker screvJ,this �
shall also be considered a splice.
D. Leave sufficient slack at terminations to make proper connections. � �
E. Connect No. 10 wire and smaller with Type R, 3M Scotchlock tapeless connectors or
equal. �
F. Connect No. 8 wire and larger with Lock-Tite type silicon bronze type connectors, T& �
B Series 35000 or 54000, or approved equal. Insulate connections of No. 8 wire and
larger.with 3M#33 tape.
�
March 3, 2000 16120 -2 99048.00 �
�
� ;G. All single and multi-conductor cables being run exposed (not in conduit) shall, as a
� minimum standard, be listed and appropriately labeled as being resistant to the spread
' ! of fire in accordance with applicable article of NFPA-70 (NEC). This requirement
; shall apply to all low-voltage, communications, alarm, etc. cable being installed. The
, listing of various systems cable installed by the Contractor shall be verified prior to
� j installation by Division 16 whether or not it is furnished by the Contractor.
� , 1. Listings sha11 include the following:
- ' � 2. NEC Article 725 for Class 2 and Class 3 remote control, signalling, and power
� : limited circuits (listed as Types "CL2, CL3, PLTC, CL2R, CL3R, CL2P and
, CL3P}.
! 3. All fire protective signalling systems wiring sha11 be run in EMT conduit and shall
� be listed per NEC, Article 760 (listing types "FPL", "FPLR", and "FPLP" and
' Table 760-51). All conductors shall be rated for minimum of 300 volts with
� minimum size of#22(cu) solid conductors or bunch-tinned (bonded) stranded -
copper including coaxial cables where used. Any non-power limited fire
' protective signalling systems wiring shall be run separately from any power
1 � limited circuits and any other building wiring in separate EMT conduits and boxes.
; 4. NEC Article 800 for communication circuits (listed as Types "CM", "CMR", and
� "CMP").
� �� , 5. NEC Article 820 for MATV, CCTV, and radio distribution systems (listed as
Types "CATV", "CATVR", and "CATVP").
� , H. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrates a smoke or fire rated
' wall, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve extended 1 foot on both sides of wall with
� ; nylon insulated bushing on both ends. Seal conduit inside and outside with fire-
resistant sealant approved by local authorities.
I
1 I. Where communications systems cables are run exposed above dropped ceilings, cables
shall be ruri at right angles or parallel to the building lines and not "as the crow flies".
i Bundle cable together using nylon straps and per NEC 300-11 (b). Support cable
� independent of other conduit, ductwork, ductwork flanges and piping. Within each
smoke compartment, various systems shall be tagged and identified on 20 foot centers
, using nylon marker ties (Panduit STA-STRAP SSM series or approved equal). This
� includes cables for the following:
' 1. Telephone system
; 2. MATV/CATV/SATV system
� 3. Departmental intercom system �
' 4. Music/paging system
t
' � ; 5. Data processing system
, i
� � � END OF SECTION
I -
� �
� �
March 3, 2000 16120 - 3 99048.00
1 � i
�
� , SECTION 16130
� � OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
, PAIaT- 1 GENERAL
1.01!WORK INCLUDED
� '
A. Outlet Boxes
� B. Junction Boxes
� 1.02 RELATED WORK _
' � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions �
� B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
i ,
� C. Section 16140: Wiring Devices and Plates
� PART-2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
� �
' A. Outlet and junction boxes constructed of galvanized steel by Appleton, Raco, or Steel
� ; City, 1-1/2" deep minimum.
� B. Provide boxes for lighting fixtures with fixture studs in center.
� � C. Provide receptacle boxes with green (CU) grounding screw in accordance with detail in
; NFPA-99. _
1 �
' D. Provide permanent metal separation barriers between normal and emergency devices
-- � (including switches) mounted in a common multi-gang box assembly.
� ,
I PART-3 EXECUTION - '
'
" 3.01 OUTLET BOXES INSTALLATION
� �
� A. Securely anchor outlet boxes, set true and plumb and no part of box or cover to extend
beyond finished wall or ceiling.
� !
' March 3, 2000 16130 - 1 99048.00
1 '
��
B. Set flush-mounted boxes to within 1/8" of finished wall and use a plaster ring to make ��
cover flush with wall.
' C. Select boxes according to intended use and ty e of outlet. Provide ceilin outlet boxes '�
P g
4" octagon in size and 1-1/2" deep.
D. Use 2-1/8" dee octa on boxes or 4" s uare boxes where re uired. ��
P g q q
E. A fixture stud of no bolt, self-locking type is required at all ceiling outlet boxes if �I
needed to hang the fixture specified at the outlet.
F. For receptacle and switch boxes installed in concrete block walls not plastered, provide �I
with Steel City, Appleton, Raco Series No. 690 through No. 699, or approved �qual
masonry boxes of proper depth and gang required and specifically designed for this - ��
purpose.
G. If more than two conduits enter box from one direction, use 4" square boxes with �I
square-cut device covers not less than 1" deep specifically designed for this purpose. �
H. Round edge plaster rings are not acceptable for block walls but are acceptable if wall is ��
plastered. Sectional or gangable type outlet boxes are not acceptable in any case,
eYcept drywall construction. ,
I. Mount outlet boxe ��
s worked to nearest block course.
J. Coordinate location of device backboxes to prevent back-to-back mounting on any �
rated partition. Provide minimum of 24" spacing between boxes on opposite sides of
same wall within a common stud compartment or as otherwise required to main�tain �
partition rating to satisfaction of local authorities. Openings for outlet boxes shall not
exceed a total of 100 sq. in. for each 100 sq. ft. of wall area.
K. Where conduit is run overhead (either above dropped ceiling or exposed), outlet boxes �
shall be supported independently (i.e. by an all-thread rod) and not by the conduit
system. - j
L. Color code essential electrical system boxes in accordance with NEC and General -
Electrical Notes on drawings. ��
M. Provide circuit numbers using black permanent marker on covers of outlet boxes ,
located above dropped ceilings (or exposed in area without ceilings)indicating all
circuits being routed within said boxes.
�
, �
March 3, 2000 16130 - 2 99048.00 �
� '
� I
3.02 JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
1 A. Size junction boxes according to number of conductors in box or type of service to be
provided. Minimum junction box size is 4 11/16" square and 2 1/8" deep. Provide
� screw covers for junction boxes.
� i B. Use code au e steel with screw covers for ull boxes aint with rime coat and
� g g P ,p P
1 provide with screw cover. Size pull boxes according to NEC.
�C. Provide pull box every 100 feet of conduit run or where excessive number of bends
� ; necessitates a box for ease of wire installation.
�
D. Color-code essential electrical system boxes in accordance with NEC and General
� Electrical Notes on drawings. - -
E. Provide circuit numbers using black permanent marker on covers of junction boxes
� indicating all circuits being routed within said boxes.
� � END OF SECTION
� ,
� � .
� , I
� ,
�
�
�
�
,
�
� � I
�
� I
I
�
Ma'rch 3, 2000 16130 - 3 99048.00
�
� i
�
� I
SECTION 16140
� WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
�
� PART- 1GENERAL
1 1.01;WORK INCLUDED y
�
�A. Switches
� B. Receptacles
� C. Plates -
1.02 RELATED WORK
� � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
� B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes
�'
1.03 SUBMITTALS
'� A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 16010.
, PART -2 PRODUCTS
� 2.01 MATERIALS
iA. Provide wiring devices and plates as manufactured by Hubbell, Bryant, Leviton,Pass
� � & Seymour, General Electric, Arrow Hart or Eagle.
2.02 SWITCHES
�� i
� i A. Use 15-amps, 120/277 volts, quiet type, except for 120-volt circuits loaded greater than
� ' � 1200 watts; use 20-amps.
� B. Use 20 amps quiet type for 277-volt circurts loaded greater than 3000 watts.
� ' �
C. Single Pole: (15amp) Hubbell#1201-I; (20amp)#1221-I
� D. Single Pole: Hubbell#1201-R(emergency red)
March 3, 2000 16140 - 1 99048.00
1 �
��
��
E. Three Way: (15amp) Hubbell#1203-I; (20amp)#1223-I
F. Three Way: (15amp) Hubbell#1203-R(emergency red); (20amp)#1223-R ��
G. Four Way: (15amp) Hubbell#1204-I; (20amp)#1224-I ��
H. Install switches on lock side and clear of door frame a minimum of 3". Prior to rough- -
in, coordinate with architectural drawings to determine lockside of door. �!
I. Provide incandescent dimmers (ivory-normal; red-emergency),by Lutron,Nova preset ��
series or equal as manufactured by Lightolier or Lithonia using decorator style
dimmers with vertical linear slide actuators having positive ON/OFF switching action
and solid state circuitry with built-in noise filters. Provide dimmers sized at 12�% of- ��
their connected wattage utilizing standard wattage units of 600, 1000, 1500, and 2000
as required by load.
2.03 RECEPTACLES ��
A. General Purpose: ��
1. 15-amp, 125 VAC: •
a. Duplex type:
b. Hubbell #5252-I, ivory in all non-patient care areas of hospital. �lI
c. Hubbell#5252-RDB, emergency red in all non-patient care areas of hospital.
d. Hubbell #GF-5252-I, ivory (ground fault interrupter type) in all non-patient
care areas of hospital. "
e. Hubbell#GF-5252-RDB, emergency red ground fault interrupter type) in all
non-patient care areas of hospital. �I
2. 20-amp, 125 VAC:
a. Duplex type:
b. Hubbell#5352-I, ivory �!
c. Hubbell#5352-R, red �
d. Specialty type (i.e. ground fault, isolated ground, etc.) are to be same brade as '
called out under 15-amp device section above. ��
2.04 FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS
A.. Boxes: Rectangular, fully adjustable before and after concrete our• manufactured b I�
P � Y
Hubbell, T&B, Fullman, or Steel City.
l. Single gang, Hubbell No. BA-2436. ��
2. Two gang, Hubbell No. BA-4233.
3. Three gang, Hubbell No. BA-4333. �I
- B. Covers:
1. Single gang,Hubbell No. SA-2425 - aluminum. �I
March 3, 2000 16140 -2 . 99048.00 �I
� �
i '
, 2. Single gang, Hubbell No. SA-3625 aluminum with duplex screw cover for duplex
�
receptacle. •
SC. Carpet Flanges:
" � 1. Single gang: Hubbell No. S-3083 Lexan.
� , 2. Two gang: Hubbell No. 5-3084 Lexan.
, 3. Three gang: Hubbell No. 5-3085 Lexan.
I � �D. Fittings:
l. High-tension (15A-125 VAC), Hubbell No. SC-3092 - satin aluminum.
� ' 2. Low-tension(telephone), Hubbell No. SC-3190 - satin aluminum. �
, 3. Hubbell No. 5-6288 duplex receptacles.
,
� 2.05 PLATES
' ' A. Satin finish stainless steel: Hubbell (Series "A"), or approved equal in all areas unless
1 ; otherwise required to match existing. Where existing coverplates are ivory,provide
�
smooth finish ivory nylon(Hubbell Series "P").
�
� � PART -3 EXECUTION
i
� 3.01 INSTALLATION , _
�
� A. Provide proper size outlet boxes for all wiring devices of types specified in outlet and
� '� junction box section of these Specifications.
� � B. Mounting: _
1. In general,receptacles shall be mounted vertically with ground prong on top. In
! special instances where receptacles are mounted horizontally (i.e. wiremold
I � � raceways, etc.), install the receptacle so that neutral prong shall be on top.
� 2. Mount weatherproof receptacles vertically.
I 3. Work devices to nearest block course using proper type outlet boxes. Check
� ' architectural and furniture drawings for counter(desk, special booth, etc.)
locations. Mount devices above work counters where required. Verify other
� special mounting conditions and locate devices as required.
� _
, C. Polarity
1. Properly wire all convenience outlets so that the hot wire,the neutral wire and the
,� � � ground wire connect to the proper terminal on all receptacles. Prior to fmal job
; observation,the contractor shall test every receptacle for reverse polarity and other
1 , inappropriate connection combinations.
�
� D. Grounding
� , 1. Install all convenience outlets in boxes specified in these specifications, and install
�
March 3, 2000 16140 - 3 99048.00
, �
� � ii
a No. 12 green ground wire from device grounding terminal to the grounding lug ��
on box and from grounding lug to bus in the panelboard in accordance with �
diagram in NFPA-99 Health Care Code. ��
E. Special Mounting Height Receptacles: �
1. Install receptacles shown on the drawings as "special mounting height" at 7�
mounting height indicated on drawings. �
2. Where no mounting height is given and receptacles are above counters (or `
casework),mount with centers 4" above top of counter backsplash. , �[
3. Where special mounting height receptacles are not above counters and no '
mounting height is indicated,receptacle mounting heights to match adjacent light ��
switches or above counter receptacles. ,
4. Coordinate the installation of all special mounting height receptacles with � �
architectural design and owner requirements prior to rough-in. _ ��
_
END OF SECTION �I
�;
�'�
�I
_ � r�
�
il
1l
�f
,
. ,��
. �
�
� ��,
March 3,2000 16140 -4 99�48.00 �
, ,
,
�
I
� SECTION 16190
� ; SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS
I
� PART - 1 GENERAI, �
I
1 1.O1 ;WORK INCLUDED
�
I
;A. Provide a system of supporting devices and hangers to insure secure support or bracing
' � i for conduit, electrical equipment, including safety switches, fixtures,panelboards,
i � outlet boxes,junction boxes, and cabinets. ,
� 1.02�RELATED WORK -
- A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
1 B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods •
� .
PART -2 PRODUCTS
, 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
� A. Provide appropriate supporting devices and hangers for electrical equipment from the
following list of Caddy Fasteners as manufactured by Erico Products, Inc., Steel City,
Minerallac, or approved equal:
� ; l. Vertical flange clamps (beam clamps).
� 2. "Z" purlin clips.
, 3. Conduit clips. �
' j 4. Universal clamps (beam clamps).
5. Beam clamps (set screw type).
� 6. Combination push-in conduit clips.
� 7. Combination conduit hanger clamps.
, i 8. Flexible conduit clips.
9. Special combination conduit clips.
� i 10. One hole steel straps.
' � 11. Minerallac conduit hangers.
� ; �
I
' I
�
I
�
March 3, 2000 16190 - 1 99048.00
� �
, i
�i
PART-3 EXECUTION I�
3.01 INSTALLATION ��
A. Secure conduits to within 3 feet of each outlet box,junction box, cabinet, fittin�, etc.,
and at intervals not to exceed those currently effective editiori of the National Electric q�
Code. °
B. Install clamps secured to structure for feeder and other conduit routed against the �r
structure. Use dro rods and han ers to su ort conduits run a art from the
p g pp p structure.
C. Provide and install suitable angle iron, channel iron or steel metal framing with ��
accessories to support or brace electrical equipment including safety switches, fixtures,
. and panelboards. _ ��
D. Paint all supporting metal not otherwise protected,with rust inhibiting primer and then
with a finish coat if appropriate to match the surrounding metal surfaces. (Prepainted, ��
parberized or galvanized support material is not required to be painted or repainted.)
E. �Use of chains, perforated iron, baling wire, or tie wire for supporting conduit runs will ��
not be permitted.
F. For support of low voltage wiring not required to be in conduit, bundle cables together ,I
in a neat manner using approved nylon tie wraps.
G. Bundled cables to be supported with "J" hooks on telephone type bridle rings, a �I
minimum of 5' O.C.
H. Clearly identify all differing types of cables being run and tag them with plastic tags �I
reading "telephone", "intercom", "dictation", etc.,for various systems utilizing cable.
I. Provide identification tags on cables at intervals not exceeding 20' and within 3' of �f
, building smoke compartment separation walls.
�I
END OF SECTION ��
��
�I
�l
March 3, 2000 16190 - 2 99048.00 ��
i �
� � SECTION 16400
�
� � SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND GROUNDING
i
�
� PART- 1GENERAL
1.01 I WORK INCLUDED
, ,
' �A. Grounding -
' 1.02;RELATED WORK �
''A. Section 16111: Conduit -
r
�B. Section 16120: Wire and Cable -
� ' ,
PAlaT -2 PRODUCTS
� ' �
2.01 MATERIALS
I
I � A. The Electrical Distribution System shall be a fully rated system. A series rated system
shall be unacceptable.
� B. Ground clamps and other grounding hardware as manufaciured by "OZ" Electrical
Manufacturing company, Type "CG" or equal by Steel City, or Appleton.
,
PA1�T -3 EXECUTION �
� ' -
3.01 GROUNDING
I
� i A. Ground electrical system in accordance with applicable edition of Article 250 and 517
of the National Electrical Code, and requirements of local authorities having
j jurisdiction.
� � i
, B. Do not use flexible metal conduit and fittings as a grounding means. Pull a green
� � i j insulated copper wire in each piece of flexible conduit and screw to conduit system
with lugs at both ends.
i
, C. Install green bonding jumpers in flush-mounted receptacle boxes as required to connect
' � the receptacle ground terminal to the grounded box. Install green bonding jumpers
I between outlet box and wall bracket mounted lighting fixtures. Screw jumpers to
� , fixture chassis with lugs.
� March 3, 2000 16400 - 1 99048.00
i
�� I
��
D. Install code size green grounding conductors in all branch circuits feeding receptacles,
motors or other permanently wired fixed electrical utilization equipment and all feeder �'
circuits.
E. Bond conductors to chassis of fixed equipment. Bond all grounding conductors to ��
multi-terminal ground bus at panelboard or service wire trough.
F. Grouping of grounding conductors under a single lug or terminal screw is not ��
acceptable. Should this method be used, Contractor will provide additional ground
lugs as required to correct the condition and rewire at his own expense. ��
G. Locate grounding attachments away from areas subject to physical damage and clean
all surfaces on equipment to be grounded to assure good electrical continuity. - �I
END OF SECTION �I
��
�I
� li
1l
!l
,!
!
, �
1
1
March 3, 2000 16400 - 2 99�48.00 �
� _
i
� SECTION 16500
� LIGHTING FIXTURES
� PART - 1GENERAL
� 1.01 �WORK INCLUDED
� : �
� A. Fixtures
� ' ,B. Controls
' ;C. Lamps -
;D. Ballasts
1 I
1.02 RELATED WORK
;
� ;A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
� � B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
' C. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers.
� 1.03� SUBMITTALS
' � A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 16010.
�
' B. Submit shop drawings for luminaries showing pertinent physical characteristics and '
� � performance data. Include specific proposed ballasts and/or lamps for each fixture as
part of the submittal.
I � C. Submit samples of luminaries prior to final production at Architect's request on any
, � proposed fixture substitution.
� 1
PART -2 PRODUCTS
� � 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
� i
' � A. Provide fixtures by manufacturers scheduled on drawings. See Section 16050 for
, substitutions.
i
' B. Provide incandescent, fluorescent and HID lamps as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania,
1 i March 3, 2000 16500 - 1 99048.00
ll
Phillips, or approved equal. �'
C. Provide fluorescent and HID ballasts as manufactured by Magnetek, Advance or
a roved e ual. - ��
PP q
2.02 FIXTURES ��
A. Provide regulating, HPF ballasts in all compact fluorescent and HID lighting fi�,tures.
Use recessed com�act fluorescent and HID fixture ballasts provided with integral �'
thermal protection.
B. Provide high frequency, electronic ballasts (Magnetek Triad HP or approved equal)in �I
lieu of electromagnetic ballasts. Electronic ballasts shall have a Total Harmonic
Distortion(THD) of less than 10%. _ �I
C. Provide rapid start, energy saving type "T8" and specialty type "T12" lamps for all
fluorescent fixtures in accordance with final fixture schedule. ��
1. "T8" lamps having 3500K color temperature with a CRI of 75 for all generGl
applications.
D. Provide HID, compact fluorescent, and incandescent lamps of wattage and type as �I
shown on drawings. All incandescent lamps shall be 130-volt. Provide compac�t
' fluorescent lamps having 3500K color temperature with a CRI of 81 minimum in all �!
applications.
E. Recessed incandescent fixtures to have thermal protection in accordance with NEC 'I
410-65(c).
F. Provide all HID fixtures where connected to emergency life safety circuits with built- '�
in quartz restrike lamp without additional cost to Owner.
��
PART-3 EXECUTION
(
'� 3.01 GENERAL i
A. Furnish, locate, lamp, and install fixtures as indicated on drawings. �
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Mount fixtures as called for on drawin s. Determine e �
g typ of ceilmg bemg install ed m
each space and furnish fixtures suitable for exact type, including roof/floor or �
ceiling/floor fire rated design with fire tenting required by Architect. All coordination
and materials to be provided without additional cost to Owner.
�
March 3, 2000 16500 -2 99�J48.00 �
�
I
� B. Structurally support lighting fixtures. Support ceiling system grid directly with
hangers attached to building structure and attach fluorescent grid troffers to ceiling
� ; system as required by NEC 410-16(c).
C. Support incandescent fixtures mounted in suspended ceilings by fixture channels,
� ! furnished under this division, laid across ceiling support channels.
!D. Support surface-mounted fixtures from building structural system using rods in
�` � conjunction with clamps or fixture outlet boxes.
' I E. Support from structure all surface and recessed fixtures installed on concealed z-spline,
� plaster, or drywall ceilings.
, � I F. Support plaster or drywall mounted fixtures from support channels spanning across -
� main building supports without depending on ceiling system for support.
' i G. Coordinate framing of recessed canopy/soffit mounted light fixtures with depth and
, ; type of ceiling being installed within.
I
� � H. Coordinate depth of recessed mounted light fixtures trim with ceiling medium to assure
, that fixture will fit in alloted space and is compatible with type ceiling system being
� I used.
� j
I. Coordinate width of recessed mounted light fixtures including mounting hardware to
I assure that fixture will fit in alloted space including bulkheads and soffits.
, � i
J. Receive, store, uncrate, install and lamp all hard-wired fixtures shown on drawings as
� � being furnished by Owner or others.
�
�. K. Adjust lighting fixtures to illuminate the intended area where applicable.
,� ' I
L. Wire incandescent or HID lutninaries with medium base sockets with wire not smaller
; than No. 16 and mogul sockets with wire not smaller than No. 14, type to be in
, , accordance with current edition of NEC 410-25.
�
. � M. Wire recessed fluorescent luminaries using flexible metal conduit with Type THHN
� � wire (including ground wire)not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Install a separate
� insulated green grounding conductor in conduit (not smaller than No. 14 AWG) for
, � , i grounding continuity with conduit system.
f
i N. Wire surface-mounted fluorescent luminaries with Type THHN wire (not smaller than _
� ; i No. 12) from outlet boxes to fixture and through fixture channels. Use patented UL
listed grip clamps for mounting surface fixtures on exposed tee-bar ceilings. Take care
I that fixtures are installed level and not tilted.
� �
' Ma'rch 3,2000 16500 - 3 99048.00
, � i
��
O. Locate no splice or tap within an arm or stem. Provide continuous wiring from splice ��
- in outlet box of building wiring system to lamp socket or ballast terminals. Pravide �
"hang-straight" Type canopies for all stem-hung or pendant-hung fixtures mounted on ��
sloped ceilings or structure. Fixtures called out on fixture schedule as stem-hung or
pendant-hung indicate rigid stems, cords will not be acceptable. '
P. Coordinate fixture locations to clear diffusers, ductwork,pi in , buildin structure etc. ��
P g g ,
without additional cost to owner.
. Maintain inte 't at enclosed as et ,��
Q gn y , g k ed fixtures. Muumize number of penetratgons and ,
where penetrations are required, make same water and dust-tight using appropriate '�
gasketing and fittings. Provide wet location gasketing on all fixtures installed in -
showers, can wash areas, and on exterior of building without additional cost to owner.
�I
�
END OF SECTION
')
- � 1i
�I
. 1!
. ��
� 1►
_ - t:
�
�.
�
!
` March 3,2000 16500 -4 99048.00 '
,,
i I
� �
�' � � SECTION 16721
� � EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
� � PART - 1GENERAL
, 1.01'WORK INCLUDED
� � � .
iA. Fire detection system.
� ' i B. Fire alarm system.
� ' 1.021�RELATED WORK -
� A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
� � B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
I
� i C. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
� D. Section 16111: Conduit
r �
; E. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
� I
1.03 SUBMITTALS
�
� ; I A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 16010.
; B. Submit a complete conduit and wiring layout drawn to scale on building floor plans
� � and a point-to-point wiring diagram for approval. Fire alarm system will be rejected
(without further review) should diagrams be omitted from the submittal package.
� j
� � 1.04 SYSTEM OPERATION
i A. Modify the existing fire alarm control panel as required to actuate from the following
i , � alarm initiation devices:
' 1. All initiation devices to be fully addressable True Alarm type.
' i. 2. Non-coded pull station
3. Heat detector
� � 4. Ceiling smoke detector
' i 5. Duct-mounted smoke detector
i B. Upon activation fire alarm panel to initiate the following: �
, ; 1. Initiate a general alann including flashing of visual signals and sounding of
March 3, 2000 16721 - 1 99048.00
, j
1�
audible signals. �'
2. Light appropriate annunciator light(s)per zoning schedule.
3. Release magnetic door hold-open devices. ��
4. Close smoke dampers by means of E.P. relay or control auxiliary relay as required
by Division 15.
5. Shut down supply and return air-handling fans per zoning schedule on drativings by �I
means of a control relay in control panel.
6. Send signal over telephone company leased lines to remote receiving unit located
at designated fire station. �I
C. In the event of either an operating power failure, an open circuit, or a ground in the
system, modify the trouble signal and trouble lamp to actuate until system is restored to I`
normal. Silence trouble signal with a switch mounted on:
1. Control panel door. _ �I
2. Remote annunciator. -
D. Continue to flash trouble lamp until system is restored to normal. Upon restoration of �`
system to normal,trouble signal again to sound until switch is returned to normal �
position.
- E. Operate e�sting fire alarm system from 120 volt A/C power su 1 with 4-hou: ��
PP Y � )
battery backup built into control panel. Where required battery back-up is not available
on existing systems, same shall be provided. �I
F. Provide each 120-volt,AC circuit feeding existing control panel power supply��rith an �I
(in-line) UL 1499 Listed transient voltage surge suppressor with connections to hot, (
neutral, and ground conductors (Leviton#51020-WM).
I
� G. Provide sufficient new motherboards,with applicable zone modules for separat� and I
distinct zones as described in the zoning schedule on drawings where extender cabinets
are necessary, provide as needed. ��
PART- 2 PRODUCTS �
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide new com onents which match and are com atible with the existin Sim lex �
P P g P
4100 Series system including but not limited to the Simplex catalog numbers shown.
_ �
B. Furnish control panel modifications consisting of, but not be limited to,the follo�ving
modules housed in a common cabinet bearing UL label visible behind a tempered glass �
locked cabinet door:
1. True Alarm addressable break-glass station: 2099-9795
2. Clg. Smoke detector (light refract) True Alarm addressable: 4098-9701 with �
March 3, 2000 16721 - 2 99048.00 '
� �
� ' i
i
4098-9781 base.
� 3. Clg. Smoke detector(Ionization) True Alarm addressable: 4098-9176 with 4098-
� 9781 base. I
, 4. Heat detector True Alarm addressable: 4098 series.
� 5. Door holder(wall mounted): 2088-9554
S ,� 6. Door holder(floor mounted): 2088-9505
, � 7. Chime/light combination (Xenon strobe): 2902-9042/4903-9101
� ; 8. Flashing light(Xenon strobe): 4904-9101
I 9. Provide Visual Strobe appliances in accordance with ADA criteria. The minimum
! flash rate shall be at least 1Hz(60 flashes per minute) and the maximum flash rate
� shall not exceed 2Hz(120 flashes per minute).
� � 10. Visual Strobes flash rates shall be synchronized wherever flashes from multiple
' strobes may be visible from one location. �
' � i 11. End of line devices: as required -
i
� C. Zone annunciator per zoning schedule on drawings and include: lamp test switch,
� ; amber trouble light, keyed trouble reset switch, trouble buzzer, keyed trouble silencing
, switch. Provide plug-in type incandescent or LED lamps.
� PART -3 EXECUTION
�
� 3.01 INSTALLATION ,
; A. Provide modifications to existing system complete and in accordance with
, i _ manufacturer's instructions, including conduit, boxes,wiring and accessories. Install all
� fire alarm system wiring in "EMT" conduit. Tag wires at junction points. Provide#14
� � I wire for all devices except A/V units which will be#12 type THHN/THWN. Provide
I all fire alarm wiring color coded per manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to section
� 16120, article 3.1 G (2) for additional restrictions on fire alarm system wiring.
� � i
B. Provide (at no cost) on-prerruses maintenance dunng normal working hours for a
� period of twelve months from date of final approval.
� j
' ! C. Su lier to have been in business for a minimum of five ears and have a
� PP Y
� representative available on a 24-hour basis within 100 miles of the subject jobsite with
, letter of reference to this affect being included in submittals.
� D. Provide 190 deg F. fixed temperature heat detectors in mechanical rooms and 135 deg
, , i F. fixed temperature and rate of rise heat detectors in all other areas where heat
, detectors are shown on drawings.
' I
� E. Wire initiation devices utilizing class "B",two-wire, fully supervised circuits to end of
� line device located after the last initiation device. Initiation devices include:
� � 1. Smoke detectors
�
, 1 March 3, 2000 16721 - 3 99048.00
, �
�
��
2. Manual pull stations li
3. Heat detectors
F. Annunciate initiation devices utilizing annunciation contacts on box circuit module in ��'
control panel and not from individual device contacts unless otherwise noted on
drawings. When the control panel alarm silence switch is used on an initiation device �� '
alann, the system will maintain a trouble signal on the control panel, and continue to
light a lamp at the annunciator identifying appropriate initiation device zone until ,
problem is corrected. �I '
� G. With the exception of manual pull stations, annunciate all initiation devices utilizing ��
annunciation contacts on box circuit module in control panel and not from indi��idual
device contacts. Annunciate manual pull stations individually from annunciatio�
� contacts on each device. When the control panel alarm silence switch is used on an - �I
initiation device alarm,the system will maintain a trouble signal on the control�anel,
and continue to light a lamp at the annunciator identifying appropriate initiation device
zone until problem is corrected. �`
I
H. Wire new and existing flashing�lights in renovated areas separately from audible
devices. When a general alarm signal is silenced at the control panel, lights will �� I
continue to flash until the alarm condition is corrected. This requirement may only be
' omitted where approval to do so is granted by both the authorities having jurisdiction I,
and the owner in writing prior to bid. Where rewiring of existing devices are necessary �I
to provide this function, include same in base bid with a deduct alternate for omission.
I. Maximum load capacity of alatm initiating and indicating device circuits shall n�t "
exceed 80% of circuits total capacity. ,
J. Smoke Detector Application: I I
1. Use light refractory type detectors in all applications shown on drawings
(including duct mounting) with the following exceptions: '�
a. Use ionization detectors in areas susceptible to high concentrations of szeam,
dust, or tobacco smoke.
b. Use fixed temperature heat detectors in kitchens, loading docks,mechanical �
equipment rooms, elevator equipment rooms, and rooms containing steaTTl
• generating equipment.
2. Provide all detectors installed prior to completion of construction with pro�te�:tion �
from contamination using sealed plastic coverage. All such covers shall be �
removed on day of final system testing by architectural team and local authorities. �
�
�
March 3, 2000 16721 - 4 99�J48.00 '
- —
f
� i
I
i
� �
�K. Remote annunciator operation:
� 1. A "trouble" condition on the fire alann system to cause the affected zone lamp(s)
1 to flash and the trouble buzzer to sound continuously on the remote annunciator.
� 2. Operation of the trouble silencing switch to signal the trouble buzzer to silence
� with the trouble light continuing to flash until the problem is corrected.
�
� ,
I
, ' � END OF SECTION ,
�
�
� _
� i ,
i
� .
�
, '
,i
' �
� I
�
.�
' :I
,i ,
' ;I
�
,,
,
,
� � -
� -
i
� March 3, 2000 16721 - 5 99048.00
, � -
.�
'
, SECTION 16740
� i TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM
,
� PART - 1 GENERAL
i
1.01�WORK INCLUDED
' ,
A. Interior telephone system to be selected by Owner and provided by Owner s vendor.
, � B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, etc., as specified and shown on selected
vendor wiring schematics.
i `
' i C. Install vendor-furnished special backboxes and cables in accordance with vendor's
' specifications.
� , D. Provide identification labels on all vendor furnished wire and cable.
�
, ; 1.02 RELATED WORK
' A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions "
B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
, i �
i C. Section 16111: Conduit
, I D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
' � E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes "
� �
; F. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers _
� �
' , PART-2 PRODUCTS
i
i 2.01 MATERIALS
i
i A. Interior telephone system components as provided by the Owner's vendor or utility
� ; company to include all switching equipment,power supplies,punchdown blocks,jacks,
� special backboxes and cable.
r � �
I B. Wall outlets to be 4" square with single-gang or double-gang device rings and box
� depth as required by Owner's vendor.
, !
March 3, 2000 16740 - 1 99048.00
r
�'
C. Provide where indicated on drawings exterior grade plywood telephone terminal boards 1'
sized as shown on drawings. Terminate all conduits with nylon insulated bushings at
these boards. ��
D. Paint all telephone terminal boards with two coats of black insulating varnish ar paint.
E. Provide grounding system in accordance with NEC 250 usin #6 cu roundin� II
g � ) g �
conductors per drawings.
�)
PART -3 EXECUTION
�I
3.01 INSTALLATION .
A. Receive, store, and protect all telephone system equipment cable. II
B. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrate smoke or fire rated
walls,provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve, extending at least 1 foot on both sides of � �i
said wall,with nylon insulated bushings on both ends. Seal conduits inside and outside
with fire-resistant sealant approved by local authorities. 'I
C. Install all cable concealed in walls or inaccessible (drywall) ceilings in conduit.
D. Serve each telephone outlet from a separate conduit stubbed up and terminated above
'I
accessible ceilings of nearest main egress corridors with nylon insulated bushings. 'i
Back-to-back outlets may be connected together and use a common stub-up concuit.
Conduit�minimum size is 3/4".
E. Have the local telephone utility and the telephone system vendor review the drav✓ings '
to verify that provisions on the drawings will accommodate the installation of the
proposed telephone service and system. Report any discrepancies to Architect before ,
service, conduits, backboards, etc., are installed.
F. Coordinate sleeves with telephone vendor for location, size, and quantity prior to �
rough-in.
G. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190. '
- �
END OF S�ECTION
�
�
March 3, 2000 16740 -2 99�J48.00 �
, ' ,
, SECTION 16750
' MUSIC/PAGING RACEWAY SYSTEM
I ' PART - 1GENERAL
1.01'WORK INCLUDED
,
A. Provide all standard and special back boxes and cables in accordance with
� i
specifications.
' j
B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, and accessories as specified and shown on
, ' selected vendors wiring schematics. -
I
C. Install vendor-furnished special back boxes and cables in accordance with vendor's
, I specifications.
� D. Provide identification labels on all wire and cable.
' �
1.02 RELATED WORK
�
, ; A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
I B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
' � .
C. Section 16111: Conduit
' ' D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
I
, j E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes •
I F. Section 16190: Support Devices and Hangers
' , I
PART -2 PRODUCTS
, � 2.01 MUSIC/PAGING SYSTEM
, �
, � A. Provide backboxes and speaker baffles as recommended by systems manufacturer with
� ! numbers shown on drawings used as standard of quality.
1 � .
B. Provide cable as recommended by system supplier and as manufactured by Belden or
� approved equal.
� � � .
, March 3, 2000 16750 - 1 • 99048.00
� �'
C. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by systems manufacturer and I'
as manufactured by Appleton, Raco, Steel City, or approved equal.
I�
PART -3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION 'I
A. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on drawings and vendor �I
wiring schematics.
B. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics and conforming �I
to "CONDUIT" section of these specifications, from backboxes to accessible dropped
ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress corridor. Terminate conduit ends (stubb�d _ �I
above ceilings) using nylon insulated bushings.
C. Provide all equipment, wiring, power supplies, and accessories in accordance with 'I
vendor's schematic diagrams and these specifications. �
D. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrates a smoke or fire rated �)
wall,provide a minimum, 1" empty sleeve extended 1 foot on both sides of wall with
nylon insulated bushing on both ends. Seal conduit inside and outside with fire-
resistant sealant approved by local authorities. 'I
E. Coordinate sleeves with system vendor schematics for location, size and quantit�. �
1
F. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190.
G. Coordinate zoning of music/paging system with owner prior to creating vendor �
schematic drawings.
_ '
END OF SECTION '
. '
. '
,
�
March 3,•2000 16750 -2 99G48.00 '
,
, SECTION 16775
' CONNECTION TO OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
�
, PART - 1GENERAL �
i
1.011 WORK INCLUDED
' , �
i,
; ; A. Certain pieces of equipment are to be owner-fiirnished such as refrigerators, microwave
, i ovens, and copiers, etc.
' B. Connect this equipment in accordance with manufacturer's brochures and instructions.
i
' ' _
I C. Connect this equipment in accordance with local regulations of governing authorities.
I
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
� A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
I ' �
� B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
' ; C. Seciion 16111: Conduit '
� D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
' � ,
� E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes
�
� � F. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
I
' PART -2 PRODUCTS
' ;
' 2.01 MATERIALS:
I
, � A. Provide all conduit,wire, outlet (with proper NEMA configuration) and outlet boxes,
' � circuit breakers, disconnect switches, etc. in accordance with applicable sections of
� these specifications and as required to connect owner-furnished equipment per
� manufacturer's brochures and instructions. �
' � �
�
�
, .
' ' I -
i -
� •
' !
March 3, 2000 16775 - 1 99048.00
' , �
� ,
ii
PART-3 EXECUTION �'
3.OlINSTALLATION: -
'�
A. Connect owner-furnished equipment and leave in satisfactory operating condition. ''
Prior to bid and/or rough-in coordinate mounting heights and types of connections with 'I
final architectural elevations and manufacturers final rough-in drawings. Include all
required components necessary for a complete tum-key installation. �
�I
. END OF SECTION 'I
'I
ii
� � 11
i'
, 1
. �
- � � �, 1,
t
. - 1
' � 1
. - . 1
, �,
1 ,
;
March 3, 2000 16775 -2 99048.00
' ,�'
�i _
, I
�
' t SECTION 16779
�, , � CABLE TV SYSTEM
tPART - 1GENERAL
' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The TV cable system equipment is provided by the local cable TV company under
' I contract with the Owner.
� B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, and accessories as shown on drawings and
' I Cable TV company specifications. -
� C. Install all special backboxes and cables furnished by Cable TV Company.
� I
I D. Provide identification labels on all wire and cable.
� 1.02 RELATED WORK
� A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
, �
B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
, 1 C. Section 16111: Conduit
� j D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
! E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes ,
, �
� F. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
I
1 � PART -2 PRODUCTS
�
' I
, 2.01 MATERIALS
; i A. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits from outlets to accessible dropped ceilings (lay-in) of
' � nearest main egress corridor conforming with conduits section of these specifications.
; Terminate end of conduits above ceiling with nylon insulated bushings.
� � I
� B. Install all wiring in 3/4" minimum size conduits conforming with "RACEWAYS"
� section of these specifications.
' �
March 3, 2000 16779 - 1 99048.00
, �
; �
��
C. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by Cable TV Compa.�y.. I�
PART -3 EXECUTION II
3.OlINSTALLATION � '�
A. Coordinate sleeve sizes and locations with cable TV company prior to rough in.
B. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190 of these specifications.
��
C. Cable TV company to connect all equipment and leave system in satisfactory o�erating 'I
condition.
D. TV mounting brackets and TV sets are furnished by others. ' � �I
E. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on drawings. �I
F. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics and conforming
to "CONDUIT section of these specifications, from backboxes to accessible dropped 'I
ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress corridor. Terminate conduit ends (stubbed
above ceilings) using nylon insulated bushings.
G. Where o en cable is run above dro ed ceilin s and enetrates a smoke or fire a '
P PP g p r ted
wall, provide a minimum, 1" empty sleeve extended 1 foot on both sides of wall with
nylon insulated bushing on both ends. Seal conduit inside and outside with fire- '
resistant sealant approved by local authorities.
, �
END OF SECTION '
�
'
,
_ �
i
March 3, 2000 16779 -2 99048.00 '
i
, I ,
' SECTION 16781
' DATA PROCESSING RACEWAY SYSTEMS
� PART - 1GENERAL
' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
�
�A. Data processing system equipment to be selected by Owner and provided by the
, ; Owners vendor.
I B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, and accessories as specified and shown on
' � selected vendors wiring schematics. -
I
� j C. Install vendor-fiunished special back boxes and cables in accordance with vendor's
� ,! specifications.
�
ID. Provide identification labels on all wire and cable.
' ' I
' 1.02 RELATED WORK
I
� � � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
� B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods
' I
' i C. Section 16111: Conduit
1 �
; D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
; E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes
' �
' F. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers
, � .
' PART -2 PRODUCTS
' , �
2.0,1 MATERIALS
� ,
' ' ' A. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by vendor and as �
, � manufactured by Appleton, Raco, Steel City, or approved equal.
� � I
i
�
' �
March 3, 2000 16781 - 1 99048.00
1
i�
PART -3 EXECUTION �'
3.01 INSTALLATION �I
A. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on drawings and vendor
wiring schematics. �I
B. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics and conforming
to "CONDUIT" section of these specifications, from backboxes to accessible dropped ,I
ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress corridors. Terminate conduit ends (stubbed
above ceilings) using nylon insulated bushings. 'I
C. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrates a smoke or fire rated
wall, provide a minimum, 1" empty sleeve extended 1 foot on both sides of wall with� 'I
nylon insulated bushing on both ends. Seal conduit inside and outside with fire-
resistant sealant approved by local authorities. _
D. Coordinate sleeves with system vendor schematics for location, size and uantit���. 'I
q .
E. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190. '�
END OF SECTION �
'
,
_ ,
- . '
'
,
, '
, �
March 3, 2000 16781 - 2 990�8.00 '
� �
' SECTION 16999
' CRITICAL SYSTEMS CHECKLIST
i
, THE FOLLOWING CHECKLIST MUST BE COMPLETED BY THE GENERAL
;CONTRACTOR AND THE APPROPRIATE SUBCONTRACTORS AND RETURNED
TO THE ENGINEER AT LEAST TWO DAYS PRIOR TO THE FINAL ON-SITE
' OBSERVATION VISIT. A FI1�1AL OBSERVATION VISIT WILL NOT MADE UNTIL
'THIS SYSTEMS CHECKLIST IS TOTALLY COMPLETE.
, ' .
1.01 FIRE ALARM
' , jA. Pull Stations: -
' 1. Alarm initiated (audio/visual)
� � 2. Annunciation by device
' 3. Door holders' release
, ,
4. Verify max of 48" A.F.F.
' i -
' ,,B. Ceiling Smoke Detectors:
; 1. Alarm initiated (audio/visual)
- 2. Annunciation by device
� 3. Door holders' release -
� 4. A/C shutdown w/annunciation
5. Verify detectors installed within 5 feet of smoke doors.
, � 6. Zone Smoke dampers close.
� i C. Sprinkler Tamper Switch:
�', ' l. Shall not initiate alann
� 2. Annunciation by zone -
' �I 3. Separate Audio device at Annunciator panel.
' �D. Sprinkler Flow Switches:
' � 1. Alarm initiated (audio/visual)
� 2. Annunciation by zone I
I
� 3. Door holders' re.lease
1 ; 4. A/C shutdown w/annunciation ,
, � 5. Zone Smoke dampers close.
' , ; E. Verify system power supply on life safety branch with written Certification of System
' � by manufacturer.
� � i
i F. Verify flashing lights continue to flash after alarmis silenced.
; G. Verify pull stations are located within 5 feet of all egress doors.
1
' March 3,2000 16999 - 1 99048.00
,
i�
, ii
H. Verify fire dept is notified by F.A. System ,�
I. Verify battery backup provided. ' II
J. Have two electricians, one alarm rep and three walkie-talkies available for testing. II
1.02 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS: ' � �
, II
A. Provide Owner s Vendor certification of device testing and system completion. ,
B. Have vendor present for random testing of patient stations and verification of _ II
annunciation. "
C. Verify emergency power source to communications equipment. � II
- II
END OF SECTION �
�I
I�
II
- 'I
'I
, It
II
� � �
'I
. 11
II
March 3,2000 - 16999 -2 99048.00 'j
f
�
I�
I ��